f 


9 


HIPLE 


AND 


a.  s  #  li 


i^i 


BSf3  ijoj   ^3 


l^Si 


TACTICS, 


.cj^EDIPiLd^l    OiP]  ®K1:E  WQiLOlfflll 


MEMPHIS: 

1861. 


/ 


I 


HARDEE'S 


RIFLE 


■a 

AND 


(   I  1  <    r  ■ 


LIGHT    INFANTRY 


TA.CTICS. 


COMPLETE  m  ONE  VOLUME. 


1861 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2010  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/hardeesrifleligh01hard 


I      U      7       } 


lii    tx    «i/ 


.11    & 


U    til  ^ 


3       ^  ',  »'•> 


mvmxmw^^ 


TITLE    FIRST. 


Abticlh  First. 
Formation  qf  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  en-  in  line. 

1.  A  REGIMENT  Is  Composed  of  ten  companlps,  which 
will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  tn  the  foUow- 
IiiKorder:  first,  sixth,  fourth,  niutb,  third,  eighth,  fiflb, 
tenth,  seventh,  second,  accordiog  to  the  rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  principle 
will  be  observed,  viz:  the  first  captain  will  command  the 
right  company,  the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the 
third  captain  the  right  centre  company,  and  so  on. 

."5.  Th«  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from 
right  to  Itft,  ftrd  company,  ticcond  company,  &c.  This 
designation  will  be  observed  in  the  manivuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their 
denomination,  will  form  the.rtrsi  division  ;  the  next  two 
companies  the  second  division;  and  so  on  to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  Into  two  equal  parts, 
which  will  bo  designated  as  the  first  and  secon<l  platoon, 
counting  from  the  right  ;  and  each  platoon,  in  like  man- 
ner, will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manceuvres,  every  regiment,  or 
part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  companies, 
will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  Th'i  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  designated, 
win  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion 
company.  That  company,  and  all  on  Its  right,  will  be 
Renominated  the  riijht  wintj  of  the  battalion  ;  the  remain- 
ing companies  the  left  wi7ig. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks;  and 
each  company  will  be  formed  Into  two  ranks,  in  the  fol- 
lowing mannsr:  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front 
rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons,  according  to 
height;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  talloet  man  will  form 
the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men  will  form  the  second 
file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  bo  composed  of 
the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  Olid  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the 
compaay,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men, 
who  will  be  designated  comrades  in  halite, 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  bo 
thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the  rear 
rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front  rank 
men. 

11.  For  nianncnvring,  tho  companies  of  a  battalion  will 
always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from  the 
BtrODgeat  to  the  weakest  companies. 

Post*  of  Company  Ojjicers,  Scrgtanis  and   Corporals, 

12.  The  company  ofilcers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in 
number,  and  will  bo  posted  in  the  following  manner : 

13.  The  captain  on  tho  right  of  the  company,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow. 

11.  Tho  first  »erff«xnt  In  the  rear  rank,  tonchlng  with 


tho  left  olbow,  and  covering  tho  captain.  In  the  ma- 
noeuvres he  will  be  denominated  covering  sergeant,  or 
ri'i/7it  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  ofilcers  and  sergeants  will  be  posted 
as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

IG.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  tho  centre  of  tha 
fourth  section. 

17.  The  Second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon. 

18.  Tho  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
second  platoon. 

19.  Tho  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  left  of  the  company.  In  tho  manoeuvres  he  will  be 
designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

2".  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  tho 
right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The/o«rt7*  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
tho  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the 
right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  tho  battalion,  the 
second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on 
the  left  of  the  battalion. 

21.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  as 
prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — 
oflTicers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The 
colonel  mav  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one  company 
to  command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain  and  first 
lieutenant  are  absent;  but  this  authority  will  give  no 
right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Eegimental  Slag. 

20.  The  field  oiBcers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  Pervico 
shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant,  when  the  battal- 
ion   is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  loot. 

27  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  cf 
the  file  closers,  and  opprsite  the  centre  of  the  bnttalicn, 
This  distance  will  be  reduced  whenever  there  is  a  reduc- 
tion in  the  front  of  tho  battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  bo  oppo- 
site the  centres  of  the  right  at.d  left  wings  respectively, 
and  twelve  paces  in  tho  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  bo  opposite 
tho  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight 
paces  in  the  roar  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  mnjor  will  aid  the  lieu- 
tenant colon<«l  and  major,  respectively,  in  thejniano^uvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  tho 
lieutenant-colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all 
the  field  officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will  com- 
mand tho  battalion;  but  if  either  be  present,  he  will  not 
call  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer,  except  in 
case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  oill- 


FOBMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


oen,  in  one  rank,  on  tho  loft  of  the  colonel,  and  tbroe 
paces  in  bis  rear. 

33.  Tbo  quiirtor-maater  sergt-aot,  on  a  lino  wllh  the 
front  rank  of  tbb  field  mtiBlc,  and  two  paces  on  tbo  right. 

Pottt  of  FMA  Mutic  atui  Band. 

84.  Th(!  bnglors  will  bo  drawn  np  In  four  ranks,  and 
posted  twelve  paces  In  ronr  of  the  file  closers,  and  loft 
upposita  tbo  centre  of  tbo  loft  centre  company.  Tho 
noulor  principal  mti^lciiin  will  bo  two  pacog  in  front  of  the 
fli'ld  mniilc,  and  the  other  two  paces  iu  tho  rear. 

35.  Tbo  regimental  band,  if  there  bo  one,  will  be  drawn 
up  lo  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  Its  numbrrs,  and 
posted  live  paces  In  rc;tr  of  tbo  lield  moaio,  having  ouo  of 
tho  principal  musicians  at  its  bead. 

Culor-ffuarJ, 

56.  In  oftch  battalion  tho  color-gnard  will  bo  oompoeoil 
of  eight  corporols,  and  p08l<<d  on  tho  left  of  thu  right 
contro  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time  being, 
tho  guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  Tho  front  rank  will  bo  composod  of  a  sorgoant,  to 
be  selected  by  tbo  colonej^^who  will  bo  called,  for  tho 
time,  djlor-hearfr,  with  iho  two  ranking  corporalH,  ro- 
ppoctivoly,  on  bis  right  auJ  loft;  tbo  roar  rank  will  h^ 
composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank;  nud  the 
three  remaining  corporals  will  bo  posted  in  their  rear, 
and  on  tho  line  of  file  cloaers.  The  b-ft  guido  of  tho  color 
company,  when  those  three  last  named  corporals  are  in 
tbo  rank  of  hlo-closers,  will  bo  immediately  on  their  left. 

SS.  In  battalions  with  loss  than  five  companies  present, 
there  will  be  no  color-gnard,  and  no  display  of  colors, 
except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-gnard  will  bo  solocted 
from  those  mDst  distlnguiBhed  for  regularity  and  precision, 
as  well  In  tbclr  poBltions  under  arms  us  in  their  march- 
ing. The  latter  advantage,  and  a  Just  carriage  of  the 
person,  are  to  bo  more  particularly  sought  for  la  the  se- 
lection of  the  oolor-bearer. 

Genial  GtiicUri. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  gnldos  In  each  battalion, 
Bolbcted,  for  tbo  time,  by  tho  colonel,  from  anioDg  the 
sergeants  (other  than  11  ret  sergeants)  tho  most  didtiuguish- 
ed  for  carriage  under  arms,  and  accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denoiniuatcd, 
In  the  mauojnvres,  right  gerieral  guide,  and  UJt  j/ineral 
gui'le,  and  be  posted  in  ;tbi<  line  of  tile  cloeors  ;  the  lirst 
In  rear  of  tbo  right,  aod  tbo  soouud  iu  rear  of  tbo  left 
flank  of  tho  battalion. 

Abiiclb  B£00KD. 
IrutrvcHon  of  Dattalior^ 

42.  Every  commanding  offlf-er  is  responslbl*  for  tho 
instruction  of  his  command.  Lie  will  assomblo  tbo  ulllcers 
together  for  theoretical  and  practical  Instruction  as  often 
08  he  may  Jndge  necessary,  and  wbon  unablo  to  attend  to 
this  dnty  in  person,  it  will  be  discharged  by  tbo  oUicer 
next  in  rank. 

43.  Cikptains  will  bo  held  respooBlMo  for  tbo  tl.'coreticiil 
and  practical  instrnctlon  of  tb''ir  nou-comnilHsionod  olll- 
cers,  and  tbo  adjutant  for  tho  instruction  of  tho  nou-com- 
migsioned  staff.  To  this  end,  they  will  require  these 
tactics  to  bo  etndied  and  recited  k«Hon  by  lesson  ;  and 
when  instruction  Is  given  on  tbo  ground,  eiich  uon-coiii- 
misslonod  otllcer,  us  he  explains  u  movement,  should  be 
required  to  put  it  Into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  nou-commlsbinnod  ofllcura  should  also  bo  proo- 
tisod  in  giving  cemmandn.  Bach  c~>nimaad,  iu  a  k-ssoti, 
in  the  theoretical  instrnctl'in,  should  flrut  bo  given  by  the 
instructor,  and  then  repented,  in  aucct-ssion,  by  the  non- 
commissioned offlcers,  eo  that  while  they  becorim  babitn- 
atod  to  tho  commands,  nniformity  may  bo  estublished  la 
tbo  manner  of  giving  them. 

4.5.  In  tho  Hchool  of  tho  Boldlor,  the  company  offlcors 
will  bo  tho  instructors  of  the  squads;  but  if  there  bo  not 
n  Bulhclent  number  of  company  ofllccrs  present,  Intelli- 
il»nt  Bergeanta  may  !«  ■obstitnted;  and  two  or  throo 


squads,  under  Borgeant  Instnictors,  be  enporintcndod,  »t 
the  Barao  time,  by  an  officer. 

4C.  In  tho  Bcho<il  of  the  company,  tho  lieutenant  colonel 
and  the  mi^or,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the  principal 
iustructora,  pubstltuting  frequently  tho  captain  of  tho 
company,  and  somctluics  ono  of  tho  lieutenants;  tbo 
suli<ititute,  as  far  as  practicable,  being  supirintouded  by 
ono  of  tho  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  l«tt&IIOD,  tho  brigadier  gen- 
oral  D)^y  constitnlu  liiui^<elf  tho  principal  Instructor, 
frequently  fulntltutlng  tbo  colonel  of  tlio  battalion, 
BomotliiuB  t!io  llentenunt  cMonel  or  mnjor,  und  twice  or 
thrice,  In  tho  same  courno  of  Instruction,  each  of  thothreo 
senior  cnplulus.  In  this  school,  ali^o,  the  Kubstituto 
will  always,  If  practicable,  bo  superintended  by  tho 
brigadier  general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of  a  captain 
being  tho  instructor),  by  tho  lieutenant  colonel  or  tho 
major. 

48.  Individual  Instruction  being  the  basis  of  tho  iu- 
sttnctiou  of  companies,  on  which  that  of  tho  regiment 
depends,  and  tho  first  principles  having  tho  greatest  In- 
liuonco  upon  this  individual  instruction,  classts  of  recruits 
should  be  watched  with  tho  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  precise 
words,  tho  movement  to  bo  executed  ;  iwid  not  to  over- 
burden tho  memory  of  tho  men,  they  will  ulwajs  U3'J  tho 
samo  terms  to  explalu  th.'  samu  iiriuriples. 

60.  They  shouM  often  Join  example  to  precept,  should 
keep  up  tho  atteutiou  of  the  n.en  by  an  aniHiated  tone, 
and  pass  rapidly  from  ono  movement  to  onolber,  as  soon 
as  that  which  thoy  command  has  been  executed  iu  a  satis- 
factory niannor. 

61.  The  eabro  bayonet  should  only  bo  fixed  wlun  re- 
quired to  bo  used,  cither  for  attack  or  defence;  tbeex- 
orclBos  and  mauocuvios  will  be  executed  without  the 
bayonet. 

bl.  In  tho  movements  xshlch  require  the  bayonet  to 
be  fixed,  tho  chief  of  tho  battnlicn  will  cause  the  signal 
to  fix  bayontt,  to  bo  sonudc;.!  ;  at  this  signal  the  men  will 
fix  bayonets  without  comniund,  and  Ininn  diately  replace 
their  pieces  iu  thopositlou  they  wsye  beture  tbo  bigual. 

Irutructlon  o/  OJ/icen. 

00.  Tho  Instrnctlon  of  oflBcers  can  be  i>erfpctpd  only  by 
Joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often  prac- 
tise tbem  In  marching  and  in  ostiniiiting  distances,  and 
he  will  carefully  endeavor  to  cause  them  to  take  steps 
equal  in  K^ngth  and  swirtiicss.  Thoy  will  also  bo  exer- 
cised In  tho  double  quick  Btep. 

54.  Tbo  Instruction  af  cfllcers  will  include  all  the 
Titles  In  this  syRtem  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as 
proscribe  their  duties  In  peace  imd  wur. 

5.1.  Every  oOlcer  will  niHUe  himself  peifeetly  acquaint- 
ed with  the  bugU  slgniil'':  and  Bbould,  by  pnictice,  bo 
enabled,  if  necewary,  to  sound  them.  Thin  knowledfje, 
80  necessary  In  general  InBtruction,  bcocmeB  o(  vital  ini- 
portanoo  on  actual  tcrvico  In  the  tield. 

Instruction  cf  Sergeants. 

50.  As  the  discipline  and  elliciency  of  a  company  niale- 
rlally  depend  on  the  conduct  and  character  of  it-i  ner- 
geants,  they  should  bo  selected  with  care,  ami  prii|..Tly 
iuBtructed  in  all  the  duties  appertaining  to  their  rink. 

67.  Their  theoretical  luetruclion  bh.iubl  incluilo  tlio 
School  ef  tho  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Comjiany,  ai^il 
tbo  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  ihould  likewise  know 
all  thu  details  of  sorvieo,  and  tho  rogulations  preset ibing 
their  duties  in  garrison  and  In  campaign. 

£8.  Tho  captain  selei-tH  from  tho  corporals  In  his  com- 
pany thoBO  whom  ho  Judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to  the 
theorotlcal  Instruction  of  tho  sergeants. 

Trtttrridinn  of  CbrporjU. 

TO.  Their  theoretical  Instrnctlon  phould  Include  the 
School  of  tho  Soldier,  and  such  ri'gulation^i  as  prescribe 
their  dotics  In  garrison  und  in  canipaigu. 

00.  The  captain  eoleots  from  bin  company  a  few  privatos 
who  may  bo  admitted  to  the  thoorotiOHl  lustruction  of 
tho  corporals. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PAET  I. 


Cl.  As  the  inslrnction  of  ecrgeants  and  corporals  ia  in- 
tended principally  to  qualify  them  for  tho  inetraction  of 
the  privates,  thoy  should  be  taught  not  euly  to  exectite, 
but  to  explain  intelligibly  every  thing  they  may  bo  rc- 
qnirod  to  teach. 

Cbmman<!*. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

C2.  The  command  of  caution,  which  Is  ailt^ntinn. 

C3.  The  preparatory  command,  which  Indicates  the 
moyemont  which  is  to  be  execated. 

04.  The  command  of  cMculion,  such  oa  march  or  7iaU, 
or,  in  the  mannal  of  arms,  tho  part  of  a  command  which 
causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct, 
and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  tbo  number  of  men 
under  instruction. 

06.  The  command  attention  ia  pronounced  at  the  top  of 
the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 
1  67.  The  command  of  ezectUion  will  be  pronounced  in  a 
tone  firm  and  brief. 

08.  Tho  commands  of  caution  and  tho  preparatory  com- 
mands are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of  execu- 
tion by  CAPITALS. 

C9.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  difTicuIt  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  wilh  au  ascending  pro- 
f^ression  in  tho  tone  of  command,  but  always  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  may  bo  moro  energetic 
and  elevated ;  the  divisions  are  indicated  by  a  hyphen. 
The  parts  uf  commands  which  are  placed  in  a  parenthesis 
are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE  SECOND. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

General^Etdet  and  Dieision  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual  and 
progressive  Instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  instructor 
never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed  until  ho  has 
given  an  exact  explanation  of  it ;  and  ho  executes,  him- 
self, the  movement  which  he  commands,  eo  as  to  join  ex- 
ample to  precept,  lie  accustoms  the  recruit  to  take,  by 
himself,  the  poBition  which  is  explained — teaches  him  to 
rectify  it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of  intelligence — 
and  sees  that  all  movements  are  performed  without  pre- 
cipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before  passing 
to  another.  After  tbey  have  been  properly  executed  iu 
tho  Older  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the  juntructor  no 
longer  confines  himself  to  that  order ;  on  the  contrary, 
be  should  change  it,  that  ho  may  Judge  of  the  intelli- 
gence of  tho  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  end  of 
each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftenor,  if  ho  thinks  proper, 
especially  at  the  commencement;  for  this  purpose  he  com- 
mands Brst. 

73.  At  tho  command  Beht,  the  soldier  is  no  Ion  peer  re- 
quired to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his  place. 
If  tho  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relievo  tho  attention  of 
tbo  recruit,  ho  commands,  in  Place— UT.ar  ;  the  soldier  is 
then  not  required  to  preserve  bis  immobility,  but  he 
always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

71.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  tho  in- 
struction, he  commands — Attention;  at  this  command, 
the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motionless,  and 
fixes  his  Bttentlon. 


75.  The  School  of  Hic  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  three 
partB  :  the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to  be  taught 
to  recruits  without  arms ;  the  second,  the  manual  of  arms, 
tho  loadings  and  firings;  the  third,  the  principles  of  align- 
ment, tho  march  by  the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheel- 
ing, and  those  of  change  of  direction  ;  also,  long  marches 
in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

7G.  Each  part  will  bo  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows : 

PART  rmsT. 

Lcuson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms:  Eyes 
right,  left  and  front. 

Lenson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common  and 
quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  tho  direct  step  in  double  quick 
time  and  the  run. 

PART  8EC0KD. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Letson  2.  Hannal  of  arms. 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 

Lesson  4:.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and  by  rank. 

Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  6.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PABT  TniKD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruction 
in  tho  principles  of  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  mar^h,  and  tbo 
different  steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of  direction.  -• 

Lesson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and  tho  5S 
run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks.  ^ 

PABT  FIRST.  I 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  recruit  at  | 
a  time  ;  but  three  or  four  may  bo  united,  when  tho  num- 
ber be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the  instructers.  In 
this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at 
one  pace  from  each  ether.  In  this  part,  the  recruits  will 
bo  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  B eels  on  tho  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  tho 
conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each 
other  something  less  than  a  right  angle  ; 

Tho  knees  straight  without  8tiCfne^8; 

Tho  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward; 

Tho  shoulders  equare  aud  failing  equally; 

Tho  arms  hanging  naturally ; 

Tho  elbows  near  the  body  ; 

Tho  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  littlo  to  the  front,  the 
little  finger  behind  the  seam  cf  the  pantaloons  ; 

The  head  eroct  and  square  to  the  Iront,  without  con- 
straint ; 

Tho  chin  near  tho  stock,  without  covering  it; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  tho  front,  and  sirikiiig  the 
ground  about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

liemarJcs  on  the  position  of  the  Soldier. 
\IIeth  on  the  same  line-; 

79.  Bccauso,  if  one  were  in  tne  roar  of  tho  other,  tho 
shoulder  on  that  sida  would  be  thrown  back,  or  the  po- 
sition of  tho  aoidier  would  be  constrained. 

Ueels  more  or  leis  closed; 

Bocan^o  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  legs 
with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constrHiut,  mak"  tboir 
heels  touch  while  standing.  *  , 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  I. 


Th»f«et  egnaUy  turiuxl  Ml,  and  net  formkig  (00  larff*  an 
any/«  ; 

nM;«atc,  tf  one  foot  wore  tnrned  out  more  than  the 
other,  a  shouldfr  would  Ik-  deranged,  and  If  both  fc«t  h% 
too  much  turned  out,  It  would  not  bo  practlcAblo  to  In- 
rlino  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without  rcndor- 
iogtho  whole  position  nnstead;. 

Kn«e»  extended  wUKoiU  tUffnem; 

Decnnec,  If  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatlgne  would  be  | 
unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  ihe  htp>; 

Because,  It  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The  In- 
Rtructor  will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the  bad 
habit  of  dropping  a  Bhoulder,  of  drawing  In  a  side,  or  of 
advaucing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right,  when  rnder  anus. 
Thf«o  are  defects  ho  will  labor  to  correct. 

TTie  upper  part  of  the  hodg  incUning  forviard; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposcMl  to  do  the  re- 
verse, to  projnct  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back  the  shonl- 
ders,  when  they  wiah  to  hold  thcmBelves  erect,  from 
which  result  great  inconvcnionccs  in  marching.  The 
habit  of  iucliuing  ferward  the  upper  ]>Art  of  the  body  is 
80  important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must  en- 
force it  at  the  beginning,  particularly  with  recrcitfl  who 
have  naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

BhovMert  square  ; 

B<vaii«e,  If  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line 
of  the  bronst,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect  called 
ruund-fhouldtred,  not  uncommon  among  recruits),  the 
man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his  piece  with  ad- 
dress. It  14  importaut,  then,  to  correct  this  defect,  and 
necessary  to  that  end  th«t  the  coat  should  act  easy  about 
ihe  shoulders  and  arm-pits;  bat  In  correeting  this  de- 
IVct,  the  instructor  will  take  caro  that  the  shoulders  be 
not  thrown  too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the 
belly  to  prcgect,  and  the  small  of  the  back  to  bo  curved. 

Th'.  firms  hanging  naturally,  clhowt  near  the  hoily,  the  palm 
nflhf  hand  a  little  turned  to  thf  front,  the  Utile  finger  be- 
hind the  team  0/ the  pantaloons  ; 

B»~ause,  these  positions  are  equally  Important  to  the 
shoulder ■trmt,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  occupying 
more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a  free  use  cf  the 
piece;  they  have,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  keeping  In 
Ihe  shoulders. 

The  fare  straii/hl  to  the  front,  and  wilhmit  constraint ; 

Because,  If  there  be  stiffness  In  the  latter  position,  it 
would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  tho  upper  piirt 
of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and  give  pain  and 
fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  tho  surest  means  of  maintaining  the 
shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to  belusistedenand 
attained. 

80.  The  Instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  position 
of  tho  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  tura- 
iug  of  the  head  and  eyes.     IIo  will  command : 

1.  j7/e«— RiGUT.    2.  FnONT. 

81.  At  the  word  right,  \\\6  recruit  will  turn  the  head 
(iently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  ej'6  In  a 
line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  thoeyes  flxwd  on  thollno 
of  the  eyes  of  the  men  In,  or  supposed  to  be  In,  the  same 
rank, 

82.  At  tho  second  command,  the  head  will  resume  the 
direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  Tho  movement  of  Eyes— 'Lzn  will  l>8  executed  by 
inverse  means. 


P4.  The  Instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  tbe 
movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the  s<]uarvness  of 
the  ihonlders,  which  will  bapi>cn  if  the  movement  of  the 
farmer  bo  too  sudJen. 

M.  NVhen  the  Instructor  shall  wish  tbe  recruit  to  pan 
from  the  atate  of  attention  to  that  of  eaao,  ho  will  com- 
mand : 

Bkst. 

8C.  To  canse  a  resumption  of  tbe  habitual  position,  the 
instructor  wlU  command : 

1.  AUention.    i.  Boiup.. 

87.  At  tho  flrst  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  hli  attention ; 
at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  and 
Bteadlneas. 

Lesson  11. 

F\icings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  lu 
ono  tmv,  or  pause.    The  Instructor  will  command : 

1.  eqitad,    2.  RigU  (or  fc/?)  — Face. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  tho  right  foot 
slightly,  turn  on  the  left  Iml,  raiding  the  toi-n  a  little, 
and  then"  replace  tho  right  htel  by  the  side  of  the  left, 
and  on  the  same  lino. 

00.  Tho  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  bo  executed 
In  two  Umc-3,  or  pauses.     The  Instructor  will  command: 

1.  Squad.    2.   ABon— Face. 

91.  (First  Time  )  At  tho  word  alovt,  the  recruit  will 
turn  on  tho  left  heel,  bring  the  loft  toe  to  tho  front,  carry 
the  right  foot  to  Ihe  ro»r,  the  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full 
three  inches  from,  the  Uft  heel,  the  feet  equare  to  each 
other. 

92.  {Seco^id  Time.)  At  tho  word  face,  the  recrnit  will 
turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  tee  a  little,  extend  the  hams, 
face  to  tho  rear,  bringing,  at  tho  same  time,  tho  right 
heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

03.  The  instiuctor  will  talco  core  that  these  motions  do 
not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 

LE£60N  III. 
Principhi  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  Tlife  length  of  tho  direct  step,  or  pace,  lu  common 
time,  will  bf  twonty-elght  inches,  reckoning  from  heel  to 
heel,  and  In  swiftness,  at  tho  rate  01  ninety  in  a  minute. 

'J6.  Tho  instructor,  scoing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  his 
position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principle  and  mechan- 
lum  of  tills  step — placing  himself  bix  or  seven  paces  from, 
and  facing  to,  tho  recruit.  IXo  will  himself  execute 
slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  Ulnbtration,  and  then 
command : 

1,  Bq^tad,  for^raud.    2.   Common  time.    3.  BLincii 

06.  At  the  flrst  commaud,  the  recruit  will  throw  tho 
weight  of  the  body  on  tho  right  leg,  without  bonding  tho 

'j7.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but  without 
a  Jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  loft  foot  twenty-eight 
Inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  neor  tho  ground,  the  ham 
extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and,  as  also  tho 
koeo,  slightly  turned  out;  ho  will,  at  the  same  time, 
throve  tho  weight  of  the  body  forward,  nod  plant  Hat 
tho  l"1"t  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  tho  distance 
where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right  when  tho  weight  of 
the  body  Is  bronglit  forward,  tho  wh<de  of  which  will 
now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot.  The  recruit  will  tiext, 
ill  like  manner,  advance  tho  riyht  footond  plant  it  as 
above,  the  heel  twenty-eight  Inches  from  the  heel  of  tho 
left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march  without  turning 
the  Bhonlders,  and  preserving  alveayg  tho  face  direct  to 
the  front.  V 


SCHOOL  Off  THB  SOLDIER— PART  II. 


98.  When  the  Inatrocior  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  march, 
be  will  command: 

1.  S-ii*Cui.     2.  HiXT. 

00.  A.t  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  grouBd,  the  foot 
in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and  planted  by  tlio  Bide  of 
the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  Indicate,  ft-om  time  to  time,  to 
the  recruit,  the  cadencoof  the  step  by  giving  the  command 
one  At  the  instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and  lico  at  the  instant 
It  onght  to  be  planted,  observing  the  cadence  of  ninety 
steps  In  a  miunte.  This  method  will  contribute  greatly 
to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two  motlons^to  which  the 
step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  wlU  be  employed  only  In  the  first 
and  second  parts  of  tho  School  of  the  Soldier,  As  soon 
as  tho  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has  become  estab- 
lished in  the  principles  of  shouldered  arms,  and  In  the 
mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of  the  step  in  common 
lime,  he  will  be  practiced  only  in  quick  time,  the  double 
qu'ck  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  Tho  principles  of  the  step  In  quick  time  are  the 
same  as  for  common  time,  but  Its  swiftness  la  at  the  rate 
of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  eqoad  to  march  In 
quick  ttiDo,  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  fonoarJ.    3.  MiBoa. 


Lesson  IV. 
'  Priiidjylea  of  th»  Double   Qukb  Step. 

101.  The  length  of  the  douWe  quick  step  la  thirty-three 
inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and 
iiify-flvo  steps  per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  tho  recruits  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick  step,  will 
command : 

1.  Dcvbh  Quick  Bl^.    2.  Maech. 

1C6.  At  'the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  ralso  his 
hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  tie  hands  closed,  the  nails 
towards  the  body,  tho  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front 
his  left  leg  bent.  In  order  to  give  to  the  knee  the  greatest 
elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the  knee  and  the 
instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed ;  he  will  then  replace  his 
foot  in  its  former  position ;  with  the  right  leg  he  will  exe- 
cute what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the 
alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  be  continued  until 
the  command  : 

1.  Siiuad.    2.  IlALT. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the 
foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  dropping 
at  tho  same  time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will  resume  the  po- 
sition of  a  soldier  without  arms. 

109.  The  Instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces 
from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the  cadence  by 
tlie  commands,  on-i  and  iwo,  given  alternately  at  the  in- 
stant each  foot  should  be  brought  to  the  ground,  which 
at  first  will  be  in  common  time,  but  its  rapidity  will  bo 
gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  In  the 
principles  of  this  step,  the  Instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  fmoard.     2,  DotiUe  Qi«efc. 
3.  Mabcii. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  tho 
weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  tho  second  oonunand,  he  will  place  his  arms  as 
iudiciitod  Ho.  100. 


113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward  the 
left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  l>ent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised 
— will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirty-three  inches 
fi"om  the  right,  and  with  the  feot  will  then  execute  what 
has  Just  been  prescribed  for  the  left.  This  alternate  move- 
ment of  the  lege  will  take  place  by  throwing  the  weight 
of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  allowing  a 
natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arras. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  dif- 
ferent degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstancoH 
the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  Increased  to  one  hundred 
and  eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate  a  distance  of  four 
thousand  yards  will  be  passed  over  In  about  twenty-five 
minutes. 

115.  Tho  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  In  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick 
step,  the  only  difibrence  consisting  In  a  greater  degree  of 
swiftness. 

117.  It  Is  recommended  In  marching  at  double  quick 
time,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much 
as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed. 
Experience  has  proved  that,  by  conforming  to  this  prin- 
ciple, a  man  can  pass  over  a  much  longer  distance,  and 
with  less  fatigue. 

PART  SECOND. 

OEHEBAL   BCLE8. 

118.  The  Instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this  «»cond 
part  until  they  shall  be  well  established  la  the  position  of 
the  body,  and  In  the  manner  of  marching  at  the  different 
steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  ho  will  placo 
in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  in 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  follows  : 


Lessos  I. 
I'iittctplo  of  Shouldered  Arim. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  In  the  firf  t 
lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause  him  to 
bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  place  the  piece  In  it,  in 
the  following  manner  : 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand— tho  barrel  nearly 
vertical  and  resting  In  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — the 
guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full 
length  near  the  body;  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  em- 
bracing tho  guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed  together, 
and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  the  cock, 
which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects 
In  the  conformation  of  tho  shoulders,  breast  and  hips. 
These  the  Instructor  will  labor  to  correct  in  the  lessons 
without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by  stoady  endeavors,  so 
that  the  appearance  of  the  pieces.  In  the  same  line,  may 
be  uniform,  and  this  without  constraint  to  the  men  in 
their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark  that 
recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  derange  their 
position  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder  apd  the  right 
band,  or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spreading  out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by 
continually  rectifying  the  position;  he  will  sometimes 
take  away  the  piece  to  replace  it  the  better  ;  he  will  avoid 
fiitiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in  the  beginning,  but 
labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  position  so  natural  and 
easy  that  they  may  remain  in  It  a  long  time  without 
fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that 
the  piece,  at  a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high  nor  to<. 
low:  if  too  high,  the  right  elbow  would  spread  out,  tho 
soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in  his  rank,  and  tho 
piece  be  made  to  waver ;  if  too  low,  the  flies  would  be  too 
much  closed,  the  soldier  would  not  have  the  necessary 
space  to  handle  his  piece  with  facility,  the  right  arm 
would  become  too  much  fatigued,  and  would  draw  down 
the  shonlder. 


8 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER-PART  II. 


IZ<).  Tha  in'trirtor,  h->foro  p^wln?  to  the  BecAn"!  leeson, 
win  canre  to  \<o  repeated  the  moTcmcats  of  «-y«  ri.,'A/,  Ufl, 

iiurl  fi(i}it,  n!i(3  \\i<yfKicinj$. 

Lesbos  II. 
Mamial  of  Antu. 

127.  The  mannal  of  arms  will  ho  taught  to  four  men 
plxcod,  Rt  first,  in  oqo  raulc,  elbow  t<j  olbow,  and  aftor- 
wanls  in  two  ranks. 

1^8.  Kacli  C'lmmand  will  bo  executed  In  one  ti)M  (or 
pause),  but  this  titno  will  bo  divi<lpd  into  motions,  the 
iiotlor  to  make  known  tlip  ui<:cUuniiiiii. 

12'J.  Tlio  rate  (i.r  Bwlflucsa)  of  each  motion,  In  the 
manunj  of  arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein  Indicated,  is 
fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute;  Imt,  In  order  not 
to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  Instructor  will,  at  first,  look 
more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without 
requiring  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he 
will  bring  the  recruits  progressively,  and  aflcr  they  shall 
have  become  •  little  (amillarixed  with  the  bandliug  of  tho 
piece. 

100.  As  tho  motions  relative  to  tl-  fartridge,  to  tho  ram- 
mer, and  to  the  filing  and  unflxiT..  f  the  bayonet,  can- 
not bo  executed  at  tho  rate  prescribed,  nor  even  with  a 
uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be  suljected  to  that  os- 
ilence.  The  instructor  will,  however,  labor  to  cause  these 
ni'-itions  to  bo  eiocuted  with  promitncsa,  and,  above  all, 
with  regularity. 

131.  Tlio  hist  sellable  of  the  command  will  decide  tho 
>>riHk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or 
p.iuse).  Tho  commiinds,  ^'•'),  tliree,  and  four  will  decide 
the  brisk  execution  of  tho  other  motions.  As  soon  as  the 
rocroits  shall  well  comprehend  the  positions  of  tho  Boveral 
motions  of  a  time,  they  will  bo  tanght  to  execute  the 
time  without  riStlug  on  its  different  motions  ;  tho  mo- 
chanisiii  of  tho  time  will  nevertheless  bo  observed,  ns 
well  to  give  a  perfect  uso  of  tho  piece,  as  to  avoid  the 
sinking  of,  or  slurring  over,  cither  of  tho  motions. 

132.  Tho  manual  of  arms  will  bn  taught  in  the  fol- 
lowing progroBflion ;    The  instructor  will  command : 

Support — Abus. 

Otm  tirM  and  fhreo  motion*. 

133.  (FIM  mMion.)  Bring  tlio  piece,  with  tho  right 
hand,  porpendicnlarly  to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes, 
the  barrel  to  the  re ir  seize  tho  piece  with  the  left  hand  at 
tho  lower  hand,  raise  this  hand  as  hiu;h  as  tho  chin,  and 
Keizo  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  tho  right  hand 
four  Inches  below  tho  cock. 

134.  (Hccond  notion.)  Turn  tho  piece  with  tho  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  carrying  tho  piece  to  the 
left  shoulder,  rind  pass  thoforo-arms  extended  on  the 
breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock  ;  support 
t!ie  cock  against  tho  loft  fore-arm,  tho  left  hand  resting 
on  the  right  breast. 

la.'i.  (Tliird  Motion.)    Drop  tho  right  hand  by  the  side. 
136.  When   the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repo»e  in 
thii  position,  be  will  command: 

Best. 

iri7.  At  thi  command,  tho  rocrnlts  villi  bring  np 
Hiiiartly  the  right  hand  to  tho  handle  of  tho  piece 
(.small  of  tho  stock),  when  they  will  not  bo  required  to 
[ireserve  si.ence,  or  steadiness  of  i)0'ition. 

138.  When  the  Instructor  may  wish  iho  recmlta  to 
paaa  from  this  position  to  that  of  alienee  and  ateadlnosa, 
he  will  command: 

1.  AUeniion,     2  8  quad. 

130.  At  the  second  word,  the  rocrnlts  will  resume  tho 
position  of  tho  third  motion  of  support  aniu, 

Bhoulilcr—A.&M». 

Ona  llmo  and  three  motion*. 

140.  {First  motion.)  Grasp  tho  piece  with  the  right  hand 
un<fer  and  agaiuat  tho  left  fore-arm ;  aeizo  It  with  the 


XcTt  hand  at  tho  lower  band,  the  thamb  cxtonded;  do* 
tachthepicoo  slightly  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore- 
arm along  till   Hi  -ok. 

111.  (.'^'  "1  Carry  the  piece  Tortlcally  to  the 
right  bh'  •  :h  h.iiid.-i,  tho  rammer  to  thefront, 
change  il..  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace 
the  guard  wiih  i  ■:■'.■■.'■  md  fore-finger,  slip  tho  led 
hand  t  J  the  hi-;.  '.  iiMer,  the  lingers  extended 
and  joined,  the  r,   :.    r::M  i^'.-irly  straight. 

112.  (^Third  mcUon.)  Drop  tbu  left  band  ^olckly  by  tbc 
side. 

Present— A.iiiia. 

On»  Hmt  and  two  motiom*. 

143.  (Fi'r»<  inolion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  tho 
piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  tho  body,  tho  rammer  to 
the  front;  at  tlio  same  timo  scizo  the  piece  with  tho  loft 
har^I  half-way  between  the  guiilo  sight  aud  lower  Imnd, 
tho  thumb  extended  along  tho  barrel  and  against  the 
stock,  the  foro-arm  horizontal  and  resting  against  tho 
body,  tho  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

lit.  {Sciond  motion.)  Urasp  the  small  of  thO  Stock  wltb 
the  right  baud  below  and  against  the  guard. 

ehoulder—Anua. 
Ono  (I'ffM  and  tteo  nolioM. 

145.  (F\Til  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoul- 
der, at  tho  same  time  change  the  position  of  tho  right 
hand  so  as  to  embrace  tho  guard  with  tho  thumb  and 
fore-finger,  slip  up  tho  loft  hand  to  tho  height  of  the 
shoulder,  tho  lingurs  extended  and  joined,  tho  right  arm 
nearly  straight. 

14)3.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  tho  loft  hand  quickly  by  tho 
side. 

OrJcr— Aems. 
One  tim«  andjicolmctioni. 

147.  (Jf^nl  motion.)  Soizo  tho  piece  briskly  with  tho  loft 
hand  near  tho  upper  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  tho 
shoulder  with  tho  right  bond ;  loosen  tho  grasp  of  the 
right  hand,  lower  tho  pleco  with  the  left,  ro-seize  tho 
piece  with  tho  rl^ht  hand  above  tho  lower  band,  tho  lit- 
tle finger  in  tho  rear  of  tho  barrel,  tho  bntt  about  four 
inchoafrom  tho  ground,  the  right  band  supported  against 
tho  hip,  drop  tho  left  hand  by  tho  side. 

143.  (Second  motion.)  Let  tho  piece  slip  through  tho 
right  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the  Uugors, 
and  take  tho  position  about  tob)  descrlbud. 

Position  o/  order  arms, 

119.  Tho  bond  low,  tho  borrel  between  the  thnrab  and 
foro-flnger  extended  along  tho  stock;  the  other  lingers 
extended  ond  joined;  tho  mnzzlo  about  two  Inches  from 
tho  right  Bhouldwr ;  tho  rammer  in  front ;  tho  too  (or 
beok)  of  tho  butt,  against,  and  in  a  lino  with,  tho  too  of 
tho  right  foot,  tho  barrel  perpendicular. 

160.  When  tho  Instructor  may  wish  to  give  rcpoao  In 
this  position,  ho  will  command: 

Rest, 

151.  At  this  command,  the  locruJtB  will  not  bo  leqnlrod 
to  preserve  silonco  or  steadiness. 

\r>2  When  tho  instructor  may  wish  to  pass  tho  re- 
cruits from  this  position  to  thot  of  silonco  and  atoadlness, 
ho  will  command : 

1.  Attention.    2.  BQDiD. 

1C3.  At  tho  second  word,  tho  recruits  will  resume  tho 
position  of  order  arm*. 

Bhou'dcr—LZTiB. 
Ono  timo  and  two  motions. 

154.  (,nret  motion.)  Baiso  the  pleco  vertically  with  the 
right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PAET  II. 


the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body ;  seize  the  p-eoe 
with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and  drop  quickly  the 
right  band  to  giasp  the  piece  at  the  swe  1  of  the  ttock,  ihe 
thumb  and  furoUug  r  embracing  the  gnard;  press  the 
piece  against  the  shoulder  with  theje-t  hand,  the  right 
arm  nemly  strHight. 

155.  (Second  msUon.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the 
lide. 

Load  t»  nine  iimes. 

I.  Load.* 

One  lime  ond  one  mriion, 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  high  as 
the  right  elbow,  and  bring  It  Tertically  opposite  the 
middle  of  Iht^body,  shift  tbe  right  hand  to  the  uppor 
band,  pliioe  the  bu't  between  tho  feet,  the  ba:rel  to  t^ic 
front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hftnd  near  the  muzz'.e,  ■»  hch 
should  be  three  inches  from  tho  boily  ;  carry  the  right 
hand  to  cte  cartridge  box. 

2.  J2a)id.'e— Castbidqe. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two 
fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear— Oabtridqe, 
One  time  ami  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  j  aper  to  the  powder,  h^-ld  the  cartridge 
upright  between  the  thucib  and  lirst  two  fingers,  near 
tLe  top  ;  in  this  pusi  ion  place  it  in  front  of  auu  near  the 
muzzle— the  back  of  the  hand  to  ihe  front. 

4.  CVior^e— Oabtbidqk. 
One  time  arid  one  motion, 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  tho  barrel:  disongsgo 
the  ball  from  tbe  paper  with  tiie  right  hand  .tnd  the 
thumb  and  first  two  finge  s  of  the  loft :  insert  it  into  the 
bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down  with 
t  he  right  thumb ;  seize  tbe  head  of  the  rammer  witn  the 
thumb  and  fore-  finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fingers 
closed,  the  albows  near  the  body. 

6.  i>;ato— Baumeb. 
One  time  an^  three  motions, 

IGO.  [First  motion.)  Half  draw  tho  rammer  by  extend- 
ing the  right  arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the 
lett  tbumU  ;  graip  the  rammer  near  the  muzzle  with  the 
right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the 
front,  the  thnaib  extended  along  t!  e  rammer. 

IGl.  {iyicond  motion  )  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes 
by  aga.u  extending  the  arm  ;  the  rammer  in  the  pro- 
longa  ion  of  the  pipes. 

162.  (Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end 
of  the  rammer  passing  near  tho  left  shoulder  ;  place  the 
head  of  tho  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  back  of  tho  hand  to 
the  front. 

6.  itani— CABTRiPas. 
One  tima  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and  steady 
It  in  this  position  with  ihe  thumb  of  the  lift  hand  ;  seize 
the  rammer  at  the  small  ei'd  with  the  thumb  and  fjre 
finger  01  I  he  right  hand,  the  b'lck  oftliohanil  to  tho  front; 
press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows  near  tho  body. 


•  WhenoTcr  tho  loadings  snd  firings  are  to  bo  executed,  tho 
Instructor  will  oausg  tht  gatuidga  b»x«s  to  b«  brought  to  tha 
(rout. 

a 


7.  Iieivrn— Bammeb. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

161.  {First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  hftlf-way  out, 
aiid  steady  it  iu  this  position  with  the  left  thumb  ;  erapp 
it  near  tho  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  ihe  little  fioger 
uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  tho  thtmb  ahng  tho 
rammer;  clear  the  rammer  from  tho  bore  by  extending 
the  arm,  ihe  nails  to  tha  front,  tho  ramm;-r  in  the  prolon- 
gation of  Ihe  bore. 

105  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  bend  of  tho 
r  lumer  passing  near  tho  left  sliou  der,  and  in»ert  it  In 
tho  pipes  until  iho  right  hand  reaches  the  muzzle,  th» 
nailrs  to  tho  fro   t. 

166.  (Third  motion  ^  Forcg  the  rammer  home  by  plactnct 
the  little  finder  o'' 'i'o  light  h>i'd  on  the  head  of  the 
rammer;  pass  tho  Itf  '.,ind  down  the  barrel  to  the  extent 
of  tho  arm,  withuut  deprasslni;  th.  shoulder. 

8.  Prime.-:* 
One  time  and  two  motion'. 

167.  (First  motion )  With  the  loft  hand  rafne  tho 
piece  till  tho  hand  U  as  high  as  the  eye  gra-p  the 
small  of  the  Etock  with  tho  right  hnnd  :  ha  f  face  to 
the  right ;  place,  at  tho  same  time,  the  right  toot  bediud 
and  at  right  angles  with  the  ielt ;  h-i  Iioilow  of  tt:e  right 
footBga'Dstt  e  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  baud  down  to  the 
lower  bind,  tho  thumt  along  thj  stork,  he  left  elbow 
against  the  body:  '  ring  the  piece  to  the  right  sidw,  tbe 
butt  below  iho  right  fore  arm — the  email  (>f  tho  stoek 
against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast, 
the  barrel  upwar  s.  tho  muzzle  ou  a  le'.el  with  the  i  ya. 

1C8.  (Second  motion)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  tbe 
right  baud,  the  ting' rs  supporte  against  the  gnard  and 
fh,i  small  ol  tho  stock— remove  the  ■id  cap  with  en  of 
the  Pilfers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  an  i 
fore- linger  of  the  same  hand  take  n  cap  from  the  pouch, 
place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  t  e  humb; 
seize  the  small  «.f  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  Shoulder— Anas. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

169.  (Rrst  Motion  )  Bring  the  piece  to  the  light  should- 
er and  support  it  there  witv,  the  left  hand,  face  to  the 
front;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the  eide  of  and  on  a  lin« 
with  the  left;  grasp  tho  piece  »itU  the  right  hand  as  in- 
dicated in  it  the  position  of  should  r  arms. 

170.  (.Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  nand  quickly  by  the 
side. 

Beadt. 

Quo  lime  and  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.)  Baise  the  piece  slightly  with  thd 
right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left 
heel  ;  carry  tho  tight  foot  to  thii  rear,  and  plic-.s  it  at 
right  angi  s  to  the  loft,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to,  aai 
ag'iiust  the  left  heel;  grasp  the  piece  witl.  the  left  hand 
at  tbe  lower  band  and  'Ictach  it  8li^htly  from  the  shoulder. 

172.  (Second  motion  )  Bringdown  the  piece  witti  both 
hands,  the  bartel  upwards,  the  l*ft  thumb  extc-nd(d  a)ong 
the  stock,  tbe  b  'tt  beltwthe  right  fv>re-arm,  the  small  of 
tho  stuck  agsinst  the  body  and  two  inches  bolow  ho 
rigiit  breast,  tho  mnzzle  as  h  gh  ns  the  eye,  tho  Ielt  elbow 
against  tbe  side ;  place  at  thi-  s  'mo  f  ii  e  the  right  thumb 
on  the  bend  of  tho  cock,  tho  other  fingers  under  and 
against  the  guard. 

173.  (Thrd  motion.)  Cock,  and  s  iz>  the  piece  at  tho 
email  ol  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position  of  tho 
butt. 

*  If  Maynard"8  primer  be  used,  tho  command  Trill  be,  toad  in 
riqht  timen,  and  the  ciRhth  command  will  bo,  xhoulder  arms,  and 
exconted  from  return  rammer,  in  one  time  and  two  motions,  M 

{First  motion.)  Raise  tho  pieco  with  tho  left  hand,  and  t&k» 
tho  position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  th«  loft  hand  quickly  by  th*  lid*. 


10 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IL 


Aim. 

One  limeland  on*  mofion. 

171.  VinUe  the  piece  with  both  baaJx,  »nd  tnpiiort  the 
butt  sgainit  the  ri^ht  shoulder;  the  leTt  olbow  down, 
therig'it  aa  hii:b  ua  the  shoulder;  Incline  the  head  upon 
the  butt.  BO  tliut  the  right  eyo  may  percilve  quickly  the 
notch  of  the  hiiusse,  the  front  sight,  and  the  olject  aimed 
at ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock,  the  fore-finfter  on  the  tripger. 

176.  When  recruits  are  furmed  in  two  ranks  to  execute 
the  firings,  the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little  lees  the 
right  elLow,  in  order  to  facilUato  the  aim  of  the  rear 
rank  men. 

170.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the 
right  foot  about  eigbt  inches  to  the  right,  and  towards 
ibu  k'ft  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right,  inclining  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

KlBn, 
One  time  and  one  mo'.iuu. 

177.  Press  the  f.ire-flnger  apiiinst  the  trigger,  Are, 
without  lowering  or  turuiug  the  bead,  and  remaiu  in 
this  pohi;tioD. 

178.  lostructors  will  bo  careful  (o  observe  when  the 
men  fire,  tliat  :bey  aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and  that 
the  barrel  be  ho  directed  that  tlie  lino  of  fire  and  the  line 
of  sight  be  in  the  same  vortical  plane.  They  will  often 
cause  the  tiring  to  the  executed  on  ground  of  different 
Inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom  the  men  to  Are  at  ob- 
ji»cts  either  above  or  below  them. 

Load. 
One  lime  and  one  motion. 

170.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the 
same  tira?  face  to  the)  ront  and  take  the  position  ot  load&i 
Indicated  Mo.  LOG.  Each  itar  runk  aian  will  bring  his 
right  fiKtt  b«  the  side  ot  the  left. 

ISO.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  tho  instructor 
will  aaube  the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  commands 
i»nd  moans  prescriU'd  No.  100  and  following. 

181.  If,  [after  firing,  the  instrnctor  should  not  wish 
Ihe  r<fcruits  to  reload,  be  will  commaLd  : ,  _ 

Slioi'lder — AuMii. 
Oiit^Ume  and  otie  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  tho  pie:;*)  briskly  with  the  hft  hand 
nnil  resuuie  th3  position  of  sh.ulder  arms,  at  tho  same 
fac  <  to  the  front,  .tu  ning  on  tho  left  heel,  and  bring  the 
right  h'  el  on  a  'ine  with  the  left. 

Iba.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  command 
fire,  the  Instructor,  when  they  arc  in  tho  position  of  aim, 
will  omuiand : 

Rctoicr — Abms. 

Ont  time  and  one  motion. 

;8t.  At  the  first  p%rt  of  tho  ommand,  wi  hdraw  the 
finger  from  the  trigger  ;  at  tho  command  armn,  retake 
till  posit'on  of  the  third  motion  of  •xmhj. 

185.  The  recruits  bringin  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring 
them  to  a  shoulder,  ho  will  command  : 

giiOL'LDEB— Akms. 
One  lime  and  one  mMion. 

\he>.  At  the  command  t/iou/dfr,  pi  ice  tho  thumb  upcii 
tbecock,ih  fore-finger  on  tiio  trigger,  ball-cock,  and 
seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  band.  At  the 
command  ai-(;,«,  bring  up  l\\t\  piece  briskly  to  tho  right 
nl  oulder,  and  retake  the  position  ot  shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  tirms,  when  t'le 
luBtructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will   remmand  : 


r^jT— Bi.io.Nri. 
Om  time  and  (hr*«  motionf. 

IM.  (firft  notion  )  Grasp  the  piece  with  fh«  loft  hand 
at  the  height  of  thn  shoulder,  and  detach  it  slightly 
from  the  shoulder  with  the  righ'band. 

\h^ .  {fiecond  motion  )  (^ilt  the  pece  with  tho  right 
hand,  lower  it  with  il  e  left  hand,  o  pohite  the  middle 
of  the  body,  and  place  the  buttoetwecn  the  feet  without 
shock;  the  rammer  to  the  r-nr,  the  barrel  verticil,  the 
muzzle  three  inches  from  tho  body;  seize  it  with  the 
right  hand  at  the  upper  banJ,  and  carry  tho  lelt  hsnd 
re^crved  to  the  handle  ol  the  sabto-bavcnet. 

I'.'O  {Third  w4ion.)  Draw  tho  sa'bre  bayonet  from 
the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  tho  barrel ; 
seize  the  pi<c6  with  the  left  hand,  tho  arm  extended,  tho 
right  ban  I  at   ho  upper  bind. 

CTou?<7cT— Aems. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

191.  {.First  r  olion.)  Balso  thepiecn  with  tho  left  hand 
and  pi" c«  it  against  tho  right  shoulder,  th^  rummer  to 
the  front  ;  seize  the  pitce  at  the  same  tine  with  the  right 
hand  at  Ihe  swell  of  the  stock,  tho  thun  b  and  lore- 
finger  embracing  the  guard,  tho  right  arm  Dearly  ex- 
tended. 

192.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  th^bfc  hr>nd  1  » 
tho  side. 

C/iarf/e— BiTONET. 

One  time  and  tiro  molimt. 

j'.>3.  {Fir.U  moti  n.)  Kale  the  piece  slightly  with  the 
right  hand  and  niaho  a  halt  face  to  tho  ri^ht  on  the  le  t 
heel ;  place  tho  hollow  of  the  rij;ht  foot  opposiio  to,  and 
tliree  inches  fiom  tno  left  heed,  tho  feet  square  ;  seize  the 
piece  at  the  same  lime  with  the  Isft  band  a  little  above 
the  lower  baud. 

194.  {t<ixond  inoHon)  Bring  down  tli9  pices  with  both 
hands,  tho  barrel  uppermost,  tho  left  dbow  f>gainst  tho 
body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  at  tho  same  tiaip,  with 
tho  right  band,  which  will  be  supported  aiialnst  the  hip  : 
the  point  of  the  sabre  bayonet  as  high  us  tho  eyo. 

ShCiiiUl-r — Abms. 
One  time  and  two  motioM. 

195.  {First  mnlion  )  Throt#np  the  plec?  briskly  with  tho 
left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  placo  it  ng  inat  tho  right 
shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  turn  tho  right  hand 
so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  tin  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  extended. 

I'Jb.  {Seeond  motion.)  Drop  tho  let  hand  smartly  by 
the  sido. 

Trail — Asms. 

One  tim«  and  two  molionn. 

197.  (First  VMtion.)  Tho  same  as  tho  first  motion  ct 
order  arms. 

198.  {Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  tho 
front,  the  butt  to  tho  rear  and  about  lour  inches  irom  tho 
ground.  The  riuht  Uiiud  supported  at  tho  hip,  will  so 
hold  tiepiec)  that  the  rear  rank  men  nmyn>t  touch 
with  thoir  bayonets  tho  men  in  tho  front  rank. 

SnouLOEa— Abma. 

I'.i ).  At  the  command  tAofiMfr,  raise  the  pIsco  perpen- 
dicularly iu  tho  ri^ht  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of 
the  barrel;  at  the  command  arms,  pxecu'e  what  h(w 
been  prencrlbed  for  the  ihould^'r  frrm  the  position  of  order 
arms. 


.SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIEK-PART  II. 


11 


r)(/l<;— Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motiont. 

UOO.  (Fn-dand  second  molions.)  The  Bfttne  as  the  first 
and  Becond  motiOLS  of  ./Ix  bayonet,  except  (bat,  nt  the  end 
(■(  the  second  command,  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  ■will 
()0  plekced  on  the  Bprint;  of  (ho  Batro-bayoaet,  and  the 
loft  hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of  the  sabro-bayonet 
and  Iho  barrel,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  blade. 

201.  {Third  modoii.)  Press  tlie  (humb  of  the  right  hand 
on  the  spring,  wrest  off  the  sabrc-bnyonct,  turn  it  to  thw 
right,  lower  the  guard  until  it  touches  the  right  hand, 
which  will  seiza  the  back  and  tho  tilgo  of  the  blade  be- 
tweon  the  thumb  and  first  two  Augers,  the  other  fingers 
holding  the  piece  ;  change  tlie  position  of  the  band  with- 
out quitting  the  handle,  return  th»  gabre-bayoeet  to  the 
scabbard,  and  seize  the  pieca  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm 
i'xt-:nded. 

S^oi(We>-— Asms. 

One  time  and  tico  moCiout. 

•M)2.  {First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  from 
lix  bayonet.  No.  191. 

203.  {Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion 
from  fix  bayonet,  No.  1U-. 

Secure— Amis. 
One  time  and  three  motiuits. 

204.  {First  motion.)  The  snmo  as  the  first  motionof  jn^- 
port  ama,  Pia.  16?.,  except  with  the  right  hand  seize  the 
piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  {Second  moHon.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
tho  barrel  to  Iho  front ;  bring  it  opposite  tho  left  shoul- 
der, tho  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  baud  at  tho  lower 
band,  tho  thumb  as  high  as  tlie  chin  and  extended  on  the 
rammer  ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder, 
tho  le't  fore-arm  against  the  piece. 

200.  {Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under 
the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  llio  lower  band, 
the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from  sliding  out, 
tho  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  tho  right  hand 
rolling  at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  lime  and  three  motions. 

207.  {First  motion  )  Raise  the  piece  with  (he  left  hand, 
and  seize  it  with  the  riglit  hand  at  the  small  of  tho  stock. 
The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  tho  shoulder,  the  butt 
against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  piece. 

208.  {Second  motion  ).  Tho  same  as  the  second  motion  of 
thoiddcr  arms  from  a  sujiport. 

209.  {Thi^d  motion.)  The  same  as  tho  third  motion  of 
thoulder  arms  from  a  support, 

^  Right  shoiiller  shift — Arms, 

One  lime  and  two  motions, 

210.  {First  hiolion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpendiculftrly 
from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with 
the  left  between  the  lower  baud  and  guide-sight,  raise  the 
piwe,  the  left  hand  at  tlio  height  of  the  shoulder  and 
four  inches  from  it;  place,  at  tho  same  time,  the  right 
hand  ou  tho  butt,  the  beak  between  the  first  two  fingers, 
the  other  two  fingers  under  tho  butt  plate. 

211.  {Second  motion  )  tiuit  the  piece  with  tho  left  hand, 
raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder  with  the 
right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards ;  lot  fall,  at  the  samo 
time,  tho  loft  hand  by  the  side. 

S?iouldci — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  {Fint  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by 
extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to 
tho  font,  at  the  same  time  s<izo  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  between  tho  lower  band  and  guide  sight. 


213.  (Sfcond  motion.)  Quit  tho  butt  with  the  right  hand, 
which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  lower  the 
piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  elide  up  ths  loft 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  exttndad 
and  closed.    Drop  tho  left  hand  by  the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  snpport  arms,  the  instructor  will 
sometimes  canse  pieces  tobobroughttotherightshoulder. 
To  this  effect,  ho  will  command  : 

Bight  thouldtr  shift— \i\ta». 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  (F^rsl  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
below  i.ud  near  tho  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left  hatnl  uiulor 
the  butt,  tho  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two  fingnra. 

210.  {Si'cond  motion.)  Turn  tlie  piece  with  the  left  Imnd, 
tho  lock  plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  tho  right  shoulder,  tho 
left  hand  sliU  holding  the  butt,  the muz/.le elevated  ;  holil 
the  piece  in  this  position  and  place  the  right  hand  upon 
the  butt  as  is  prescribed  No.  210,  and  let  fall  the  left  hami 
by  the  side. 

Support— Anna. 

One  time  and  two  raotiont. 

'217.  {First  motion.)  Tho  samo  as  the  first  motion  of 
shoulder  ariiu.  No.  212. 

218.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
the  barrel  to  the  front,  curry  it  opposite  tbe  left  shoulder, 
slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  iha  ntock,  place  the  lelY 
fore-arm  extended  ou  the  breast  as  is  prcaciibed  No.  i;U, 
and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the  bide. 

Arms — At  will. 
One  time  and  one  moliou. 

219.  At  this  command.-  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on 
either  shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  tho  muzzle  ol«- 
vated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
one  time  and  one  motion, 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  tho  position  oi 
shoulder  arms.* 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed  ou  tha 
ground,  ho  will  command  : 

GroKiirf— Abms. 

One  time  and  two  motions 

222.  {Firft  motion.)  Tnrn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the 
cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  ad- 
vance the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lower  band;  lay 
■,h  e  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right  hand,  the  toe  of 
th  e  butt  on  a  line  with  the  right  toe,  the  knees  slightly 
bont,  tho  right  heel  raised. 

223.  {Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bricg  the  left  foot  by 
tho  side  of  tho  right,  quit  the  cartridge  bos  with  the  left 
hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 

Raise— A.R1SS. 

One  time  a7id  two  motion'. 

221.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the 
left  hand,  becd  tshe  body,  advance  th^  left  foot  opposite 
the  lower  band,  and  seize  the  piooo  with  the  right  hand. 

22.'>.  {Second  motion.)  Raise  tlio  piece,  bringing  tbe 
left  foot  by  the  side  of  tho  right ;  turn  the  piece  with 
right  hand,  tho  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the  same  t'mn 
quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  thld 
h.".nd  by  the  side. 


Imptc'ion  of  Arms. 

22G.  Th.i  recruits  being  ac  ordered  arms,  and  havi;  g 
tho  sabre-bayonet  In  tho  scatibnrd,  it  the  instrnctor 
wishes  to  cause  au  inspection  of  arms,  ho  will  com- 
mand : 


SCHOOL  or  THE  SOLDIER—PART  II. 


On*  Iir7i4  and  two  motiont. 

127.  {Krtt  motion.)  £oizo  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
I>alovr  aiid  ueur  th<«  upper  bauJ,  corry  it  with  both  haudi 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  budy,  the  butt  between  the 
fxt,  th«  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  bariel  vertical,  the 
niu/.zle  about  »breP  inches  fr^>m  the  bod)  ;  carry  the  left 
hand  rereiird  to  the  Batrn-bay.mot,  draw  it  from  the 
»<".bbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel;  Krasp  the  piece  wi;h 
the  left  hand  below  and  near  th.  urpor  band,  ielie  Ihc 
rammer  with  the  thumb  and  foro-fluger  of  the  rlghi 
band  bent,  the  ether  fingers  c!u»od. 

22i.  (Second  motion  )  Praw  thn  rammer  b»  has  been 
oxplft-ncd  in  loadinj  and  lot  it  glide  to  iho  bottom  of  tlie 
bore,  rpp'ace  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  oppenite  the 
ri^ht  shoulder,  and  retake  the  ponilion  of  orrf<Tf(/ arm*. 

22J.  Theitistrnctor  will  then  Unpoctln  auccesslou  the 
pic"o  of  each  recrnlt,  In  passing  along  the  front  rank, 
Kach,  as  t' e  Instructor  teaches  htm,  will  raise  smertly 
bis  ple'e  with  his  rljfht  hand,  se  ze  it  with  the  left  be- 
tween the  lower  band  and  Rnids  sight,  the  lock  to  the 
front,  the  led  hand  at  the  height  ol  the  chin,  tho  piece 
oppesite  ti  the  left  eyi-;  the  instructor  will  take  it  with 
thcrinht  hand  at  th"  hiindlo,  and,  after  iiispectinfi  it,  will  | 
r.'tnrn  it  to  the  recruit,  who  will  receive  it  back  with  the  \ 
richl  baud,  and  rep' ace  it  in  the  position  of  (irdrred  arma. 

230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passeo  him,  each 
rocrtii'  will  ret  ik«  the  j>o«ltion  presc'lbed  at  tho  com- 
mand intjifction  arms,  return  the  rammer,  and  resume 
the  position  ot ordered  arm). 

231.  If,  instfHd  ot  in>]>fct:'on  of  amn,  the  instructor 
should  merely  wieh  to  caiise  bayOQCti  to  be  fixed,  he  will 
command : 

/'ijr— Batovet. 

232.  Take  the  position  Indicated  No.  227,  fix  bayonets 
as  has  been  explained,  and  ia  modiately  res  time  tho  povi- 
tioi  of  ordered  orm». 

■.!33.  If  it  bo  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to 
ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  diachurged,  he 
will  command : 

Spring— Bammehs. 

23t.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  ox- 
ylaiued  aiiove,  and  immediately  retake  tho  position  of 
0rdercd  ami. 

2il6  The  instructor,  for  tho  purpose  stated,  can  take 
tho  rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel, 
or  rauio  each  recroit  to  make  it  riog  in  the  bariol. 

236.  E4ch  recruit,  afti'.r  tho  instructor  passes  him,  will 
rf tarn  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  armt. 

RcmarU  on  iht  JfumnZ  of  Arms. 

237.  The  mannal  of  orms  frequently  distorts  the  per- 
sons of  recuitu  befur  •  they  acquire  ease  and  coi  fidence 
in  the  several  positions.  The  iuBtructor  will  therefore 
frequently  recur  to  elementary  principles  in  tho  cciirsoof 
the  lessons. 

233  Rscruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  cnrvo  the 
sides  and  bacli,  and  to  deranjj''  the  shoulders,  espc  i.ily 
in  loadinx.  Consequently,  the  instructor  will  not  caun 
th  m  to  dwell  too  long,  at  a  tl  i.e,  In  one  position. 

219.  When,  alter  some  days  of  exercise  in  the  manual 
of  arms,  the  four  inec  shall  be  well  established  in  their 
use,  tha  instructor  will  always  t(rmionte  the  lesson  by 
marching  the  men  for  some  time  in  one  r'l:  k,  and  at  one 
pace  aoart,  in  common  and  quick  time,  In  order  to  con- 
firm them  more  and  m:)re  iu  the  mechmism  of  the  step; 
he  will  alSH  teach  'hem  to  mark  time  and  to  change  step, 
which  win  be  executed  iu  the  fjllowlng  manner : 

To  marti  lime. 

240.  Tho  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  tho  in- 
(trustor  will  command  : 


1.  JfarX-  limt.     2.  MlSCB. 

241.  At  tho  second  command,  which  will  b«  grlvsn  at 
the  instant  a  foot  is  comme  to  the  gronnd,  tho  recruits 
Mill  make  a  semblanoe  of  marching,  by  bringing  the 
heels  I  y  thaside  of  each  other,  and  ohserviDgthe  cadence 
of  the  step,  by  raJsiiig  each  foot  alternately  without  ad 
Vhbcing. 

212.  The  Intmotor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  b«  ro- 
sumid,  will  command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  M.VBCa. 

243.  At  the  second  crmmand,  which  will  bo  given  si 
prescribed  above,  the  rec(uit«  will  retake  the  etcp  cf 
twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

254.  Th''  fqii.\'J  being  in  march,  the  instrnctor  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  ilep.     2.  MabcjI. 

245.  At  theoecond  command,  which  will  be  given  at  tho 
instant  cithtr  foot  is  comii>g  to  the  ^ri'uud,  bring  tho  fo;it 
which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that  which  is  in  Iront,  and 
step  cffagHiu  with  thu  foot  which  was  in  Iront. 

To  march  bacltcards. 

'JlCi,  Tho  instrnctor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  back- 
wards, will  command : 

1.  5.;t(a(i  baclicard.    2.  MAScn. 

217.  At  tho  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  Inches  to  tho  roar, 
reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  Iho  feet  iu 
BuccessioQ  till  tho  command  halt,  which  will  always  be 
preceded  by  the  caution  squad.  Tho  men  will  halt  at  this 
command,  and  bi  iug  back  thu  foot  iu  front  by  the  side  of 
the  other. 

24''.  This  step  will  always  bo  executed  In  quick  time. 

249.  The  instructor  wid  be  watchful  that  the  recruits 
march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  tho  erect  position 
of  tho  body  and  tho  piece  Le  not  deranged. 

Lessok  III, 
Tu  lo<id  in  four  times. 

250.  Tho  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  tho  recruits 
to  load  at  will,  and  to  ctuse  them  todis'luKuitih  the  times 
which  require  the  grcatent  regularity  and  atte'  tlon, 
c»ich  as  charije  cartritUjc,  ram  cartriUgt,anil  prime.  It  will 
bo  divided  as  follow  h: 

251.  The  first  ;timo  will  bo  executed  at  the  end  of  the 
command;  thu  thice  others  at  tho  commands  (ico,  thr*t 
and /our. 

The  int(rnctor%ill  command : 

1.  Load  in  foiir  times.    2.  LOAD. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  Include  charge  cartrldgs. 

Two. 
2&3.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge- 

Tubes. 
254.  Execute  the  times  ta  Include  prme. 

FouE. 
265.  Execute  Ihe  tims  of  ihouldtr  armt. 
To  load  at  will. 

25').  The  Instructor  will  nost  teach  loading  at  will 
I  which  will  bo  exeontod  as  loading  in  our  times,  but  con- 

liiudd,  and  w  ihout  raatlng  on  either  of  the  times.  Ho 
Iw.U  command: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PAET  II. 


IS 


1.  Load  at  via.    2.  Load. 

t97.  Th-)  instroctor  will  hnbitnat"  the  recniits,  by  da- 
grp«a,  to  !o'd  with  the  Rre.ite«t  po  Bihle  promptitude, 
each  without  regulntiiig  hltn-elf  by  his  neighbor,  aud 
Btce  all  without  waitiDg  for  him. 

168  The  :ftdence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  ;iot  applicable 
to  loa  -  ing  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 

LrssoN  IV. 

TirinQi. 

259.  The  flringa  are  direct  or  cbliquc,  and  will  b^  ex- 
ec a  tod  as  follows: 

The  direct  fire. 

200.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands : 

1.  Fire  by  squad.    2.  Sqmd,    3.  Readt.    i.  Aim.    5.  Fire. 
6.  Load. 

261.  The  Bereral  commsndi  will  bo  executed  ai  has 
been  prescribed  in  thf>  X'atitnl  of  Jrms.  At  the  third 
command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of  ready  as 
heretofore  expla  ned.  At  the  fourth  they  will  aim  ac- 
cording to  the  rank  in  which  each  may  find  himself 
placed,  the  rear  rank  men  iuclining  forward  ■»  little  the 
upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may 
reach  as  mnch  beyond  the  front  rank  as  possible- 

265.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their  p'eces 
and  return  immedintoly  to  the  position  of  vidn- 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommenco  the  firing  by  the 
commands  : 

1.  S<iuad.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Ioad. 

264.  AVhen  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  erase,  he 
will  command : 

Ceaie  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firiDtr,  but 
will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and  afterwirds  bring 
them  to  a  shonlJer. 

Oblique  Firings, 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the  right 
and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the  direct  fire, 
with  thi:<  sing'e  diffarence^the  comraund  aim  will  always 
be  preceded  by  the  caution,  rigid  or  left  obli'pie. 

Position  of  the  tico  rinks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  right. 

267.  At  the  command  rexrlfj,  the  two  ranks  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

208.  At  the  cautionary  command,  ri'j/ii  oblique.,  the  two 
ranks  will  throw  back  the  ^ight  shoulder,  aud  look  steadily 
at  the  ob  ect  to  be  hit. 

2ij9.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  raak  mnii  will 
aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet  ;  each  rear 
rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eii;ht  inches 
tow.irds  the  right  heel  ©f  the  man  next  on  the  rieht  of 
hij  file  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  iuclining  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  left 
knee. 

Position  of  the  two  ranln  in  the    Obliguc  Tire   to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command,  hft  oh  ique,  the  two 
ranks  will  thro  v  back  the  loft  shoulder,  and  look  steadily 
at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  th" front  rank  will  take  aim 
to  the  leit  without  deranging  the  fert;  each  man  in  thi> 
rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches 
toxards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of 
his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  lelt,  inclining  tho  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  littl?  the  right 
knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men  of 
each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  prescribed 
in  the  direct  fire;  the  rear  rank  mtn  bringiug  back  the 
foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  thf  sido  of  the 
other.    ISach  man  will  continue  to  load  ns  if  isolated. 


To  fire  hy  Jilt. 


273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  tho  two  ranks, 
the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  end  without  regu- 
lating on  each  other,  except  for  the  first  fire. 

274.  The  iiistructor  will  command : 

1.  Fire   6y  file.     2.   Squad.     3.  Keabt.     4.  Commexcb 

FIBIKO. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the 
position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

27 ij.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will 
aim  and  fire  ;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the 
pesition  indicated,  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly 
and  fire  a  second  time ;  reload  and  fire  again,  and  so  on 
in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  tho  first 
brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  will  conform  in  all  re- 
spects to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  tho  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  tho  front  and  rear  rank  men 
will  not  bo  required  to  fire  at  the  sums  time. 

280.  Kach  man.  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position 
of  ready  and  continue  the  flre. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he 
will  command : 

Cc'ase— FiRixo. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing.  I 
they  have  fired  they  » ill  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them 
to  a  shoulder;  if  at  the  posi'ion  of  ready,  they  will  half- 
cocs  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  position  of  aitn,  tney 
will  bring  down  their  pieces,  hall-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  hy  rank. 

2S3.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire 
rank,  alternately. 
281.    The  instrnctor  will  command  : 

1,    Fire  by  rank     2.    Squad     3.    Beadt.     4.    Rear  rani. 
5.  Aim.    6.  Fire.    7.  Load. 

235.  At  tho  third  command,  the  tvro  ranks  will  take 
the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

230.  At  the  seventh  command,  tha  rear  rank  will 
execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  In  the  direct  fire, 
and  afterwards  take  the  position  of  ready. 

2S7.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of  the 
rear  ralSk  in  the  position  of  ready,  ho  will  command: 

1.  D-onl  rank.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  renk  will 
execute  what  has  bten  prescribed  for  the  rear  rank,  but 
they  will  not  step  off  viththe  right  foot. 

2i9.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  tho 
rear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank 
to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease,  when  ha 
will  command,  cease  firing,  which  will  be  executed  as  here- 
tofore prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 

To  fre  and  load  hneeling. 

200.  la  this  ex3rci8e  the  squad  will  be  supposed  loaded 
and  drawn  up  in  one  r^uk.  Th*»  instruction  will  be  given 
to  each  man  individually,  without  times  or  motions,  and 
in  the  following  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire  and  load  kxeeliso. 

292.  At  this  command,  tho  man  on  the  right  of  tha 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  ond  halt;  then  carry 
tho  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  tho  left  heel, 
and  in  a  position  convenient  for  placing  th«  right  knee 
upon  the  ground  in  bonding  the  left  log  ;  place  tho  riuht 
knee  upon  the  ground  :  lower  the  piece,  the  left  fore-arm 
supported  upon  the  thigh  on  tho  same  side,  the  right  hand 
on'the  small  of  tho  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right 


14 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  IIL 


thigh,  the  left  band  fupportiag  the  pi*c«  luar  tbo  l»wer 

bHDd. 

•JS:i.  Ho  will  next  move  fho  right  leg  to  f  lie  left  around 
I  lie  kno«  Hupport'.xf  oa  th  ■  ground,  aulil  liiia  leg  ia  uuarly 
ix-rpendicular  to  the  directiun  of  the  left  foot,  and  tliua 
Hcat  himsolt  comfortably  on  the  ripht  heel. 

'JH.  Bilse  the  piece  with  the  ri^lit  hand  and  Hupport  it 
with  the  loft,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  left  el- 
tvjw  iPhtirc  on  tlio  kft  tliiph  near  llii'kiii-o;  seizu  th« 
hammer  with  llio  thumb,  the  T'ln-QoKor  under  the  giitrd, 
cock  and  sci/.o  th<.<  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stuck;  bring 
the  piece  to  ih'j  shoulder,  aim  and^rc. 

2?5.  liriog  the  piece  d»wu  assoon  as  iti-*  flred,an<l  -ur* 
port  it  with  tliu  k-ft  hand,  tha  butt  renting  HKaibftt  the 
richt  ihigh;  carry  the  i>icce  to  the  loar  risiDK  ou  the 
knee,  the  barrel  downwardu,  the  butt  roHtJNK  en  the 
ground;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with  the  It  ft 
liaud  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cartridee  with  the  rii^ht 
and  load  the  piece,  ramminij  iho  ball,  if  necessary,  with 
both  haU'lH. 

29C.  WheB  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the 
left  hand,  wh'ch  holds  ic  at  the  upper  band;  seize  it  at 
xamo  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  ot  the  stock  ; 
turn  the  piece,  the  bHirtl  uppermost  and  nearly  horizon- 
tiil,  thf- left  elbow  rtHtinc  on  the  left  thigh  ;  half  cock,  re- 
nioTo  the  old  cap  and  i>rime,  and  return  to  the  rauks. 

2'.i7.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through  tha  re- 
mainder of  the  squad. 

To  JIre  and  load  lying. 

293.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in*une  rank  and 
loaded;  the  iustructiou  will  bo  given  Individually,  and 
without  times  or  motions 

299.  The  instructor  wUl  command : 

FfBE  A!«D  L-iAB  LTIXO. 

3J0.  At  ^this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  tlie 
Equad  will  move  forward  three  faces  and  halt ;  ho  will 
then  bring  his  piece  te  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees,  and 
place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly.  lu  this 
pubition  he  will  support  the  piece  nearly  horizontal  with 
ihe  luft  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  buft 
end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  renting  on  the  grouud, 
the  barrel  uppermost;  cock  the  pieae  with  the  right  hand, 
and  carry  this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  raise  the 
)<iece  with  both  hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  thoul- 
d'.T,  and  reatiug  on  both  elbows,  aim  and  fire. 

:iv)l.  As  soon  a^  ho  has  flreil,  bring  the  piece  down  and 
turn  upon  hix  M't  side,  still  renting  on  his  left  elbow  ; 
bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite  his  breast, 
t'  >■  butt  tiud  resting  on  the  ground  ;  take  out  a  cartridpj 
with  the  right  hand ;  seize  thesmall  of  the  stock  with  this 
hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  iho  thumb  and  two  first 
fliigers;  he  will  then  throw  himselt  on  bis  back,  still 
holding  the  piece  with  both  hands ;  carry  the  piece  to  the 
rear.  Hace  the  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the 
niuizlo  eleva'ed.  In  this  position,  charge  cartrid.e,  draw 
rammer,  ram  cartridge,  and  r<!turn  rammer. 

3U2.  ^Vben  finished  loading,  the  uiau  will  turn  asrain 
upon  liis  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  theu 
raise  the  piecu  vertically,  rise,  turn  about,  and  resume 
his  position  in  the  ranks. 

3''3.  Tbo  second  luan  will  be  taught  what  lias  just  baen 
prescribed  for  the  first,  and  bo  on  throughout  tue  squad. 

Lessor  ,VI. 
Dttynncl  Exercise, 
304.  The  bayonet  exorcise  In  this  book  will  be  confined 
to  two  movements,  the  f/nard  against  infanlry,  and  the 
guard  against  cavilry.  The  mou  will  be, placed  in  one 
rank,  with  two  paces  Interval,  rnd  being  at  shoulUir 
arms,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Guard  agaiusl  Iiifanlry.    2.  Oi'af.p. 
Oiifl  Cimc'and  two  motions. 
.305.  (First  motion  )  Make  a  half  face  to  tho  right,lt'rn- 
ing  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other ;  at  the 


same  time  raise  the  ptere  slightly,  lanrt  seize  it  with  th« 
loft  hand  al>oTfl  and  near  the  lower  band. 

SOS.  {Second  tnotion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty 
inches  perpendicularly  lo  the  far,  the  T'tiht  heel  on  the 
prrlongHtion  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly  bjnt.  Iho 
weight  of  tho  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs;  lower 
the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  b:irrel  upiH<rmo.st,  the  left 
elbow  against  tho  b}dy  ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  at  thesmall  of  t'.e  stock,  the  arms 
falling  niturally,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  slightly  de- 
rated. 

S/ieufJtrr— Arms. 
One  lime  and  one  moliun. 

307.  Throw  uji  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place 
it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  tho  left  and  fat.o  to  the  front. 

1.  Guard  against  Cavalry,     2.  GuaBP. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

SOS.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  {juard  against  infun- 
try,  except  that  the  right  hand  will  bo  supported  against 
the  hip,  and  tho  bayonet  held  at  tho  height  of  tho  eye,  as 
in  chargf  bayunet. 

hliouldcr—XKKS. 

One  linuy  and  one  motion. 

309,  Spiing  up  the  piece  with  the  loft  hand  and  place 
it  against  the  right  shouHer,  at  the  same  time  I  ring  the 
right  heel  by  t:  e  siJo  of  tho  left,  unJ  face  to  tho  front. 


PART  THIRD. 

310.  VFhen  Iho  recruits  are  well  established  in  tho 
priii':ij>hs  <imi  niec/iniii'^in  of  titc  »^J>,  the pMition  vj'  the 
body,  and  the  manual  of  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite 
eikbtBien,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  iu  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  nligiunent,  the  princi- 
ples o  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  tlo>  fiout, 
the  principles  of  the  march  by  tho  fi  ink,  wheeling  from 
a  halt,  wheeling  ia  marching  und  tho  change  of  direc- 
tion to  the  side  of  tho  guide.  lie  will  place  tho  squad 
in  ouo  riinkolbow  to  olbow,  ami  numlier  the  men  from 
right  tv  left. 

Lesson  I. 

Aliijiiinenti. 

."ill.  Tho  iuatnictor  will  nt  first  teach  tho  recr  it.s  to 
align  tlicmselvfis  man  by  nmn,  in  ordir  the  bettor  to 
malce  them  comprehend  th  <  vrinciples  of  altgumcut ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  coniniand  the  two  men  on  tho  right 
flank  to  march  two  pacex  to  the  front,  and  having  aligned 
th"m,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  tho  i-qnid  to 
move  up,  as  they  may  bo  Hucce8t>i>ely  called,  each  Iiy  his 
number,  und  align  themselves  successively  on  the  Hue  of 
thd  first  two  men. 

312.  Kach  recruit,  as  (leslgiiatod  by  liif  number,  will 
turn  tlio  head  and  eyoi  to  tho  right  as  pr.?«cribed  in  tho 
first  lesson  of  tho  fir.st  |iart,and  will  march  iaqnick  time 
two  paces  forward,  hhorteniiig  the  last  so  as  to  find  him- 
self about  six  iucboH  behind  tho  now  alignment,  which  he 
ought  never  to  lass:  he  will  text  move  up  steadily  by 
steps  of  two  or  three  iiulies;  tho  hams  extended,' to  tho 
Hide  of  tlio  man  next  to  him  on  Iho  alignment,  go  that, 
without  deranging  the  head,  the  line  of  tlio  eyes  or  that 
of  tho  shoulders,  ho  may  fiud  himself  in  the  exact  line  of 
his  neighbor,  whoso  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without 
op  niiig  his  owu. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  tho  rank  well  aligood,  will 
command ; 

Fboni. 

31t.  At  t>iis,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the, 
same  principles. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQLDIEK— PART  III. 


15 


316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to  align 
themselv  b  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without  groping 
or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire  ranlc  to 
align  itself  at  once  by  the  command  : 

m^M  (or  ?r/0— Dress. 

^^17.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  pl.aced  in 
advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  np  in  quick 
time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line,  according  to 
tlie  piirciples  prcsrribed  No.  312. 

31H.  The  instructor  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  oliserrethat  the  prin- 
ciples are  followed,  and  then  pans  to  the  flank  that  has 
fcrved  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  number  of  the 
rank  aligned,  will  command : 

Feont. 

320.  Tho  instructor  may  afterwards  order  Ihis  or  lltaf 
file  forwird  or  hack  designating  each  by  its  number.  The 
file  or  flleb  designated,  only,  will  slightly  turn  th»  head  to- 
wards the  ba-'id,  to  judge  how  nuich  thoy  ought  to  move 
up  or  back,  steadily  place  themselves  on  tlio  line,  and  than 
turn  eyes  to  tho  front,  \«ithout  a  particular  command  to 
that  eCToct. 

321.  Alignmeits  to  the  rear  wiil  bo  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  the  rccruitj  stepping  back  a  little  be- 
j»nd  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  Ko.  312,  tho  instructor  command- 

Sight  (or  leji)  backward— DtLEss. 

322.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor,  will  examine 
tho  position  of  the  men,  and  cause  tho  rank  to  come  to  or- 
dered arma,  to  prevent  too  ranch  fatigue,  and  also  tho 
dinger  of  uegligenca  at  shouldered  arms. 

Less'.n  II. 

323.  Ihe  men  having  learned,  in  the  flrct  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and  to 
take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness,  will  be  exorcised 
in  the  third  part  oniy  in  <;j(/c7i:  time,  doubh  quick  lime,  and 
thortiH;  tho  iLStructor  will  cause  them  to  execute  suc- 
cessively, at  these  different  gaits,  the  march  to  the  front, 
tho  facing  about  in  marching,  tho  march  by  the  flank, 
the  wheels  at  the  halt  and  iu  marching,  and  the  changes 
of  dlr  ction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

.'JSt.  The  instructor  will  iutorm  tho  recruits  that  at 
the  command  march,  they  will  always  move  off  in  quick 
lime,  Tinless  this  command  should  bo  preceded  by  that  of 
double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  f  rout. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  alignet*,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wifh  to  cause  it  to  march  by  tho  front,  ho 
will  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right  or  the  lelt 
according  to  the  side  on  which  ho  may  wi-  h  th  guide  to 
be,  and  command : 

1.  Squad,  foricard.    2.  Guide  right  (or  left).    3.  Maech. 

326.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to 
march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders  always 
in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  cbiorvo,  in  msrching  to  the 
front,  that  the  mru  touch  lightly  tlio  elbow  towards  the 
side  of  tho  guide  ;  that  they  do  not  open  cut  the  left  el- 
bow, nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yield  to  pressure  com- 
ing from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resi.xt  that  coming 
from  the  opposite  side;  t'.iat  they  recover  by  insensible 
degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost ;  that  they 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which 
side  the  guide  may  be  ;  and  if  found  before  or  behind  the 
alignment,  that  the  man  in  fault  corrects  himself  by 
shortening  or  lengthening  tho  step,  by  degrees,  almost 
Insensible. 

328.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cft"sethe  recruits  to 
compreheod  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  prcseiTed,  in 


marching,  by  tho  rognlnrity  of  the  step,  tho  touch  of  the 
elbow,  and  the  maiatenance  of  the  shoulders  in  a  square 
with  the  line  of  direction  ;  that  if,  lor  example,  tho  stop 
of  some  be  longer  than  that  of  others,  or  if  some  march 
faster  than  others,  a  separation  of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of 
the  alignment,  would  be  iuevitable  ;  that  if  (it  bt-ing  re- 
quired that  the  head  should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they 
do  li ot  strictly  ob.serve  the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  bo 
impossible  for  an  individual  to  jndge  whether  he  marches 
Abreast  with  his  bis  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  thero 
be  not  i>n  interval  between  them.  W 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  tendency 
to  mak->  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  movements,  the 
instructor  will  bo  careful  to  regulate  the  cadence  of  this 
step,  and  to  liabituate  them  to  preserve  .always  tho  oroct- 
ness  of  the  body,  and  tho  due  length  of  the  pace. 

3o0.  Tho  men  being  well  ostablisbed  in  the  principles  of 
the  direct  march,  tho  instructor  will  exercise  them  in 
msrching  obliquely.  The  rank  being  in  march,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.  liigJd  (or  left)  ohliquehj.    2.  Masch. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a 
half  face  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  will  then  march  straight 
forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the  men  no  longer 
t.uch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the 
nearest  files,  towards  tho  side  to  which  they  are  obliqu- 
ing, and  will  regulate  their  steps  so  that  the  shoulders 
Bliall  always  Vo  behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor  ou 
that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  tho  heads  of  tho 
other  men  in  tho  rank.  Besides  this,  tho  mea  should 
preserve  the  samt)  length  of  pace,  and  the  samedegrea  of 
obliquity. 

332.  The  instiuctor 'wishing' to  jesumo^  the  primitive 
direction,  will  command; 

1.  Forward.    2.  Mabch, 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a 
half  face  to  the  left  (or  right)  and  all  will  then  march 
straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  tho 
direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  indoidjle  quiclc  time. 

334.  Whan  the  seTeral  principles,  heretofore  explained, 
have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and  th?y  shall  bo 
well  established  in  the  position  of  tho  body,  the  bearing 
of  arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of  the 
step,  the  instrnctor  will  pass  from  qvick  to  double  quick 
time,  and  the  reverse,  observing  not  to  make  them  march 
obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till  thoy  are  well  estab  • 
lished  in  tho  cadence  of  this  step. 

3;-!5.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the 
instru'.tor  will  command : 

1.  Double' qiiick.     2.  Mabch. 

330.  At  the  command  marm,  which  will^be  given  when 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  step 
off  in  double  quick  time.  Tho  men  wil  endeavor  to  fol- 
low  the  principles  laid  down  in  tlio  first  part  of  this  book, 
and  to  preserve  tho  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instrnctor  wishes  ths  squad  to  resume 
th:  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March, 

f  38.  At  the  coramard  march,  which  will  be  given  when 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  tho  squad  will  retake 
the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  loarch,  the  instructor  will 
halt  it  by  the  commands  and  nuans  j  reacribed  Nos.  93 
and  99.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  an  instant  be- 
fjre  the  foot-^s  ready  to  bo  placed  on  the  ground. 

34ii.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick  tioio, 
the  instructor  will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark  time  by 
the  commands  proscribed  No.  2-10.  The  men  will  then 
mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering  the  cadence  of 
tho  step.  He  will  also  cause  them  to  pass  from  tho  direct 
to  the  oblique  step,  and  reciprocally,  conforming  to  what 
has  boon  prescribed  Ko.  330,  and  following. 


16 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER- -PART  III. 


S41.  Tho  gqaad  being  at  a  halt,lbein«troctor  vrlll  caiBo 
it  to  niHrrh  Id  donblp  (juick  lime,  by  preceding  tho  com- 
inaud  march,  by  daiije  quUk. 

34'i.  The*  inctrartor  vill«DdeftTor  to  regulate  well  the 
cadeocc  of  this  8t«p. 

To  face  alout  in  marching. 

313.  If  the  squad  be  tnarcUiDg  In  quick  time,  or  double 
quick  time,  and  iho  ioatructur  ahould  wish  to  march  it 
ia  retreat,  ho  will  ^bmrnanJ: 

1.  Squad  rijhIaUml.    2.  MxncQ. 

311.  At  the  comnr.:.  I  .nardi,  vbich  M'ill  be  gircn  at  tlio 
InstHtit  the  left  fuo:  .a  ccming  to  tho  ground,  iho  recruit 
Kill  briiig  this  foot  to  the  ground,  ajd,  turning  on  It, 
will  (kco  to  the  roar ;  ha  v  ill  theu  place  the  ri^ht  foot  in 
the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  lett  fool. 

To  march  lacJ:irnr(Js. 

315.  The  gqnad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  thould 
wish  to  march  it  in  tho  hock  alep,  ho  will  command: 

1.  Sqitad  baclward.    2.  Guide  Ufl  (or  rigid  )  3.  Maboh. 

346.  The  bark  step  will  bo  exccntcfl  by  tho  ucans  pre- 
acribed  No.  247.  ^ 

347.  The  instructor,  In  this  step,  will  bo  watchful  that 
the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  tb''  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should 
only  be  e\  fnled  at  Miou'dored  arm",  iho  instructor,  iu 
order  noi  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and  aUo  to  pro- 
vent  negligence  in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  Iho  squad 
frcm  time  to  time,  and  caus"  arms  to  bo  <  rcI>.Tcd. 

31U.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will 
always  carry  their  pieces  ou  the  .tight  ehoulder,  or  at  a 
trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

a60.  If  iho  iubtrucior  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a 
trail,  he  will  give  the  command  iraiV  oritis,  bi'fore  the 
command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  contrary,  this  com 
maud  be  uot  given,  the  men  will  uhift  iheir  pieces  to  the 
right  shoulder  at  tho  commaLd  doulle  quick.  In  either 
case,  at  the  commdnd  halt,  the  men  will  briog  their 
pieces  to  the  posiliuu  of  sVoiUder  arms.  This  rule  is  gen- 
eral. 

Leseon  III. 
Tlie  march  hy  Ihejlank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned, 
the  instructor  will  commund: 

1.  Stpiad,  right— ¥Ace.    2.  Forward.    3.  MAitcn. 

352.  At  tho  last  part  ef  the  first  command,  the  rnnk  | 
wi  1  lare  to  tli«  right;  the  oven  numbered  men,  ai':er 
facing  to  th"  right,  Will  step  quickly  to  the  right  aide  of 
the  oud  numbeied  men,  the  la<ter  staudiug  Int^t,  so  that 
when  ti.e  roovemout  is  executed,  tho  men  will  be  formed 
Into  fi. eg  of  two  men  ubieatit. 

85a.  At  the  third  comni'.nd,  tho  squad  will  step  cff 
■martiy  with  tho  left  foot ;  the  fllo  keeping  aligned,  and 
preserving  llieir  iutervals. 

354  Tho  march  by  tlie  loft  (l.mk  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  comuiiinds,  substituting  the  word  It/t,  lor  right, 
and  by  inverse  means ;  in  this  ruao,  the  even  lumibured 
mei:,  alter  facing  to  iho  left,  will  stand  fiiet,  and  tho  odd 
Bumberpd  will  place  IhemselvtH  ou  iheir  lolt. 

355.  Tlie  instructor  will  i  laco  a  well  inBiriicted  soldier 
by  tho  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  Ihu  head  of  the  rnnk, 
to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him  ;  and  it  will  be 
crj')iued  on  t'. is  recruit  to  march  always  elbow  to  elbow 
wi'h  ihe  soldier. 

35G  'Jlie  instructor  will  cou''e  to  be  tbscr^d  in  the 
march,  by  the  ildnk,  tho  fuUowiug  rules  : 

TItat  the  step  he  ezectUed    according  to  the  principhn  pre- 
scribed for  the  direct  $te^ ; 

Because  these  principles,  witho.Jt  which  men  placej 
elbow  to    elbow,  in  the  tame    rank,    cannot   preserve 


tinity  and  harmony  of  movement,  are  ct   a  more   ne- 
cessary obtervanco  in  marching  in  fllr. 

That  the  head  of  the   man  uho  immtdiatelii  precedm,ooter* 
the  heads  of  all  who  are  m  front; 

Uecrtupe  it  is  Ihe  rno^X.  certain  rule  by  which  eich  man 
msy  maintain  himrelf  iu  Ihe  exact  hue  of  the  flle. 

'6'S1.  'Ihe  instructor  will  place  himsell  habitnall'*  five 
or  six  paces  un  the  Hank  of  Ihe  rank  marching  la  flic,  to 
watch  over  the  exccuiioD  d  the  print  tples  prrscrllieJ 
ab  )ve.  Ue  will  also  |>lnre  himsilf  Fometinies  in  its  rear, 
halt,  and  aiiOer  it  t>i  paru  ftlteeu  nr  twei  t  r  pares,  tho  Wt. 
tor  to  see  whether  Iho  ri-Mi  cover  each  other  »ccnmt.'Iy. 

u5S,  When  he  shnll  w.^h  to  halt  the  rank,  niarchlng 
by  the  flank,  and  cau^d  it  to  ttx^  to  the  front,  bo  will 
commaud: 

1.  Fquad.    ■!.  Halt.    5.   rnoxT. 

350.  At  the  second  cemniand,  Ihe  rnnk  will  halt,  and  af- 
terwards no  man  will  stir,  nlihoiigh  he  mav  h'.iv,-  lost  hia 
dirlatcc.  This  prohibitiuu  is  neces-iary,  to  hntiituatethe 
men  toacoustuut  prescrratio  i  i.f  their  disUnoes. 

300.  At  tho  third  c  nimaud,  e;icli  man  will  front  by 
facing  to  the  left,  if  marchinu  by  the  right  flnnk,  au'.:  by 
a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  th«  left  flaiik.  Tho 
rear  rank  ni<»n  will  at  tho  kiiuiu  time  mi)V<?  tjuirlily  into 
their  places,  so  as  to  fjrm  Um  squad  a^aia  into  one  rank. 

301.  'When  the  m>jn  hav<9  become  ace uilomed  to  march- 
ing by  the  flank  theiuslructor  willcau»e  tin  ni  to  change 
direction  by  file ;  lor  this  purpose,  he  ^i  ill  commacd  : 

1.  By  file  Icjt  (or  right).    2.  MARca. 

?.C2.  At  tho  command  march,  the  first  file  wiil  change 
direction  to  the  leil  (or  iiglit)iiidogcribiiiK  a  small  are  of 
a  circle,  and  will  th-n  march  straight  forward  ;  Uie  two 
men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the  touch  of 
the  elbows,  and  tho  iji:iu..ulhe  side  to  which  the  wheel' 
is  mnde,  will  shorleii  the  first  thn  e  or  four  ••leps.  £ach 
filo  will  ci.>ttie  succesniiely  to  wheel  ou  the  same  spot 
where  tha>  which  preceded  it  wh^'eled. 

'Mi.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  fa^o 
bv  the  rijht  or  lefi  fiauk  in  marching,  and  fur  this  pur. 
potie  will  commaud : 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  l-ft)  flank.    2.  ilAECii. 

304.  At  tho  second  command,  which  will  be  given  ft 
little  before  olth  -r  foot  couios  to  the  ground,  the  recruits 
will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  tuut  is  raised  iu  the 
now  direction,  iiud  step  off  with  tho  other  foot  without 
alteriug  the  cadeuco  of  the  step ;  tho  men  will  double  or 
undouble  rapidly. 

o05.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  tho  left  flank,  the 
squal  should  face  t"  the  rear,  the  men  will  ci  ine  into  one 
rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles  indicatfd  ho.  ^00.  It 
is  to  bo  remimed  that  it  is  iho  men  who  are  in  rear  who 
always  move  up  to  form  into  Bii>t;lo  rnnk,  »nd  in  such 
nmbuer  as  never  to  invert  tho  order  of  tho  uumhera  iu 
tho  rank. 

300.  If,  when  tho  Fquad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
instructor  should  cauboit  to  laco  by  tho  lef.  flank,  it  is 
the  oven  numbers  who  will  doube  by  m  iving  to  the  left 
of  the  odd  numbers;  but  if  by  the  right  Ila'  k,  itlstheodd 
numbers  who  will  double  to  the  rij^ht  of  tho  even  num- 
ber-. 

;  07.  This  lesion,  like  Ihn  preceding  one,  will  be  prac- 
tised with  pieces  at  tho  shoi;Kl*r;  but  thj  instructor 
may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasionally  order  stijtport 
arniH,  and  he  will  nqnire  ofth"  recruits  marching  in  ibis 
poollion,  as  much  rtgulaiity  as  in  the  former. 

Tlte  inarch  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  lime. 

3r8.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in  double 
quick  time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  fi  i  c.  The  instructor 
will  give  tho  commands  pretcribcd  No  251,  taking  core 
always  to  give  the  commaud  double  quick  before  that  of 
march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greateat  attention  to  the  cadonco 
of  the  step. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 


17 


370.  The  instructor  ■will  cause  the  change  of  direction. 
and  the  march  by  the  flink,  to  be  exe-uted  in  double 
qnick  time,  by  the  8Hm»;  commacdSj  and  accorciag  to  the 
Bam  '  prioc'ples,  as  in  quick  time. 

37'.  The  iiiRtriicfi^r  will  cause  the  p-'ecea  to  bo  carried 
either  on  the  rig't  shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  insiiuctor  will  sometimes  march  the  iquad  by 
the  Qdok,  without  doublinc:  the  tiles. 

37:i  The  priocip  es  of  this  march  are  the  !<ame  as  in 
twii  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  qnick  time. 

374.  Th"  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed 
Ko  ^-lol.  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the  squad  not 
to  double  files, 

375  The  instructor  will  bewitrhru^  that  the  men  do 
Dot  bend  their  kuees  unequally,  Atiicli  would  cause  them 
to  trend  on  the  heel?  of  the  meu  in  Ir-ut,  and  also  to  lose 
the  cidei  ce  of  the  step  and   iheir  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  Ih  s  l<  ssnn  wi  1  1  e  exe- 
cuted in  singe  rank  In  the  cL^UKes  of  direction,  the 
leading  mau  will  change  directiou  wiihont  altering  the 
lergih  or  the  cadeuce  ot  the  step.  The  instructor  will 
recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that  in  facing  by  tUe 
right  or  left  Han't  in  mar^.hing,  they  wiil  not  deuble,  but 
march  in  one  rank. 

Less  N  IV. 

WH  EELIKOS. 

General  principles  of  Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds  :  from  halts,  or  on 
flxel  pivots,  an  1  iu  march,  or  on  moveable  pivots. 

378.  Wtieeliijg  o.i  a  fixed  pivot  tfkes  place  in  passtLg 
a  c  irpi  from  the  order  in  b»;tle  to  the  order  iu  column,  or 
from  th»  latier  to  tlje  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  miirching  take  place  in  changes  of  di- 
rectioJ  iu  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed 
to  the  side  oppos'te  to  the  guide. 

38)  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns 
In  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  in  the  wheels  in  marcliiog,  the  pivot  takes  steps 
of  niueoreleven  inches,  accord  ng  as  the  pquad  is  marchiug 
in  quick  <>r  double  qu  ck  time  so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling 
point,  which  \-t  noc  ssary  in  order  that  the  subdivisions  of 
a  column  may  Chans'*  direction  without  1  sing  their  dis- 
tances, as  will  be  explained  in  the  school  oi  the  company. 

38.:.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  lie  full 
step  of  twenty-e  ght  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches,  accord- 
ing to  the  g'iit. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place 
a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank,  to  conduct 
It,  and  then  command : 

1.  By  squod,  right  wheel.    2.  March. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off 
with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  bead  a 
little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of 
the  men  to  their  left;  the  pivot  man  will  merely  mark 
time  in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform 
himself  to  the  movement  <f  the  marching  flank  ;  the  man 
who  conducts  tbis  fl  ink  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight 
inches,  and  from  the  flr^t  step  advance  a  little  the  left 
shoulder,  cts".  his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank, 
and  feel  constancy  tha  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly, 
but  nevsr  push  him. 

335.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  m*n  t  wards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming  fr  m 
the  op^iosite  i>ide,  and  each  will  conform  himxelf  to  the 
marching  fla'  k— shorten  his  step  accurding  to  his  a;>- 
proximuion  to  tlie  pivot. 

386.  Ihe  instructor  will  make  th«  rank  whof-l  round 
the  circle  <  noe  or  twice  b-foe  hailing,  in  order  to  cau^e 
the  priucipleg  to  be  the  better  understood,  and  he  will  be 
Watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

387.  Ue  will  cause  ihe  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles 

383.  When  the  in  trnctor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
Wheel,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

3S9.  At  the  Hf cond  commaTid,  the  rank  will  halt,  and 
no  man  stir,  'ihe  instructor,  going  to  the  fl<ink  o'lr.oste 
the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  oi  tl.at  fl«nk  in 
the  direction  ho  niny  wi-h  to  give  to  tie  rank,  »iihiut 
however  displacing  tbo  pivot,  who  will  confirm  IL.- line 
of  his  shoulders  to  this  direciion.  The  in-tiuctor  will 
take  care  to  have  betwwn  th  se  tw>  »ien,  and  tl-.e  pivot, 
only  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  Ho 
will  then  command : 

Left  (or  right)— Dczfa. 

390.  A  t  this,  the  rank  wiil  pluf-e  itsc  If  on  the  al-'gntri'lit 
of  ttio  two  men  establis-heJ  astheba&is,  inconftrmity  with 
the  principles  pnscribed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  crmtMand  From,  which 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  No  314. 

Bemarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a  halt. 

392.   Turn  a  little  the  hend  toicirds  th'  marching  finnk,  ond 
fix  the  (j/es  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who  are  o .  t'.al 
tide; 
Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each  maa 

to  regulate  the  length  of  his  S'ep  so  as  to  c-^-uform  his  own 

movement  to  that  of  the  marching  fliuk. 

Touch  lighthj  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  towards  the  pivot; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 

Built  pressure  that  comer  from   the  sids  cf  the  marchirg 
flank; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the  pivot,  wMch 
ought  to  be  a  fiied  pont,  in  wheels  from  a  hilt,  mi^lit 
be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 

Wlieeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  movea'  le  pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  ex^^cnfe 
well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taught  to  wheel 
in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the 
instru~tur  shall  vti&h  to  cau«e  it  to  change  direction  to 
the  reverse  fliub,  (to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide  or 
pivot  flauk  )  he  will  command : 

.1.  Bight  {yt  left)  wheel.    2.  lilAKcn. 

395  The  first  command  will  h^  given  when  the  rank  Is 
yet  four  paces  from  the  marching  point. 

396.  At  the  second  commana.  th.-  wheel  will  be  executed 
n  the  same  manner  as  from  a  h  ilt,  except  thic  the  tech 

of  the  elbow  will  remain  towrds  the  marching  fla'  k  (or 
side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual  p  vot  ; 
that  the  p. vot  mtn,  instead  cf  m-rtly  turning  in  his 
place,  will  conform  himself  to  the  niovtm-nt  of  the 
mirching  flank,  feel  light'.y  the  elbow  ot  the  ne.xt  man, 
take  iteps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  grour  d  for- 
ward in  deecrib  i  g  a  small  curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point 
of  the  wheel.  The  middle  <.l  the  runk  wili  bend  slitht  y 
to  the  rear.  As  Foon  as  the  movement  shall  commence, 
the  man  who  conducts  the  march  ng  flank  will  cast  Lis 
eyes  on  the  grjund  over  whi^U  ho  will  have  io  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

398  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when  four 
paces  ure  yet  required  to  comoletc  thechai  geocireciiaii. 

:99.  At  the  coram  and  marc7(,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  of  completing  the  wl  eel,  the  man  wt;o  cos- 
ducts  th?  marching  flmk  wi  Idirec-  himself  8trRi..:t.t  lor- 
wanl  :  the  piv»t  mau  and  all  the  rank  will  rniake  the 
step  of  twenty-eigkt  inches,  and  bring  the  i  ead  direct  to 
the  front. 
Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to    ihe  side  tf  the  guide. 

4C0.  The  change  of  directicu  to  the  side  rf  the  guide,  in 
marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows:  Xho  iuBtructor 
will  command: 


18 


SCHOOL  OF  TEE  COMPANY. 


1.  Lffl 


(or  ri^hi) 


tum.     2.  MABcn. 


401.  The  flret  cotnnian<l  will  be  piven  when  the  rank  is 
jet  four  paces  from  the  turuing  i  uint. 

40-.  At  iho  comiotuil  march,  to  be  p-onoonreJ  at  the 
instaa:  tLt-  riuk  ought  to  turu,  the  guide  will  face  to  the 
left  (or  right;  ic  marcbiDK,  and  move  foi  ward  ia  tho  new 
direction  without  sUckeuing  or  quickeniLg  tbe  cadence, 
and  without  Bhortening  or  IcDgiht'oiug  ilic  step.  Tho 
whoio  raLk  will  promptly  eonform  itbeftotlie  new  di- 
rection :  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  advance  tbe 
■  honlJer  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the  double  fiuirk  step, 
to  carry  himeelf  in  the  new  direction,  turn  the  bind  and 
eyes  to  the  side  of  the  fruide,  and  retake  tbe  touch  of  the 
elbow  on  that  aide,  in  placing;  himself  on  tho  alignment 
of  the  guide,  from  whoiu  he  will  take  the  step,  and  then 
resume  tbe  direct  pot-ition  of  the  head.  Kach  man  will 
thus  arrive  saccossively  on  the  alignment. 

Wlieeling  and  charging  dirtvtion  to  Ote    tide   of  ih'  gudie, 
in  douhlc  qtticli  tintc. 

403.  When  tho  recruits  comprehend  and  execute  weV., 
•  n  quick  tim°,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and 
the  change  of  diructiou  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  the  in- 
structor will  oiise  the  same  movemcntB  to  bo  repeated  in 
do'ilile  quick  time. 

404.  'lhe»e  variouo  movements  will  h?  executed  tiy  the 
same  commands  :ind  according  to  tbe  eamo  principles  as 
in  quick  time,  except  that,  the  command  dotthlc  quick  w  II 
pr^ced•-  that  of  »narc/i.  In  wheeling  while  marching,  the 
piTot  man  will  tike  stoi  g  of  eleven  iuchte,  and  in  tho 
changes  of  direction  to  tho  eide  of  the  guide,  the  men  on 
tbe  side  opposite  the  guide  mnst  increase  tho  gaitiu  order 
to  bring  thomsrlTes  into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  orlor  not  tolatigue  the  recruit', 
and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  vill  cause  them  to 
execute  the  several  movements  of  which  this  lesson  is 
compoB'd,  firdt  witbo  t  arms,  and  next,  after  the  me- 
chanism he  well  compreheudod,  with  arms. 

Lesson  V. 
Long  marche)  in  doulle  quicJ;  lime  and  the  rtin. 

400.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the  exer- 
ciser in  double  quick  time  and  the  ruo,  with  arras  and 
knansacks. 

417.  lie  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  execntfd  In 
doable  quick  time,  both  by  ihe  Tontand  by  the  Hark, 
and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pass  over  a 
distance  of  live  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The  pieces  will 
be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  sumetimca  at  a  trail. 

408.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at  a 
ran,  the  pieces  carried  at  will ;  the  men  will  be  instruclC'i 
to  Keep  as  united  as  possible,  without,  however,  exacting 
mnch  regularity,  which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to 
when  it  miiy  bo  h'ghly  important  to  reach  a  given  point 
with  great  {jromptilude. 

To  slacJc  armt. 

The  nwn  being  at  order  arms,  tho  Instructor  will  com- 
mand: 

Stack— Anne. 

410.  At  this  command,  tho  front  rank  man  of  every 
even  numbered  file  will  pass  bin  piece  before  him,  seij.ing 
It  with  the  left  hand  near  the  upjier  band;  will  place  tho 
hutt  a  little  iu  advance  of  his  left  toe,  the  barrel  turned 
towards  the  body,  aud  draw  the  rammer  slightly  from  its 
place;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  oild  numbered  file 
will  also  draw  the  ramnior  slightly,  and  pass  bis  piece  to 
the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  tho  right 
hand  near  tho  upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in 
advance  of  the  right  too  of  tbe  man  next  on  bis  right,  the 
barrel  turned  to  tho  front ;  ho  will  then  crobs  tho  mmiu'-rs 
of  the  two  piecas,  tho  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd 
numbered  man  being  Inside  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  every 
even  file  will  also  draw  his  rammer,  lean  his  plf  C9  for- 
ward, the  lock-plate  downwards,  advance  tho  right  foot 


about  six  Inches,  and  insert  the  rawmer  letwoen  the 
rammer  and  barrel  of  the  piice  vf  his  front  rain  man  ; 
with  bis  led  hand  he  will  plsce  the  butt  of  his  |  iece  on 
the  preund,  thirty-two  incLi  s  in  renr  of,  and  iwrjx'ni  ICB- 
lar  to,  ttaefront  riwLk,  biii  giug  bat.k  hisrijchi  foot  by  the 
siile  of  the  left ;  the  from  rank  mau  of  every  even  fi'« 
will  at  the  same  time  leHn  the  stack  to  the  rear,  quit  it 
with  his  right  hand,  aud  force  all  tho  rummers  dtwo. 
Tho  stack  being  thus  liTmi  d,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every 
odd  lile  will  pass  his  piece  into  bis  1>  ft  h.'\nd,  the  barn-l 
to  the  front  and  inclining  it  forward,  will  rest  it  od  tUo 
stack. 

411.  Tho  men  of  both  rnnl?"  hnvlrg  taken  tbe  position 
of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  « ill  ccmnund; 

1.  ZJrcaJk  ran/.*.    2.  3lAECn. 

7b  resume  armi. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  re-f.rir.'d  in  rear  of  their  staeki, 
tbe  luatructor  will  coaimaud  : 

I  rnJ.c— Arms. 

I  413.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd 
I  numbered  file  will  withdraw  his  j>iece  from  the  ttnclc ; 
j  tho  front  rank  man  ot  every  even  file  will  seizj  his  own 
'  piece  witli  the  left  hand  end  that  of  tlie  man  onlii:,  tifiht 
with  his  right  hand,  bnth  above  Iho  lower  band,  the  r<i>r 
rank  man  ol  the  even  file  will  seir.o  hii:  piece  with  tho 
1  riirht  hand  below  fho  lower  band;  those  two  men  will 
i  raise  up  the  stack  to  lco!ien  tho  rammers  ;  the  front  rai:k 
I  nmn  of  every  odd  file  will  liicilitale  Ihe  disetigng'  m.nt  of 
j  tue  rammers,  if  nocesfary.  by  drawing  them  out  slightly 
I  with  the  lefi  baud,  and  will  rrc  ivo  his  piece  from  the 
■  bai^d  of  the  man  ne.xt  on  bis  left ;  tho  four  men  will  re- 
'  talce  the  position  of  the  eclJIer  at  ordr  arms. 


iND  cr  Tus  fcncoi.  of  the  soipies. 


TITLE  THIRD. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY. 

General  Iiulcs  and  division  of  the  School  cf  Ihe  Compani/ 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that 
by  battali "U,  aLcl  the  o)  ject  being  to  prepare  the  suidlera 
for  the  higher  school,  tho  exorcises  of  detail  by  company 
will  be  strictly  aobcred  to,  as  well  in  respect  to  priuciples 
aa  the  order  of  progro^ision  herein  preecribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing 
elementary  Jiistructiin,  a  captain,  a  coverli  g  eeigiant, 
and  a  certain  number  ot  file  clos'er.^,  the  whole  jiosied  iu 
the  manner  indicated.  Title  First,  aud,  occordinp  to  tho 
same  Title,  tho  officer  charged  with  the  exerciss  cf  such 
company  will  herein  bo  denumiDated  the  inahiictor. 

3.  Tho  School  of  the  Company  will  bo  dnided  into  six 
le.vsons,  aud  each  lesson  will  cumiirehend  five  articles,  us 
follows  : 

Lessok  X. 

1.  To  open  ranks 

2.  Alignments  iu  open  ranks. 
.').  Manual  of  arnss. 

•t.  To  close  ranks. 

6.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  oruis  in  cloetJ  tanks. 

Leseon  it. 

1.  To  load  In  fcnr  times  and  at  will. 
'.I.  To  fire  by  company. 
.3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

6.  To  Ore  by  the  renr  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  I. 


10 


Lesbon  IH. 

1.  To  niarcU  In  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  m*rcbing  in  line  of  battle, 
an    to  align  it. 

8.  Oblique  march  In  lino  of  battle. 

4.  To  luark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  end 
the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  lino  of  battle. 

Lesson  1Y. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  filo. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marchirg  by  the  flank,  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form 
it  on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  I  attle. 

6.  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by 
company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cauae  it  to  face  to  the 
right  and  left  in  marching. 

Lesson  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt,  or 
wliilo  marching. 

2.  To  mnrch  in  column.  ' 

0.  To  change  direction. 
4.  To  halt  the  column. 

6.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or 
left  into  line  of  baitle,  cither  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Lesson  TI. 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  com- 
pany. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re- 
enter into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  t»  routi,  and  t'S  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

6.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right 
or  left  int  J  line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks. 
The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  numbered, 
and  for  this  purpose  will  command  ; 

In  each  ranh— Count  Twos. 

6.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from 
right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice, 
in  ihj  same  tone,  without  hurry  and  without  turning  the 
head,  cue,  liro.  Recording  to  the  place  which  each  one  oc- 
cupies. He  will  also  cause  the  company  to  be  divided 
into  platoons  and  sections,  taking  care  that  the  first 
platoon  is  always  compi  sed  of  an  even  number  of  files. 

G.  The  instructor  will  bo  as  ciear  and  concise  as  possi- 
ble in  hrs  expl  mations ;  he  will  cause  faults  of  detail  to 
be  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will  indicate 
thoiii,  if  the  captain  should  not  have  himself  observed 
them;  and  the  instiuctor  will  not  otherwise  interfere, 
unle-s  the  captain  should  uot  well  comprehend,  or  should 
badly  execute  his  intentions. 

7.  Comp  .sure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  liim  who  com- 
mands, and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first  moans  of 
order  in  a  btdy  of  troops,  the  instructor  will  labor  to 
habituate  the  company  to  this  essential  quality,  and  will 
himself  give  the  example. 

LESSON  FIEST. 

Aeticle  First. 

To  open  raiils, 

8.  Tho  company  boinj  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and 
filo  cl  jsers  well  aligned,  when  tho  instructor  fhallwinh 
to  cause  th' ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will  direct  the  left 
guide  t.>  pl^e  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  which 
being  cxocutei,  hu  will  command : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Company.    3.  Shoulder— kn^s. 
4,  To  tha  rear  open  order. 


0.  At  tho  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant,  and 
the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  pace* 
from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  aligrment  of 
th  •  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this  distance  by  the  ey«, 
without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  tlm« 
on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these  t*o  non- 
commissioned officers  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front 
rank,  and  if  nepessary,  to  correct  their  positions,  whi  h 
being  executed,  he  will  command : 

^  5.  Maech. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  tho  rear,  without  count- 
ing the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment 
mark(d  for  this  rank,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldii-r,  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on 
the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  sams 
time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  two 
paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rack  aligned,  will 
command : 

6.  Front. 

10.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  (he  left  of  th« 
rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will  di- 
rect the  captain  and  the  covering  sergsant  toobsfrve  tho 

I  men  in  their  respective  ranks, and  tocoirect,  if  nceessaiy, 
I  tho  positions  of  persons  and  pieces. 

I  Aeticle  Second. 

Alignments  in  open  ranis. 

18.  Tha  ranks  being  open,  the  inetructor  will,  in  tho 
first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better 
to  inculcitte  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  fuur  men  on  th» 
right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  mnrch  two  or  three  pac#« 
forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them,  ccmmand  : 

By  fih  right  (or  left)— VRtss. 

20.  At  this,  tho  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  succes- 
sively on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  preceded  by  his 
no  ghbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards  the  basis,  by  two 
paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned  himself,  will  cast  his 
eyea  to  the  front. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  tliofol- 
diers  to  dress  cc^rectiy,  the  inttructor  will  cause  the 
ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward iind  backward, 
Eomt  times  in  a  direction  parallel,  and  scmetimesin  cn« 
oblique,  to  the  original  direction,  giving,  in  each  cose, 
two  or  lour  men  t  •  servo  as  the  basis  of  Hligament  to  each 
rank.    To  efl'ect  which,  he  ■fiM  cc mmand  : 

1.':  Jiight^ipr  left)— D&Kss.    2.  Front. 


1.  Eif/ht  (or  left)  backward.— DViisS.    2.  Feont. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  rarks,  the  men  of 
the  lear  rank  will  not  seek  i>  cever  their  file  leaders,  as 
the  Biile  object  of  tho  exercise  is  to  teach  them  to  al  gn 
themselves  correc.ly  in  their  respective  ranks,  in  iho 
different  directions. 

■^3  In  the  several  alignments,  thecaftTln  will  superin- 
tend the  front  rank,  and  ihe  coverin.'  Pcrgeant  thy  reai 
rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will  place  themselves  on  ths 
sidi  by  which  (ho  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblifiue  slignmonts,  the  men  will  conform  (h« 
line  cl  their  shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their  rai  k, 
and  will  place  (heniBelves  on  tho  aligrment  fs  has  1  eea 
prescribed  in  the  ichool  of  the  soldier,  No.  317  or  No. 
321,  accordincT  as  the  new  direction  shall  bo  in  front  or 
rear  of  tho  oriainal  one. 

26.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  tho  captain  and  the 
covering  sergeant  wi  1  pass  along  the  front  of  the  ranks 
to  correct  tho  poaitiona  of  persona  and  arms. 


20 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  II. 


Aktioli  Tbikd. 

Manual  of  arm*. 

S9.  Tlie  mnks  l>eine  open,  the  tnatract^r  will  place 
bi.'Q-ell  ill  u  pr)-Uion  to  see  tbc  rankf.iind  will  command 
the  muantl  of  arms  in  the  followiog  order  : 


Prntni  a.rmt. 
Orier  armt. 
Groiinrl  >iri)U. 
Ji  i*e  arms. 
Stippirl  armi. 
fix  bayonet. 
Chirgt  h  |Ouef. 
Trail  armt. 
Viifii  hay  HcU. 
8:Cure  amu. 


BheuUUr  armt. 


t'houltUr  am*, 
ahmd'ier  artnt. 
ShonVitr  armt. 
Shoulder  armt. 
Hhou'.drr  armt. 
Shouhlcr  armt. 
Shoulder  armt. 


Load  in  nine  titnu. 
27.  The  invtruntor  will  take  care  that  the  poeitlon  of 
the  boiy,  of  Uio  f-et,  and  vi  the  piece,  be  alnaii  exact, 
and  that  tbc  liuies  in.-  briskly  exocu'cd  and  clcsa  to  the 
por«on. 

Abticlb    Fourth. 
To  dote  ranl.i. 

2S.  Tnu  maDuu!  of  arma  being  eude4,  the  Instructor 
wil!  coraiuand  : 

1.  Cl'jxe'order,    2.  March. 

20.  At  Ifee  CDmmi'^d  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close  np 
in  quick  time,  each  mau  uirrctlDg  himself  on  his  tilo 
leader. 

Abticle  Fifth. 

Alignmenli  and  manual  of  armt  in  cloicd  rankt. 

30.  The  ranks  beioi;  closed,  the  instructor  will  caust 
to  b^  px'-cTod  paralel  aufl  obliqne  iitignmnnts  by  the 
right  and  left,  forward  and  backward,  otiservinjc  to  plaeo 
always  two  i<r  four  filb»  lo  serve  ss  a  basis  of  olignu "nt. 
He  will  giv«  the  commands  prescribed,  No.  21. 

SI.  la  alignm  nts  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  ^Till 
gaperinteiid  th  •  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
the  retr  nuik.  Thtj  will  habituate  themselves  to  judge 
the  nlig'im.-rit  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and  sheulderB,  in 
caitinga  glance  uf  the  eye  along  the  front  and  rear  of  the 
ranks. 

«2.  The  moment  tJio  captain  perceives  the  greater  nnm> 
ber  i  tiio  Iroat  rank  aligned,  bo  will  command  Fro.nt, 
and  ra  itify,  af;erwird<,  if  uecussary,  the  alignment  of 
I  be  other  m^n  hv  the  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldi  T.  N«.  3:;0.  The  rear  rauk  will  conform  to  the 
alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superintended  by  thecover- 
ioir  feref«nt. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  Instructor  will  place 
himsi'lf  on  the  fl»nk  to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will 
als'i  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covera  accurately  his  Hie 
le»di-r. 

CI.  In  ohHqTio  nll;2rrimenf8,  the  instructor  will  observe 
what  in  preBcribed.  Ko.  24. 

8.1.  I'l  all  ."tlignm'iifs,  the  file  olri«'"-s  will  preserve  the 
di»ttnco  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  i/mk. 

36.  T  e  iilignmeuts  being  endei  >he  instructor  will 
ca"S9  t )  be  executed  the  manual  of  ?.rr  n. 

S7.  Th»  Inntructor,  wishing  to  i  ^i  ii<emen,  without 
derangint;  the  alignment,  will  first  c  v.ru  aims  to  be  sup- 
ported, or  ordered,  and  then  command : 

In  plice—'BitBT.  " 

35.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be  con- 
strain d  to  presoive  silence  or  steadiness  of  position  ;  but 
tbsy  will  always  keep  cno  or  other  hcsel  on  the  align- 
ment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  Instrnct-r  should  wish  to 
rest  the  men  without  constraining  them  to  preserve  the 
alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Best. 

40.  At  V  hich  command,  the  men  will  not  bo  required  to 
preserve  immj>iility,  or  to  remain  in  thuir  places. 


41.  Th»  instnirtor  m»y.  also,  when  h«  fhall  Judge 
proper,  canse  arms  to  be  sucktK),  which  will  be  execated 
at  prescribed,  sibod  of  the  seldier. 

LE:;SO.N  SECOND. 

42.  The  tnitrnctor,  wishing  to  paM  to  the  second  les- 
son, will  canse  the  company  to  take  armS|  if  stacks  have 
been  formed,  and  command  : 

1.  AUeniion.    2.  Ompani/.    3.  5^<3«M»r-AB.Ms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  flriogs 
to  be  executed  in  the  foUowiug  order: 

Articli  Tirst. 
To  load  in  four  timet  and  at  tciU. 

44.  Loading  in  four  timet  will  be  commanded  and  exe- 
cuted as  prvscribeii  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  25li 
and  following.  The  instructor  will  cau«e  this  exercise  to 
be  often  repeated,  in  succession,  before  pissing  to  loading 
at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  executed 
as  prescribed  in  the  schocd  of  tVe  soldier.  No.  256.  lo 
priming  when  loading  in  fotir  limes,  and  aUo  at  will,  f'^t 
captain  at. J  covering  sorgeaLt  will  half  fwce  to  the  right 
with  the  !n  n,  and  fa  e  to  the  frout  when  the  man  next  to 
them,  respectively,  brings  his  piece  to  th"  shoulder. 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  tocaupeths 
men.  In  the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what  haa  been 
prescribed  in  the  Bch.>ol  of  t:ie  soldier,  Nos.  £67  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  C'  nre- 
qnently  t«e  one  with  which  it  is  raobt  important  t»  render 
the  men  familiar,  it  will  cUini  preference  In  the  exe'cises 
the  moment  the  men  be  well  entablishc  d  in  the  principles. 
To  these  they  will  be  hruupht  by  degrees,  so  that  every 
man  may  We  able  to  load  with  c.<rtrid(;es,  and  to  fire  at 
least  thres  rounds  in  a  minuto  with  ease  and  regularity. 

Abticle  Second. 

To  fire  by  company. 

48.  The  Instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  Are  by  com- 
pany to  be  exociiteJ,  will  command  : 

1.  Fireby  i-ompany    2.  Commence f.ring. 

49.  At  the  first  cninuiand,  the  captain  will  prcmpily 
place  himself  opposite  the  cectre  of  bis  company,  and  four 
paces  in  rear  01  the  line  of  file  closers  :  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  retire  to  that  line  atid  place  himself  opposite 
to  his  interval.  This  rtde  it  genx-al.  for  both  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  different  firings. 

[>0.  Ac  the  second  comnmnil,  the  cautaiu  Mill  ai!d  ;  1. 
Company;    2.   Rbact  ;    3.  Aim;    4.  Kiac;    6    Load. 

III.  At  the  command  Zuad,  the  men  u  ill  load  theirpiecas, 
and  then  take  the  pobiCioM  uf  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier. 

62.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the 
firing,  by  the  cummauds  : 

1.  Company.    2.  AiM.    3.  FlBE.     4.  Load. 

63.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  signal 
to  cease  filing  is  sounded. 

64.  The  captain  will  sometin-.es  cause  aim  to  betaken 
to  the  right  and  lett,  simply  observing  to  pronounce  rt|;U 
(or  left)  oblijue,  before  the  command  aim. 

Article  Tninn. 

r/u>  Fire  by  file. 

56.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  flro  by  file  to  b« 
executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Compani/.      3.    llEADT.      4.    Commence 
firing. 

66.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed  in  the  BchuoJ  of  the  soldier,  No.  275  and  fol- 
lowing. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSOK  III. 


21 


67.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the 
company;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the  iustant  the 
first  brings  down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  so  on  to  the  left; 
bnt  this  progression  will  only  be  observed  in  the  first  dis 
charge,  aftfir  which  each  man  will  re-load  and  fire  with- 
out regulating  hira-elf  by  others,  conforming  himself  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 

Abticlk  Fourth. 
To  Fire  by  rank. 

68.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be 
executed,  will  command : 

1.  fire  itj  ranJs.     2.' Company.    3.  ReAIiT. 
4.  Jiear  rank— Am.   6.  Fibb.  C.  Load. 

69.  The  fifth  and  s'xth  commands  will  be  executed  as 
Is  pte'cr.bed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285  and 
following. 

60.  When  the  inptrtictcr  sees  one  or  two  pieces  iu  the 
rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.      3.  Fibe.    4.  LOAD. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  altornato  ranks 
until  the  bignal  is  given  to  cease  tiling. 

G'2.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cau'e  aim  to  bs  taken 
to  th'>  right  and  loft,  conforming  to  what  ia  prescribed 
No.  54 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  tj  ceise, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  ranV.  by  soundiog 
the  signal  lo  cease  firing,  and  at  the  iustant  this  sound 
coram  nces,  thj  men  will  cease  to  fire,  conforming  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  si.ldier.  No.  282. 

61.  The  signal  to  cease  firii'g  will  bi>»lway8  followed  by  a 
bugle  note  ;  at  which  sound,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their  plac  s  in  line,  and 
will  rectify,  if  neceasary,  the  alignment  of  ths  ranks. 

65.  In  this  pchoal,  except  wheapowdpris  used,  the  sig- 
nal to.  ease  firing  will  b»  indicated  by  the  command, 
cttse  firing,  wliich  will  be  pronounced  bv  the  instructor 
whfiu  he  wishei  the  semblance  of  firinu;  to  cease. 

66.  The  commandpos/j  will  be  likewise  substituted,  un- 
der similar  circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note  employed  as 
the  signal  for  the  return  of  Ihv.  captain  and  covering  ser- 
g*ant  to  their  places  in  line,  which  commaud  will  be  given 
when  the  instructor  sees  the  men  have  brought  their 
pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  Th9  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frpnuently 
ns  d  against  an  -nemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be 
rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the  troops.  The  i.,B»ructor 
will,  therefore,  give  it  almo-it  exclusive  preference,  and 
labor  t.i  cause  the  men  to  aim  with  care,  and  always,  if 
possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As  it  is  of  the  utmost 
Importance  that  the  men  should  aim  with  i  rec  sion  in 
Cattle,  this  principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  tlie  exer- 
cises for  the  purposes  of  instruction. 

Akttcle  Fifth. 

To  Fire  hy  the  reir  rank, 

68.  The  instructor  will  canse  the  several  fires  to  be  exe- 
ctitod  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rciir  rank.  To  effect 
this,  he  will  cummand: 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.    2.  OtmjiJtv'.    3.  About — Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  st^p  out  and 
place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his 
company;  the  covering  sergeant,  and  file  cIosBrs,  will  pass 
quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and  place  them- 
selves faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace  be- 
hind the  captain,  -ind  the  file  (losers  two  paces  frum  the 
f  out  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each  passiug 
behind  the  coveting  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through  the 
interval,  the  company  will  face  about;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  ia  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become 


the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  in 
the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  ficed  by  the  rear  rank,  <he 
Irstructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company, 
both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  ty  file,  and  "the  fire  by 
rank,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  iu  the 
three  preceding  articles  ;  the  captain,  covering  sergoant, 
and  the  men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like  manner,  to 
what  is  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the 
company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank,  the 
firing  will  commence  ^with  the  front  rank,  now  become 
the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the^inetructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.    2.  Company    3.  About— Yji.cn. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  ser- 
ge mt  and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
Noi.  69  and  YO. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced 
about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  leauma 
their  places  in  lino. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the 
men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  particular 
object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to 
make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  aim  and  jTr«, 
to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  p  ace  himself  in  position  to  sea 
the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect  fnults  ;  he  will  charge 
the  captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally  watchful,  and  to 
rop«rt  to  him  when  the  ranks  are  at  rest.  He  will  remand, 
tor  individual  instruction,  the  men  who  may  be  observed 
to  load  badly. 

79.  The  inptructor  will  recommend  to  the  sol  iers,  in 
the  firings,  I  he  highest  degree  of  ci.mposure  or  presence 
of  mind  ;  he  will  neglect  nothing  that  may  contribute  to 
this  end. 

50.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  gineral  principle,  to 
maintain,  in  the  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place,  in 
order  that  the  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may  not 
be  deranged  :  and  he  will  verify,  by  examination,  after 
each  exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this  principle. 

51.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to  these 
remarks,  all  those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartrirtr:<>B,  it  Is 
particularly  leconmiended  that  the  men  observ,',  iu  un- 
cocking, whether  smoke  escapes  from  the  tube,  v>h:ch  is 
a  certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been  diecbarged  ; 
but  if.  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapes,  the  soldier, 
in  such  case,  instead  ot  re-loading,  will  pick  and  pr)me 
again.  If  believing  the  load  to  be  discharged,  the  sol- 
dier should  put  a  sec(  nd  cartridge  in  hie  piece,  he  ought, 
at  least,  to  perceive  it  in  rammiug,  by  the  height  of  the 
load  ;  anil  he  would  be  very  culpable,  should  he  put  in  a 
third.  The  instructor  will  always  cause  arras  to  be  in- 
spected after  firing  with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe 
if  the  fault  has  been  committed,  of  putting  three  cart- 
ridges, without  a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece,  in  w  licb 
case  the  ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

S3.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed  fire, 
that  the  tube  is  fo  nd  stopped  up  with  r»  hard,  white, 
and  compact  powder;  in  this  case,  >iii  kIi.^  will  be  dis- 
pensed with,  anda  new  cup  substituted  ie.'S  lor  the  old  one. 

LESSON  THIBD. 

Aeticle  Fibbt. 

To  advance  in  line  of  bailie. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  correctly 
aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  .•.sh  to  exercife  it  in 
marching  by  the  front,  he  will  af^ure  himself  that  the 
(■boulders  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  are  per- 
fectly in  the  direction  of  their  respective  racks,  and 
that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the  captain;  the  in- 
structor will  then  place  himself  twenty-tive  or   thirty 


22 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMi'ANY— LESSON  III. 


paces  1q  frcntof  tb«iD,  face  to  the  fmu,  and  place  him- 
Mir  exactly  on  the  proloogation  of  the  Hoc  pansiog  be. 
twe«n  their  be«l8. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  en  the  directing 
file,  wili  command : 

1,  Company, /orwaid. 

86.  At  this,  a  serf^oant,  prprioubly  designated,  will 
move  nix  paces  in  adrauce  of  the  captain  ;  the  iastrcc< 
tor,  from  the  position  proscribed,  will  correctly  align 
this    K«rgoaDton  the  prolojogatioa  of  the  dircctini;  file. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged  with 
tbt  dir<M;tioo,  will,  the  moment  bit  position  is  assured, 
take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  lino  which 
would  pass  between  bis  own  and  the  bocis  of  the  in- 
structor. 

63.  These  difpositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will 
step  aside,  and  command : 

2.  M Alien. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with  life.  The 
directing  eergeaut  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  pre- 
ciiiion,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  marching  oa 
the  two  points  h<»  has  chosen  ;  he  will  t»ke  in  snccesiion, 
and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the  point  nearest  to 
him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same  line  with 
the  first  two,  andat  the  distance  of  some  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  from  each  other.  The  captain  will  march  steadily 
in  the  trace  of  the  directing  sergoant,  keipiug  always  six 
paces  from  him  ;  the  men  will  each  maiutaiu  the  head 
direct  to  the  frtint,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor 
on  the  bide  of  direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  jirin- 
ciples  preecribed,  school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by 
the  front. 

90  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special  care 
not  to  I  ass  him  ;  to  this  end,  bo  will  keep  the  line  of  hh 
shoulderK  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  samo  direction 
wi'h  thfise  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  wiil  march  at  the  habitual  distance 
of  two  pac'S  behind  the  rear  ranlc. 

92.  If  tUo  men  lose  the  step,  the  instrsctor  will  com- 
mand: 

To  ihe—STrr. 

03.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards  the 
directing  sergeant,  retsko  the  step  from  him,  and  again 
direcf  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  The  iUBtructor  will  canse  the  captain  and  covering 
Beri:eant  to  he  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and  some- 
times on  t'  0  left  of  the  cimnany. 

95.  The  directing  si  rgeant,  in  advance,  having  the 
greatPHt  influence  on  tli«  march  of  lb"!  company,  ho  will 
be  se  ected  for  the  pifclsion  of  his  step,  his  habit  of  main- 
tainlne  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given  line  Of 
directii'n.  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without  variation. 

90.  If  this  sergi-ant  should  fail  to  olserve  these  princi- 
plo-",  uniliilations  in  the  front  or  the  company  must  neces- 
oariiy  fdlow;  the  men  will  be  un«lj|«  to  contract  the 
habit  "if  taking  steps  equal  In  length  and  swiftnuss,  and  of 
miiintnining  their  shoulders  in  a  souaro  with  the  line  of 
direction — the  only  means  of  attaining  perfection  in  the 
mtrrh  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  entnhlish 
th-t  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  in  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  lice,  will  cause  the  company 
to  advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces,  at  once,  without 
hal  ing,  if  the  ground  will  permit.  In  the  t  rst  exercises, 
lie  will  mirch  the  company  with  open  ranks,  tlio  better 
to  obs'-rve  the  two  rank". 

93.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  f>int  all  thf  prin- 
ciples of  the  march  in  lino  are  strictly  observed  ;  he  will 
generally  bo  on  the  directing  (lank,  in  a  position  to  ob- 
serve the  two  rank-,  and  the  (anils  they  may  mniinlt ;  he 
W'li  8ome>imeB  halt  behind  the  directing  lile  dnring  Rome 
thirty  successive  eteps,  in  order  to  judge  whether  the 
direiting  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file,  deviate  from 
the  perpendicular. 


Atncui  Sbmhd. 

To  halt  lk$  company,  nnrchinj  in  lint    c/  laUU,  and  (• 

alijn  iL 

j      00.  The  iBatrnctor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  «tll 
.  command: 

I  1.  Cbmfany.    2.  Halt. 

I      100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  bait ; 

I  the  directing  sergeant  will   remain  in  advance,  nniess 

'  ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of  tile  iloM-rs.     The  com-. 

I  pany  b>-ing  at  halt,  the  instructor  may  advance  the  firtt 

{  throe  or  four  files  <  n  the  side  of  direction,  and  align  the 

I  company  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  ccnfli.o  himself  to 

causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectifir-d.    In  thi"  last  case, 

he  will   command:     Giptain,  rccli/ij  Uic  ali-.ni"tcia.    The 

captain  will  direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the 

;  rear  rank,  when  c>ach,  glancing  his  cyee  along  bis  rank, 

,  will   promptly  rectily  it,  couformiug  to  what  if  pre* 

scribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Ko.  320. 

Abticle  Thibd. 
Olliqtte  march  in  line  of  haUle. 

j  101.  The  company  bciug  in  the  direct  march,  when 
the  instructor  shtiU  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  olliqnely, 

i  he  will  command: 

'  1.  lii.jJil  (or  Ufl)  olUquc.    2   Marcu. 

!  102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the 
oblique  step.    The  mi-n  will  accurately  obserTe  the  prin- 

,  ciplcs  prescribed   in  the  school  of  the  soldier,   No.  331. 

I  The  rear  rank   men  will  preserve  their  distances,  and 

I  march  in  reitr  of  the  man  next  on  the   right  (or  left)  of 

j  their  hahitnal  file  lo'iders. 

j      103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  mirch  to 

i  be  resumed,  be  will  command  : 

I  1.  Forward.    2.  MiKcn. 

I      101.  At  the  command  tiiarc?i,  the  company  will  rosnmo 

I  the  direct  maich.  The  instructor  will  move  brilkly 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and  facini;  the 
company,  will  place  himself  exfictly  in  the  proloug/tiou 
of  tliu  cuptuia  and  covering  sergeant;  und  then,  by  a 
(i^o,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same  line, 
if  be  be  not  already  on  it;  tl  e  latter  will  imn  ediately 
take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
instnictor,  and  ns  ho  advauccF,  will  tuke  new  points  of 
direction,  as  is  expln'ned  No.  ti'J. 

105.  In  the  ub  ique  march,  t!ie  men  i:ot  having  the 
touch  of  elbows,  the  giii  Je  will  alwayj  bo  on  th-<  side  to- 
wards which  the  obliqu-  i^  made,  without  any  indication 
to  that  elfoct  being  giviii  ;  and  when  the  direct  march  is 
rr-Hiinied,  the  guide  will  bo,  ei|ually  with<Mit  iuoication, 
on  tlie  aide  wliere  it  was  previo'is  to  the  oblique. 

loO.  The  in-tructor  will,  at  firht,  causu  ibe  oblique  to 
be  made  towards  the  sido  ot  the  guiilp.  lie  will  also  di- 
rect the  csptaju  to  have  an  eyeou  Hie  directlugseri^eant, 
in  order  to  kotp  on  the  caini>  perpendicular  line  to  tho 
front  with  him.  while  following  a  piu-allel  Uireclion. 

107.  During  the  perf  riuiii.te  of  the  march,  the  in. 
Btnut  r  will  be  walchlul  thnt  the  men  follow  parallel 
directions,  in  conforiniug  to  tho  principles  proper  bet  n 
the  school  of  tho  soldiar,  for  preserving  the  general  nlign- 
iiu-ut;  wi  enevi.r  th^  men  lose  the  alignmeut,  be  uill  be 
t'vreful  that  they  regaiu  it  by  lengthsuiug  or  short-uing 
tli«.':t<p,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or  chaiigiu^  the 
dine  ion. 

108.  The  instructor  will  placs  himself  in  froiitof  tho 
company  ai  d  face  to  if,  in  order  to  r(  sulale  t'le  inirch  (  f 
the  directing  sorgeiint,  or  the  man  who  in  on  the  Hank 
towards  which  the  oblique  ig  made,  an  1  to  see  fh  t  t"e 
principles  of  the  u  arch  are  jiroperly  1 1  saved,  and  that 
the  files  do  not  crowd. 

ABTICLK    I'OURTll. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  dnuhle  quick  li:He,  and  the  back 
tl)'p. 

109.  The  company  being  in  tho  direct  march  and  in 
qrick  time,  the  iubtructur,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will 
command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  IV. 


23 


1.  J/arfc  time.    2.  JIarch. 

110.  To  resBms  the  m\rch,  ho  will  command  : 

L  Ibrwird     2.  M  Roa. 

lit.  To  catise  t>)e  mircU  in  double  quick  t.'mo,  the  in- 
Btructor  will  command : 

1.  Doulle  qu'ck.    2.  ^Iaech. 

112.  The  coromund  march  will  bo  prnnounc.d  at  the 
InFt  K  t    iiher  foot  13  coming  to  the  proiind. 

113.  The  resume  quick  time,  the  inttructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  QuicTc  time,    C.  HiBCB. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  in 
st>nt  either  foot  is  comiut;  to  tba^oan<l. 

115.  The  company  beiiif?  »t  a  halt,  thu  instrnctnr  vany 
cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  stop  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Company  haclicard.    2.  UlAF.cn. 

111.  The  bick  step  will  be  executed  accordini;  to  fie 
principles   prescr'bed  in  the  school  of  the   solditr,  No. 

'  247,  but  th^nseof  it  bei'^g  rare,  the  ins  ructor  will  not 
'einite  more  than   fifteen  or  twt-nty  steos   to  be  t.keu  in 
BUG  e«i-ion.  and  to  thit  extent  ^nt  seldom. 

117.  The  iuitructor  o  g''t  not  tiex'TCise  the  company 
In  mirching  in  donblo  quick  time  till  the  menaie  well 
estublishod  in  the  length  and  swi.tness  of  the  pace  in 
quick  tim?  ;  he  will  then  endeavor  to  'ender  the  march 
of  outi  hundred  and  sixty-five  sttpsMn  the  minute  equally 
eas.'  and  familiar, and  also  cause  them  to  ob.'serve  the 
same  crectnos?  of  body  and  composure  of  mind,  en  if 
marculug  in  qiiicK  time. 

118  When  marching  in  double  quick  fime,  if  a  sub- 
division (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direc'ion  by  turning, 
or  has  to  firm  into  line,  the  men  will  quicken  the  pace  to 
one  hundred  and  eighty  steps  in  a  minute.  The  same 
Bwiftnes?  of  step  will  be  observed  under  all  circumstances 
where  great  rnpidity  of  movement  is  required.  But,  as 
rauks  of  men  cannot  mirch  any  length  ot  time  at  eo  swift 
a  rate,  without  brea1;ing  or  confusion,  this  acceleration 
will  not  be  considered  a  prescribed  exercise,  an  1  accord- 
ingly c  impanies  or  battalions  will  only  be  habitually 
ex-rci-^ed  in  the  double  quick  time  of  one  hundred  and 
«ix'y-ftvo  steps  in  the  minute. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  re- 
treat, he  will  command : 

1.  Conqyani/.     2.  About— Txce. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  (he  instruc- 
tor will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing  file,  con- 
forming to  what  is  proscribed.  No.  84. 

121.  Th' instructor,  being  correctly  established  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  command  : 

3.  Company,  fcncard. 

122.  At  this,  the  dircct'ng  sergearit  will  conform  him'elf 
to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  86  and  87,  with  this  difference 
— he  will  place  himself  six  paces  iu  front  of  the  lineof  flle 
cloflerg,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  o(  flle 
clo*er»,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place 
himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  inatrnc- 
tor  will  command : 

4.  March. 

128.  At  this,  the  dir  ting  sergeant,  the  captain,  and 
the  man,  will  conform  tbemselYM  to  what  is  prescribed 
Ko.  89,  and  following. 


12G.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching 
in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in  advance  ; 
the  cjmmands  and  the  means  of  execution  will  be  the 
same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will, 
when  ho  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  thi  front  by  the 
commands  prescribed  Nu.  119.  Thecaptain,  the  c^vericg 
sergeant,  nnd  the  directing  sergeant,  will  resume  their 
hat'itual  places  in  line,  the  moment  they  shall  have  faced 
about. 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank, 
if  the  instructor  ghoul  I  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he 
will  cause  the  right  abont  to  be  executed  whilu  marching, 
and  to  this  effect  will  command : 

1.  Company.     2.  Bight  ahotU.     3.  MabCH. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly 
faco  a'  out,  and  recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rark. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the 
company,  and  will  move  rapidly  six  pacts  in  front  of  tho 
hie  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide. 
The  instructor  will  ilare  him  in  the  proper  dirtctinti  by 
the  means  prescribed  No.  164.  The  captain,  the  cover- 
ing serireant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  iusti  uctor  wishes  the  company  to  march 
by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the  same  cemmands,  and 
will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march  by  the  same 
means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double 
quick  tiiue,  all  the  movementt  prescribed  in  tbeSil,  4th, 
5th,  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with  the  eiception 
of  the  march  hackwardi,  which  will  be  executed  only  in 
quick  time.  lie  will  give  the  same  commaDds.  observ- 
ing to  add  double  quich  before  the  command  march 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoul- 
der, in  quick  time,  tho  distance  between  ihe  ranks  will 
be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  therefore,  the  ini'tructtr 
brings  tho  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this  position,  tho 
rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  tho  first  stepi  in  o»der  to 
gain  tho  prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the  steps, 
on  the  contrary,  in  order  to  close  up  when  the  pieces  are 
again  brought  to  a  shoulder.  In  marching  in  double 
quick  time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twen- 
ty-six inches,  and  the  pieces  will  be  carried  habitually  on 
the  right  shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  baited,  ths  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command 
lialt.  The  rear  rank  will  closo  to  its  proper  distance. 
These  rules  are  general, 

LESSON  rOUBTE. 

Article  First. 

To  march  by  the  /lanl-. 

133.  The  company  beint;  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  r 
halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 
by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command: 

1.  Company,  njftt— FiCE.    2.  Foricard.    3.  March. 

136.  At  ihe  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  at 
the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having  stepped 
out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the  sHo 
of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left ;  the  front  rank  will 
double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
352;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  sidestep  to 
the  right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the  ssmo  manner;  so 
that  when  the  movement  is  completed,  the  files  will  bo 
formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and  elbow  to  elbow.  The 
intervals  will  be  preserved. 

137.  The  file  slosers  will  also  move  by  side  ftep  to  the 
right,  so  that  when  tho  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  bo 
two  paces  from  the  rcarmose  rank. 

135.  At  the  command  march,  tho  company  will  move  off 
briskly  in  quick  time;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will  march 
straight  forward.    The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast 


24 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPA^'T— LESSON  IV 


of  their  reip«ctive  front  mnlc  men,  beads  direct  to  the 
front ;  ib«  file  clo«eii  will  march  Oj^poilte  their  i>luc«i  is 
litie  ofbittle. 

139.  The  initrnrfor  will  cnnse  the  princijilos  of  the 
march  b>  the  ll«uk  to  l>e  obc^rted,  Id  piuriug  hiniti-if, 
peDtliog  the  march,  as  prescriUd  Id  th<-  schuol  of  the 
•uldier.  Nu.  357. 

IIJ.  Tha  itittructor  will  cuDse  t)ie  march  by  (he  left 
flai.k  l>  b*  executed  by  Lbe  snme  commauus,  sub^titiiiinR 
left  t  r  riyfU;  the  raukn  will  d^iublv  m  hHS  been  piesciitK-d 
lu  the  ^cu<>ul  fur  the  solilier.  No.  34.  the  roar  rank  will 
■iilv-tt<p  to  the  lelt  one  puce-  before  dunbiin^. 

111.  At  the  iiitt^iit  tliu  compauy  fact-s  U>  the  left,  the 
left  »;uide  will  place  himaelf  ut  the  bead  ol  th«  front  rank; 
tbf  captain  will  pnx't  rii|iidl>  to  th«  left,  aii<l  plure  lilm- 
•e!t  bj  the  rinht  Md«  of  this  guide:  the  coveriug  ewr- 
gtant  will  n-iilacf-  the  captain  in  the  f.oiit  rank,  tlio 
mvment  the  latter  qaitj  it  to  go  to  tbo  left. 

Aeticlk  Second. 
To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  l)eing  f.ici>d  by  the  flauk.  and  either 
Id  march,  or  at  a  ha.t,  wbun  the  iuatruciur  khall  wish  to 
caiue  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  command: 

1.  ByfiJe  l<fi,  {or  right.)    2.  Maech. 

143.  At  the  command  tnarcJi,  the  firpt  file  will  wheel; 
If  to  the  i^ide  ol  thu  front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take 
care  D'  t  1 1  turii  at  onco,  but  to  describe  a  tlit-rt  arc  of  a 
circle,  i-hirteuiijg  a  little  the  first  five  or  six  stcpg  iu  I'rder 
to  gi^e  time  tj  the  fourth  man  of  this  tile  to  conform 
hinia'  1:  tn  the  ti.ov,  meiit.  If  the  wheel  !>«  to  the  side  nf 
tha  reir  rai.k,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  tlie  Btep 
cf  twenty  eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  coiifurm 
himwif  to  the  movem  nt  by  describing  a  tliort  arc  of  a 
ciicle  as  has  been  ^^platned.  Kach  file  will  ci  m<'  tn 
wheel  on   the  same  ground  where  th.it  which  prtcuUcd  it 

Wh«»el<;d. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  exocnfed 
according  to  these  ;  -intiples,  in  order  that  the  dia  anco 
between  the  ftles  ii  .;,  .iluays  be  preserved,  and  thattheru 
be  no  check  or  hi:-   iniice  at  the  whoelicg  point. 

AitTiCLK  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  liy  Ihejlanl:,  and  to  face  it  to 
tite  frunt. 

145.  To  effost  these  objects,  the  inetrustor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Company,    2.  Halt.    3.  Fbost. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed 
M  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Hoe.  369  and 
3U0.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  uudoublod,  tho  rear  rank 
will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  captain  anil  cover- 
ing serpeant,  as  well  as  the  left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by 
the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their  habitual  places  in  line 
at  the  ii.-i.nt  the  company  faces  to  tho  front. 

147.  J  !i-  uintructor  way  then  align  tho  company  by  ouo 
of  tho  mtui.b  proscribed,  N^i.  100. 

Abticle  Focbth. 

The  compani/  being  in  march  Uj  IheJlanJ;,  (o  form  it  on  the 
riylU  (ur  kfl)  by  file  into  line  uf  buttle. 

HC.  If  the  comi-iany  be  marching  by  the  right  flani, 
the  instrtictor  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  rirjht,  by  file  into  line.     2.  Mabcii. 

149.  At  the  command  viarch,  tho  rear  rank  men  doubled 
will  mark  time;  the  captain  and  the  covering  8ert:eHnt 
will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight  t(  rward,  and  be 
halted  by  t'le  iusiriictor  when  they  shall  have  parsed  at 
least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closrm  ;  the  cup 
tain  wil  place  himself  correclly  on  the  line  of  I'Uttle,  and 
will  direct  the  Hliiznmeut  as  tho  men  ol  the  front  rank 
auccesHtTcly  ArriTe:  the  sergeant  will  place  himbelf  be- 


hind the  raptnio  at  the  ''«:tance  of  the  rear  rack  :  the  two 
men  on  the  i  i^ht  I'f  t);i-  iroLt  rsnk  doubled,  wil  continca 
to  march,  and  p-seirg  beyond  the  covering  rerpeant  and 
the  captain,  will  turn  to  the  riglit ;  after  tiirniig.  they 
wi.|  coBtitiue  to  march  ellow  to  e  liiw  and  dirrci  hcm- 
seiTes  towariis  the  line  >.if  battle,  but  when  they  shall  ar- 
rive at  two  pared  fr<  m  this  line,  the  even  oumtMr  will 
hhorten  the  step  so  ihai  the  odd  number  may  precede  him 
on  the  line,  ih"  c<ld  iiuml>er  placing  hllu^ell  l>y  the  bide 
and  on  i)ie  lefc  of  the  captain;  the  eteu  number  will 
afterwards  oblique  to  thu  left,  and  place  hinitelf  on  tha 
left  ol  the  vdd  uuiiiiier  ;  the  uex  two  men  ol  the  frcut 
rank  doutjled,  will  puss  in  he  sane  DiaLner  behind  ihe 
two  flrnt,  iHrn  tlien  to  tho  ripht.  and  place  Ihemstlves, 
nrcoiding  to  the  means  Juit  osplalned.  to  thi  left  and  by 
the  Hide  if,  he  two  men  already  eatal  lii-htd  I'lj  tl  i  iiio  ; 
the  remaining  fllea  of  this  rat.k  will  follow  in  sncrersion, 
and  bo  furuM-d  to  the  lelt  in  the  same  n  sneer.  1  lie  mr 
rank  doubled  will  execute  the  moven  ent  in  the  maui.er 
all!  ady  explained  r>r  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not  to 
rominence  the  movement  until  four  men  of  the  Iront  rank 
are  established  on  the  l.ne  of  battle  ;  the  re^ir  rai  k  men, 
KM  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  iccurately  their  file 
leadeis. 

16U.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the 
ins  luctor  will  laUAe  it  to  lonu  by  tile  on  the  lelt  in'o  line 
of  battle,  aec 'tdibg  to  the  same  princij  les  ano  ly  the 
rnme  conimands,  bubsiituiine  thoiuiiicaiion  left  fvr  right. 
lu  ttiis  case,  the  cdd  uiimlers  will  sboittn  the  step,  so 
that  the  even  uiimbeis  may  precede  ihcm  on  the  line. 
1  he  capt  lin,  |il»ced  on  ihe  lelt  i  f  the  fri  ir.  rank,  and  tbo 
lelt  g'  ide,  will  return  to  their  peaces  in  line  of  battle  by 
order  of  th.'  instructor,  alter  thecouii.au>  shalll).  formed 
andaligne.l. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  tho  better  to  comprehend  the 
mcchaiiisiii  ol  thih  movement,  the  instrucior  will  a'  first 
cuu.eit  to  be  ex  cuted  cei  aiately  by  each  rank  doubled, 
and  afterwatds  by  ihe  two  rimka  united  and  c'oiibled. 

162.  The  iuttructor  will  iiliu-e  himself  on  the  liue  of 
battle,  and  without  the  polut  where  the  riglit  or  lelt  is  to 
rest,  iu  ori.er  to  establish  the  bKhu  of  the  alignment,  and 
•iterwaids,  he  will  follow  up  the  mo^rmmt  to  oasure 
himself  hat  each  fiie  conforms  itsuli  to  what  is  pre- 
set i  bed  Ko.  149. 

Articlc  Finn. 

Tlie  company  being  in  marcA  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by 
compuny.  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to  cauto  it  to  fact 
tu  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

153.  The  company  1  eing  in  march  by  Ihe  right  fi'tnk, 
the  instructo.  will  order  tho  cnptain  to  form  it  into  line  ; 
the  captain  will  immediately  command  : 

1.  By  company,  into  lint.    2.  Mabco. 

151.  At  tho  comrrard  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will 
continue  to  march  straijibt  lot  ward;  the  men  will  ad- 
vance tho  right  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick  Step,  ond 
move  into  lino,  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  care  to  un- 
dout'luthe  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  alter  tho 
other. 

l/)5.  Ab  tho  front  rank  men  succecsively  arrive  ia  line 
with  the  coveriiij;  ferj:eaiit,  they  w  ill  take  from  him  the 
step,  and  then  turn  tboir  ryen  to  the  front. 

150  The  men  of  tho  reiir  rank  will  cnnfo-m  to  the 
movements  <  f  their  respective  fie  lesders,  but  wilhoit 
cudeavoriug  to  ariivu  in  liuuat  the  same  time  wiih  the 
latter. 

l.'i?.  At  tho  i:  slant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain 
will  face  to  his  company  in  rrrer  to  follow  up  the  execu- 
tion ;  and,  us  soon  as  the  company  is  formed,  he  will  com- 
mand, guide  left,  place-  himself  two  paces  before  the  cen- 
tre, factj  to  tho  front,  and  lake  the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  Command  guide  lefl,x\w  second  serKeant 
will  pr  imi.tly  place  hiinsell  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  lelt, 
to  eerve  as  gi.ide,  and  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  ou  the 
oppo-ite  flank  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  mardies  by  tho  left  flank,  tlils 
movement  \n  ill  b    executed  by  tho  same  commaa^i)  and 


SCHOOL  OF  TUE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 


25 


a-coriliup;  to  (bo  aatni  pvinoiples;  tin  coropiny  boing 
formed,  the  oaptjin  >\ill  cummand  guide  right,  and  pluce 
hiimolf  ill  froHt  of  liis  compiiuy  as  ibjve;  Iho  covoriug 
8  Ti;  ant  wh  ■  is  oji  the  iigbt  of  tlio  front  rai.k  will  pervo 
aa  i^uldo,  luid  the  second  uurgeant  placed  ou  the  left  flank 
will  reiii.iiu  there. 

)G).  ThuB,  in  a  column  by  compiiny,  ripht  or  left  in 
front,  ilie  coveiinE;  serireant  nnd  the  sccund  sereeant  of 
eaiU  company  will  always  be  placid  on  the  right  and 
lu  t,  rt-spBi'tively,  ol  tlie  front  rank  ;  they  will  bodenom- 
inatod  ri'jlit  ijiiitlt;  and  Ifft  r/iiide,  and  the  oBe  or  other 
charucd  with  iho  direction. 

101.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it 
be  th9  wlah  oi  the  iustr'io  or  to  canno  it  to  form  pla- 
totius,  h'  will  fcivo  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain, 
wlo  will  couiiuaui'  : 

1.  B>j  platoon,  into  U»e.     2.  MaIICU. 

IGJ.  The  mnvomont  will  bo  ex"CTited  by  each  platoon 
accordiDfC  ti  thp  above  principles.  The  captain  will 
place  himself  licfore  tho  crrtre  of  the  first  platoim,  and 
thii  flr«i  lieutenant  bffore  tbo  ceiitro  of  tho  secon  ',  pass- 
iuj;  thr'^'ush  the  oi>ei)in(<  made  in  tho  centre  ot  the  com- 
pany, if  thomircU  be  by  the  rijiht  flank,  and  around  tho 
left  i.f  Ilia  pUtoiin,  if  tiio  maroli  be  bv  tho  left;  in  tliiu 
Ust  cise,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around  tbo  left  of  tlio 
Kec«nd  pi  itDon  iu  order  to  pi  ico  himself  in  Iront  of  tho 
first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieuton  i"t,  without  waiting 
for  each  other,  will  command  r/nide  hfl  (>  r  right)  at  tho 
inst'int  their  respi'ctive  pbitcons  are  fomicd. 

H):5.  At.  the  command  guide  left  (or  rijhl),  the  gni'le  of 
each  platoon  will  pass  rapiilly  to  tho  ludicated  llark  of 
the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

1(14.  Thf-  rifjht  c;iiide  of  the  company  will  .ilways  serve 
as  the  giiid'i  of  the  rii^ht  or  left  ot  the  first  p'atoon,  and 
the  lott  guide  of  the  company  will  serve,  in  like  manner, 
as  the  puide  of  th'3  seroud  platoon. 

16''.  Tbtia  in  a  column,  by  plati  on,  there  will  bo  but 
one  guide  to  each  platoon  ;  ho  will  ahvayi  be  placed  f-n 
it<  loft  fl mk,  if  tho  right  be  in  front,  aud  ou  the  right 
flmk,  if  the  left  be  in  Iront. 

IGi.  In  these  miveni"nts.  tho  file  closers  wi.l  follow 
the  platouns  to  which  they  are  attachoo. 

1G7.  The  instructor  may  causo  ihe  conipnny,  marching' 
by  tlio  fli'ik,  to  firm  by  corapmy,  or  by  platoon,  into 
line,  by  hi^  ownd'rtc  command<,  using  those  pretcribod 
for  ti;e  captain.  No.  lo3  or  ICI. 

lC-<.  Tho  iu^trictor  will  exercise  the  csmpany  in  pass- 
ing without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the 
march  by  tho  flank,  and  rociprt)cally.  Iu  either  cii-»,  bo 
will  e'liploy  thrt  corumanda  prescTibed  in  tho  school  ot  tho 
soldier,  No.  Gfc3.  substi'utiDgcomjXin.v  U>r  sipiad.  The  com- 
pany will  fico  to  the  ri>>ht  or  lelt,  iii  in:irthin2,find  the 
captain,  the  guides,  and  fllo  closora  will  conform  them- 
Bftlvas  to  whit  is  prescribed  for  e tch  in  the  ii.arch  by  tho 
flank,  or  in  tho  march  by  tho  front  of  a  company  sup- 
posed to  be  a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

IGJ.  If,  after  facing  to  the>  right  or  iott,iu  marching,  tho 
company  find  itself  laaed  by  the  rt-ar  rank,  tho  captain 
will  placo  hims.ilf  two  ppcos  behind  the  centre  of  the 
front  rank,  now  iu  the  rear,  the  guides  will  pass  to  tne 
rear  rauk,  now  leading,  end  tho  fllo  clotitr.'j  will  march 
in  front  of  (his  ronk. 

170.  Thaiubtrnctor,  in  order  to  avtid  fatiguing  the  men, 
nn<\  to  provent  th' m  f:om  being  negligent  in  the  i  osi 
I  ion  of  shoulder  arnii.  will  sometimes  order  support  arras 
in  marching  by  tho  Hauk,  and  armj  on  tho  right  shoulder, 
when  marcUiug  in  liuo. 

LBSSON  FIFTII. 

ARTi:tE  FinST, 

To  hreal:  into  eoltnnit  li/pUUoon,  eitlier  at  a  hull  or  in  iitarch. 

171.  The  company  boing  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  (ho 
instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by  platoon  to 
the  rit^ht,  will  command  : 


'I  I> np^aloon,  rijht  uhccl.     2.  Makch. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platofln  will 
rapidly  place  thomsehes  two  paces  before  the  centres  of 
their  respective  platoons,  the  lieuti  nant  patsii'g  around 
(ho  left  ol  tho  c 'Bipany.  They  iieed  not  occupy  themselves 
w  ith  dressiUL',  one  upon  the  other.  The  coToriug  sergeant 
will  rejilace  the  ciptain  in  iho  front  rank. 

173.  At  the  comman  1  mavch,  tlie  right  front  rank  man 
of  each  jUtoou  will  fico  to  the  right,  the  cover  ng  ter- 
geant  standing  fast ;  tho  chief  of  each  plaioon  wilKinove 
rpiickly  by  tho  .shortest  line,  a  little  beyond  tho  point  Ht 
which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when  the  wheil  sh-tU 
be  completed,  face  to  the  lato  rear,  and  place  hiu  self  so 
that  tho  line  which  ho  forms  with  the  man  ou  the  r  ght 
(who  had  faced),  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied 
by  Iho  company  in  lino  of  battle  ;  each  platoon  will  wheel 
according  to  the  p'iuciples  pre^cribed  for  the  wheel  on  a 
fi.xed  pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  couduct^  the  march- 
ing tlink  shall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its 
chief  will  command : 

1.  Platoon..  2.  Halt. 

174.  At  tho  command  hall,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flan):  ^htll  have 
arrived  at  tlirte  paces  fr^  m  tho  perpendicular,  the  ilitoon 
will  hilt;  the  covering  sergeant  wil  move  to  the  point 
where  the  loft  of  the  iirst  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing  bv  the 
front  raik;  tho  second  sergeant  will  pl.ace  himself,  iu 
like  niaiiU.3  ■,  in  respect  to  the  second  platoon.  Kach  will 
take  carti  to  leave  between  himself  and  tha  man  on  the 
righo  of  his  platoon,  a  spice  equal  to  its  Iront ;  ih-^  cap- 
taiu  and  first  lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  and  each  take 
cat 0  to  align  tbo  s-Jgeant  between  himself  ^ud  tho  man 
of  tho  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  riilit. 

175.  The  guide  cf  each  plateon,  being  ilias  established 
on  the  perpendicular,  each  clii^if  will  pl-ice  himself  two 
p.'ices  outsido  of  his  guide,  aud  facing  towards  him,  will 
oommaud : 

3,  if/i!— Dress. 

17().  Tho  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  iilntoon 
will  command,  I'hoat,  and  place  himself  two  paces' before 
its  centre. 

177.  Tho  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the 
movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  p'oserving  always 
the  distance  of  two  p-iccs  from  the  rear  raiib. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  tho  left,  ac- 
cprdmg  to  the  same  principles.  Tho  inhtructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  13;/ platoon,  IcJlKhecl.    2.  March. 

179.  Tho  first  coramnnd  will  bo  executed  iu  tho  same 
munner  as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  iho  right. 

ISO.  At  the  command  mnrch.  the  loft  front  rank  man' of 
each  platoon  will  fjro  ti  the  left,  ard  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  tho  lelt,  according  to  the  principles  prei-cribed 
f^.r  tho  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  chivts  of  platoon  will 
conf  rm  to  the  principles  indicated  ^os.  173  unrl  174. 

181.  At  tlie  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each 
plitoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  rijiht  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  fheserond  sergeant  near  the 
left  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each  move  to  tho  points 
where  the  right  ot  his  platoon  is  to  rest.  The  chief  of 
each  platoon '•hould  be  careful  to  align  (ho  sergeant  be- 
tween himself  aud  the  man  of  tlie  plaioon  who  had  faced 
to  tho  Uf.,  and  will  then  commttud: 

HifjlU—ItRrss. 

182.  The  platoons  being  ali5;ned,  e.ach  chief  of  platoon 
will  ccjmmand,  Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its 
centre. 

1'3.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by 
platoon  to  tbo  right,  and  t.i  move  the  column  forward 
ntter  the  whe»1  is  ci^mpli  t'd,  will  caution  tho  company  to 
that  ollcct,  and  command : 

1.  Vy  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  llAUcn. 

181.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
movo  rapidly  iu  front  of  their  respective  pifttoous,   con- 


28 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 


forming  to  wh»t  hu  boen  prescribed  No.  172,  and  will  ro- 
main  Id  thit  poiition  during  the  coutinnaLco  nf  tlio  whoul. 
The  cov(>rin(;  iiert((-ant  vrill  n'jilace  th«  chief  of  tk«  first 
platoon  in  tlie  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  rommaud  nuirrh,  tlio  plat'xmii  will  wbeel  to 
the  ri(;ht,  confurniiog  to  the  principles  herein  preiscrihod ; 
the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not  face  t^)  lb<>  right,  hot  will 
mark  time,  conforming  himself  tu  the  movement  of  tlio 
marching  flank  :  and  when  the  in«n  who  is  on  the  left  of 
this  (lank  shall  arrive  nc«r  the  perpendicular,  the  instruc- 
tor will  command  : 

3.  Fonrar,!.     4.  MARCH.      6.  Gttuk  U/l, 

18G.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  givca  at 
the  ioftant  the  wheel  in  completed,  the  platouus  will  move 
straight  to  the  fruut.  all  the  men  taking  the  Ktep  of  twen- 
ty-eight irichc'B.  Tha  coverii  g  sergeant  and  tlie  socoiid 
B«rg6ant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  loft  of  their  respective 
platoons,  the  former  pa8t>in>;  biloro  the  flout  rauk.  The 
leailing  guide  will  immediately  take  puintx  oo  the  ground 
in  the  direction  which  may  bo  iudioatc-d  tu  bim  by  the 
inclruclor. 

I«7.  At  the  fifth  commi\nd,  the  men  will  take  the  touch 
of  tlliows  lightly  to  the  left. 

ISJ.  11  the  gnide  of  the  second  platoon  should  loso  his 
dlRlnnci',  or  the  lino  of  diri-ctiiia,  he  will  conform  to  the 
prliici|.le8  herein  prescribed  No«.  20"J  and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front, 
the  instrnctor  will  cause  it  to  brenk  byi>la^Donto  the 
right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  command  marrh, 
the  platoon)  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already  explained ; 
the  man  ou  the  pivot  will  take  care  to  mark  time  in  his 
plac«,  without  advancing  or  receding;  the  instructor,  tho 
chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what 
has  be«n  prescribed  Nop.  1st  and  f  dlowing. 

I'JO.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  plntonns  to  the 
left,  according  to  tbo  Haine  principles,  and  by  inverKo 
meauH,  the  instructor  giving  the  cominands  prescribed 
NoH.  IK.'}  and  185,  substituting /'//  fur  rijhl,  and  recip- 
rocally. 

I'.tl.  The  movements  explained  in  Nob.  183 and  189  will 
onlj'  bo  executed  after  tho  company  has  Ijcconie  well  es- 
tablished in  the  iiriHciples  of  the  march  in  column.  Ar- 
ticled Sticoud  and  Third. 

lliiiKirhn. 

I'.i2.  Tho  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company, 
will  observe  whether  the  mnvement  bo  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prchcrilied  above;  whether  the  pla- 
toons, after  breaking  Into  column,  are  perpeijdicular  to 
tho  line  of  Imttle  just  occupied  ;  and  whether  tlie  guide, 
who  placed  hiinncif  where  tho  raiirching  flank  of  hlspla- 
t<ioii  had  to  rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  llio  front 
rank  man  ou  the  right  (or  left,)  llio  space  necessary  to 
contain  the  fiont  of  the  platuou. 

■1'.I3.  After  the  platouns  have  broken,  if  tho  rearmost 
gulile  should  not  accuratidy  cover  tho  leading  ono,  he 
will  uot  seek  to  correct  bis  position  till  tho  column  bo  put 
In  march,  iiuloss  the  instructor,  wishing  to  whenl  inimu- 
ilint-'ly  into  line,  should  think  it  neiM.Hsary  to  rectify  the 
direction  of  the  guides,  which  would  be  executc'd  lis  will 
be  heieinafter  explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this  Lesson. 

104.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  tho  man  on  the 
right  (or  lift)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  thn  coniiimud 
irt/irr/i,  faces  to  the  right  (or  left)  being  tho  true  pivot  of 
the  wheel,'^tli«  front  rank  man  ne.\l  to  him  ought  to  gain 
a  little  ground  to  tho  front  in  wheeling,  so  as  to  <  Irar  tho 
pivot-mun. 

Abticlb  Skconii. 

To  march  in  cvluinn, 

^'.^^.  Tlie  rnmpftny  having  broken  by  pliiloon,  ii;^lit  (or 
left)  in  front,  th-i  instructor,  wi.shiug  to  caiisn  the  col- 
umn tu  nmrch,  will  throw  himsr'lf  tuonty-live  ur  thirty 
paces  in  front,  fico  to  the  guides,  place  hlin-ielf corroclly, 
on  their  direction,  and  caution  tho  leading  gulijo  to  talio 
points  on  Ihe  ground. 


106.  The  instmctor  l>oing  thns  placed,  the  guide  of  the 
loading  platoon  will  take  two  pointa  on y he  ground  iu 
the  straight  line  pasbing  between  his  own  and  the  heels 
of  the  ioBtrucicT. 

197.  Those  disponitions  Vicing  n  adc,  the  instructor  will 
step  aside,  and  command  : 

1.  (MumHi/oncard.    2.  Giiidf  Ir/l  {or  righl.)    3.  Mabcii. 

108.  At  the  ccmmand  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off. 
by  a  decided  step,  their  renpectlvc  pUtiKius,  In  order  that 
the  whole  may  more  smartly,  and  at  the  same  moment. 

109.  Tho  men  will  each  feel  lichtly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in 
marching,  to  tho  prtnciph'S  prescribed  in  the  scbuti  of  tho 
soldier,  No.  327.  Tlio  man  next  to  the  guide,  in  each  pla- 
t(K)n,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to  march 
always  uhuut  six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from  him,  iu 
order  not  to  [lOnli  him  out  of  the  dirictiou. 

2uO.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precislou,  the  length  anil  c*dcuco  of  the  step,  and  inaiu- 
taiu  tho  direction  of  bis  march  by  tho  means  |  rescribcd 
No.  S9. 

201.  Tho  following  guide  will  march  exactly  In  the 
trace  of  the  leading  one,  presi-rviug  betwiiMi  the  latter 
and  hiiusulf  a  distance  pie^-isely  eijual  to  the  fi-ont  of  h  s 
platoon,  and  marchiDj,'  in  the  same  step  with  the  Ivadine; 
guide. 

202.  Tf  tho  following  guide  lose  his  distsnce  from  tho 
on«  loading,  (uhich  can  ouly  h  tppeu  by  liis  owu  fiolt.) 
be  will  correct  himself  by  slightly  lengtliening  or  short- 
ening a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may  not  b?  sii'ideii 
quickcnings  or  blackcuings  iu  the  uiRrcli  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  eamo  guide,  having  neglect<Hl  to  march  ex- 
actly in  tho  trace  of  tho  preceding  onei,  find  himsolf  sensi- 
bly out  of  tlio  direction,  ho  will  remedy  this  fault  by  ad- 
vancing more  or  le.sa  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  true 
dirortiou,  and  thus,  iu  a  few  steps,  insensibly  regain  it, 
without  tli'j  iuconvouionce  of  the  oblique  step,  which 
would  cause  a  loss  of  distance.  Iu  all  cases,  each  chief 
of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform  to  tho  luovenients  of 
ltd  guide 

Bemarks  on  Ute  march  in  column. 

20-1.  If  tho  cliiofs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  iie^liel 
to  lead  off  and  to  decide  the  march  from  the  flist  stop,  the 
march  will  bo  begiiu  in  nucert«inly,  which  will  cause 
waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  auii  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  nnequal steps,  the  march 
of  his  siilidivisiou,  and  tliut  which  follows,  will  bo  un- 
certain ;  there  will  be  undulations,  quickeulngs,  and 
slackenings  in  the  march. 

200.  It  the  game  guide  be  not  hiibltuated  to  prolong  a 
given  direction,  without  deviation,  ho  will  descridu  a 
crooked  lino,  and  the  column  must  wind  to  conform  itself 
to  such  lino. 

207.  If  the  followiii;^  guide  bo  uot  habituated  Oi  march 
in  tho  trace  of  the  preceding  ono,  ho  will  lose  his  distancn 
at  every  moment  in  endeavors  to  rigaiu  tho  trace,  the 
preservation  of  which  is  tl;e  most  important  principle  in 
the  niarcli  in  column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will  be 
responsible  for  tho  direction,  iliatanco,  and  step;  the 
chief  of  the  subdivision,  for  the  order  ami  coul'ormity 
of  his  suhdivifiion  with  tho  iiiovementa  of  the  guide. 
Accordluply,  the  clii.  f  will  fnquentty  turn,  in  tho 
march,  to  observe*  his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  tho  gnide.i, 
will  watch  over  the  exocution  of  all  tho  principles  pre- 
scribed ;  he  will,  also,  Hometinios  pliice  himself  in  the 
reirr,  Mjin  himself  on  the  guides,  and  hilt,  pendingsoniu 
lliirty  puces  together,  to  verify  the  accuracy  v(  tho 
guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  willalwiiys  lo 
peat,  with  tho  greate-it  promptitude,  the  coniniands 
iii'irc/i  nnd  /i<W/,  Jio  chief  wailing  r>r  another,  but  eiuli 
repesting  the  comm:»nd  tho  moment  he  catches  it  fririn 
tlio  instructor.  They  will  repeal  no  other  command 
given  by  him  ;  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their 
subdivisions,  In  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  V. 


27 


have  to  execute,  as  iudicatrd  by  tlio  commands  of  can- 
tiun. 

AuTieiK  Third. 
To  change  direciion. 

211.  Tlin  cbangosof  direction  of  a  column  wliilc  march" 
iup,  will  liu  cxeeutod  according  to  llio  principles  pro- 
Hcribod  for  wbooliug  oo  tbo  marcli.  Wlunuvcr,  there- 
fore, a  column  is  to  cbaugo  diroctiou,  tbo  instructor  will 
change  tbo  guide,  if  not  already  there,  to  the  flank  cp- 
posito  the  sidn  to  which  tbo  change  is  to  bo  made  : 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front  if  U  bo 
I  ho  witili  of  tbo  instructor  to  change  direction  to  tbo 
right,  be  will  give  iho  order  to  tbo  chief  of  the  firRt  pla 
tiiou,  and  immediately  go  himHclf,  or  send  a  marker  to 
tbo  point  at  which  tbo  cbaugo  of  direction  is  to  be  made  ; 
the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on  tbo  di- 
rection of  tbo  guides,  ey  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that 
dunk  of  tbo  column. 

213.  The  leading  Ruide  will  direct  his  march  on  that 
pers  >u,  so  that,  in  passing,  bis  left  arm  may  just  gra/.o 
bis  breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have  ap- 
proached near  to  tbo  marker,  tbo  chief  of  bis  platoon 
will  command : 

1.  IUqU  Wheel.    2.  Mincn. 

■JI'J.  Tb<^  (irst  couimanil  will  bo  f;iven  when  the  platoon 
r.s  at  the  diHtauce  of  four  p.aees  from  the  marker. 

215.  At  tbo  command  mtm-k,  which  will  bo  pronounced 
at  the  iustaut  the  guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  tbo 
marker,  tbo  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  eouforming 
t.i  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  tbo  soldier,    No. 

21C>.  Tbo  wheel  being  finished,  the  chi(f  of  each  pla- 
toon will  command : 

3.  Fortmrd.    4.  MAncn. 

217.  Those  commands  will  bo  pronouncod  and  executed 
IIS  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  tho  soldier,  N©s.  3;>S  and 
;(!)9.  The  guide  of  tho  first  platoon  will  take  points  on 
the  ground  in  tho  now  dircctioa,  in  order  tho  better  to 
regulate  tho  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to 'march  straihgt 
forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to 
tbo  right,  and  retake  the  direct  march  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  tbo  same  means  which  governed  tho  first 
plat4X>n. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  he 
will  command,  gtiido  riijlU.  At  this  command,  the  two 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  tho  right  of  their  respective 
platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  bubdivision ;  the 
men  will  take  tho  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  the  in- 
structor will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  213. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  tho  loft  will  then  be 
executed  according  to  tho  same  principles  as  the  change 
of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  in- 
Bttuctor  will  command,  gtiidc  left. 

222.  Tho  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front, 
will  bo  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

22.^.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time,  the 
platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  401. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  tho  men  for  those  formations 
in  lino,  which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the 
right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  the 
column  to  change  direction  to  the  sids  of  tho  guide.  In 
this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  will  command  : 
Lrft  (oTrU/IU)  turn,  instead  of  left  (nr  righl)  nlic-I.  The 
Bulidivisiona  will  each  turn,  in  succession,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  tho  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  402. 
The  leading  guide,  as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take 
points  on  the  ground,  tho  better  to  regulate  tlie  direction 
of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  dis- 
tances and  tho  direction,  that  all  tho  snbdiviRions  of  the 


column  fhotild  change  direction  precisely  at  the  point 
where  tho  leading  subdivision  changed;  it  is  for  this 
reason  that  that  point  ought  to  be  marked  in  ailvance, 
and  that  it  is  pioscribod  that  the  guides  direct  their  march 
on  the  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  sulidivisiim  shall  not 
caiise  the  change  to  commence  till  tbo  guide  of  bis  subdi- 
vision has  grazed  tho  broast  of  this  marker. 

22G.  Kacli  chief  will  take  caro  that  bis  Bubdivis'ou  ar- 
rives at  tho  point  of  change  in  a  square  witli  tbo  line  of 
direction  :  with  this  view,  he  will  face  to  bis  subdivisiou 
when  tho  one  which  precedes  ha«  commenced  to  turn  or 
to  wheel,  and  ho  will  bo  watchfol  that  it  continues  to 
march  squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  where  tho 
charge  of  directio'n  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  tho  pivot  of  the  sulxli- 
vision  which  wheels  should  not  clear  tho  wheeling  point, 
the  next  subdivision  would  bo  arrested  and  distances 
lost;  for  tbo  guide  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  hav- 
ing to  describe  an  arc,  in  length  about  a  half  greater  tha!i 
tbo  front  of  tbo  subdivision,  tho  second  subdivision 
would  be  already  up  with  tho  wheeling  point,  whilnt  tbo 
flvst  which  wheels  has  yet  the  half  of  its  front  to  exocutn, 
and  heuco  would  bo  obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half 
bo  executed.  It  is  therefore  prescribed  that  tbo  pivot  of 
each  subdivision  should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inchoH 
in  length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order 
not  to  arrest  the  march  of  tho  next  subdivision.  Tbn 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look  well  to  tho  stej)  of  the  pivot. 
an»l  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened  as  may 
be  judgdd  necessary.  By  tbo  nature  of  thin  movement, 
the  centre  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to  tha 
rear. 

22S.  Tho  guides  will  never  alter  tbo  length  or  the  ca- 
dence of  the  step,  whether  the  chaTige  of  direction  bo  to 
the  eide  of  tho  guide  or  to  the  opposite  side. 

22'.).  The  marker,  placed  lit  tho  wheeling  point,  will  al- 
ways present  his  broast  to  the  flank  of  the  column.  The 
in>tructor  will  take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing  the  pre- 
scribed principles  to  be  observed  ;  bo  will  see  that  each 
subdivision  only  commences  the  clnuige  of  direction  when 
tho  guide,  grazing  tho  breast  of  tho  marker,  has  nearly 
passed  him,  and,  that  tho  marching  flank  does  not  de- 
scribe the  arc  of  too  largo  a  circle,  in  order  that  it  may 
not  bo  thrown  beyond  the  now  directiim. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  tho  guide  of  the 
wheeling  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  over  tho  ground  at  tho 
moment  of  commencing  tho  wheel,  and  will  describe  an 
arc  of  a  circle  whoso  radius  is  equal  to  tho  front  of  tho 
subdivision. 

Aeticlb  Foubtu. 
To  hall  the  cojitmn, 

231.  The  columu  being  in  march,  when  tho  instructor 
shall  wish  to  halt  it,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  Column.    2.  Halt. 

202.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides  also 
will  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have  lost  bothdistancs 
and  direction. 

233.  If  tho  command  hall,  be  not  repeated  with  the 
greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant,  dis- 
tances will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guido,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to  recover 
it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  tha 
following  guide,  who,  if  he  have  marched  well,  will  no 
longer  be  at  his  proper  distance;  and  if  the  latter  regain 
what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be  propagated 
to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  hy  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into  Uh« 
of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column,  righ^ 
in  front,  and  wishiug  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  wll 
place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading 
guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position 
of  tho  gnide  beyond  ;  which  being  executed,  ke  will 
comBiand  : 


PCnOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- -LESSON  V. 


0M.  At  tbii  command,  which   •will  not  be  repeated  br 

lhec»iic-N  of  platoon,  each  of  ilivm   will   p'aco  bimwlf 

,  l.rreklv  iwo   pacf^s  outside  "t   hl»  Rtilde,  and   direct  Iho 

ulijrriment  of  the  platoon  pLTpcudiriilarly  to  the  direction 

(.f  tbe  colnran, 

237.  Ka/'h  clil»-f  boTlntf  alifrned  ».!•  ;;Wtr.(in,  wl'l  cin;- 
r:»tnl  Fboxt.  nii-i  rftnrii  qnirkly  xn  "niK  jilirf  in  column. 

238.  Tlilidi>f)usitiou  bolug  mado,  tl:c  iL-'ru.  i.r  will 
command : 

1.  L'_n  into  tine,  tthctl.    1.  3Iau-.i:. 

239.  At  tho  command  ware*.  briRUly  rppoufpd  fcy  tbe 
cbtefs  uf  platur>ii,  the  front  rank  man  on  lli<>  left  of  cnch 
plMt<'On  will  lacp  U'  111?  I<>n.  nnd  pi  tc"  liiH  V^rpast  li};hlly 
Kg:iiiii«t  llit>  arm  of  tlie  fU-'lc  by  bin  ni'le,  who  stHnd-  lii»t; 
the  platoon*  will  wbo«-l  to  llif  b-ft.  oa  tlio  T'liiicipl'  i^f 
whpflii  fr.im  a  bilt.  and  in  ronformity  to  wbat  > 
fcrib<d  No.  I'Jl.     Kach  cbit-f  will  turn  to   Mk  plot 

■  ilicfcrve  itn  m'"vempnt.  end  wh<»n  tlip  innrcbinK  11  n  ' 
M^ITuaclied  near  the  lino  of  battle,  be  will  cutumaDd  : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  H*l.T. 

340.  Tlie command  halt  will  be  f^iven  whon  the  march- 
ing flanic  uf  tli»  platoou  ia  ibroj  pucon  from  the  line  of 
b»itle, 

211.  The  chief  of  the  Recotd  platoon,  having  hnltod  it, 
will  rptiiru  to  bin  place  aa  a  file  clotur,  piikBiug  around  the 
Ifit  of  bii  sultdivision. 

1^42.  Til"  c:ipttiiu   bitviug  halted  the  first  pIat«on,  will' 
mDve  Fiipi  ily  t  >  the  p  jiut  at  which  tho  ri^lit  of  the  coia- 
paay  wi.l  rout  in  li.ie  of  battle,  and  cominaud  : 

Bight— D&TA^. 

2J3.  At  thia  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  rp- 
oii  the  aliguiarut ;  thi'  front  rank  min  on  the  riaht  of  the 
li'Rdinic  plat--on,  who  llad^  himself  c p.ifsite  tlio  in-  tructor 
eslnblikh  d  on  the  dirccliijn  of  the  (.iiidos.  wW  plico  his  i 
br-ist  1  Klitly  ngiinst  the  left  nrra  of  this  <.fiii:er.  The 
captain  »il  direct  tliH  aligum'Mit  from  tho  right  on  tho 
man  on  the  opposite  (link  of  the  company. 

•H^.  The  cjmpauy  being  allgue.l,  thy  captain  will  cara- 
mand  : 

FOONT. 

245.  The  instructor  eyeing  the  company  in  line  of  l>.\ttle 
will  coaimaud  : 

Guides — Posts. 

249.  At  this  cr>minat:d.  the  covering;  Rfrj*»ut  will  cover 
till-  ciipiHiii,  and  the  U ft  guide  will  return  to  his  plm-uas 
a  file  cli>M-r. 

•.1:47.  If  thi-  column  bo  Iflt  la  front,  and  the  instructor 
should  wi-b  to  foiin  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  ho 
will  place  Li.., stif  ut  platoon  distance  in  front  of  ilie 
IcHdiug  (;"''''"•  f'"-""  to  him,  and  rtclify,  if  nocossary,  the 
pi'siliun  of  the  giiiJo  Lcyund;  which  being  executed,  he 
will  coiumiiud : 

1.  Bijilit  into  line  Kheel.    2,  Mabcu. 

243.  At  the  command  march,  the  fro  it  rank  man  on  the 
right  of  each  platoon  will  f  i^o  ti  the  tight  and  jilaco  his 
briMst  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  iho  (;uido  by  his 
file,  who  stands  fnst ;  eiich  pluiocn  will  wheel  to  the 
ri^ht,  nnd  will  bo  biilt''d  by  its  chiif,  when  the  marching 
flunk  ban  aptir.'achcd  near  th?  lino  of  b:ittle;  for  this 
purpose,  tho  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command : 

1.  rialoon.    2.  Halt. 

240.  The  cjnimand  hnll,  will  be  given  when  the  march- 
ing fl  ink  f.f  the  plnt'/Dii  is  thrue  pares  frcuu  tho  !iue  of 
buttle.  The  chief  of  llie  B'Cuiid  platoon  liuvini;  halii'd 
his  platoon,  will  nsumu  his  placo  in  tho  rank  of  file 

CloSITH. 

260.  Tha  captain  having  hal'ed  tho  flrRt  platoon,  will 
move  brittkly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  compa- 
ny will  rest,  and  command : 


L</1— Dbxss. 

2f>t.  Atthip  ri-nimund,  the  two  platoons  will  dresa  op 

on  :'  i'  ~-  -                     -  -.-.  on    Iho  left  of  the  second 

pi:''  tor,   will    pi  ce  his    brcnot 

lij;'  ■!!  of   tUi.4   oflicer.  and  tho 

cii]  ■  •  '.    :u  the  lelt  on  the  muu 

on  I  :    y. 

I,    tho  captain   will 


riloKT. 

~.'.u.  The  indnictor  will  afterwards  cciumand  ; 
Guide*— Tcmra. 

•zr-i.  At  tbiB  commind,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
lit  of  hU  c<>mp»ny,  tho  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
.  and  thu  lelt  gu<de   will  return  to  his  place  as  a  Hie 

iT. 

..5.  Tl^  '-    ..--...--  ,  .   ,  orriyhl 

(fr»M,  p!c  ■    uhcel, 

iiiileM,  a  :  r  should 

liCU' me  nee  ►my  i  •  n..  --  ij.ri'iil  ('!1-,  l  r  ol.c  of  them, 
biternlly  10  the  light  or  It  ft 

2i6.  Tho  W^'rii'"  r,  •"•I'T"  the  r  mtmnd /./T  (or  right) 
int I  liitr.     '     '  '  '  ':"  that  tiio  rearjiuat 

pliitouui'  'nco  from  the  one  In 

Iront.    'J  1  ■     'n   ord^r  to  detect 

neitUgenci- 1  11  111- 1  ar-.  CI  i_i:  ''    ■     I'litiai  point 

U57.  If  the  column  be  man  iron',  nnd  tho 

Instiuc'.or  should    wi?h   to  .  ,    lino  without 

halting  the  cclumn,  he  wiil  r  ^''  ii'<'  ccmmands  pro 
ecribi^d  Ko.  2j8,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  Icadine  (;uidn. 

2"8.  At  i!'e  c.nimand  iimrcA,  b'ifk'y  rrpeat.d  t-y  tbo 
chie  8  of  pliitooii,  tho  le't  guides  wi  1  halt  short,  tho 
iiiRlruclor,  tfte  thiiifs  of  plat0"n,  and  tho  platoons  will 
coiif 'tin   t  >  what  is  presf  ribed  in  ^o.  2;!a  and  f  •!!  wing: 

259.  If  tho  colimin  be  in  mnrch  left  in  frout,  thit  forma- 
tii'U  will  be  tniul'i  according  to  the  same  iTiiiciplcs,  and 
by  invoree  nienna. 

200.  If  the  column  l>e  marching  rifht  In  front,  nnd  tho 
insiru  tor  should  wish  t»  form  it  Into  Hno  r-  1th.->»i»  h'<llin!^ 
the  colnmn,  and  to  inirch  tho  company    '      "  ' 
front,  he  will  ccmmiind  : 

1.  Vy'jilali'onilfjl  fchitl.    2.  Mabck. 

201.  At  tho  command  vinrrh,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chill's  of  platoon,  the  left  guiiies  will  halt ;  the  miin  Di-xt 
to  tho  lolc  guide  in  em-h  idiitoon  will  mark  lime;  tbo 
platoons  will  wheel  to  the  b-it,  conforming  to  ihe  princl- 
I  les  of  tho  wheel  nii  a  ti.sfd  pivot.  When  the  right  of  the 
platoons  uball  ariive  ui-Jir  tbo  lino  of  battle,  thuiuslrucior 
will  command : 

3.  7''ont;(ir.J.    4.  Mabch.    0.  Guide  ri^jht  {or  h/t.) 

202.  At  tho  fonrth  command,  pivon  at  tho  iost.int  tho 
whoii  is  conipieted,  all  tbo  lucu  of  thi-Cimpnny  will  move 
c£f  together  with  the  step  of  twoiity-i  ight  incbes;  ibo 
captain,  tho  chief  of  the  s.cond  pliitoo'i,  the  cdoring 
pcigeiint,  and  tho  loft  guide  will  take  their  positions  as  In 
liiiouf  battle. 

203.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  tmmo- 
diatily  after  the  f>!irih,  tho  capttiln  and  covering  utrg-uut, 
if  not  alroiidy  tluuu,  will  m.ivo  bii.-k!y  to  tho  side  on 
which  tho  guide  Is  designated  The  non■col;lmis^ioned 
ollior  charged  wlih  the  direction  will  111  ive  rapidly  in 
fr  lit  of  thi  giiid",  and  will  bo ussund  in  his  line  of  mureh 
by  the  insiriicl'T,  as  is  preset ibed  No.  104.  That  nou- 
ODiniiiljfionid  •  fflrer  will  immediately  t»Uo  prints  on  the 
giouod  fts  indicated  in  the  siiine  nun.bvr  ')  hi  imm  will 
tiiko  Ihotonchof  elbow*  toibesiihM.f  ilioguidi',ci)nfoim- 
ing  1h-mselves  totlie  ptinciidi's  of  the  niurch  in  liuo. 

,     204.  Tho  83LUIO  pi'iuciplcs  uro  applicable  to  a  column  left 
In  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  YI. 


2» 


I*  LESSON  SIXTn. 

AmiciB  FiEST. 

To  brtak  Iht  company  into  platnoits,  and  iu  re-j'jmi  Oi¥  com- 
I'dny. 

To  lire/ik  tiie  company  into  platoons. 

265.  Th?  company  marchina;  in  Iho  cadenced  step,  and 
fluppofed  to  inukc  part  of  a  colnmn,  right  in  froof,  when 
the  iuatructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  break  l>y  plntoon, 
hi  will  givj  t!io  order  to  tha  caotain,  who  will  command  : 
1.  B^eak  iiUo  pUitonm,  and  imnioJiately  place  himself 
bo''ore  the  ccutie  of  the  first  pi  toon. 

•2i)G.  At  the  cammntiA  breal- into  pMoons,  the  first  licii- 
touaut  will  pt93  quickly  urouad  the  !•  ft  to  the  centre  of 
his  platoon,  and  Rive  the  ciuiion  :  Mark  time. 

207.  The  "aptaia  will  then  command:     2.  March. 

208.  The  first  til.i''ijn  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward;  the  covering  Bprgeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
left  flrink  of  this  pltitoon  (paaning  hy  the  front  rank)  as 
Boon  aa  the  Jlink  shall  be  riicpngsgcd. 

203.  At  I  he  ciiiimtnd  m«rf7(,  given  by  the  ciptain,  the 
sr^c  )ud  platonn  will  b^ein  to  mark  lime  ;  its  chief  will  im- 
m  diafely  add;  1.  JlitjM  ohlijne;  2.  Maech.  Tho  last 
command  will  bo  given  so  that  this  platoon  may  cnm- 
meuce  obliqning  the  instant  the  rear  rank  rf  the  first 
platoon  shall  huve  p:iR3ed.  The  men  will  ehorten  the 
nt<p  in  ob'iquine,  fo  that  when  tho  command /orwarrf 
mirch  is  given,  ihn  plntorn  ITi;»y  liave  i^s  fxnct  distance. 

270.  Th«  guice  cf  the  second  piaioon  b«ing  near  tho 
direction  of  the  g:iid"  of  th^  first,  tiic  chief  ot  tlie  second 
will  commin'l  Ihrward,  and  add  M  \Rca,  theinetautth.it 
th"  guide  of  his  platoon  ^hall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  lelt  in  front,  the  company  will  break 
into  platoons  by  inversi  mctns,  npiilying  to  the  first  pla- 
toon all  tint  has  bseu  pieociiwed  for  the  second,  and  re- 
ciprorally. 

272.  In  this  caso.  the  left  gnide  of  tho  company  wiM 
shiit  to  tho  rig'it  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the 
covering  serggant  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  reform  the  company, 

273.  Tlie  coluTnn,  by  p  atoon.  being  in  march,  right  in 
front,  when  tha  in.^tructor  sh«U  wi.>h  to  ciiuae  it  to  form 
company,  ho  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command :  Form  compavi/. 

274.  Ilivin^  given  this  command,  flio  captain  will  im- 
ni*^-  iattlvadd:  1.  First  pUiloon;  2.  Sight  obl'que. 

27.'i.  The  chief  of  the  srcoud  platoon  will  caution  it  to 
coufinno  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  Xha  captain  wil'  taon  comni':nl:  3.  Marct. 

'J.~7.  At  this  command,  rept <vt<jd  by  the  chi.  f  of  the 
second,  the  first  platuon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in 
ord  r  to  unmank  the  S'cond;  the  C(>verirg  sirg  ant,  on 
the  k-fc  rf  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of  the 
companv.  passing  byih'  front  ranlc. 

278.  Wlon  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  unmasked 
tho  second,  the  ciptain  w.ll  cominatid  :  1.  Mark  time,  ami 
at  tho  iii'tanc  «he  nnniaslting  shall  be  comploie,  lie  will 
adi;  2.  ^.^Bcn.  Tho  first  platoon  will  then  cca^e  to 
oblique,  and  m.irk  lime. 

27'J  III  ihc'  ni^an  titno  the  ecco&d  platoon  wilt  have 
routinueJ  to  march  straight  forward,  ai  d  when  it  .thnll 
be  nearly  no  with  th«  first,  tho  captain  will  commau'l 
Farwidy  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  thall  nnite, 
add  Mar.u;  tho  fii-at  platoon  will  then  cease  to  mirk 
time, 

250.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  saioe  movement  will 
b.i  executed  by  iuvcrne  means,  tho  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  giving  the  command  Fonrard,  and  the  Miptiiin 
adiling  ihecomuiand  Mabcu,  wheu  th.  jlutoons  are 
nnitod. 

251.  Tho  gnidd  of  tho  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will 
pass  to  its  left  flank  tha  moment  the  pbitoon  begin*  to  ob- 
liijU":  tho  gul'Io  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  r«niair:ng  on 
that  fl^'ikof  the  plat'jon. 

282.  Tho  instroctor  w;U  also  sometimes  canse  the  com- 
pany to  break  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his  own  direct 


commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the  general  com- 
mands prf  scribed  for  the  c«ptain  above  :  1.  Creak  into 
platoons:  2.  Mabch  ;  and,  Form  company;  2.  BIa'CH. 

2S.3.  If.  in  breaking  tho  compiiuy  into  platoons,  the 
f>nl<division  that  breaks  off  shoi.ld  mark  time  too  long,  it 
mi^ht,  in  a  column  of  many  sub<iivisioos,  arrest  the 
march  of  tho  following  one,  which  would  cause  a  length- 
ening of  the  column,  and  a  loss  of  di.*tance^. 

2Si.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  nececsary  that  the 
platoons  which  oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step  too 
much,  in  order  not  »o  lo-e  distance  in  column,  and  not  to 
arre-t  tho  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

JS.5.  If  a  plntoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  fltiik,  it  would  bo 
obliged  to  obllqno  again  to  the  opposite  fl  ink,  to  regain 
the  direction,  and  b)  the  double  movement  arrest,  proba- 
bly, th"  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

285.  The  chiufs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will  face 
their  platoons,  in  order  to  enf  rce  the  observance  of  the 
forrgoing  principles. 

2!s7.  AVhen,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they 
break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that 
each  company  should  contiimn  to  nrirch  in  tlie  same  step, 
nilh  shortening  or  slackenirg.  whilst  that  which  pre- 
cedes breaks,  although  the  following  ci  nirany  should 
close  lip  on  the  preceding  one.  This  attention  is  e6sentii>l 
t  J  guard  against  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

rSS.  Fnnlts  cf  but  Htila  moment,  iu  a  column  of  a  few 
roropani^s,  would  be  si  rir.iis  inconveniences  iu  a  gonor.al 
column  of  mxnj'  battalion^.  Hence  the  inftructor  will 
give  the  gieato«t  care  in  ctneing  all  the  prascribftd  prin- 
ciples to  bo  Rtri.tly  eiiServ^d.  To  tbi?  end,  he  will  \o\A 
himself  on  the  directing  flank,  the  better  to  observe  all 
the  movcmeiitB. 

Abticle  Skcond. 

Beiiiij  in  colmcn,  to  break  fJes  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  lltan 

to  re-enter  into  J-ine. 

280.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  suppoeed  to  con- 
stitute a  subdivision  of  a  column,  light  (or  left)  in  front, 
when  the  instructor  shnll  wisn  to  cause  files  to  break  off 
he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immedi- 
ately turn  to  his  company,  and  command : 

1.  Tiro  fiUi  from  left  (or  riijht)  to  rear.    2.  3IABCU. 

290.  At  tho  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the  left 
(or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the  others  will 
continue  to  mnrch  ptiaitht  forward;  the  two  rear  rank 
m' n  (i  these  files  will,  at  soon  as  the  r^ nr  rank  of  the 
company  shall  clear  them,  move  to  tho  riglit  by  advancing 
the  outer  shoulder;  tho  odi  numb>rwjll  plnc»  himself 
behind  the  third  file  from  that  fin'dc,  the  even  number 
behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the 
odd  number;  the  two  front  rank  men  will,  in  like  man- 
ner, movo  to  the  right  when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company 
shall  clear  ihem,  tie  odd  nnnibor  wi  1  jilaco  h  mself  be- 
hind tho  first  file,  iha  even  number  beliiud  the  secon^  file, 
passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  numler.  If  the 
fib  8  aio  broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will  move  to  the 
left,  advancing  tha  outer  shoulder,  the  (ven  '  umber  of 
tho  rear  rank  wi'l  piare.bim?elf  behind  the  third  fie,  the 
odd  number  of  tho  SMue  rank  behind  tli»  fourth;  the 
even  number  of  the  front  rai.k  behind  the  first  file,  the 
<dd  number  of  tho  suae  rank  behind  the  second,  the 
odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  tho  even 
numbirs.  Tho  men  will  bo  careful  not  to  lose  their  dis- 
tances and  to  keep  aligned. 

;;0l.  If  the  inslrnctor  sbonld  still  wish  to  break  two 
fil'>8  from  the  samo  ftide.  he  will  give  Iho  trdar  to  the 
ca;)'ain,  wlio  will  proofed  as  above  direct'd. 

•1p2.  /.t  the  command  jHiro?!,  given  by  the  captain,  the 
fiKs  already  broker ,  adv.. ncirg  a  little  tl  e  outer  shoulder, 
will  gain  th»  fpace  <  f  two  fil-s  to  the  right,  if  Ih"  files 
aio  broken  from  the  \tU,  and  to  iho  b  ft,  if  the  tl'.os  are 
broken  from  the  rinht,  fhortenit  g,  at  the  same  tim^,  'he 
step,  in  order  to  m«ko  room  between  themteUes  and  the 
rear  rank  of  the  c  •mpany  for  the  files  last  ordered  to  the 
rear  ;  the  latier  will  brtak  by  the  sume  commands  and 


30 


5CU00L  OF  TUE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 


in  lh«  same  maDnor  m  tho  flr^l.  The  m«n  who  JoubU 
•  hould  incroaira  tho  Icii^cth  <f  tho  aU-ji  in  onlor  t4i  [iro. 
T«'nt  ilintiiocps  from  In-iuj;  lii«t. 

2*3.  Thp  instructor  miiy  thns  dimlniih  tho  frnnt  f>f  a 
<.()iilT>any  by  liroHkinR  c.lT  RurcoMiivv  (;rou)>4  of  two  filt'ii, 
but  tho  new  fil'»  mustalwaya  ho  brukcu  from  the  Biimo 
Ni(l<>. 

204.  Tho  Instrnctor,  wkihfng  to  canso  files  hrokoD  off 
til  rvtarn  into  line,  will  (jive  tho  order  to  tlio  cajdalu, 
who  will  Immodiately  command  : 

1.  TirofUt  iiit,.  Unr.    2.  MAncii. 

296.  At  tho  <rommand  vxnrrh,  tlie  first  two  files  of  tliopo 
marrhlnp  by  tho  flank  will  retnrn  briskly  into  lino,  and 
tli«  othois  will  jtftin  the  gpace  of  two  filcH  by  a<lvancing 
tho  inner  shonldur  towarJi  the  flank  to  which  they  bo- 
Iciie. 

•na.  Tho  captain  will  tnrn  to  IiIr  company,  to  watch 
tho  ob-ervauco  of  tho  principles  which  Lave  Just  been 
prei»r.ril)cd. 

■-".ly.  Tho  inBtrnctor  having  caufiel  prcnpn  of  two  tiloa 
to  bri<ak  one  after  another,  and  to  retnrn  ag-iin  into 
line,  will  iiflcrwards  rnu»e  two  or  three  groups  to  break 
tOK0'*ier,  and  for  tliis  |  urpoee,  will  comniauil  :  l\mr  or 
tix  flics  from  hfl  (»r  riijlu)  to  rear;  N  Alien.  Tho  lil>H 
<le-<i^'natcd  will  mark  time ;  each  rank  will  advance  a  lit- 
tle tho  outer  Hhouhhr  as  8f>un  as  tho  rear  rank  of  tho 
company  shall  clear  it.  will  oblique  ut  on^-e,  and  each 
1,'roup  will  place  itself  behiml  tho  four  neighboring  files, 
and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  tho  movement  had  been 
executed  group  by  group,  faking  cure  that  tho  diBtances 
are  preserved. 

■2'JS.  Tho  instructor  will  nest  order  the  captain  to  cause 
two  or  throe  groups  to  be  brought  into  lino  at  ouce,  Who 
turning  to  tho  company,  will  comniund  ; 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — Mahch. 

2'0.  At  the  command  vmrch,  the  files  (designated  will 
a<lvancn  tho  inner  shonlder,  movo  up  and  form  ou  tho 
Hunk  of  the  company  by  tho  shoite-it  linos. 

VAn.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  tho 
pniilo  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  ob  tho  nearest 
front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will  also  ojwn 
out  to  make  room  for  files  onlerod  into  lino. 

.'JOl.  Tho  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed 
in  tho  following  order:  tho  left  files  as  if  tlio  company 
was  marching  by  tho  right  flank,  and  tho  riaht  files  as 
if  the  ccrni.iauy  was  inarching  by  tho  left  flank.  Ounse- 
ijueutly,  whenever  tljore  is  on  tho  right  or  lett  of  a 
subdivision,  a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  jt 
will  be  broken  singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  tho  preservation  of  d'stanceniii 
column  that  tho  nu-n  should  bo  habituated  in  the  schools 
oJ  detail  to  execute  tho  movements  of  this  anicle  with 
precision. 

.^03.  If  now  files  br  ken  off  do  not  sup  well  to  tho  left 
or  right  in  obliquing;  if,  when  files  are  ordered  into 
lino,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptiiudo  and  proci- 
eiou,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will  bo  arrested  in 
their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  columu  to  lo  length- 
ened out. 

304.  Tho  instructor  will  placo  himself  on  (he  flank 
from  which  tho  files  are  broken,  ^o  assure  hiuuelf  (.f  tho 
exact  obscrvaixo  of  tho  prlnciploH. 

.  .305.  I'ilos  will  only  be  broken  off  from  tho  side  of 
direction,  iu  order  that  tho  whole  crapatjy  may  easily 
pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  nnrch. 

AUTICLE  TniBD. 

Ta  march  the  column  in  route,  and  to  exectUe  tiM  movements 
iiicidcnl  thereto. 

306.  ThesWiftncss  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hnndred 
and  ten  steps  ia  a  niinuto;  thi4  swiftness  will  be  habit- 
ually maintained  in  columns  in  route,  when  the  roads 
and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  Tho  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  Instructor 


simll  wish  toca«s«  it  to  march  in  t)<e  uuto  step,  he  will 
rommund  : 

1.  Column,  forward.    2.  Guide,  f<;rt  (or  ri]/hl)    S.  Bout* 
ttrp,    4.  M&KCU. 

308.  At  tile  command  niarrl,  rejioated  by  the  cajt-iln. 
the  two  ranks  will  step  oir  le^;ether;  tho  reir  rank  will 
tal^e,  in  marching,  by  Btiorteuicg  a  few  ittejig,  a  distance 
ofoiiopoce  (tweutyK-ight  inchvs)  from  the  rank  pncfd- 
lug,  which  distance  will  bu  coiuculed  from  tho  liriaxts 
.'flhe  iiion  in  th*  rear  rank,  to  the  knapsaiks  (>f  the  men 
in  the  tront  nink.  The  men,  wiihuut  lurther  command, 
will  immediately  carry  their  arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in 
ihesrhoolif  the  soldier,  Mo.  2 1  a.  They  will  no  K.ng'T 
be  riHjuiretl  to  march  in  tho  oolenced  ptvce,  or  with  tlio 
panv?  foot,  or  to  remain  sili  nt.  The  files  will  niarrti  nt 
o>iN>;  but  care  will  be  taken  to  pr<'vent  the  rank*  from 
intermixing,  the  front  rank  from  getting  in  advance  f I 
the  gtiide,  a'ld  the  rear  rank  from  "(MUiug  to  too  g'uat  u 
distance. 

'.'.OO.  The  company  marcbing  in  the  route  step,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  to  chaugo  direction,  which  will  bn 
ex<'Cuted  without  formal  conuuan<ls,  on  a  simple  caution 
from  the  aiptain  :  tho  rear  rank  will  come  up  to  chaneo 
dinclion  In  the  same  manner  as  the  front  rank,  h^aeh 
rank  will  conform  itself,  althoucb  in  the  route  klep,  to 
the  principles  which  have  bren  prescribed  for  tho  cliniign 
in  clotted  ranks,  w  ith  this  difl^i-ronce  only  ;  that  tho  pivot 
man,  instead  of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will  t:>ko  steiis  of 
fourtocm  inches,  iu  onler  to  clejir  the  wheeling  {loint. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  tho  route  step,  to  caiiKO 
it  to  pass  to  the  cadonced  step,  tho  instructor  will  first 
order  pieces  to  bo  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  then 
command : 

1.   Qiiitk  lime.    2.  MAncit. 

Till.  At  the  command  m<ircA,  tho  men  will  resume  the 
cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  uf 
sixteen  inchos  between  onch  rank. 

312.  The  comjuiuy  marching  in  tho  cadenced  pace,  tho 
instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  tho  route  step,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  /.'<)t(/t'  sliy.    2.  MABcn. 

313.  At  tho  command  )n<(r(7i,  tho  front  rank  will  conti- 
nue tho  step  of  twenty  eijrlit  inches,  the  rear  rank  will 
t»ke,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  tho  distance  <p1 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front  rank  ;  tho  men  will 
carry  their  arms  at  will. 

311.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  tho  route  step,  and 
tho  instructor  should  suppose  the  ncceynity  of  marching 
by  tho  flunk  iu  the  same  direction,  ho  will  command  : 


1.  V'lhijiawihijtheriijlit  (or  h-ft)flnnl:. 
ri^jht.)    3'.  Maucii. 


2.  I!y  file  Ufl  (or 


315.  At  the  command  mrtrc/*.  tho  company  will  face  to 
tho  right  (or  left)  in  murchin;;,  the  captain  will  place 
hiniHoIf  by  the  side  of  the  guidii  whocomiurts  tho  leadini; 
flunk  :  this  guiiio  will  wljiul  immediately  to  the  left  or 
rij^ht ;  all  tho  flies  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  tho 
same  spot  as  the  gui.l* ;  if  there  be  files  broken  off  to  the 
roar,  thoy  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  thoirreepertivepliicoH, 
and  follow  tho  movement  of  tho  company. 

31  (J.  The  instructor  having  caused  tho  company  lo  bo 
ogaiu  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing  and 
diminishi)igfrout,  by  platoon,  which  will  Ik>  ex'M:ufo(l  by 
the  same  commands,  and  the  some  means,  as  if  the  com- 
pany wore  marching  in  tho  cadencod  step.  When  tho 
compony  breaks  into  platoons,  thechlef  of  each  will  movo 
to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  tho  plaroofthe 
guide,  who  will  stop  back  into  tho  ri'ur  rnnk. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and 
pupposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  can 
cause  the  front  to  bodiminishedand  increased,  by  section, 
if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or  more. 

318.  Tho  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing 
front,  by  scQtion,  will  bo  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  platoon,    Tho 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY—  LESSON  VI. 


31 


right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  commanded  by  the  cap- 
tain and  first  lieutenant,  respectively  ;  the  Ictt  sections, 
by  thi:  two  next  subalterns  in  rank,  or,  iu  their  absence, 
by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  ecction, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Break  inlo  sections.    2.  MiBcn. 

320.  As  soon  as  tho  platoons  shall  bo  broken,  each  chief 
of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  tho 
front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thns  displaced  will  fall 
back  into  the  rear  ramk ;  tho  file  closers  will  close  up 
within  one  paco  of  this  rank. 

.^21.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in  the 
column  in  route,  the  movement  will  never  be  executed  in 
the  manceuvrcs,  whatever  may  be  tho  front  of  l^e  com- 
pany. 

y'22.  When  the  i  nstructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  platoons, 
he  will  give  the  order  to  tho  captain,  who  will  commai>d  : 

1.  Form  jUatoous.      2.  SIar-CH. 

32:5.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section  will 
pliice  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides  will  pass 
into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command  viarch,  the  move- 
ment will  be  execute!  as  bus  been  prescribed  for  forming 
company.  The  moment  tho  platoons  are  formed,  the 
chiefs  of  tho  left  sections  will  return  to  their  places  as  file 
closers. 

;i.;4.  Tho  instructor  will  also  cause  to  bo  executed  the 
diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  files,  as  prescribud 
iu  tho  preceding  article,  and  iu  the  same  manner,  as  if 
marching  in  the  cadenced  ttep.  When  the  company  is 
broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions  must  not  be  re- 
diicetl  to  a  f  out  of  less  than  six  files,  not  counting  the 
chief  of  th)  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by 
section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the 
route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  tho  same  di- 
rection, by  tho  commands  ami  the  means  indicated, 
Nos.  314  and 315.  Tho  moment  the subdi^Hions. shall  face 
to  ihe  right  (or  left),  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel  to 
the  left  (or  right),  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direction, 
and  to  unite  with  tlic  rear  file  of  tli»  suhilivision  immedi- 
ately preceding.  The  file  closers  wiil  take  their  habitual 
places  in  tti3  march  by  tho  flank,  before  the  union  of  sub- 
ilivisions. 

KlCy.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  tho  right  flank, 
and  tho  instructor  ehould  wish  to  imdouble  the  flies, 
which  might  sometimes  be  found  uecettary,  he  will  inform 
tho  captain,  who,  afior  causing  the  cadeuced  step  to  be 
rnsiiraed,  and  aims  to  be  shouldered  or  supported,  will 
Command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  undoiMc  files.    2.    Mar'"B. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  con- 
tinup  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  number^  will 
shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will  place 
themselve.s  pruinptiv  behind  tho  odd  numbers;  the  rear 
riink  will  gain  a  step  'o  tho  left  so  as  to  rc-take  the 
toncli  of  elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

82S.  If  tho  company  bo  marching  by  the  left  llauk,  it 
will  lie  tho  even  niunbets  who  will  continue  lo  march  for- 
ward, and  tho  odd  numbers  who  will  undouble. 

32'J.  If  the  instructor  should  wisli  to  double  the  files, 
li«  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  com- 
niund  : 

1.  In  four  rault,  douhle  files.    2.  March. 

,130.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double  in  the 
manner  as  explained,  whuu  tho  company  f.Koa  by  the 
right  or  tho  left  flank.  The  iuatructur  \Kill  afterwards 
nnuHe  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  Tho  various  movements  proscribed  in  this  lesson 
may  be  exi-cuted  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  be 
liroiiylit,  by  degress,  to  pass  over  at  tliis  gait  about 
eleven  hundred  yards  in  eoven  niinute.<<. 

332.  Wlieu  tho  company  marching  in  the  ronto  stop 
shall  halt,  tho  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  thi'  command 
h-tU,  and  tlie  whole  will  iihoulJer  arms. 


333.  Marching  in  the  route  stop,  the  men  will  be  per- 
mitted to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  th«y  shall  find 
most  convoHieut,  paying  attention  only  to  holdinf;  the 
muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 

Article  Focbtii. 

CowUermarch. 

331.  Tho  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  con- 
stitute part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he  will 
command : 

1.  CountcrnuircU.      2.  Company,    right— Fi.cs.     3.  Sy  file 
left.    i.  March. 

33.5.  At  the  second  command,  tho  company  will  tico  to 
the  right,  the  two  guides  to  tho  right  about;  the  captain 
will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and  cause  two  files  to 
break  to  tho  rear,  and  then  place  himself  by  the  sido 
of  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

33G.  At  the  eomraand  vi'vch  both  guides  will  stand 
fast;  the  company  will  step  off  emnrtly  ;  the  first  file, 
conducted  by  the  Cflptain,  will  wheel  around  the  right 
guide,  and  t^irect  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as  to 
arrive  behind,  and  two  p.ices  frsm  the  left  guide  ;  each 
file  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground 
around  the  right  guide  ;  the  leading  file  having  arrived  at 
a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  tho  captain  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Comptuiy.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front.    4,  Iihj?U— Dress. 

337.  Tho  first»command  will  be  given  at  four  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  filo  is  to  rest. 
33S.  At  tho  so  ond  command,  tho  company  will  hUt 
339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

310.  At  the  fourih,  the  company  will  dress  by  tho 
ri,:ht;  tLc  captain  will  stop  two  paces  outside  of  the  left, 
guide,  now  on  the  rigLt,  and  direct  the  aliKnmont,  so  that 
rhe  frMiit  ranli  may  be  embused  betweon  the  two  guides  ; 
theccmpauy  being  aligni'd,  he  will  command  Front,  and 
place  Urn  self  befoio  the  con  ti  r  of  the  company  as  if  in 
column  ;  the  guides,  passing  along  the  front  rank,  will 
shift  tj  tho'r  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  cf  that 
rank. 

311.  la  a  c^'Iumn,  by  platoon,  Iho  countermarch  will 
bo  executed  by  the  8,.mo  commands,  anil  according  to 
fhosbme  principles:  the  guide  of  each  platoou  will  face 
about,  a-id  its  cliirff  will  plHCo  himself  by  the  side  of  tho 
file  nn  the  right,  to  conduct  it.  * 

312.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  th'*  countermarch  will 
be  extcuted  by  inverse  commands  and  moan!>,  but  accor- 
ding to  tho  same  principles.  Thus,  the  movement  will 
be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions,  if  tho  right 
boiu  front,  and  by  the  lift  flank,  if  th?  left  bo  in  front  ; 
in  both  cases  tho  eubdivinions  will  wheel  by  filo  to  tho 
fide  of  tho  frjLt  rauk. 

Article  Fifiu. 

Ueing  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  rigid  (or  left) 
into  line  of  baltlc. 

313.  Tho  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in 
march,  the  inctructor,  wishing  to  form  it  on  tho  light 
into  lino  of  battle,  will  command  : 

1 .  0)1  the  right  into  line.  2.  Guide  right. 

34t.  At  the  second  con  mnnd,  tlif  guide  of  e.ich  pi  itoon 
will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  fl  mk,  and  tho  men  will 
touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  column  will  continue  to 
tnarrli  stiaight  forward. 

'■A't.  Tho  icstfuctor  li.-iving  given  the  second  commaud, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  wliiili  the  right  of  Ihrf 
oompuny  ought  to  nst  iu  li'e,  an  I  pla  o  himself  facir.g 
the  point  (if  direction  to   Ih.i  loft  whirli    bo  will  choose. 

3lr>.  Thu  lino  of  b.itllo  oii;:lil  («  be  so  chosen  thit 
tho  guide  of  each  platoon,  alter  h.iviug  turiitd  to  the 
riKht,  may  Irivo,  at  least,  leu  p  ices  to  lake  before  arriving 
upon  that  lino. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY- -LESSON Vl. 


347.  Tha  haai  of  the  column  being  nf'urly  opposite  t»  | 
the  iDStructo",  the  c>i  f  of  cbo  fl-st  i  iBtoon  w  II  ccm-  i 
mind:  1.  Jii^Mtum;  Midwhtn  exactly  opposlio  to  Uuit  ' 
poini,be  will  add  :  ! 

JH'i.  At  the  conirainl.  marcS,  tho    first   platoon    wll 

turn  '"  '' ■•    !  •  ■■  'i*"  rmlty  wjih   tha  i>riuciiIo»  pro- 

'   il'  .h>  B  Idiar,   No.  i'^l.     Its  piii'lo 

u.M  1  tJ  br'na  th«  fr^nt  rank    niiin, 

lui;  ..  ,  .,  .  ,)■  "  I  ■  t .  llio  iiuirucior;  tho  chl 'f  of 
tb«  pint  (ID  will  ninrch  Ix-fore  its  c?nt>T  ;  Hud  wi'Cd  iti 
KUide  bb^l  bo  nea,-  ihp  liuo  of  battle,  bo  will  com  mind  : 

i .  J'liiiuun.    2.  Halt. 

PAO.  vii  ill'  iiim.ind  hnlt,  whifli  will  be  pven  nt  <h(» 
inatant  tb-  riKbt  of  ilie  platoon  Hhull  nrrivf  nt  ihn  diis- 
tnnoo  rf  ihr<M>  t'lics  from  Ilia  iluo  of  buttle,  the  plrttoon 
will  b»!t;  lb-  Jil-d,  not  yet  iu  lino,  will  c  inn-  up  jTi'inptly. 
The  jiU'de  will  throw  bimBHf  on  the  linn  of  baltla.  oppo- 
site lo  on«  <if  tho  tiiree  it-ft  flits  of  hit  pintooa  '  hnwill 
fHce  to  the  iuilruc  or,  who  vrili  nliiin  biin  ou  the  p  int  of 
direction  to  tbv  left.  The  chiiif  of  T'l«toon  baTiiii;.  nt  tlm 
snnia  limn,  (touo  to  ibo  point  wheru  thi  rii-ht  ol'  lh<- 
crvmpany  U  to  rest,  will,  as  sooa  as  bu  socs  all  ibi*  fUe^i  of 
platoon  iu  line,  command: 


PM).  At  this,  tb'i  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the 
front  rHOk  iukh,  who  fln.l"  hiniPnIf  oppoStfa  to  tho  gni  lo, 
will  roat  Ilia  brtftHt  li^b'ly  acniust  the  right  arm  of  bis 
puMe,  and  tho  chief  ol  the  platoon,  from  tbo  right,  will 
direct    h  ■  ali^omont  on  this  man. 

351.  Tlifl  so  Olid  plrito.n  will  c  mtiunc  to  mirrlj  .struight 
forwurd,  until  its  Kiiidi»  hIi'iII  arrive  ojipusito  lo  the  lott 
lile  cl  tli'j  li  — '  •  i'  ^^  i'l  'lii-n  turn  to  thu  right  at  Ibo  coin- 
nitndofi^  .:cii  t.iil^rfts  tbo  lino  of  baffle,  its 

guiile  dinr  n  tho  'efl  flln  of  tbo  first  platoon. 

362.  'Ibi-;....       .......,;  arrived  at  Ili>)  dldtaiice  of  ibioe 

paci'8  from  iho  huu  ol  buttle,  tins  platoon  will  be  halted, 
as  preicribtd  f.^r  the  fir>-t ;  at  tb"  i«stKnt  It  hats,  its 
guidi-  will  Hjiiii  j;  on  the  line  ol  bi  tie,  oppnfite  to  one  of 
tho  three  Uft  li.es  of  b  H  jilatoon,  and  will  be  assured  iu 
bis  position  liy  llw  itstnjctor.- 

BoS  'Ibe  chief  of  the  s-co'id  platoon,  aecinc;  all  its  filoR 
inline,  audits  guide  ostablished  on  tbo  direction,  will 
comidaud : 

Jli'jhl—'Dacss. 

354.  Iliving  given  this  command,  bp  -R-ill  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  <  loser,  piissin^  uround  the  I^ft ;  the  eecond 
platoon  will  drms  iiu  tn  tli>i  alignment  of  iho  first,  and, 
when  ostublibbed,  tbu  captuia  will  comm^Dd  : 

FUOM. 

SS**.  The  movement  cndud,  tbo  ir,s;r;:c!:ir  will  ccni- 
inaud : 

Ciddei—Voft'S. 

r.5G.  At  lb  s  command,  the  two  );ni  k,-  vi  i  uuiiii  to 
their  placoii  in  liuc  of  buttle. 

307.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  wiil  form  on 
the  left  into  line  of  luttio,  uccordiiv;  t.)  Iho  siiiiie  piiml. 
pies,  UMil,  by  iuvereo  inciiiiH.  apiilyiii^  to  iln  i-.oiid  pla- 
toon whit  IS  pie-ictlhed  (or  the  firitt,  iiud  ri  cipicc'-lly.  The 
chiefof  tbo  second  platoon  b:ivini;  aligned  il.lii.iii  the  point 
of  appiii,  (ih ->  left.)  will  rotire  to  hi«  plxco  as  a  file  closer. 
The  r^iptain  having  liultcd  thti  firi>t  llatuou  Ibree  paces 
behiuU  ilio  line  of  battle,  will  go  to  tbo  same  p„iut  to 
align  this  platoc>n,  and  tbi.<n  command:  Kho.nt.  At  the 
conimiind,  giiulfs— posts,  gi.en  l.y  tho  iniitiuutcr,  the  cap- 
tain will  shut  to  his  prop,  r  llauk,  aud  the  (guides  luko 
their  pUc  8  in  tho  I  no  of  battlo. 

3.58.  V»  h>-n  the  c  mpanies  of  a  rcgiraent  are  to  booxT- 
eised.  nt  the  »ame  time,  in  tho  scho.l  of  the  company,  the 
(olonel  will  Inolcnte  the  lesson  tr  lessons  they  are  sevo- 
rally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  c  nunenco  by  a  bugle 
kigual,  and  teriniuato  in  a  liko  manner. 


FbrnuUiom  qf  a  tompinp  from  ttoo  ranki  into  thtijU  rank, 

and  rc( ijtrucalt}/, 

369.  The  company  beinp  formed  Into  two  ranks  In  tho 
m  inner  Indicated  No.  >i,^cho^l  of  ihe  roldier,  aud  iitii>- 
IHjsed  t<i  uiike  part  if  a  column,  right  br  left  in  fronr, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it,into  liiuglorauk, 
bo  wilt  command  : 

1.  Ih  one  r<mk,  /orm  Compcny.    2.  llAncii. 

.1'/).  At  the  first  command,  tbo  right  guide  will  face  to 
the  right. 

•SGI.  At  the  command  marcJi,  tho  right  guide  will  step 
off  and  martb  iu  tbo  prulongaiiou  of  tbo  Irunt  rank. 

3i;i.  The  first  file  will  !>i' p  i^lf  ui  tie  oaii.e  time  with 
ihegiiiJe;  the  front  rai:k  luiu  will  turn  to  the  rl.  ht  hi 
the  timt  btep,  follew  tie  ^Uide,  aud  be  bimi-eli  followed 
by  tb  .•  rear  ruuk  tu>in  of  Ins  Ilie,  who  wiilmme  to  turn 
on  tho  Bum'-  f  <■(  wh-T"  )'■■  had  lurned.  The  sec  iiut  file, 
rtbd   Ku;c  ier    files,    will    step  off    as 

baa  teen  inst,  ihe  fr.nt  rank   ni'in  of 

each  file  :  y  the  rear  rank  iii'in  of  tbo 

file  next  on  M     r.^m.     Hi-   euptuin  will   siipii  intend  the 
tnovemeiit,  and  wuen  tho  lasi  m  m  flnill  have  ^tepjcd  ofT, 
be  V  ill    halt  the  eomi'any,  and  lace  it  ttj  the  fniit. 
3t3.  The  fi'.o  clo!)(-rs  will  tak.^  tueirpiucesiu  liiio  of  bat- 
I  tie,  tivo  paces  iu  tear  of  the  lank. 

j      3GI.  The  couipany  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  In- 
I  Btructor  shall  with  to  formitinio.tworauks,  bo  willcuui-^ 
inabd  : 

1.  la  luso  rai^hs,  form  company.    2,  Company  rght—Vh^t. 
3.  OlAiicn. 

3C5.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  fico  to 
the  ri^bt ;  the  ri):hi  gnido  and  the  man  ou  ihe  right  will 
ri'iu  liu  fdced  to  llu-  ftunt. 

Stli.  At  the  cu'uinand  marc/i.  lb<»  ni«n  who  have  fared 
to  the  right,  wilLMep  >lf,  nna  furin  bUx  in  tliu  lollowiug 
inauULr:  ibi>  eecud  luun  iu  Ibo  iiuik  will  pla.-e  biniRulf 
liebind  the  first  lo  foriu  the  first  file,  ihe  third  will  place 
biniKelf  by  tbeBide  ol  the  first  in  tie  troit  rank;  tbo 
fonrtli  behind  the  third  in  tb«  rear  riik.  All  tho  obers 
will,  iu  like  mauuory  plaeo  tUeni -elves,  alternately,  tu  the 
fiout  and  icir  tank,  and  iliiis  lurm  hies  of  two  nieu,  on 
t'je  lelt  of  those  alrondy    oiiued. 

3C>7.  The  format  ons  abive  JeHciiboil  will  bo  hnVitually 
executed  by  tbo  right  cf  the  conipanies  :  but  when  tho 
iustrjictor  shall  wish  to  ha  e  tbcin  execiiled  bv  the  lefc, 
bo  will  lace  the  ccinpauy  about,  itud  post  tbo  guidos  iu  tho 
roar  tank. 

."iiS.  'the  formation  will  then  bo  exocnted  by  tho  i>nme 
commands,  and  aocoiding  l«  th^  same  prinriplefiiis  by  tbo 
front  rank  ;  tbu  niovi  uieut  roiumeuciiig  with  the  lolt  file, 
now  becomo  tho  ri(:ht,  ai.d  in  estb  fue  by  the  rear  tank 
man.  now  bicnme  tho  front  :  the  leit  guiJo  will  coufonn 
to  what  has  b'Oii  j*iefCril'od  fi  r  the  right. 

30'J.  The  foriuation  ended,  tbo  iusiructor  will  fiic«  the 
company  to  iis  proper  Iront. 

IJ.'O.  When  a  battalion  iu  line  li-'B  to  execute  eitl'or  of 
the  tonimtion«  above  iies>ribod.  the  Colonel  w.ll  ciiue  it 
to  break  to  the  roar  by  tbo  right  or  left  of  companies,  and 
will  then  giv«  tbu  rouimauds  just  prescribed  lor  the  in- 
strnctor.  JCach  company  wiU  execute  tho  movtuient  as 
if  acting  slncly. 

Formntioii  of  a  cnmjvinn  fmin  tiro  rnnl-n  into  four,  nnil  y  i- 
procaily,  ul  a  halt,  aiui  in  ntareli. 

371.  Tho  company  beirg  formed  In  two  ranks,  at  ahalt, 
at'd  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  richt  i'l  ircnt, 
when  the  luBtructor  shall  with  to  form  it  into  four  raukv, 
be  will  commana : 

1,  III  four  ra»l-»,  form  compdny,      2,  fjinpnuy  I^—I^oz, 
3.  Makcu  (sr  (2uiiMc>/iiii7v'— MaucuJ. 

072.  At  tbo  second  command,  the  left  giiido  will  remain 
faced  to  the  front,  tho  company  will  face  to  the  Itft  :  the 
rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  ol  one  pace  fro-n  tho 
front  ruuk  by  u  wido  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men 


INSTEUCTIOir  FOR  SKIKMISHEKS. 


33 


will  form  iutj  fuur  rsiuks  aa  prescribed  iu  the  school  of 
the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  comniAiid  inarch,  the  first  fil»i  of  fonr  men 
will  rpfaco  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All  the 
other  files  of  four  will  step  off.  and  clcsins;  auixessively  to 
abotit  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  lialt,  and  im- 
mediately face  to  the  front,  the  men  roniaining  doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  thoir  cow  places  in  line  of 
battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

875.  1'he  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  w'ill 
command : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  C'liiipiHy.       2.    Compamj  rujltt — FaCS 
3.  Habcu  (or  double  quick— M\B.tn). 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand 
fast,  the  company  will  f.-tcc  to  the  right. 

.378.  At  th'?  comraind  nhr.-ch,  the  right  guide  will  stop 
off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The 
leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at  the  same  time,  the 
oilier  files  ptanciing  faiit;  the  seeond  file  will  step  off 
when  there  shall  be  between  it  «ind  the  first  space  suffi- 
cient (0  S»rm  into  two  ranks.  The  f 'llowins;  files  will 
ex?cute  successively  what  has  been  prercribed  for  the 
Focond.  As  soon  as  the  last  fi'o  shall  have  its  d:stance, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Compavy.    2.  Halt.    3.  Fkont. 

379.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  cmpany  beins:  fjrmed  in  two  tanks,  and 
marching  t<*the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  four  rank",  he  will  command  : 

1.  la  four  ranis,  form   compaii;/.    2.    Bij   the    Iffl    double 
Jile$.    3.  Mabcq  (or  doubh  <ptick  March.) 

381.  At  the  command  march,  tha  left  gnido  and  the  left 
file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front :  the  company  will  make  a  hnlf  face  to  the  left,  the 
odd  numbers  placing  tlienifelvea  behind  the  even  nam • 
bors.  The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten 
thoir  steps  a  little,  to  permit  tlie  odd  numbers  of  the  front 
rank  t^g-^t  between  them  and  tlie  even  numbers  of  that 
rank.  The  files  thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file, 
will  continue  to  march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps 
slightly,  so  as  to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide  ; 
each  file  will  close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left, 
and  when  at  the  proper  distance  from  the  file,  will  face  to 
the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  tho  touch 
of  elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  comjany  being  in  march  to  Jthe  front  in  four 
ranks,  when  tho  instructor  shall  wish  ta  form  it  into  two 
ranlu,  he  will  command  :  ^ 

1.  In  lico  ranhs,  form  compani/.     2,  I?_y  the  right,  undouhle 
filet.    3.  Kabcu  (or  double  quick — Habch.) 

383.  At  the  commar'd  march,  the  left  gnide  and  the  left 
file  of  the  cxjmpany  will  contiuuo  to  march  straight  to 
the  front ;  tho  comp.iny  will  make  a  half  f  ice  to  the  right 
and  march  obliquely,  lengthening  the  steps  a  little,  in  or- 
(lor  to  keep,  as  near  .as  possible,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As 
soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  loft  shall  have  gained  to 
the  right  the  inteival  necessary  for  the  left  fi'e  to  lorm  into 
two  rank's,  the  second  file  will  face  to  tho  front  by  a  half 
face  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  will 
immediately  furm  into  two  ranks,  arid  take  tho  touch  of 
»lbowi  to  the  loft.  Each  file  will  execute  successively, 
what  h.as  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  Ihe  left, 
and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file  next 
on  its  right  has  oblifiued  the  required  distanco  and  faced 
to  the  frott. 

381.  If  the  company  bo  supposed  to  make  jiart  of  a 
cMumn,  loft  in  front,  those  different  movenienls  will  ho 
executed  amrding  to  the  shuio  principles  and  by  iuverso 
moans,  subdtitiitii'g  the  indication  hft  for  ri'jhi. 

EXn  OF  THE  SCnooi  OP  TDK  COMPANV. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR,  fcJKlRMiaiiERS. 

Geucial pri.uipki  and  diiision  ofinsfrvction. 

1.  Tho  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  suljocted 
to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means  of 
moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the  greatest  prompti- 
tude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be 
executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor 
is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would  materially  inter- 
fere with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmisbeis  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way 
far,  and  to  protect  tho  advance  of,  the  niiin  cori  g,  their 
movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps  as  to  keep 
it  constiihtly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve,  the 
strength  and  composition  of  which  will  vary  according 
to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  dis'aBcn 
of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will  be  stifflcient 
for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  bo  to  fill  vacaut 
places,  furnish  tho  line  with  cartridges,  relieve  the  fa- 
tigued, and  serve  as  a  rallying  poiut  for  the  skirmishers. 

C.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  be- 
sides the  company  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  re- 
quired, composed  of  entire  companies,  which  will  be  em- 
ployed to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the  line  aa 
may  be  warmly  attacked  ;  this  reserve  should  be  strong 
enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies  dep'oyed  as 
skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserves  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of 
the  line  of  skirmishers,  tbe  company  reserves  at  one 
hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at  four  hun- 
dred paces.  This  rule,  howev  r,  is  n'  t  invariable.  Tho 
reserves,  while  holding  themselves  within  sustaining  dis- 
tince  of  the  line,  should  be,  as  much  as  possiblo,  in  po- 
sition to  afford  each  otlier  mutual  protection,  and  must 
carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of  the  ground  to  con- 
ceal themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  shel- 
ter themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed  in 
quick,  or  doubl  ■  quick  time.  The  rua  will  be  resorted  to 
only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces 
in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habituilly  indicated  by  the 
sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  Theofficers,  and,  if  necessary,  thenon-coramifisionod 
officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  tho  commands  to  be  exe- 
cuted as  soon  as  tliey  are  gircn  ;  but  to  avoid  mistalies, 
when  the  signals  arc  employed,  they  will  wait  until  tho 
last  buglfc  note  is  souudod  before  cemmenciug  the  move- 
ment. 

12  When  skirmishers  are  order-^d  to  move  rapidly,  the 
ofhcers  and  non-commissioned  ofiicers  will  see  that  tho 
men  ecotomise  their  strength,  keep  cool,  and  profit  by  all 
the  advantaf,es  which  the  ground  may  offer  for  cover.  It 
is  only  by  this  c-nlinuiil  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all 
grndss,  that  a  line  of  skirmishers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  he  divided  into  flvo  nrtiileR, 
and  subdivided  us  follows: 

ABTICLE   FiBST. 

1.  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  To  deploy   by  the  flaiiV . 

3.  To  extend  iutervalB. 

4.  To  close  intervals. 

5.  To  roliuve  skirmiehcrs. 

Abticie  Secom". 

1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  retreat  in  line. 

3.  To  rh  (iigo  (iirccllon. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank, 


34 


INSTRUCTION"  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


ABncLi  TaiEP 

1.  To  flr*  nt  ahalt. 

2.  Tn  (Ire  marrhiog. 

Aetkle  Fovrtb. 

\.  The  rally. 

'J.  To  form  column  to  marcli  in  any  tliroclioii. 

■J.  The  aaieutily. 

ABTifLE  Fifth. 

1.  To  denloy  a  battalion  as  gkirmisher*. 

'Jt.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  us  tkiiniislier.s. 

It.  In  the  flr»t  foar  articleB,  it  is  coppofird  that  tUe 
laoTements  are  extcnted  by  a  coraiany  drpluvert  asikii- 
iniabani,  en  a  front  equal  to  Ibat  of  tl;e'  lattalion  in 
order  of  ba'tlf.  In  thi;  fl:tL  artirlo,  it  i»  nupposed  that 
<-afh  company  of  the  battalion,  bcinpr  deplo.M'd  as  eklr- 
uil»berB,  occiipiei  a  tront  of  one  hundred  paccn.  From 
fb«8e  two  examples,  rules  may  bo  deduccMi  fir  all  cases, 
wbatrTrr  may  l-e  the  numerical  .itreactta  of  the  skirmish- 
rn,  and  the  extent  of  ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 

Abtk-lk  Fiut. 


D^jtloymeHlf, 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in  two 
wa>B  :  forward,  and  liy  the  flank. 

Itt.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when  the 
(umpany  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  eftab- 
lisbe.l  as  skirmishers  :  it  will  h'^  deployed  by  the  flank, 
when  it  finds  itself  alre.idy  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  lif-ployeri  as  skirmifih- 
tT6,  it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon 
will  >ie  B  ibdirided  into  two  sections;  the  comrades  in 
l/ntlle,  finning  groups  of  four  men,  will  be  careful  to 
know  and  susfain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure 
bijiself  that  the  files  in  i ho  center  ol  each  platoon  and 
•ierti<ju  are  <  etiiinated. 

iii.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmisherii  en  its 
right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other  named  file  what- 
hoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  bo  thrown  for- 
ward with  the  (greatest  possible  rapidity  on  any  ground 
they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 

1!'.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve 
tb  «ir  alig^imetit.  '  ut  no  advaiita(;es  which  the  ground 
lu.iy  pi-se*it  bli   -.,.1  be  Racriflced  to  attain  tUis  rcgulaiity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmiRhers  depends  on  the 
extent  ol  ground  to  be  covered  ;  but  in  g  iieral,  it  is  not 
proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should  be  removed 
fiiore  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  Thg  habitual 
distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in  op-n  grounds 
will  be  live  i)a>.e«,  in  no  ca.se  wib  they  lose  Kijjht  of  each 
other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occrpied  to  cover  a  battalion  cow- 
prebends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each  inter'al  which 
suparafes  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and  left.  If  a 
lln( ,  whose  wings  are  not  nnpiiorted,  should  becoverod  by 
xkirmisbers.  it  will  be  nece■^ary  ciilior  to  protect  the 
flanks  with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend  them  in  front  of  the 
line  so  f«ir  beyoml  the  winiis  as  tffectnally  to  oppos'  nny 
attempt  which  might  be  made  by  th.i  enemy's  sklriiiishers 
to  disturb  the  flanks. 

To  dt-phiy  /onrnrd, 

2.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when  the 
captHin  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of 
the  first  platoon,  holding  the  stcond  platoon  in  reserve, 
b  <  will  command  : 

1.  First  pluloon — nj)  sl.inninheis. 
U.  On  the  left fih— take  inleriat^. 
o.  MARcn  {or  iloithle  qnirh — Maucu.) 

i'i  At  the  flrst  command,  tlie  second  and  third  lieiiteu- 
ants  will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  pact'ij    b(hiiid   the 


centrt'S  of  the  right  and  loft  eectinns  of  the  lirtt  platoon: 

tht  fitth  aergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centio 
,  of  the  first  platoon,  and  wilt  place  himself  l>etwe«n  tha 
.  two  sections  in  the  Iront  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement 
I  liegins  ;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  Ivft 
:  of  the  front  rank  of  the  snmo  plaioon.  as  soon  rb  he  can 
I  pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  str^reaut  the  p'iiit 
I  on  which  h^uishcs  him  to  din-ct  Uia  march.    The  first 

lieutenant,  placing  himself  beluns  the  ceulre  of  the  tMond 

platoon,  will  command : 

Second  jihluon  /nicJlirun/ — SIabcii. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  sleptbres 
paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  nnmask  the  flank  of  the  first 
platoon.  It  will  then  be  baited  by  its  chief,  and  the 
sicond  bergoaut  will  pUce  liiuiself  on  the  left,  uiid  the 
third  ser(je«nt  on  the  iij;ht  llai.k  i  f  this  platoon. 

■J5.  At  the  conimund  march,  the  lell  group  ol  four  men, 
conducted  by  the  fourth  turscaiit,  will  Oirict  itbolf  <  u  the 
point  incicatod  ;  all  the  other  grou]'S  of  fours  throwing 
forward  briskly  the  Iff.  Khouluei,  will  move  diagonally 
to  the  tronc  in  double  quick  tlme,80  as  to  gain  to  the  right 
the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which  shall  be  the  dittAnce 
between  each  group  and  that  immediately  on'  its  bit. 
When  tho  second  group  from  the  left  kIihU  arrive  eu  a 
line  with,  and  twenty  pices  Itfiu  the  fiist,  it  wiliiuarch 
i-lraight  to  the  trout,  conforming  to  the  gait  and  direc- 
tion of  the  first,  ktoping  constantly  on  ti,e  tame  align- 
ment and  at  twenty  pnci  s  from  it.  The  third  group,  mid 
all  the  others,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  b  eu  pro- 
Bcrib  d  fur  the  second  ;  they  will  arrive  succebsively  on 
the  line.  The  right  guide  will  uriive  with  the  labt 
g  oup. 

2i).  The  left  guide  I  aving  rea'  bed  the  point  where  the 
b  ft  of  the  line  hhould  rest,  i  he  captain  will  commnLd  the 
skirmishers  to  halt ;  the  lueu  composing  each  grouji  of 
fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  five  phces  from 
each  other,  find  to  the  right  and  leit  <.f  the  IVout  rank 
man  of  the  even  Jiio  in  e.ich  group,  the  re  r  rank  men 
pluciug  tbeiiiselvi  B  on  he  lelt  of  their  lile  leaders.  If 
any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the  command  halt,  they  will 
move  up  rapidly,  confirming  to  what  has  jutt  been  fro- 
scribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  i-h"uld  be  flrei! 
upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cnuie  tbo  ^oups  .> 
lours  to  deploy,  us  they  gain  their  proper  distances. 

28.  The  line  being  loinifd,  the  non-commisbioued  c ni- 
ters on  the  r!gbt.  left  and  cmtre  of  the  platoon  will 
place  themselx  s  ten  j.area  in  rear  ol  the  line,  and  oppo 
site  the  pusitiona  they  resj actively  occupied.  The  chief-> 
of  B' ction"  will  promplly  iictify  any  irregularities,  ainl 
then  placetbeiiiselves  twenty-live  orlhirty  ;  aces  iBrfaroi 
the  centre  of  til- ir  seoliouR,  each  having  with  him  (oui 
men  taken  fioiu  the  re.serve,  and  also  a  bugler,  who  will 
n  peat,  if  nccespury,  ti  e  signals  Fonnde<l   by  the  captain. 

2t'.  Skirmisbers  .should  bo  particularly  instrucied  lo 
t»ka  advatjtagfof  any  cover  which  thegnmnd  mny  offer, 
a'jd  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such  a  move- 
ment is  necotsary  to  priitoct  I  hem  from  tbo  Are  ol  the 
enemy.  Kegiilarity  in  the  alignment  ihoiild  yield  to  this 
impuMant  u  Ivaulnge. 

;!0.  When  the  mo.emtnt  bfgin«,  the  first  lleiitcuaM 
will  face  the  secobdplntoonu/yoK/.and  maicli  it  piouiptly, 
and  by  tbo  thortest  lino,  to  a1>  <u'  one  buuilred  and  flilv 
puces  In  the  icarof  the  centre  tf  the  line.  lie  will  hold  It 
always  1 1  this  distance,  unle/^B  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  it.'-elf  to  all  the  move- 
muniB  of  the  lin ).     7'his  rule  is  (jciicral. 

uJ  Light  troops  will  carry  thilr  bayonets  habitually 
in  the  ECikbbaril,  and  this  rule  applits  equally  to  theskir 
miKhcrs  and  the  reserve ;  whenever  oayonets  are  required 
to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be  givtn.  Tho  cap- 
tiiiii  will  give  a  general  superintcn'lciice  to  the  whole  de- 
plojnieiit,  and  then  promptly  plaee  hiniaelf  about  eichly 
puces  m  the  rear  ot  thoceiilreot  the  line.  lie  will  l)a\c 
with  him  a  bu;{ler  and  four  niin  taktu  from  tbo  reicrvi. 

r!:j.  Tho  deployment  may  bo  maiio  on  the  right  <  r  th'J 
centre  of  tne  platoon,  by  the  same  coinnmn''H,  subiUtu- 
tine  the  indication  riijhl  or  centre,  for  thnt  of  Jfft  file. 

SI.    The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  c(ftjtre  will  be 


INSTIiUCTlON  FOR  aKlKMISHERS. 


SrV 


made  iiccoidtng  to  the  piiuc'ples  pioscribod  abovo  :  in 
this  latter  ciise,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  bo  marked 
by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  section  ;  the 
fifth  eergeant  will  p!ace  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group, 
and  servo  as  the  guide  of  the  phitoou  diiriu^'  the  deploy- 
ment. 

35.  In  wliatever  manner  the  df-ploymont    be  niatie,  on 
the  right,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  earli  ivronp  of  fours 


j  15.  At  the  first  command,  the  ofticeis  and  noncommis- 
j  sioned  officers  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
!  No.  c8 

I       10.  At  the  Pocond  command,  the  firot  lieuterant  will 
I  place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the  ri^riu  poction 
;  of  the  second  platoon,  th»  third  lieutenant  behind  the 
ridht  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 
47.  At  the  command  mnrch,   the  right  section  will  fm- 


will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  othfir.and  upon  I  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  f-ce  tothe  left,  the  group 

the  front  rank  man  of  the  even   numbered   lile.    The  on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand  fast.    Th- 

deployments  will  hahifually  bs  made  at  twenty  paces  two  Kections  will  move  in  opposite  directions;  the  'hirrt 

interval;  bnt  if  a  greater  interval  be  required,  ft  will  be  sergeant  will  place  him.self  on  the  left  of  the  right  filo  tc. 

indicated  in  the  command.  conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on  right  of  the  left  flli- 

3G.  If  a  company  bo  thrown  out  ns  fkirmi.shors,  so  near  :  The  rwo  groups  nearest  that  which  stands  fast,  will  each 

the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  nnnecossary,  the  halt  at    twenty  paces  Irom  this  group,  and  ea«h  of  fb" 

entire  company  will  be  extendod  in  the  same  raanner.'and  I  other  groups  will  halt   at  twenty  paces  from   the  gronu 

according  to  the  same  piinciples,  as  for  the  deployment  of  I  which  is  in  rear  of  it      Each  group  will  deploy  as  hereto 

n  platoon.     In  this  case,  the  third  lieutenant  will  com-  |  fore  prescribed  No.  40. 

mand  the  fourth  section,  and  a  non-commissioned  oflicer  |      48.    Tho  first  and   third   lieutenants   will   direct    tlm 

designated  for  that  purpose,  the  second  section;  the  fifth  j  movement,    holding  themselves  always    abreast   of  tl\o 


Fergeant  will  act  as  centre  guide;  the  file  closers  wiil 
place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  oppo- 
site their  p'aces  in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second 
Ifeute^iant  will  each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 

To  deploi/  by  thefiaui;. 

.'!7.  Tho  company  b.nng  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flam:,  holding  the  first  pla- 
toon in  reserve,, he  will  command  : 

1.  t-ceond  platoon — as  skirmishers.    2.  By  Vie  right  flattk — 
lake  iiitervaU.    3.  Maech  (or  double  ^iii'c/.-— MAKon). 

.3S.  At  t'ln  first  command,  the  fir.^t  and  third  lienten- 
ants  Will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces  behind 
the  centres  of  tho  first  and  second  sections  of  the  second 
platoon  ;  tho  fifth  sergeant  will  pl.aco  himself  one  pace  in 
front  ot  the  cestre  of  the  second  platoon  ;  tho  third  ser- 
geant, as  Koon  as  ho  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platooj.  The  captain 
will  indicate  to  him  tho  point  on  which  ho  wishes  him  to 
direct  his  march.  Tho  chief  of  the  first  platovn  will 
oxocuto  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the 
second  pla'oon,  Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  tho  first 
sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

3'J.  At  Ih)  second  command,  tho  first   and   third  lieu 


gronp  which  is  abcmt  to  halt. 
I  49.  Tre  captain  can  cause  tho  deployment  to  be  madi* 
!  on  any  named  group  whatsoever;  in  this  case,  the  fifdi 
I  fiorgf  ant  will  place  himself  before  the  group  indicated,  aud 
I  the  deployment  will  be  made  according  to  the  principles 
I  heretofore  prescribed. 
I      .'lO.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  ac  ord- 

ing  to  the  same  priucipl<js. 

1  Ji'  cjJoul  itilrrvalf, 

,■>!.  This  moveiiionf,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a  linn 
of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to  theprinri- 
ple^  prescribed  for  deployments. 

.V-'.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  lite  of  skirmishers  is  »t 
a  halt,  and  that  the  cHptain  wishes  to  cxt«nd  it  to  the 
left,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  Jj'j  the  Ml.  finiik  (na  iikuiij    pares)    exletul    iiUvriuh.     2' 
Mabch  (or  -hmlde  quick — MahCIi). 

.";j.  At  tho  command  \,i,u<h,  the  grrup  on  the  richtwill 
Stand  fast,  all  tho  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left, 
and  each  gronp  will  extend  its  iuterval  to  the  pre.'cribed 
distance  by  the  moans  in "icuted  No.  40. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  pre- 
serve between  each  other  the  distance  of  five  paces,  un- 
less tho  nature  of  the  ground  should  render  it  neces- 
sary that   they  shoulu  close  nearer,    in   order   to   keej 


tenants  will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind  the  left  I  i"  sight  of  each  other.    The  intervals  refer  to  the  spaces 


between  the  groups,  and  not  to  distances  between  tha 
men  in  each  grouj).  The  intervals  will  be  taken  from  the 
right  f  r  left  man  of  the  neighboring  gro'-p. 

6.').  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front, 
and  tho  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the  right,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  On  the  left  groiig  {so  tiiiui/   pacfs)  extend   iiUcrials.    'Z. 
ilABCU  (or  double  qiiJc/c— March). 

6fi.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  con- 
tinue to  march   on   the  point   of  direction  ;   the  other 

41.  Tho  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  attention  '  proups  throwing  forward  the  left  ahoulder,  and  taking 
to  tho  successive  deployments  of  the  groups, keeping  noir  '  "'6  aonbleqnick  step,  will  open  ih.-ir  intervals  to  the  pre- 
the  group  al'out  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify  any  errors  which  ]  scribed  distacce;  by  the  moans  iiuiicatod  No.  2o,  con- 
may  be  committed.     When  the  deployment  is  completed,  '  forming  also  to  what  is  prescribed  ^o.  ;)4. 

they  will  place  themselves  thirty  paces  in   rvar  of  the  [      •'''•  Intervals  may  be  exteu'ied  on  the  centre  of  the 
centre  of  their  sections,  ns  has  boen  heretofore  prescribed,  i  lino,  according  to  the  same  princijiles. 
Tho  non-commissioned  ofHceri  will  also  place  themselves  '      «''^-  If  '"  extending  inter»al8,  it  bo  intended  that  one 
Hs  previously  indicated.  ■  company  or  platoon  should  o.~cupy  a  line    which   had 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movemuut  commences,  the  chief  of  l'*""  previously  occupied  by  two,  tho  men  of  the  com - 
Ihe  first  platoon,  cau«in^  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as  '  P»ny  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  successively 


froiip  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  tho  command  inarch,  tha  second  platoon  will  face 
(o  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement ;  the  left  group 
of  fours  will  stand  fust,  but  will  deploy  as  soon  as  there  is 
room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
No.  20 ;  the  tiiird  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  tho  left 
of  the  right  group,  to  conduct  it;  tho  second  group  will 
halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  one  on  its  left,  tho  third 
group  at  twi>nty  paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  tho 
right.  As  the  groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy, 
and  deploy  as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  gronp. 


indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  loft  flank 
according  to  the  same  priuclpl'is,  substituting  A'/f/a»/i: 
for  right  Jlank. 

41.  If  the  captain  thould  wish  to  deploy  tho  company 
upon  tho  centre  of  i.no  of  tUo  platoons,  he  will  com- 
mand : 


to  tho  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the 
intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 


O'J.  This  movement,  like  that  of  op<>uing  iutervals,  will 
be  exf  cuted  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
deployments. 
j      CO.  "if  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and   theoxp- 
I.  Second  platoon— as  skinumheis.     2.  By  Ihe  right  and  left  i  tain  should  wish  to  cljse  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will 
Jlanks—take  inlcrvals,    3.  M4ECB(ordoi(l?ei/HicA:)  Mahch,  'command: 


'.',>> 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISUERS. 


1.  Py  tUt  Iff  I   ilanic  {so    manti  )>arri)   cZm)  iHUrraU.    2. 
M411C11  (or  douhle  5111'f'.— March). 

t>l.  A«  .  .roupwill  BtAnd 

fint,  lie-  iiid  (■'•ji<e  to  tlio 

prpucrii"  ,  .  the  eueiny  as  it 

iittniDH  it-  1  ri  1  er  .li  .liif-  . 

W.  U  iho  line  be  marrhlnif  to  tb- front,  the  cnptaiu 
will  couimuud  : 

1.  On  the  hfl  yroup  (no   jJinuy   pners)  rto"    {ntervnU.    2. 
MABcn  (nr  doiiVU  quick— JAinrn. 

C>2.  Till'  left  cronp.  cnmliictpd  by  tho  froidp.  will  roDtl- 
11116  lo  mov<"  on  in  tlip  'iirpction  pievlously  iodif  lUcd  ;  the 
nllipr  croups,  ndTnnciDK  th»  right  Bhoiilr"er.  will  close  to 
the  tffr,  tintJI  thp  intorvals  nre  reduced  to  the  prescr.hed 
dihtnni'K. 

r4.  Int"  rvii1»i  jn<i\  hf»  rlnsod  on  tho  rlpht,  or  on  the  rcn- 
tro,  RiTOxdInc  to  thf>  dump  prlnciplrg. 

1.5.  When  iiit"TViiIi<  are  to  t>p  rlo^od  up,  in  order  to  re- 
inforcp  ft  lin*"  of  skirmiohiTB.  so  as  to  caiwo  two  cnmpn  • 
tiiPH  to  coTor  11m  pronnd  which  hnd  hi-n  pnviously 
nrciipiod  hy  onp.  tho  nfw  rnnipany  will  di-ploy  so  as  to 
finlnh  its  movpment  nt  twenty  parps  in  rrar  of  the  lino  it 
id  to  occupy,  MTid  thu  mpD  Will  suropwivply  move  upon 
that  linp.  Ml  tItPv  Rhall  In-  nnnia*kpd  hy  the  m  n  of  the 
old  comiiaiiv.  The  n  hprvcs  of  lli»  two  companiL'^j  will 
unite  behind  the  centre  of  the  line. 

To  rcllric  n  co./ij((Tiij  drptoycil  us  slinnMcrs. 

66.  Whon  a  cr.mpany  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  relieved, 
tho  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  iuteution.  which  ho  will 
immrdiatoly  eomuunicate  to  his  firstand  seconJ  lieuten- 
ants. 

f.7.  The  new  company  will  execute  i's  deployment  for- 
ward, ai>  as  to  firiioh  the  movement  at  about  twenty  paces 
In  rear  ol  the  line. 

GK  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  m^n  of  the  new  com- 
pany, by  command  of  th'  ir  captain,  will  advance  rapidly 
ii  few  pacen  beyond  the  old  lin"  and  halt  ;  tho  new  line 
lii-iiiK  established,  the  old  company  will  a.sHemble  on  its 
rc'st.fve,  talcin;;  care  not  to  jret  into  frroups  of  fours  until 
tliev  are  be\ond  the  fire  of  the  eiieniy. 

(■'9.  If  the  Hkirmishe;s  to  be  relieved  are  marchin?  in  re- 
tro t,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will  deploy 
by  tbi'  ll!4uk.  as  preHCribed  No.  3S  and  followine.  The 
old  Hklrmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order,  and 
haviuK  passed  the  new  lin»,  thoy  will  form  upon  the 
reserve. 

Ahtiole  Secofd. 

To  adcance. 

To  ailvaticc  ill  line,  and  lo  retreat  in  line. 

TO.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  sUir- 
niisherH  is  marching  by  the  front,  the  truido  v, ill  be  habi- 
tnally  in  the  centre.  No  particiibir  indication  to  this  ef- 
fei*t  need  be  kIvou  in  the  commamls,  but  if  on  the  con- 
trary it  be  intended  that  the  directing  icnideHhould  boon 
tlip  right,  or  left,  the  command  ijititli:  ri'jIU,  or  guide  h/l, 
will  be  ifiven  immediately  after  that  <>r  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmiehers  to  ad- 
vance, will  command  : 

1.  Fuiwurd.    2   March  (ot  duullc  quicf:~Mji.Kai.) 

12.  This  commund  will  b?  repeated  with  the  prcateat 
r:ipidlty  by  the  chic^fs  of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  l)y 
tho  sergeants.  This  rule  is  (jeneral,  whether  tho  skir- 
mishers march  by  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 

".'1  At  the  Ilrst  command,  three  serifiants  will  move 
briskly  on  the  line,  tho  first  on  the  right,  tho  second  ou 
the  u'ft,  an  1  the  third  in  the  center. 

74.  At  tho  command  niarc/i,  tho  line  will  move  to  (he 
front,  the  euide  charged  with  the  direction  will  move  on 
the  jioiiit  indicated  to  him,  tlie  sUirniishfrs  will  hold 
themcolves  alifnied  ou  this  Riiido,  uud  preserve  their 
intervals  toward  him. 

7r..  The  chiefs  of  soctioiia  will  m^rch  immediately 
behind  their  eections,  so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 


70.  Tho  captain  wi'.l  ^ive  a  general  suporintendence  to 
tho  muyement. 

77.  When  lio  tball  wi.-h  to  halt  tho  skirmishers  ho  will 
command : 

U.U.T. 

78.  At  this  oiumand,  briuky  repeated,  tho  line  y>v\ 
halt.  The  chiefs  uf  stctious  will  pr«jmplly  rectify  any 
irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and  kfler 
taking  every  pcssible  nclrauta^e  which  the  ground  may 
offer  lor  protectinx  the  men,  they,  witl.  tho  three  wr- 
geintsiu  the  line,  will  ic-tire  tu  thoir  pri>l)er  placoi  in 
rear. 

Til.  Tho  captain,  wishing  to  march  tho  ikirmlsbers  in 
retreat,  Will  cunio  aud  : 

1.  In  relreal.    2.  M.iBcu  (or  dtulU  gutcir— UaiiCU.) 

80.  Atthe  flrstcoaniiand,  the  three  sergeants  will  moT9 
on  tho  line  as  pre-cr.bed  No.  ~:i. 

81.  Attbocommind  march,  tho  skinuis'iera  will  faco 
about  individually,  and  inarch  to  tho  rear,  couformioi; 
to  the  principles  preHcrllied  No.  74-. 

82.  Tho  ollicori  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion  to 
preserve  order. 

8:1.  To  halt  tho  skirmi-hers,  marcliiog  in  retreat,  the 
captain  v<  'H  c,.i..!n'  1.1  ■ 


H4.  At  tUi>  coniiii'.nJ,  the  skiriuifhcrs  will  halt,  and 
immeriiately  face  to  the  front. 

85.  Tho  chiefs  of  sections  and  tho  Ihreo  gnidca  will 
eacn  conform  himself  to  what  is  prepcribed  IJo.  78. 

To  change  direclion, 

SU.  It  the  «cnimauder  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall 
wisn  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  richt,  lie  will 
command : 

1.  Rigid  ichcel.    2.  }Iinca(oi  dotihlc  quick — M&RCn). 

87.  At  tho  command  mircJi,  the  right  guide  will  mark 
time  in  his  place  ;  the  lelt  guide  will  move  in  a  circle  to 
the  rig  t,  And  that  he  mav  properly  regnlate  his  move- 
ments, will  occasionally  cast  hi:  ey.H  to  tho  ri^^ht,  so  as 
to  observe  the  Jirec.iou  of  tho  Hue,  and  the  nature  of  th> 
ground  to  be  pasi-ed  over.  The  center  guide  will  also 
march  in  a  circle  to  tho  right,  and  in  order  to  conform 
his  movements  to  the  geiierrtl  direction,  will  take  Sre 
th'it  his  Bt  -ps  are  only  half  the  length  of  the  steps  of  tho 
guide  on  the  left. 

88.  The  skirmi-'hers  will  regulate  tho  length  of  thtir 
steps  by  their  distance  froia  tho  ntarching  lUuk,  being 
less  as  they  approach  tho  pivct,  and  greater  ns  they  are 
removed  from  it;  they  will  often  look  to  the  marchiuf; 
flank,  sons  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

89.  When  tho  cnnniander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to  re- 
sume the  direct  march,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  Mabch. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  tho  line  will  conso  to 
wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will  move  direct  to  the  front; 
the  centre  guide  will  march  ou  file  point  which  will  bo 
indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place 
of  moving  it  to  tho  front,  ho  will  commsud  : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command.the  lino  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  loft  will  bo  made 
according  to  tho  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  moans. 

94.  A  lino  of  Bkirmiohors  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  tho  same 
couimandrt,  as  a  lino  marching  iu  iidvaiice  ;  for  example, 
if  tne  captain  should  wish  to  refufie  his  left,  now  become 
the  right,  he  will  command  :  1.  Left  wheel.  2.  MARen. 
At  the  command  halt,  tho  skirmishers  will  face  to  the 
enemy. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


9.).  But  if,  iustead  of  haltinf;  the  lino,  tho  raptain, 
nlionid  wiah  to  continiio  to  lusrch  it  in  retreat,  he  will, 
wlien  he  judt^ea  tho  lino  has  wlioeled  suSicicntly, 
conimaud  : 

1.  In  ictreal. 

2.  Maich. 

To  march  ly  flank. 

OG.  Tho  captain,  wishing  tho  skirmishera  to  march  \>j 
tU'  right  fl'iuk,  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 
2.  March  (or  douhle  quick — March). 

97.  At  the  first  corainand,  the  three  sorgoatjts  will  place 
thomsolves  on  the  lino. 

'.»«.  At  tlio  command  mr.rch,  the  skirmishers  will  face 
to  the  right  and  move  off;  tho  right  guide  will  place 
hlm»olf  by  tho  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the  right  to 
conduct  him.  and  will  march  on  the  point  indicated  ; 
each  Rkirnilsher  will  fake  caro  to  follow  directly  in  the 
direction  of  the  one  immediately  procoding  him,  and  to 
prosorve  his  distanca. 

'JO.  The  Bkirmishers  may  be  murched  by  tho  left  flank, 
iiceoriliDR  to  the  seme  prinoiplf  8.  and  by  tho  same  com- 
mands, substituting  left  for  right;  the  left  guidj  will 
)<l>ico  himself  br*  t)ie  side  ol  the  leading  man  to  conduct 
him. 

100.  If  tho  skirmishers  bo  marching  by  t'  e  flank,  and 
tho  captain  should  wish  to  hilt  them,  ho  will  command  : 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and  face 
to  tho  enemy.  Tho  officers  and  sergeants  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102.  Tho  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of 
the  lirip,  and  be  hold  always  about  one  hundred  atid  fifty 
paces  from  it,  so  as  to  bo  i.i  position  to  second  its  opera- 
tions. 

103.  Whi?n  the  chi  f  of  the  roservo  pliall  wish  to  march 
il  in  advance,  ho  will  command  :  J.  Platoon  foncard.  2. 
Guide  left.  .3.  March.  If  ho  should  wish  to  march  it  in 
r»>tipat,  ho  will  command:  I.  In  retreat.  2.  March.  3. 
(7uidc  righ'..  At  th^omraaud  halt,  it  wi'l  re-face  to  the 
enemy. 

104.  T'lo  men  shonld  be  mads  tr)  understand  that  tho 
signals  or  commaud«.  such  as  forward,  mean  that  the 
pkinnlshcrs  shall  march  on  the  enemv  ;  m  retreat,  t\iAt 
they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  flank,  that  the  men 
must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  bo  their  posi- 
tion. 

10.5.  If  tho  skirmishers  bo  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
tho  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right 
(or  left),  be  will  command:  1.  By  file  right  (or  left).  2. 
M.\RCH.'  These  movements  wll!  also  be  executed  by  the 
signals  STos.  Hand  15. 

Article  Third. 
The  flriiigf. 
100.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  n  halt  or  marching. 
Toflreatahall. 

107.  To  canac  this  Are  to  be  execHttd,  t!io  captain  will 
command : 

.  Commence— Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated  tho  men  of  the 
front  rank  will  comraenci^firin;;;  they  will  re-load  ripidly, 
and  hold  themselves  in  roadini^ss  to  firo  a^ain.  During 
thi.H  time  the  men  of  thf  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready, 
and  as  sofiii  as  their  respoctivo  file  leadtra  have  loaded, 
they  will  also  Are  and  re-load.  Tho  men  of  each  file  will 
thus  contlnua  the  firing,  conforming  to  this  principle,  that 
tho  one  or  the  other  ehall  ahvays  have  bis  pioco  loaded. 


109.  Light  troops  should  bo  always  cnlm,  so  as  to  aim 
with  accuracy  ;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  esti- 
mate correctly  the  distances  between  themselves  and  the 
enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire 
with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  reloading,  nnless  protected  by  accidents  in  tho 
ground. 

To  flre  marching. 

111.  This  firo  will  be  executed  by  tho  same  commands  as 
the  flre  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  tto  command,  cc/Diiiioice  firing,  if  the  line  bo 
advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  tile  will  halt,  fire, 
and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  Tho  rear 
rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and 
after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man, 
will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire  when 
his  front  rank  man  has  load'd  ;  the  fire  will  thus  con- 
tinue to  bo  executed  by  each  file;  tho  skirmishers  will 
keep  united,  and  endeavor,  as  mnch  as  possible,  to  pre- 
serve tho  general  direction  of  the  alignment. 

il3.  If  the  line  bo  marchiug  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand commence  firing,  tbn  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will 
halt,  faco  to  the  enemy,  flre,  and  then  re-load  whilst  mov- 
ing to  thorear;  the  rear  rank  man  of  tho  same  file  will  con- 
tinue to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his 
front  rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  firi', 
when  his  front  rank-  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  ami 
loaded;  after  which,  ho  will  movo  to  the  rear  and  reload: 
the  front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to 
the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear 
rank,  faco  to  tho  enemy,  load  his  piece  and  firp,  conform- 
ing to  what  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  firing  will  thus 
be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  bo  marching  by  the  right  flink,  at 
the  cmmand,  ciimmence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt, 
and  firo,  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue  to  move  for 
ward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  fired,  he  will 
place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  maa  and  reload 
whilst  marching.  Ti'hoB  he  has  loaded,  the  roar  rank  m«n 
will,  in  turn,  step  ono  pace  forward,  halt,  and  flre,  and 
returning  to  the  ranks,  will  place  himself  behind  his  front 
rank  man  ;  the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same 
manner,  observing  the  same  principles.  Attho  command, 
ecase  firing,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  thiir 
original  positions.  If  not  already  there. 

116.  If  tho  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  th« 
flre  will  bo  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  but 
in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  men  who  will  firo 
first. 

llfi.  The  following  rules  will  be  cbserved  in  the  cases  to 
which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  bo  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marchinc 
by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Fortcard — March,  it  will 
be  the  men  wliose  pieces  are  loaded,  without  regard  to 
the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong,  who  will  move 
to  tho  fiont.  Tho.ie  men  whose  pieces  have  been  dis- 
charged, will  remain  in  their  places  to  load  them  before 
moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will  bo  continued  agree- 
ably to  the  principles  prekcr'bed  No.  U'2. 

lis.  If  the  lino  he  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or 
whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command.  In  retrent 

March,  tho  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  remain 

faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in  this  position  ;  the  men 
whose  pieces  are  "discharged  will  retreat  loading  them, 
and  tho  tiring  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a  halt, 
advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  Dij  the  right  (or 
Itftflnuk — March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  step 
one  pace  out  of  tho  goneral  alignment,  face  t»  the  enemy, 
and  fire  in  this  position;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded 
wil!  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march  in  the  direction 
ind  catfd.  The  men  who  stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will 
idnce  themselves,  immediately  after  firing,  upon  tho  gen  • 
oral  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank 
men.  as  the  case  may  bo.  The  fire  will  be  continued  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  114. 


38 


IXSTRUCnON  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


1-0.  SkirmUherii  nill  be  babitnatod  to  load  tbtirpi>r(>« 
nhilU  marching;  but  Ibey  will  be  eoJoloc-J  to  halt  al- 
ways an  iaetant,  when  in  the  Bt.t  ot  charj^iug  carlr.dge, 
and  prirnirK. 

121.  1  h'-y  Bhould  hs  practised  to  &to  nnl  load  knoeliug, 
IjiuK  down,  and  Hitting,  and  much  I.l.t-rtv  blimlil  l>p  al- 
lowed in  those  exiTcises,  iu  thitt  ibij  itj.ij  bi  iX'  cud  d  in 
the  manner  fjund  to  bo  mixit  c  .uvouifi:!.  t■'kiiu^i^he^s 
should  becaut  oiit-d  nM  to  fn-;;  -t  Hi  I  in  wlmluvi-r  pjsi- 
tion  th(<)'  mnr  load,  it  if  important  thiit  tho  j>i<'ceFli'jUld  be 
placed  upriubt  U-forc  ramming,  in  ordiT  tliat  ibi.- entire 
rhart;c  of  powder  may  rsBch  tlio  bottom  of  iliu  bore. 

122.  Inrommonriof;  tbu  fire,  thcrnvnof  thu  same  rank 
vhould  not  nil  fire  at  ouce,  and  ibe  men  of  tb  it.ime  flle 
should  I  e  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of  Iheiu  bo  al- 
n8}B  loaded. 

1^3.  In  retreating,  the  otTicer  commnnditig  tho  skfr- 
miHbers  should  soixe  on  every  advantage  wbicb  Ibe  ground 
may  present,  for  arresting  the  eueuiy  as  lou;;  as  possi- 
bl.'. 

121.  At  the  signal  to  inii>e  jiriny,  the  ca}it:iin  wll  si-e 
that  the  or'ipr  is  promptly  obeyed  ;  but  tlu<  men  uhu  inHV 
not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  thn  lino  be  uiarcbiug,  it  will 
continue  the  movement;  but  the  man  of  ouch  tile  who 
happens  to  ba  iu  front,  will  wait  uuttl  the  mau  lu  tbe 
rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him, 

126.  If  a  line  of  skirmisherM  bo  firing  advancing,  ut 
the  command  IiuU,  the  line  will  re  l'»rni  upon  tliu  Bkir- 
raikhcrs  who  nrc  in  front  ;  when  the  liue  i'>  lotriiiitinj;, 
upon  the  skirmikhors  wlioare  in  rmr. 

12'i.  OffliMrn  5.honld  watch  with  the  groutoat  pobsible 
vigiltnce  over  a  line  of  Hkirmishers;  in  battle,  thiy 
•hould  neither  carry  a  ri lie  or  fowling  piece.  In  all  the 
firines,  they,  xswell  as  the  gergcants,  should  eee  thiit 
order  and  silence  are  preecrvcd,  aua  thiit  the  skiruiisbor* 
do  not  wander  ini])rudcntly;  they  should  tspecially  cau- 
tion them  to  be  cnlm  and  collecttd  ;  not  to  lire  until  tb>*} 
distinctly  perceive  tho  objects  at  which  they  aim,  and  are 
sure  that  those  objects  are  within  proper  runRe.  Skir- 
ralxbers  should  take  advantage  prtniptly, and  withiutolli- 
gence,  of  all  shelter,  and  of  all  accideuM  of  tho  ground, 
to  conceal  themselves  from  tho  view  of  tho  ent  my,  and  to 
f^otect  themselves  from  liia  fire.  It  may  olteu  h'lppen, 
that  intervals  are  momentarily  lost  when  stvenil  men 
ne-r  each  other  find  a  common  skelter  ;  but  when  tbcy 
fjuit  this  position,  they  should  iniuiodiately  ro.iumo  their 
intervals  and  their  places  lu  line,  no  that  thoy  may  not, 
by  crowding,  ncedliesly  expose  llicmselvrs  to  the  lire  of 
the  enemy. 

Article  Foiiuth. 

TnS    BALLV. 


t'a«-..  biime!f  In   the  group  nearest 


I  serving   for  mutual   snpirart.    The  four   men    in   ea.'b 
gionp  will  comr  t^  n  r^ndy  fire  as  occa&ion  may  ofTjr,  aAd 

I  load  without  i  ■ '    '  r  feet. 

]      l.Tt.  Thee  fj  of  •cclions  will  each  cause 

the  four  iii»;i  .to  his  guard  to  form   square, 

tl.e  ni  ■  ii^io  enable  lilm   and  the  bugler 

;  topli.  in  the  centre.      Tho  throe  eerg-anls 

I  wlilc.       ,  .... 

bini  iu  ' :  <   III 
131.  \Vlieii'  ■  jitdg"  these  squares  loo 

I  weak,  but  sli .>  pon.tion  by  sti«ngtbeu- 

ii.g  his  Iiuo,  be  «,ii  ,.hm.<in.i: 

I  llally  l>y  tccliont. 

y.Vl.  At  this  command,  the  chitb  of  sections  will  move 

rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  Ihiir  rcppottive   tectious, 

I  or  on  any  other'nt<-rlor  sToup  w'>o»e  pOKition  miitht  otlrr 

I  a  «helt'-r,  or  othf-r  jurticul  ir  nd-ant'igo;  the  sl£lrml«heri 

I  will  c<ll-ct  rnpldiT  Ht  a  nm   rn  tnis   gionp.  anil   withoi;t 

I  distinction  of  numbers.     '1  ho  men   compocinK  the  group 

;  <  n  which  tho  formiition  is  ma'lc,  will   iiiimediiitely  form 

I  pqunre   as  heret  "fore  cxpl  lined,  and  ilevatn   their  pleceH, 

I  tho  bayonets  »ipperm'>?.t,  in  ord'  r  t  >  indicate  the  point  on 

wliii'li  the  rally  is  t)  I  e  mnde.     The  other skirmtsherp,  n« 

they  nrrivi",  will  occupy  and  fill  tlie  open  angular  spaces 

j  between  these  four  men,  ard   snccessiroly    rally  around 

I  ttii"  first  nticl-OH,  and  in  surh  roann<T  as  to  form  rapidly 

I  aconpact  circle.  The  skirmishers  will  t'ikeas  they  arrive, 

I  the  position  of  charge   b  ivonet.  tho  point    of  the  bnyoiu  t 

I  mote  elevated,  iiud  uill  cock  their  pbces  in  this  position. 
The  movement  c included, the  twoexferior  ranks  will  flr>< 
as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load   without  moTiag  tneii 
I  fiet. 

I  VA'i.  The  captain  will  move  riipid'y  with  his  guard, 
I  wlierovcr  be  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 
I  134.  Tho  cflloere  and  sorjieiints  will  be  piirticnlar  to 
I  observe  that  ihorally  is  made  in  Bilence,  and  with  promp- 
I  titude  and  order  ;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of  their  sub- 
I  divisions  ba  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  In 
I  directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  bo  most 
■  eflective. 

i;i5.  If  the  reserve  hIioiiIiI   bo  Ihrea'eued,  it  Will  form 
!  into  a  circle  around  the  chief. 

I  130.  If  the  captain,  orcomman''cr  ofallne  rf  pkirmish- 
I  ers  formed  of  many  pIato.in<,  shotild  judge  that  the  rallv 
I  by  section  does  not  off.r  sulTicient  resinlano,  be  will 
I  cause  the  rally  by  phitf.<,ns  to  bo%iccu!fd  and  for  thi-t 
purpose,  will  command : 


To  form    Cohiinn. 

127.  A  comhsny  deployed  as  hkirmishors,  iii  rallied 
in  order  to  oppose  the  enoniy  \rtth  l>etfer  success;  the 
rallies  are  made  iit  a  run,  and  with  bayonnts  fixed ;  when 
ordered  to  rally,  the  skiruiishers  li.x  bsyohets  without 
command. 

121.  There  «r>'  fevoral  ways  of  ralying, which  thochlef 
of  the  line-irill  adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

120.  If  Ibo  lin^  marching  or  at  »  halt,  bo  merely  di^<- 
turbed  by  scattend  I'orfeiiien,  it  will  not  1  e  nec^>.'■^ar.'»  lo 
tall  bi  ck  on  tho  reserve,  but  the  captain  will  cause  biiyo. 
•  nets  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  shouM,  however,  ad- 
vancA  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  ca)>tHin  will  oni- 
raand, raWv  Jij;  fours.  Tlie  lino  will  hull  if  marching, 
and  the  four  men  of  each  group  will  execute  :hl8  rally 
in  the  follow  ing  manner  :  ibelrunt  rauli  man  of  theevi-n 
numbered  file  will  take  the  position  of  guard  apainul 
cavalry;  the  rear  rank  man  of  tho  odd  numbered  file 
will  also  take  tho  poHiliot  of  guard  a'jtfinsl  c^vnlry,  tin  n- 
ipi;  his  back  to  him,  his  right  foot  tliirto.-n  inches  from 
the  right  loo  of  the  former,  and  pariillel  to  it  ;  the  front 
rank  "'*n  of  the  odd  file,  and  tho  rear  rank  man  of  th,) 
eveu  fl'^t  will  also  flace  tluniselves  back  to  back,  taking 
a  like  position,  and  between  tho  two  men  alrea'^y  oslab- 
liehed)  fscii  g  10  theriglit  and  left ;  tho  right  leetoftho 
four  men  will  be  brongbt  together, forming  a  square,  and 


EciUy  hij  iihiloons. 

I  137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  ai!Cording  to  tho 
■  same  principles,  and  liy  the  same  means,  as  tho  rnlly  by 
sections,  'i'he  cliicfn  of  platoon  will  conform  to  whitthss 
'<  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 
I  138.  The  captain  wishii  IT  lo  rally  the  skirmishers  on 
I  the  reserve,  will  couiniaii<l 

I  liaVy  on   ii-    /-M/.r. 

'  lao.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly 
'  on  the  reserve  ;  the  (Ulcer  Wi.o  commands  it  will  take 
1  Immediate  steps  t'>  I 'rin  square  ;  for  this  purpose,  Im 
will  onso  tUo  half  fecti  IIS  on  t!  e  flank  to  te  thrown 
I  perpendicularly  t,»  tho  rear;  h"  will  order  tho  raen  to 
'  come  to  a  reudy. 

110.  The  HklrniiHhors  cf  each  Beciioii,   taVing  the  run, 
will  form  rapidly  into  pronps,  and  upon  that  niau  of  each 
I  group  who  is   nearest  the  center  of  the    Hection.     These 
j;roups  will  direct  thinirtelves  diiicron.dly  towards  each 
oilier,  and  in  surh  manner  as  to  form    inlc^  i<nilioiiB  with 
the  greatest  posnible  rapidity  while  nn  \  iiiK   to  the  rear  ; 
'  the  ollicers  and  tergeants  will  mo  tl:iif   tliis  formation  is 
'  mnde  in  proper  order,  and  (he  ch'efs  will  direct  tbefr  sec- 
tions upon  llie  reserve,  tnking   curt'  to   I'nniHfik  it  to  tho 
ritht  and  loft.    As  the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  con- 
tinue and  complete  the  formation  of  tho  squaro  begun  by 
the  reserve,  cl'sing  iu   rapidly  upon  the  latter,   without 
recard  to  their  places  In  line;  they  will  come  to  a  ready 
without  command,  and  fire  tipou  tho  enemy;  which  will 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


39 


also  be  dono  by  tho  reserve  as  soon  aa  it  is  unmasked  by 
the  skirmishers. 

141.  Jf  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavalry 
while  retreating,  it  thief  will  csmmand  Jialt  ;  at  this 
command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  compact  cir- 
cle arouad  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his  'section  and 
resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  can  do  so  with 
saffty. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  nnd  effi- 
cient manner,  requires  conlness  and  activity  on  the  part 
of  both  officers  and  serKeants. 

143.  Th"!  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of 
respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  lf»ave  him;  as 
soon  as  lu<  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself  beyond 
the  reach  of  their  charge's,  eithor  by  gaining  a  position 
where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage,  or  byre- 
turning  to  the  corpa  lo  which  he  bi»Iong3.  For  this  pur- 
pose, being  in  square,  ho  will  can«o  the  cci'ipany  to  break 
into  column  by  platoons  at.half  distance;  to  this  e£fect,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Fomi  column.    2.  Mabch. 

144.  At  tho  command  march,  each  platoon  will  dress  on 
its  centre,  and  the  platooa  which  W!>s  facing  to  the  rear 
will  face  about  without  command.  Tha  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  right  hn  1  Uft  of  their  respective 
platoons,  those  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves 
at  half  distance  from  those  of  the  first,  counting  from  the 
n.-ar  rank.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  captain 
can  move  tho  columu  in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge 
proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  wil1|ccm- 
mand  : 

1.  Til  retreat.    2.  M.^rch  (or  double  ijMici  — March).     * 

140.  At  th(>  command  march,  the  column  will  imme- 
diately fAce  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the  opposite 
direction.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  in  motion,  the  captain 
will  command  : 

3.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide; 
th«>gnido«  will  march  at  their  proper  distances,  and  the 
men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavaUy,  tho  cnptain  will 
command  : 

1.  Fbrt»  "tufirf..    2.  March. 

149.  At  tho  command  march,  the  colnnin  will  h.ilt;  the 
first  pUtooii  will  face  about  briskly,  aud  the  outer  half 
Hectious  of  eich  platoon  will  be  thrown  pf^rpendicularly  to 
the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the 
square.  Tli«  ffTicers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irrnguUrities  which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  hffl  should  wish  to  mirch  thecolnmn  in  advance, 
the  capiaia  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.    2.  M\Ecir. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Xo.  144. 

153.  The  column  l)«ing  formed,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    Foricnril.     2.    Maucii    (or    double    qiiiri: — Maecu).     3. 
Guide  Uj'l  (or  right), 

163,  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move 
firward.  and  at  the  third  command,  the  men  will  take  the 
tonch  of  elbows  to  thi>  side  of  the  gui'le. 

154.  If  tlm  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
ground  to  tho  right  or  loft,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels 
to  \)ioi  side  opposite  the  guije.  and  fur  this"  purpose,  will 
change  the  guide  whenever  it  miy  be  necessary. 

1'p5.  If  a  company  b'  in  column  by  platoon,  at  lialf 
distance,  right  In  front,  the  captain  can  deplov  the  first 
platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  explained  ; 
but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon 
f  rwardon  the  centre  file,  leaving  the  first  platoon  in  re- 
serve, ho  will  command  : 


I.    Second  platoon — as  skirmishert.      2.    On  the  ceittrefile — 
take  intervals.     3.  March  (or  dotible  quick — March). 

luG.  At  the  first  crimmand,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
will  camion  his  platoon  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  bpfore 
the  centre  of  their  sections:  tho  fifth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  rieht  sec- 
tion, second  platoon,  will  commat^d  :  Section  right  face  ; 
the  chief  of  thi^  left  section  :  Section  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sectiors  will  move 
off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having  unmasked 
the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  respectively 
command:  Vy  the  Ifflfnnk—^lKTicu,  and  By  the  right  Jlaiik 
— March;  nnd  as  soon  as  these  sections  arrive  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first  platoon,  they  will  command:  As 
shinnisScrs — March.  The  groupH  will  then  deploy  »rcr>rd- 
ing  to  prescribed  principles,  on  ths  right  group  of  the  loft 
section,  which  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on 
the  poirt  indicated. 

ISO  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment  made 
by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved  to  the 
front  by  the  mean«  abeve  stated,  and  halted  after  passing 
some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the  first  platot.n ;  the 
deployment  will  then  be  made  by  the  fiank  according  to 
the  prirciples  prescribed. 

1(50.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, and  the  cartain  should  wish  to  rally  them  on 
the  battalion,  be  will  command: 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

im.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve, 
no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which  they  be' 
long  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  rapidly  nnmask 
the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing  them«elvfs  in  a  run 
toward  its  nearest  flank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

1C2.  As  soon  as  the  skirmiiihers  have  passed  beyond  the 
line  of  file  closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  rfnd 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  re-f«rra  his  sub- 
division, and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing  on  which 
it  is  ra'lied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  tho  rank  <»f  file  closers. 
These  subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  ot 
the  commander  of  tho  battalion,  who  may,  if  he  thinks 
proper,  throw  them  into  line  of  batt'e  at  the  extremitifs 
of  the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  betweeii  the  battalions. 

103.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  same 
wing  of  a  battalion,  or  bhind  any  shelter  whatsoever, 
they  shou'd  be  formed  always  into  clo.-Je  colnmn,  or  Into 
column  at  half  distance. 

Iti4.  When  tho  batta'ion,  covered  by  a  company  of 
skirmishers,  shall  le  formed  into  square,  the  platoocs  and 
sections  of  the  covering  company  will  be  directed  by  their 
chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at 
the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then 
form' d  into  <^se  column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the 
first:  front  of  tWsquare. 

ITiS.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  tho  angles  of  the 
square  from  being  opened,  fh<?  skirmishers  will  throw 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  fi-ont  rank  men.  the  right 
knee  on  the  gronnd,  th'  butt  of  the  piece  re.sting  on  the 
th?p;h,  the  bayonet  in  a  tlireateuing  position.  A  part 
may  also  place  themselves  about  the  angles,  where  they 
can  render  good  service  by  defending  the  fections  with- 
out fire. 

166.  If  tho  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are  ral- 
lied be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skirmiiihers 
will  be  formed  into  close  colnmn  by  platoon,  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  tho  thiid  division,  and  at  tho  comnisnd, 
Form  sijiiare — Mascij,  they  will  move  forward  and  closa 
on  the  buglers. 

1G7.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon  or 
section  behind  the  wings  of  n  battalion,  and  it  be  wished 
to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will  ba  majrhed 
by  the  flank  towards  tho  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  be 
then  deployed  so  p.s  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  interior 
of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed,  they  will  be 
marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown  forward,  a« 


4q 


INSTRUCTION  FOE  fcJKIRMlSHEKS. 


':i»n  hare  \xd- 
Jei>!oyeJ,  tbt 


In  prefcribed,  No.  157  ;  ns  (■ 
luaaked  tbecolmnn  or  aquan-. 
one  on  tbo  right,  the  other  on  i:  . 

TTu  a';emhly. 

1C9.  A  company  dcpl^v'- '  --  ^'•'- — ■-'    --  -■   "  '  > w 

l>l»d  wbcD  tliero  ia  n<>  L 
uJ  ;  the  iiancmbly  wiil  1 

170.  The  cA]>lKia  wirln-^;  t^p  Jl^MIUl.'J  u.'  run  iai:-ii' rs 
uD  Iho  reaetTo,  will  commaud  : 

An'in'Ae  oi  (7i«  roerre. 

171.  At  (bi8  comtDand,  tlip  ekirmislicrg  will  a.s8rinbIo  by 
RToapa  of  four*  ;  the  front  roiik  men  will  placo  thnnsolvos 
l>ohind  tbeir  rear  rank  mcu  ;  and  each  trnu|  b  of  four  will 
direct  itaelf  on  the  reBcrvo,  whore facb  will  lukeKs  prmx-r 
place  in  the  ranks.  When  the  company  is  ro-formod,  it 
will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  bo  also  prosier  to  aHHcmblo  tbs  Rkirm!«herH 
on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  lino,  cilbor 
luarchini;  or  at  a  halt. 

17^t.  If  the  captiiin  shonld  wish  to  aR^emblo  them  on  the 
centre  while  m<irchiug,  he  will  command  : 

AtstTribU  on  Vie  centra. 

17t.  At  this  command,  the  ventre  iniide  will  coiitinne 
to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  indioiited  ; 
the  front  rank  man  of  tbo  directing  file  will  follow  the 
guide,  and  be  coverej  by  bis  rear  rank  man  ;  the  other 
two  comrades  of  thia  Rroup,  and  likewise  those  of  their 
leff,  will  march  diagonally,  advancing  the  lift  HhonlJor 
and  accleratim;  the  gait,  so  88  to  re-form  tlm  groups 
while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the  dircccing  file  ;  the 
men  of  the  right  section  will  unite  in  the  same  manner 
into  groups,  and  then  upon  the  directing  file,  throwing 
forward  the  right  shouMir.  As  they  successively  unite  ou 
the  cenire,  the  men  will  bring  their  pk;cea  to  Iho  right 
shonlder. 

17o.  To^8»emhlo  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  ho  exe- 
cut«I  according  to  the  fame  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will 
also  be  execnted  accerding  to  the  fame  principles,  the 
front  rank  m'^n  marching  bohind  their  rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  Bkirmishers  at  n  luilt,  and 
on  the  lin-!  they  occupy,  the  csj.tain  will  givo  the  sanie 
I'ommauds  ;  the  skirmi'theiB  will  ftce  to  the  right  or  left, 
according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or  left  (lank, 
re-forra  the  groups  while  marching,  and  thud  arrive  on 
the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of  f>rmaiion.  Am  they 
Kucceshively  arrive,  the  skirmishers  will  Rni.;  ..rl  arms. 

Abtioli  Fifth. 

7b   ilfpXoy    a    halliUon   a$    sl-irmitliers,    cud  to  r.xlti/  this 
h^Ualion. 

To  deploy  the  hatlalion  at  sJ;irmMers. 

178.  A  battilion  being  in  lino  of  bafffc,  if  the  com- 
mander 8houH  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  tho  eixih 
cumpany,  holding  thit  thruu  right  conipunies  in  nsurvo, 
ho  willhignify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  and 
adjntaut,  and  also  to  the  niiijor,  who  will  be  di'-ecteil  to 
take  charge  of  tho  reserve,  lid  will  point  out  to  the 
liuutenunt-colonel  tho  direction  ho  wishes  toglvo  tho  line, 
;is  well  as  tho  point  whtire  lie  wihlios  the  right  of  tbo 
ni\tli  company  to  rest,  and  to  tin-  commander  of  tho  re- 
Knrvn  tho  place  he  niav  wish  it  ostiiblished. 

170.  Tho  lientenant-colon>d  will  move  rapidly  in  front 
of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  tli-j  adjutant  in 
front  of  tho  left  of  the  sam  ■  company.  The  commander 
(if  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  iu  tho  umuner  to  bo  here- 
inafter indicated. 

180,  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Firs'  (or  t.eco»d)  platoons— an  fiinnixlicrii. 

2.  On  the  right  of  Ihi-  airlU    compmiy—lahe  inlrrvalf. 
■''.  Maeoii  (or  Juiihlc  yHiV/.— ftlAuon). 

181.  At  the  second  eommand,  tho  captains  of  the  fifth 
and  sixth   companies   will   prepare   to  deploy   tho  flriit 


p!. 


omp&uics,  the  aixthoj    its 


1  ..-    .  urth  company  will  face  it  to 

the  ri^ht,  aud  iho  cuptHiiisof  the  seventh  and  eighth 
conipuuica  will  face  their  ieKi)cctlTe  compani  s  to  the 
lea. 

163.  At  the  command  m<irc?i,  tho  movement  will  com- 
mence. The  platooni  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  deploy  forward  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  ilxlb  will 
march  on  the  point  which  wdl  bo  indicated  to  him  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 

l!-4.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and 
also  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will 
march  straight  forward.  The  fonrth  company  will  take 
an  Interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from  the  Irft 
of  lb"  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  tU  Writ  pbitosn  on 
its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  eirli 
tnke  nn  interval  of  onehun<Ircd  paced,  counting  from  the 
flr.at  file  of  tho  company,  which  is  iinmcdittely  on  Its 
right ;  and  the  chiefs  of  thes<>  companies  will  afterwsrds 
deploy  their  first  pi  itoons  on  the  right  file. 

1^6.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  flies  on  which  tl  o 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  them- 
selves towards  the  onlnr  man  of  the  neighboring  company, 
alre^dy  deplojed  ft^  skirnit-hers  ;  or  if  tho  company  has 
not  finished  its  deployment,  they  will  Judge  carefully  tho 
distance  which  may  still  lo  required  t^  place  all  thoso 
files  in  line,  and  will  th'U  mirch  on  the  point  thus 
ni  rked  out.  The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line, 
will  align  themselves  on  those  already  denlcyrd. 

IBCi.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  fellow 
tho  deplo.^ment,  the  one  on  the  right,  tho  other  nn  tho 
left;  the  movement  concluded,  the-y  will  place  theiusedveti 
near  tho  colonel. 

187.  Tho  reserve <  of  the  company  will  be  established 
in  echellon  iu  the  following  manner:  th"  reserve  of  the 
Kixtli  company  wdl  be  placed  one  hundred  and  flity  pacos 
In  rear  ef  tho  right  of  this  ctmpan>;  the  reserves  of  (ho 
fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united,  opposite  tlie>  center  of 
their  line  of  fkirmish-'rs,  lai.l  thirty  prices  in  advance  of 
the  reserve  of  the  aixth  company  ;  the  recervcs  of  the 
Bevonth  and  oigbth  companies,  also  united,  op|Hi<ito  tho 
center  of '"leir  line  of  skiriuiHliers,  and  thirty  pae-es  far- 
ther to  tho  rear  than  th  >  reserve  of  tho  sixth  company. 

IBS.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  evimpoHing 
tho  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  tho  colonel  to 
tlmt  effect  will  march  these  companie*  thirty  paces  to  tha 
rear,  an.I  will  then  pby  ttuni  into  column  Ly  company,  at 
lalf  distance:  after  which  he  will  conduct  the  column  to 
the  point  which  cliall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

IS'.t.  The  colimel  will  have  a  geueriil  superintendenco  of 
the  movement ;  and  when  it  is  finished,  will  move  to  a 
point  in  rear  of  tbo  liiie,  whence  his  view  may  bolt  em- 
brace all  the  parts,  in  onUr  to  direct  their  movemonts. 

100.  If,  insle-ad  of  i"e 'loving  forward,  it  l>e  I'esirnd  to 
de])loy  by  the  flank,  the  Kixtli  ami  fifth  companies  will  bu 
moved  to  the  front  tenor  twelve  paces,  hitlt>  d,  and  de- 
ployed by  the  II  ink,  the  one  on  the  right,  tin-  iilher  ou 
the  left  file,  by  themeans  already  indicated.  Kacb  of  tbe> 
other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  Hank;  and  as 
Hoon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company,    next   townids  tli.< 

i  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  Intervals,  it  will  be  moved 
upon  the  lino  established  by  tho  iifth  and  sixth  cejmpn- 
nii's,  halted,  and  deployed. 

101.  In  the  preceding  example.it  hns  bee-n  suppoprd 
llmt  tho  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle;  btit  if  in  col- 
umn, it  woidd  bo  d<  ployed  as  skirnilsherH  by  the  same 
commands,  and  acfording  toihe  same  |)ri»ici|deR. 

102.  If  tho  deplojtnent  Is  to  bo  made  /onoa >•</,  tho 
directing  rompany,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  bo 
moved  ten  or  twelve  pnci  b  in  Irout  of  the  Innd  of  tho  col- 
umn,  and  will  then  bo  deployrd  on  the  tile  Indicated. 
Kach  of  the  other  companies  will  lake  its  interval  to  tbo 
right  or  Ifft,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is  tnkon. 

103.  11^  tho  deployment  iB  to  be  made  by  the  flmk,  the 
directing  company  will  be  mo'cd  in  the  same  nmnni'r  to 
the  front,  aa  soon  ns  it  is  uiimaokod,  an<l  will  then  bo 
hal  led  and  deployed  by  Iho  flank  on  the  file  indicated. 
Kach  of  the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  th"  flunk, 
when  its  iuterval   is  taken,  will   bo  moved  ou  the  line, 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


41 


baited,    and    deployed  as    soon   as    the    company   next 
towards  the  direction  shall  hare  finished  its  deiloyment. 

194.  It  has  been  preBcrib?d  to  place  the  reserres  in 
ecbellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  rally, 
be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injuring  each 
ether  ;  and  the  reserves  of  two  coBtiijuous  companies 
have  been  unitjd,  in  ordor  to  diminish  the  miinber  of  the 
t'cbellons,  and  tj  decrease  their  capacity  for  resisting 
cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  p;iveD,  descend  from 
ri^bt  to  left,  but  they  may,  on  an  indication  from  the 
colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same  principle,  so 
as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

19G.  When  tl  e  color-couipacy  is  to  be  deployed  as 
ekirmishers.  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  detailed, 
and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  movenienta 
prescribed  for  a  company,  to  bo  executed  by  the  battalion, 
and  by  the  same  command  and  the  same  signals.  When 
he  wishes  to  rally  the  ba  tulion,  he  will  cause  the  rally 
on  the  battalion  to  bo  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose  his  re- 
serve as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  comp:»nie8  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves  ;  each  re- 
serve of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form  the  first 
front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections  on 
the  flanks ;  the  skirmisbers  who  arrive  first  will  complete 
the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  Iront.  The 
officers  and  sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally,  and  us 
fast  aa  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form  them  into  two 
ranks,  without  regard  to  height,  and  cause  them  to  face 
(■utwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  comman'^ers  of  squares 
will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow 
for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  marching  upon  the 
battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an  advantageous  position; 
to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares  will  be  formed  into  col- 
umn, and  march  in  this  order  ;  and  if  threatened  anew, 
it  will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the 
battalion  reserve,  each  will  i;e-form  aajpromptly  as  possi- 
ble, and  without  regard  to  designation  or  number,  take 
place  in  ths  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already 
in  it. 

201.  The  b  ttalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself 
threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  companies  In 
marching  towards  it  will  place  themselves  promptly  in 
the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march  on  the  squares. 

EXD  OF   INSTKrCTION   FOE  fKIBKISHERS. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE, 
FOR  OFFICERS. 

POSITION  or  THE  SWOKD  OR  SABRE,  CNDEE  AKM8. 

TJie  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which  will 
be  SHpportel  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade 
against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALUTE  WITH  THE  BWOED  OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  (oT  pauses). 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  pacss  from  the  person  to  be 
saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  the 
point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye, 
the  gunrd  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  sup- 
ported on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  s.ibre  by  extend 
ingthearra,  so  that  the  right  Inn  ■  n  r.  brought  to 
the  bidn  of  the  right  thigh,  ami  remain  in  that  position 
until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  ia  rendered  shall  be 
passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  aword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  the 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 

G 


•     COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or  in 
march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  sup- 
prrted  at  the  right  hip,  tho  right  hand  generally  placed 
on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to  hold  it 
steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors,  the  color- 
bearer  will  salute  as  follows: 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along 
the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye ;  lower  the  lance  l)y 
straightenlne  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the  heel  of  the 
lance  remniniug  at  the  hip,  and  bring  lack  the  lance  to 
the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted  shall  be 
passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  pacta. 


MANUAL 

FOR   RELIEVING   SENTINEI.."?. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock  to 
the  front,  se  ze  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with  Ijoth 
hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the  lower  I  and, 
the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the  muzzle,  the  barrel 
sloping  upwards  and  crossing  opposite  the  point  of  the  left 
shoulder,  the  butt  proportionally  lowered.  The  palm  of 
the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  theleft  under 
the  piece,  the  nails  of  boih  hands  next  to  tbe  body,  to 
which  the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

S/iou/der— Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

{First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion  )    Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  Bide. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished  to 
give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be  : 

Parade — Rest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  Diece  on  the  heel  of  the 
butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  ot  the 
centre  ot  the  body  ;  seize  It  at  the  same  time  with  the  left 
hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the  upper  band  ; 
carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the  rear,  the  left  knee 
slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION 

FOE   THE   CHIEF   BrOLEH  AND    DRVM    MAJOB. 

The  post*  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been  given. 
Title  I,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and  band  will 
march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and  on  the 
side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage  of  defiles 
to  the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at  the  head  of 
their  respective  battalions. 


GENERAL  CALLS. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  The  general. 
.■?.  The  .issemlly. 
4.  To  the  color. 


42 


HCHOOL  OF  TlJE 'BATTALION. 


:..  Th0  recall. 

7.  VmV.-  -■-'  '  ■ 

8.  Tht    • 

y.  r/K-i 

10.  BrtrraJ. 
M.  Tattoo, 
li.  To  e^lin^i'h  Vohli. 

r\.  Aiuir   "'     '-'     '-';;<n<. 

U.  Xi"  ird. 

l^.  OrU'  :  lerge.inl' 

\fl.  Fur  in-  . ^  .  . ,  ■  iM  l,i).e  Hifir  Jy/.i. 

in  line  aflrr  firiruT. 
17.   The  dinprrnf. 
lb.   Vficeri'  rail. 
V.I.  Jireak/attr,in. 
liO.  Jiinner  coll. 
21.  Sick  call. 
'22.  t'otigiie  r-tll. 
23.  Church  call. 
H.  IhiU  mil. 
T>.   SclKK'tmll. 

CALLS   FOll  SKIIfMlSHKKS. 
1.  i'lj  L<ii/(>iv/, 

ii.    UnlLr  hayiintt. 
:i.   (^'UCil'  lint''. 

"i.   5'A«  run. 

7;  J-'urinarU. 
8.  7ii  ntrciit. 
9    i/a«. 
hi.  Jin  the  riglU  flan/.. 

11.  ;;j//fte  hjlflaiil: 

12.  (  owtnCTir*  firiiig'. 
IJ.   <Jm*c Jiriny. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 
K'.  Li*  dcirn. 

17.  iiiic  iijJ. 
1 S.  ;?aWv  by  fours. 
n.  Jlully  by  seclioH'. 
JO.  7f<i%  by  platnotu. 

21.  li<illy  on  the  reterve. 

22.  y>fi//;/  on  //«?  InttoVfi. 
2:i.  .leftirtt/o  on  <A<'  battalion, 

KuTE. — ^'licU  tlio  whole  troopn,  in  the  Bdtne  crtmp  of 
carrinou,  iirt  to  (Japart,  </i«  yeneral,  th»  astenihly,  Rud  <o 
</i<  cu/o)-,  ■will  be 'beaten  or  auunded,  at  the  projer  int  r- 
TalSiia  Hie  order  bere  mentioned.  (At  the  fir  t,  the 
troopi  will  prepare  forthemovemptit:  at  the  spcund,  they 
will  form  by  cv.mpany,  and  at  the  third  nnlte  by  bat- 
tii'iou. 


TITLE  FOURTU. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Ibrmalion  0/  Oie  ISatlalion. 

1 .  RvERY  colonel  wiil  Inbnr  to  habituate  hU  biittalion  to 
form  lino  ol  battle,  by  nifcht  as  well  as  by  day,  with  the 
grrAtfSt  prssible  promptitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  gfinerally  be  deai^jnated  as 
the  directing  company.  '1  hat,  an  boou  uh  farmed,  will  be 
placed  on  the  direction  tlie  Cdbmel  may  have  di-termiiiod 
for  the  line  of  battle  Th9  other  companies  will  form  on 
it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  principles  of  Btn-cessive 
formations  which  will  be  herein  proscribed. 


8.  The  color-boarrr  may  hare  receired  iSe  folor  fVom 
th<>  hands  of  the  dklonel:  b\it  if  there  be  davliKhl,  ami 
time,  Ihecnlor  will  be  produced  with  due  Boleiniiity. 

Cutnpoiition  and  i,iarch  of  the  color-t*eort. 

4.  When  thehattalinn  turns  •«t  under  arms,  and  the 
Color  is  wanted,  a  conipuny,  other  than  that  of  the  color, 
will  be  put  in  march  to  reciivf  and  escort  if. 

.1.  The  march  will  be  in  the  followinft  order,  in  •julck 
time, and  without  muhic  ;  the  field  music,  ful lowed  by  the 
band;  the  escort  In  column  by  platoon,  tight  in  ItonI, 
wjih  arms  on  tli'i  rii;Ut  shoulder,  and  the  color-tx-arer 
between  the  platoons. 

C.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  qaarteri  of  the 
colonel,  the  escort  will  form  lino,  the  field  maaic  an4  hand 
on  the  ri^ht,  an<l  arms  will  be  brought  to  a  shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  e«cort  is  In  line,  the  color-bearer, 
preceded  by  the  first  lieutetiaut,  uiij  followed  by  a  Mr- 
geapt  of  the  e«-ort,  will  jfo  to  receive  the  color 

8.  Whtoi  ti  .■  ,-,  ^  r  Ik  irer  shall  rome  out,  followed. hy 
theUc'jt*!.  mt,  he  will  halt  before  the  en- 
trance ;  t'  iircsent  arms,  aud  the  field  mnaic 
will  sotiuJ 

'J.  After  auUio  iwciiiy  s-ocoiJr,  the  captain  will  caOse 
the  sound  to  cea^jf,  arms  to  bo  shrnlderci.  and  then  break 
by  platoon  into  colu-.nii  ;  the  color-brarer  will  place  him- 
Fi'lf  between  theplat^otig,  and  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant 
will  resume  their  pn-jts. 

10.  The  escort  will  niiirch  back  to  the  battalion  tn  the 
Bound  of  music  in  quick  time,  and  In  th«  same  order  as 
above,  tliB  RUido  on  the  right.  The  march  ^(illbe  so  con- 
ducted that  vrhen  the  escort  arrive?  ftt  one  hundred  and 
fifty  paces  In  front  of  the  ripht  of  the  bnttnl'on,  the  di- 
rection of  tha  iiiBich  will  be  parallrl  to  ItH  front,  and 
when  tlio  color  arrives  nearly  opposite  itH  p'ace  inline, 
the  colaroil  will  change  dlrcrtion  to  the  left,  and  the 
I  right  Kuijo  vill  dlre:t  himself  on  the  centre  of  the  batta- 

ifviwrs  pi'.il  to  the  col'tr. 

'... ,;i  the  distance  of  twenty  p:i50s  frein  the 

lialtaiioii,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music  cease  ;  the 
colonel  will  jilnce  himself  tix  paces  before  the  centre  of 
the  battnlion,  the  color-bearer  will  approach  the  colonel 
by  the  front,  in  quick  time;  when  at  the  distance  of  ten 
paces,  ho  will  halt:  the  colr>nel  wilt  cause  arius  to  be 
presented,  and  to  the  color  Id  be  nonudod,  which boinK  ex- 
ecuted, the  color-bearer  wlil  take  his  place  in  the  front 
ruuk  of  the  color-guard,  and  the  bnttulion,  by  command, 
shoulder  arms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  niusic,  and  baml,  will  return  in 
quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle, 
marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  eseortod  back  to  the  colonel's 
tent  or  qnarters  in  the  aboTe  order. 

General  linles  ami  Diclshii  6/  iJie  ^Choot  oj  the  Baltalinti. 

M.  This  school  has  for  Its  oljccl  the  it1^t^urtlon  of  bat- 
talions singly,  iaud  thus  to  luapiro  thom  for  manoeuvres 
in  line.  The  harmony  »o  iudisiiensable  in  tho  movements 
ot  luauy  battalions,  can  only  be  attained  by  the  use  of 
tho  same  commands,  the  paiiie  princiides,  and  the  same 
means  of  execution.  Utnco,  all  colonels  and  actual 
commanders  of  batUilion  will  conform  themselves,  with- 
out addition  or  curtailment,  to  what  Will  henin  be  pro- 
scribed. 

15.  Whon  a  battalion  instructed  In  this  drill  shall 
manrtjtivre  in  line,  tho  colonel  will  reputato  its  move- 
ments, .18  pieflcribcd  in  tin  third  volume  of  the  TaolioB 
for  he.tvy  infantry.  ...,,..    .. 

10.  Tho  school  of  th5  battalion  will  bo  divided  into  five 

P*''*3.  .       .  ,  ... 

17.  Tho  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  riofing 
ranks,  and  tho  execnt'on  of  the  difterent  fires. 

IS.  Tho  scconil,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from  the 
order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

1!».  Tho  third,  tho  march  in  column,  anM  llie  ither 
movements  incident  thereto. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-- PART  1. 


43 


20.  Xho  fourth,  tha  differeDt  modes  ot  pasfticg  from  tbe 
order  in  celuma  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  roan:  b  in  lineof  bat- 
tle, in  advance  and  in  retreat;  tbe  passage  uf  defiles  in 
retreat ;  the  march  by  the  flank  :  thcformatidn  by  file  into 
line  of  battle  ;  the  change  of  front ;  the  column  doablel 
on  the  centre;  dispositions  against  cavalry;  the  rally, 
and  rnles  for  manc^uvring  by  the  rear  rank. 


PXm  FIRST. 

Cpeniiig  and  dc.^iug  ranks,  and  the  cj-ccnthn  of  Hit  dijfercnl 
fires. 

Article  Fibst. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

liJ.  The  tolotel,  wishing  tbe  ranks  to  be  opoocd,  will 
command : 

1.  rtepare  to  open  ranks. 

2.'..  At  this  command  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  majer 
will  place  thpmselveo  on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  the 
tirst  on  the  Hank  of  the  file  clofers,  and  the  second 
fonr  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  tbe  battalion. 

24.  These  dispositiona  being  made,  tbe  colonel  will 
command : 

2.  To  the  rear,  open  order.    Z.  Mabcu. 

26.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  sergeatts, 
and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  place 
themselves  f(.nr  paces  In  rear  of  tbe  front  r.-ink,  and 
opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  in  order  to  mn'-k 
the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank;  they  will  bs 
aligned  by  the  major  on  the  left  sergcnnt  of  the  battal'on, 
who  will  be  rareftrt  to  place  himself  exactly  four  paces  in 
rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to  hold  his  piece  between  the 
eyes,  eroct  and  inverted,  the  better  to  indicate  te  the 
nisjoT  the  direction  to  be  given  to  the  covering  ser- 
ceanta. 

26.  At  the  command  marcJi,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file 
closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  counting  steps  ;  the 
men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line  traced  for  this 
rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the  covering  sergeants, 
who  will  align  correctly  the  men  of  their  respective 
companies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the  dis- 
tance ef  two  pac^s  from  the  rear  rank,  glanring  eyes  to 
the  right ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will,  from  tbe  right, 
align  them  on  the  file  closer  of  the  left,  who,  having 
placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from  the  rearrjnk, 
will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up  erect  between  bis 
eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

28.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  co:ii- 
iiiand  : 

4.  Fbost. 

.Kt  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  mnjor,  and 
the  left  sergeant,  will  take  their  places  in  line  of 
battle. 

2!).  Tbe  colonel  will  caase  the  ranks  to  bo  closed  by  the 
commands  prescribed  for  ilu;  instructor  in  the  school  rt 
the  company,  No.  28. 

Aeticle  S£eo:«D. 
JTanual  of  arms. 

■  >0.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  cc  lonel  will  .'cjuiso  the 
following  times  and  pauses  to  be  executed  : 


JW'rnt  arntf,. 
Order  arms. 
Support  arm*. 
Fix  hatjoncl. 
Charge  btpoiitl. 
Unfix  hoyoni-l. 


t^houldcr  vrrm. 
."shoulder  ar»is. 
.■>/i/-iiWer  ar]ns. 
f'hnulder  ariiii, 
ShiiuUfcr  anna. 
Shoulder  ttthiK. 


Abticli:  laiBD 
Loadiur/  at  will,  and  tite  Firiv^s. 

M.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed  loading 
at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  tbe  8<'ho<il  of  th<> 
company  No.  45  ;  the  ofticers  and  sergeants  in  the  rank? 
will  face  to  the  right  with  tbe  men  at  the  eighth 
time  of  loading,  and  will  face  to  the  Iront  when  the  men 
next  to  tfaem  come  to  a  shoulder. 

Si.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire  \>y 
company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fir* 
by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  to  !■•' 
herein  indicated. 

3S.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will  h1w«j« 
be  direct  ;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  tire  by  w  og, 
and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  cr  oMique. 

04.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel 
will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  le/t) 
oblique,  between  the  c^ramandi'  ready  and  aim. 

3d.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alternately 
by  the  right  and  left  companies  of  each  division,  as  if  the 
divisioa  wtre  alone.  The  right  compapy  will  fire  first ; 
the  captain  of  the  left  will  not  give  his  first  command 
tin  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces  at  a  ready  in  thn  right 
company;  the  captain  of  the  latter,  after  tbe  first  dis- 
charge, will  observe  the  same  rule  in  reepect  to  the  left 
company  ;  and  the  fire  will  thus  be  ccnlinned  alternately. 

o6.  The  colonel  will  cbaerve  the  same  rule  in  the  firing 
by  wing. 

'.Vi.  The  fire  by  file  will  commf  nee  in  all  the  ccmpanies 
at  once,  and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prtfcribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company  No.  J5  and  following. 
The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  r»nk  alter- 
nately, as  has  been  prescribed  in  (ho  school  of  the  com 
pany  No.  tS  and  the  folk  wing. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself  for 
the  defense  of  the  color. 

The  fire  hjfciitu^iiy. 

39.  The  colonel  wishing  the  flre  by  coiupaui  lu  be  exe- 
cuted, will  command : 

1.  Fire  hij  compaiiy,    2.  Cjinmence  f.riiitj. 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  tovtriug 
sergeants  will  take  the  poeitions  indicated  in  the  school 
of  the  company  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the  fame 
time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  cf  tbe  guard  in  a  line 
with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  T/jm  rii/«  it  general 
for  (HI  the  different  firings. 

42.  At  tbe  second  conimand,  the  odd  numbered  compa- 
nies will  commence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will  each  give 
(he  commands  prescribed  in  tbe  echo<  I  of  (he  company 
No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  command  coiii^an^/ 1 y 
that  of  first,  third,  fifth  or  secenlh,  according  to  the  number 
of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  nnmb^red  companies  will 
give,  in  their  torn,  the  same  coramands,  observing  to 
precede  them  by  tbe  nnmber  of  tb^ir  respective  coxnpa- 
nieB. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbercil  companies  may 
not  all  fire  at  once,  their  ciptains  will  observe,  but  only 
for  the  first  discbarge,  to  give  the  oommand  fi^e  one 
after  another;  tlms,  the  captain  of  the  third  cimpany 
will  not  give  the  command  fire  until  he  Iws  heard  the 
fire  of  the  first  company;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will 
observe  the  same  ru'e  with  respect  to  the  third,  and  ihe 
captiin  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the 
third,  and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same  rule  with 
respect  to  the  fifth, 

io.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  toceaseby  the  sound 
to  cease  firing ;  at  this  sonDd,  the  men  will  execote  what 
is  prescrited  in  the  echod  of  the  company  No.  tJS:  at  the 
^ouud,  for  oQlccrs  to  take  their  places  after  firing,  the 
captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color-cuaid,  will 
promptly  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battl*:  litis  rvh' 
if  (/eiitral  for  all  the  firiny. 


44 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II. 


The  /ire  tij  teiiig. 

46.  Whun  th«  cHonel  •hall  wiih  (his  flrn  to  he  exo- 
<  uted,  he  will  command: 

I.  Firt  hy  iriity.     •_*.   Right  iciny.     3.  Keapt.      1.  Am.     5. 
FlBE.     C.  1.0  *P. 

47.  The  I'  I'^nrl  will  cause  (br  wines  to  fire  alternately 
and  hn  will  rpcnmmeDce  the  tiro  l.y  the  commands,  1. 
lii-lhl  tring ;  2.  Aim;  3  Fire;  4.  Load.  1.  Lfft  irinf/ ; 
'2.  Aim;  3.  Fire,  4.  I,i>aii;  in  coiifi)rming  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  36. 

The  fire  hy  hattnlion. 

IS.  Th»-  coloni  I  will  can«5  this  flro  to  do  oxecutpil  by 
the  comma' ds  last  prescri bod.  Kubstituting  for  the  first 
two,   I.   Fire  h>i  Inttalirnt ;  2.  UMalion. 

The  fire  hy  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  exocnted,  tho  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 


1 .    Fire  hy  file. 


liat/alioH.    3.    BcASY.    1.  Commcnee 
firing. 

■V).  At  thv>  fjurth  command,  tho  flro  will  commence  on 
llio  riicht  of  .->ach  compiny  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
tho  comnany  No  .IT.  The  colonel  may,  it  he  thinks  pro 
per,  cans?  the  fire  to  commence  on  the  right  cf  each  pla- 
toon. 

The  fire  hy  ran);, 

fit.  To  caase  this  fire  to  be  czecntod,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank     2.  BaUaXion.    3.  Beadt.     4.  Hear  rnnl: 
5.  Aim.     C.  i'lRB.    7.  Load. 

62  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  boon  explained  in 
the  school  of  tho  company  No.  59,  in  foilowiu;;  the  pro- 
gression prescribed  for  the  two  ranks  which  should  (ire 
alternately. 

To  fire  hy  the  rear  rank. 

.53.  When  the  colonel  shall  wl;h  the  battalion  to  (ire  to 
the  rear,  he  will  command  : 


1.   Face  hy  Ihe  rear  rank. 


J)altaUon.    3   Ahoul — Face. 


54  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering  sor- 
•;eants,  and  file  closers  will  oxecme  what  has  been  pre- 
Kcribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  fi9  ;  the  color- 
boaror  will  pass  into  therear  rank,  and  for  this  pnrposo, 
the  corporal  ef  his  file  will  step  before  the  corporal  next 
on  his  right  tn  let  the  color-bearer  pacs,  and  will  then 
lake  his  place  in  the  front  rank;  tho  lieutonant  coloml, 
adjutant,  major,  Borjroant  maj  t,  and  the  music  will  place 
themBelves  before  the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  roar, 
each  opposite  his  place  In  the  line  of  battle — tho  flriit  two 
pASsine  around  Ihe  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left 
of  the  battalion. 

65.  At  the  third  command,  tho  battalion  will  lice  about ; 
the  captains  and  covering  sprge.iutH  observing  what  is 
prescribed  in  tho  school  of  tho  con  pany  No.  70. 

!>(i.  The  battalion  facinf?  thus  by  tho  rear  rank,  tho 
roljiicl  will  cause  it  to  executo  the  different  fires  by  the 
same  commands  as  if  it  wore  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

fi7.  The  rlRht  and  left  winfts  will  retain  tho  same  doBij;- 
nations,  althrugh  faced  about;  the  companies  also  will 
preserve  their  former  designations,  as  first,  second, 
third,   *c. 

58.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  each 
company,  now  become  the  rlRht. 

59.  The  fire  by  rank  will  cnmmenci  by  the  front  rank, 
now  become  the  rear  rank.  This  rank  will  preserve  its 
denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering  screeants,  and  color-guard 
will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel,  take  the 
places  prescribed  for  them  i.i  tho  fires,  with  the  front 
rank  leading. 


^Gl.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  Ihe  roar,  wishing  to  face 
the  battalion  to  ill  proper  front,  will  command  : 

I.  Filer  hy  iMe /roiU  r<uil:.    ::.  BMalion.    :i.  Ahoui  —  VArr.. 

62.  At  those  commands,  tho  battalion  will  return  to  its 
proper  front  bv  tho  ni<-ans  proscribed  No.x.  /4  and  b-'i. 

63.  The  flro  by  file  b<inii  that  most  used  in  war,  tho 
cdonel  will  giv.  It  the  preference  in  tho  preparatory  ex- 
ercisos,  in  order  that  tho  battalion  mav  be  brought  to 
execute  it  with  th<  greatest  possible  regularity. 

r.l.  When  the  colonel  m.iy  wish  t»  give  some  relaxation 
to  th"  battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks,  be  will  ex- 
ecute what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany Nos.  37  and  38  or  No«.  .TJ  and  40. 

('>5.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  arms  to  bo 
stacked,  ho  will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered  arms,  aad 
then  command  : 

1.  Slack— Arus.    2.  Break  ranks.    3.  Mabiii. 

65.  The  colorol  wishing  the  men  to  re'urn  to  the  ranks, 
will  cause  <iW«H/iof»  to  bo  sounded,  at  which  the  battalion 
will  re-form  behind  the  stacks  of  arms.  The  sound  being 
finished,  the  colonel  after  causing  thostncksto  be  broken, 
will  command : 

BallaUon, 

07.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  their  attention, 
and  remain  immovable. 

PAET  SECOND. 

Different  moda  of  passing  from  the  order  in  hall'.c  to  the 
order  in  column. 

Article  First. 

To  break  to  the  rigid  or  Ihe  left  into  column. 

_  6S.  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into  column  by 
company  ;  they  may  also  break  by  division  or  by  platoon. 
09.  It  is  here  supposod  thfit  the  colonel  wishes  to  break 
by  company  to  the  right;  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  company,  ri'jhl  lohf  el.    2.  Maecii  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

7".  At  tho  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
self rapidly  before  the  ceutro  of  his  company,  and  caution 
it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right ;  each  covering  ser- 
geant will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank 

71.  At  the  command  man /i, each  company  will  break  to 
the  right,  according  to  the  principles  i>ro8Crlbed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  173;  each  captain  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  platoon  ; 
the  left  guide,  as  soon  as  ho  can  pass,  will  place  himself 
on  tho  left  of  the  front  rank  to  conduct  the  marching 
Hank,  and  when  he  elriU  have  appi'oached  near  to  the 
perpendicular  the  captnin  will  command  :  1.  Such  com- 
jMnij.    2.  Halt. 

72.  At  tho  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  left  guidf  shall  be  at  the  distance  of  three 
paces  from  tho  pcrpeniliculur,  tho  company  will  halt;  the 
guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left  arm  lightly  against 
the  breast  of  tho  captain,  who  will  establish  him  on  the 
alignment  of  the  man  who  has  faced  to  tho  right;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
alignment  on  the  right  of  that  man  ;  which  being  execu- 
ted, tho  ciptain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left, 
command  Fro.nt,  and  place  hinnelf  two  paces  before  its 
center. 

73.  The  captains  having  commanded  KnoNT,  the  guides, 
although  some  of  them  may  not  bo  in  the  direction  of  the 
precedinit  guides,  will  stand  fawl,  in  order  that  the  error  of 
a  company  that  has  wheeled  too  much  or  two  little  may 
not  be  propagated:  the  guides  not  in  tho  directijn  will 
readily  come  into  it  when  the  column  is  put  in 
march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into  column 
by  company  to  tho  left,  according  to  the  sane  principles, 
and  by    inverse   means;  the   covering  Bergeant  of  each 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II. 


45 


company  will  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  the  left 
Koide  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  Bt 
the  moment  the  company  halts.  _ 

75.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the  indica- 
tion division  will  be  substituted  in  the  commands  for  that 
of  rumiyamt ;  the  chief  of  each  division  (the  senior  cap- 
tain) willconform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
chief  of  company,  and  will  placehimself  two  paces  before 
the  center  of  his  tlivision;  the  junior  captain,  if  not 
already  there,  will  place  himself  in  thf  interval  lietween 
the  two  companies  in  the  front  rank,  and  be  covered  by 
the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company  in  the  rear 
rank.  The  right  guide  of  the  right  company  will  be  the 
right  guide,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company,  the 
left   g\iide   of   the  division. 

76.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to  the 
right  or  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  pass  around 
the  left  of  his  company  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
second  platoon,  and  for  this  purpose,  each  covering  ser- 
geant, except  the  one  of  the  right  company,  will  step, 
f>rthe  moment,  in  rear  of  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

77.  When  the  battalion  breiiks  by  division  to  the  right, 
and  there  is  an|odd  company,  the  captain  of  this  company, 
(the  left"!,  after  wheeling  into  column,  will  cause  it  to 
obliqne  to  the  l^ft,  halt  it  at  company  distance  from  the 
preceding  division,  place  his  left  gui.le  on  the  direction  of 
the  column,  and  then  align  his  company  by  the  left. 
When  the  line  breaks  by  division  to  the  left,  the  odd 
company  will  bo  in  front  ;  Its  captain,  having  wheeled  it 
into  column,  will  cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it 
at  division  distance  from  the  division  next  in  the  rear, 
place  his  right  guide  on  the  direction  of  the  other  guides, 
and  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

78.  Thp battalion  being  in  column,  the  lifntenant  col- 
onel andmajir  will  place  thenipelves  on  the  directing 
flank,  the  first  abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision  and  the 
other  abreast  with  the  last,  and  both  six  paces  from  the 
flank.  The  adjutant  will  l)e  near  the  lieutenant  colanel, 
and  the  serif  ant  mfljo-  near  th<>  major. 

70.  The  colonel  will  hive  no  fixed  place  as  the  instructor 
of  his  battalion;  but  in  columns  composed  of  many  bat- 
taljonH,  he  will  place  himself  habitually  on  the  direct- 
ing flank  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  guides,  and 
abreast  with  the  centra  of  his  battalion. 

50.  Wlipn  the  colonel  sliall  wish  to  move  the  column 
forward  without  halting  it.  he  will  caution  the  battalion 
to  that  efl'ect,  and  will  command  : 

1.  Z>7  company,  right  wheel     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
MABcn  ) 

51.  At  tlie  first  command,  the  captains  of  companies 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  breaking  into  column 
from  a  halt. 

82.  At  th!>  second  command,  they  will  remain  in  front 
of  their  companies  to  superintend  the  movement ;  the  com- 
panies will  wheel  to  the  right  on  fixed  pivots  as  inncated 
in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  185 ;  the  left  guides  will 
conform  to  what  is  pr  scribe"'  above;  when  they  shall 
arrive  near  the  perpendicular,  the  colonel  will  command: 

3.  Forwii-d.    4.  Mabch.    6.  Guide  left. 

?o.  At  the  thiri  command,  each  covering  serjeant  will 
place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  on  tlie  right 
cf  the  front  rank  ot  his  company.  At  the  f.inrth  com- 
mand, which  will  given  at  the  instant  when  the  wheel  is 
completed,  the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel  and  march 
Btmlght  forward  At  the  fifth,  the  men  will  tike  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  leading  guide  will  march 
in  the  direc!if>n  indicated  to  him  by  the  lientenant  coo- 
nel.  The  guides  will  immediate'y  conform  themselves  to 
the  principles  of  (he  march  in  column,  school  of  the  com- 
pany No.  200  and  followiiig. 

8-4  If  the  battalljon  bi'  marching  in  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left,  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  suma  means  ;  but  he  should  pre- 
viously caution  the  I  attalion  that  it  is  to  coutinue  the 
march. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  inte 
colnmn  by  company  to  the  left,  according   to  the  same 


principles  and  by  inverse  means  ;  the  covering  sergeant 
of  each  company  wfll  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and 
the  left  guides  wi  1  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  their 
respective  companies  at  the  command  forward 

8rt.  When  a  battalion  has  'o  prolong  itself  in  column 
towards  the  right  or  left,  or  )\as  to  direct  its  march  in 
column  perpendicularly  or  di»gonally  in  front,  or  in  rear 
of  either  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  by  com- 
pany to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just  been  prescribed  ;  but 
when  the  line  breaks  to  the  right,  in  order  to  march 
towards  the  left,  or  therpverse.  the  colonel  will  command: 
Break  lo  the  right  to  march  to  the  Uft,  or  hrenlt  to  thf  left  to 
march  to  III''  right,  before  giving  th''  command,  hycompanii, 
rujht  (or  left)  wheel.  As  soon  ae  the  battalion  is  broken, 
the  lientenant  colonel  will  place  a  marker  abreast  with 
the  right  guide  of  the  leading  company.  The  instant 
the  column  is  put  in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel  to 
the  left  (or  right)  ten  paces  to  the  front  without  chang- 
ing the  gnide.  and  wheel  again  to  Ihfl  left  Cor  richt.) 
The  second  VI  heel  being  completed,  the  captain  will  im- 
mediately command  giiide  left  for  right.)  The  guide  of 
this  company  will  march  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the 
guides  of  the  column.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be 
careful  to  place  a  second  marker  at  the  point  where  the 
first  company  is  to  change  direction  the  eecon  *  time. 

Article  Second. 

To  hreak  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  itito  column,  and  lo 
advance  or  retire  by  tlie  right  or  left  o/companie'. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  battalion 
to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column  by  com- 
pany, he  will  command :  f 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column.     2.  Bat- 
talion right— Tacb.      3.  MABCH(ortfoH6fc5t<ic<;— Mabch.) 

8S.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face 
to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the 
fr.ont  rank. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  right ;  each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  Ms 
company,  and  break  two  files  to  there^r;  the  first  file 
will  break  the  whole  depth  of  two  ranks  ,  the  second  file 
le=s;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will  place  him- 
self so  that  his  breast  may  touch  lightly  the  left  arm  of 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  last  file  in  the  company  nest 
on  the  right  of  his  own.  The  captain  of  the  right  com- 
pany will  place  himself  as  if  there  were  a  company  on  his 
right,  and  will  align  hitpself  on  the  other  captains.  The 
covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  break  to  the 
rear  with  the  right  files,  and  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant, 
placed  before  this  fil«,  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to 
the  rear.  The  other  flies  will  come  successively  to  wheel 
on  the  same  spot.  The  captains  will  stand  fa^t,  see  their 
companies  file  past,  and  at  f-e  instant  the  last  file  shall 
have  wheeled,  each  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.    2.  Hait.    3.  Fbont. 
4.  I,'/^— Deess. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front,  its 
left  guide  will  place  himself  so  that  his  lelt  arm  may 
touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align  it- 
self on  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so  directirg  it,  that  the 
new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that  which  the 
company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle,  and,  the  bef- 
ter  to  judge  this,  ho  will  step  back  two  paces  from  the 
flark. 

93.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  com 
mand  :  Fbont,  and  take  his  place  before  its  centre. 

91.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  break  into  colnmn  by  company,  to 
the  rear,  by  the  right,  ho  will  command  : 


46 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II. 


rtf/hl  of   eompauias    to    tk*    rr'r    into    rtAumn, 
■Tlien,  by  the  right, Hank.   Hi.    Mabcii  Cor  double 
-Mabcb). 

05.  At  (he  fltBt  coiutnauJ,  o*cb  captaiu  ^vill  iit«p  briskly 
lu  front  nf  the  centre  of  bia  ooiuiMtD.T,  and  caution  it  to 
face  hy  t\e  right  flank. 

9G.  At  tbu  cemu&nd  vi^rdi,  tbo  batta  ion  viil  face  to 
the  right :  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of 
hit  coiupnny  and  cause  It  t'l  break  to  the  right  ;  iho  Urst 
tile  uf  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  light, aad  tbu  cover- 
iug  Rcrgnant  placud  in  fiont  of  this  Hie  will  conductit  per- 
pendicularly to  the  rear ;  the  other  files  will  wheel  sue- 
cc6iively  at  the  samo  place  ai  the  firet.  The  captains  will 
SFe  tbeir  companies  file  past  them  ;  whYn  the  last  files 
bav«  wheeled,  the  colonel  will  ccmmand  : 

o.    Ji  llahon,  hy  Uie  k/t  ndnk—il aucu .       i.     Gnitle  left. 

'>7.  At  the  command  march,  the  coni)iHuieH  will  face  to 
the  left,  and  march  in  column  in  the  uew  direction.  The 
captains  will  place  tbemselTe!<  in  front  of  the  centres  of 
their  respective  companies.  At  the  fourth  command,  the 
guides  will  conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in 
( olumn  ;  the  leading  one  will  more  in  the  directi>>n  indi- 
cated to  him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.  The  men  will 
take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel  will 
i;ivo  the  same  commands  as  iu  the  case  cf  breakiui;  to  the 
rear  by  the  right,  substituting  the  indication  H'/,  for  that 
of  rif/bt. 

'.t"*.  The  movement  will  be  executed  Recording  to  the 
Mame  principles.  Kach  captain  will  ba'<ten  to  the  left  of 
his  company,  cause  the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear, 
and  then  place  hia  breast  aeainst  the  rifiht  file  of  the  com- 
pany next  on  the  left  of  his  own,  iu  the  niair.ior  pre- 
scribed above. 

100.  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the  left 
Kuido  of  each  company  will  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  headmost  file,  to  conduct  him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  fare  to  the  front,  (he 
right  (tnide  ofeach  will  place  himself  so  (hat  his  right  arm 
may  lightly  touch  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to  (ho 
rear,  by  the  right  or  left.  In  like  manner  ;  in  this  case, 
the  indication  rfinnons  will  be  Bubsiitnted,  in  the  first 
command,  for  that  of  coytipaui'-s :  the  chieffl  «f  division  will 
conform  thempelves  to  what  is  prescrib'd  for  the  chiefs  of 
ro'npany.  The  junior  captain  in  each  division  will  place 
hinMPlf,  when  th»  division  fuc^n  to  a  fiank,  by  the  side  of 
th"  coveriuR  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into 
(ho  front  rank. 

103.  If  there  be  an  odd  number  of  companicf,  and  (he 
battalion  breaks  by  division  t<)  the  roar,  whether  by  tho 
right  or  left,  the  captain  of  the  left  conjpany  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  No.  77. 

104.  Tliis  manner  of  breaking  into  column  being  at 
once  the  most  prunipt  and  regular,  will  ho  preferred  on 
actual  service,  unless  there  be  some  jiarticular  reason  fir 
breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  tho  battaliim  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and  the 
colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  tho  rltcht  of 
comj'Hnies,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  riffht  of  compatiief  to  the  front  (or  rear).  2. 
JiaUalion,  riylU—FAve.  '.i.  AIabcii  (or  tlmihle  quid — 
Mabcu).    4.  Guide  rigid,  {lefl)  or  {centre). 

lOG.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
rapidly  two  pacf  s  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  caution^it  tofuce  (othe  right ;  (ho  covering  sergeants 
will  replace  tho  captains  in  the  front  rank. 

107.  At  the  Second  command,  the  battalion  will  faci  to 
thd  right,  and  each  captain  moviig  cjulckly  to  tho  right 
of  his  company  will  cause  Bins  to  break  to  the  front,  oc- 
ccrding  t«  the  princii'I'B  indicated  No  8!i. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  each  captain  placing  him- 
self on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide  will  conduct  bis 
company  perpendicularly  to  tua  original  line.  At  the 
fourth  command,  the  guide  of  eacli  company  will  (Irons  to 


the   rigbt<  lofl,  or  c;>utie,  ai.coi'diDg   to  tlu  indication 
given,  taking  care  to  |>re«erve  accurately  hit  dittAuce. 

100.  If  the  (  olnnol  Fh  iiM  wish  to  move  to  the  frpnt,  o 
rear,  by  the  left  companies,  tbo  movemenl  will  >>e  exer 
cutod  by  the  rume  nuaiis  and  the  samo  commands,  sub- 
siitutine  left  {orri-jU. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shoolil  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  compa- 
nies, ha  will  cummand  : 

1.  liy  the  right  of  cofnpattie*  to  Oic  front  (jr  r«lr1.  J. 
Jioutation,  hy  Ou  rifjhl  flank.  3.  Marou  (or  doubl'- 
quick— ilAion).    4.  Guide  right  (left)  or  {centre). 

111.  Wlilch  will  be  executed  accord inir  to  the  princi- 
ples and  means  prescribed  Nos.  PO  and  following,  and  lOi. 
and  following.  At  the  first  command,  the  color  and  gen- 
eral guides  will  take  their  places  as  in  c-lunin. 

112.  If  the  C'llonel  should  with  to  advance  or  retire  by 
the  left  companies,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
8ame  means  and  the  same  commands,  substituting  t^  ftir 
right. 

113.  If  the  bftttnlion  bo  advancing  by  the  right  or  left 
of  companies,  and  the  olonel  should  wish  to  form  line  to 
the  front,  he  wilt  command  : 

1.  /fy  compani'"!'  into  Une.    i.  M'RCB  (or   ilouhle  quick— 
MAncn).    3,  Ouicle  ctntre. 

114.  At  the  command  ni<frc7i,  briskly  repentod  by  tlw 
captains,  each  comi  any  will  be  formed  into  line,  as  pre- 
scribed  in  the  scliool  of  the  company.  No.  1^1. 

115.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  and  general 
guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their  places  in  line,  ils  will  b<> 
hereinafter  prescribed  No.  lori.  \ 

lUi.  Iflho  battalion  be  re'iring  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  lino  farlu;; 
the  enemy,  he  will  lirst  cause  the  companiea  to  face  about 
while  marching,  und  immediately  form  in'  line  by  the 
r<,i,n  ,   ii.i.  .firl    iii<-.i IIS  prescribed  Xoi.  1  l.'I  ami  fullowiug. 


Aai  iLB  TuiaD. 
T'.i  xil"ij  Oil  hati'iliun  into  cloic  coUintH. 

117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  couip,»ry  or 
by  division,  on  the  right  or  l.ft  subdivision,  or  on  any 
other  subdivision,  ripht  or  left  in  front. 

U.S.  The  examples  in  this  school  will  suppose  tho 
presence  of  four  divisions  with  directions  for  an  odd  com- 
pany ;  but  what  will  be  prescribed  lor  fuir,  will  serve 
equally  lor  two,  thiee  ci  live  divivions. 

119.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by  division 
iu  rear  of  (ho  first,  (he  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column,  h>i  liiviKtun,    2.  (tu  iJie  first  rfieiVion,  right  i,i 
front.     :t.  BatLilion,  right — K.icE.    4.  March  (or  double 

(/Ill'tA— M.^Bl'H.) 

120.  At  the  BccMud  conimaurt,  all  the  chicfti  of  division 
will  place  themsolvpH  befn-e  the  centres  of  their  divlslorB  ; 
th»  chief  of  the  first  will  caution  it  to  stand  fist;  the 
chiefb  of  tho  throe  othfrit  will  remind  tlum  that  they  will 
have  to  face  to  the  rinht,aiul  the  covering  sergeant  of  the 
right  company  ofeach  Uivisiim  will  replace  his  captain  iu 
the  front  rauk,  as  eo>m  us  the  latter  steps  out. 

I'Jl.  At  the  third  command,  Ihn  last  thre<  division*! 
will  facs  to  tho  rinht  ;  tho  chief  of  Ciich  Oiviaiou  will 
haston  to  its  right,  and  cause  the  lllex  lo  be  broken  to 
the  rear,  as  indicated  No  (iO  ;  the  riulit  guide  will  break 
at  tho  same  time,  and  place  himsell  l..^'.irt.  tlio  ftont  rauk 
man  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him,  nud  oaoh  ohief  of  di- 
vision will  place  himself  by  the  sidw  of  this  guide. 

122.  At  tho  mou  eut  these  divisions  face  to  the  right, 
the  junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
tho  covering  sorgoaut  of  tho  loft  cojurauy,  who  will  place 
oimsolf  in  the  froit  rauk.  'i'Uiis  rrk  ia  gcneml  for  all  tin- 
X)li'!/mcuta  111  diiitivit. 

U'iJ.  At  tbo  command  vimch,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  add.  (fuide  left;  at  this.  Ha  left  guide  will  place 
himself  ou    tlie  left,   as   noon   as   (he  movement  of  tho 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION—PART  II. 


47 


second  division  may  permit,  and  the  (lie  closers  will  ad- 
TSDce  ono  pac«  upon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  All  the  other  diTisions,  each  conducted  by  its 
chief,  will  step  off  together,  to  take  their  j.laces  in  the 
colnmn  ;  the  second  will  gain,  in  wheeling  by  file  to  the 
rear,  the  space  of  six  pacps,  which  ought  to  separate  its 
^ide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  division,  and  so  direct 
its  march  as  toeuter  the  column  on  a  line  parallel  to  this 
division;  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  direct  them- 
selves diagonally  towards,  but  a  little  in  rear  of,  the 
points  at  which  they  ought,  respectively,  to  entT  the 
column;  at  six  paces  from  the  loft  flank  of  the  column, 
the  head  of  each  of  these  divigiouH  will  incline  a  little  to 
the  left,  in  order  to  enter,  the  column  as  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  second,  taking  care  also  to  leave  the 
distance  of  six  p*ces  between  its  guide  aud  the  guide  of 
the  preceding  division.  At  the  moment  the  divisions  put 
thomselven  in  march  to  enter  the  column,  the  file  closers 
of  each  «ill  incline  to  the  left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves 
to  the  liistauce  of  a  pace  from  tlio  rear  rank. 

125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct 
his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the  di- 
recting one;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt,  see  his 
division  file  past,  aud  halt  it  the  instant  the  last  lite  xball 
have  passed,  commatidiag :  1.  I'-Vc./t  diiitioii;  2.  Halt; 
•'!.  Front  ;  4.  X<yi— Dhkss. 

126.  At  the  second  command,  tli'i  diviffiim  will  hnlt ;  the 
left  guide  will  place  himself  pranntly  on  the  direction, 
six  paces  from  the  guiiie  whicli  precedes  him,  in  order 
that,  the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions  may  be 
separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  divini  .n  will  face  to  the 
front ;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  ali;,'ncd  by  its  chief,  who 
will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  aud 
direct  the  alif^nment  so  thiit  his  division  may  bo  parallel 
to  that  which  precedes — which  being  done,  ho  will  com- 
mand, Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  contio  of  his 
division. 

128.  If  any  division,  after  the  command  front,  bo  not 
at  its  proper  distance,  and  this  can  only  happen  through 
the  negligence  of  its  chief,  such  division  will  remain  in 
its  p'ace,  in  order  ti.at  the  fault  may  not  be  propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  siiiKTluteud  tho  e.xucution  of  the 
movement,  aud  cause  tho  prescribed  principles  to  be  ob- 
served. 

130._Thc  lieutenant  colonel,  i)laciug  himself  in  sticce.s- 
sion  in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  on  the 
direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  move  to  his  place  out- 
side of  the  left  Hank  of  the  column  six  paces  from,  and 
abreast  with,  tho  first  t^ivisioQ.  In  assuring  tho  guides 
on  tho  dir«ctiou,  ho  will  bu  a  mere  observer,  uuless  one  or 
more  should  fail  to  cover  exactly  tho  guide  or  guides 
already  cstttblishcd.     l'lii$  rule  is  ycncnil. 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  Ifcft  of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterwards  take  bis 
jiositiou  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  tho  column,  six  ]<acc8 
from,  and  abreast  with,  this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  ihe  battalion  in  front  of  tho  lirst  division, 
the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands, siftstituliug the 
indication  Ift/l  for  that  of  ri'jiti  in  fiont. 

133.  At  the  second  aud  third  commaniis,  the  chiefs  of 
<Iirision  and  the  junior  captains  will  conform  themselves 
til  what  is  prescrrbed,  Nos.  120,  121,  122  ;  but  the  chiofsof 
the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  causiBg  tho  lirst  two 
files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  cause  them  to  break  to  the 
front. 

1U4  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  tho  first  divi- 
sion will  add  :  (r'liirfe  riglit.. 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  off  togeth?r  to 
take  their  places  in  the  column  in  frout  of  tho  directing 
divisiou  ;  each  will  direct  itself  aa  rrescrilied.  No.  121, and 
will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  when  halted,  its  guide 
may  find  him-ielf  six  pacoj  from  the  guide  of  tho  division 
next  previously  establiBhed  in  the  columu. 

13t).  Kach  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  Lis  divi- 
sion, till  his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  guide 
ofthe  directing  one  ;  he  will  then  h.ilt  his  division,  and 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front  ;  at  the  instant  it  halts,  its 
right  guide  will  face  to  tho  rear,    place  himself  six  paces 


from  the  preoedlug  guide,  and  cover  him  exactly — which 
being  done,  the  chief  will  align  his  division  by  the  right. 

l."7.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  pleu;ed  in  frontof  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides  ou  tho 
direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  and  then  move  out- 
side of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  to  a  point  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division,  now  in  front. 

l.'-;8.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed. No.  131,  and  then  move  ontside  ofthe  right  flank 
of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first 
division,  now  in  the  rear. 

139.  Tho  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Oi'iilc!>,  fi!-oii<— Face. 

140.  At  this,  the  guides,  who  are  feced  to  the  rear,  will 
face  to  the  front. 

111.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  ft-ont  of  the 
fourth  dirisijn,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column  h>i  (lirixion.  2.  On  the  fourth  divmoti,  left 
(or  rir/ht)  in  front.  3.  Vnttallon,  left, — FACE.  4.  MabOH 
(or  (toubk  quick — Maech}.. 

14'2.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  of  those  which  precede,  but  by  inverse  means: 
the  fourth  division  on  which  the  battalion  ploys  will  stand 
f,tst;  the  instant  tho  movement  commences,  its  chief  will 
command,  ijuidfi  right  (or  hjt). 

143.  The  foregoing  examples  erohiaco  all  theprin«iples: 
thus,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  the  battalion  on 
an  interior  division,  he  will  command  : 

1.  C/iwo  coliunn  lnj  (tivisioii.  2.  On  such  dii-ision,  ritjTU  (or 
left)  in  front.  3.  Buttnlion  imcards—ifKOE.  i.  Maroh 
(or  doiMe  qiiicl: — Maroh). 

144.  The  instant  tho  movement  commences,  the  chief 
ofthe  directing  division  will  command,  tjnidc  hfl  (or  right). 

145.  The  divisions  which,  in  tho  order  in  battle,  are  to 
the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to  the  lefc  ; 
those  which  are  to  the  lilt,  will  face  to  the  right. 

lit).  If  the  ri^ht  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right  divisions 
will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  divisions,  and  the  left 
in  its  ruar ;  the  reserve,  if  the  lelt  bo  in  front.  And  in 
all  tho  foregoing  suppositions,  the  division  or  divisions 
coutiguous  to  the  directing  one,  in  wheeling  br  file  to  tho 
front  or  rear,  will  gain  the  space  of  six  pa;e8,  which 
ought  to  separate  tlieir  guides  from  the  guide  of  the  di- 
recting division. 

It".  In  all  the  ployiiients  on  an  interior  division,  the 
lientonant-colonol  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides 
in  front,  and  Ihe  major  those  in  rear  of  the  directing  di- 
vision. 

148.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  by  combining  the  two 
gaits  of  i^uick  and  double  quick  time,  and  always  in  rear 
of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

140.  Tho  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in  rear  of 
the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  C/ftte  column  l/ii  dinition.    2.  On  tho  H'tl  diiUion.    .'!. 
i       Battalion  ~l>!/    Ihe    right     flank.     4.     Vonhlc     quick  — 
March. 

I      IJO.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will 
j  move  rapidly  1  eforo  the  centre  of  his  division  and  cau- 
tion it  to  face  to  tho  right. 

151.  The  chief  of  tho  first  division  will  caution  it  to 
continue  to  march  to  tho  front,  and  he  will   command  : 

I  Quick  march. 

152.  At  tho  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  flrst  di- 
vision will  comni!iM<\  Guide  l< ft.  At  this,  the  left  guide 
will  move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and  direct  him- 
self on  the  point  indicated. 

l.')3.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  fhe  right  and 
niova  off  in  double  (juick  time,  breaking  to  the  right  to 
take  their  places  in  cohiiun;  each  chief  of  division  will 
movo  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division  in  order  to  con- 
duct it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to  preserve  their  dis- 
tances, and  to  march  with  a  uniform  and  decided  step. 
The  color-bearer  and  general  guides  will  retake  their 
places  in  the  ranks. 


48 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION- -PART  II. 


IfA.  The  apcond  dirlaion  will  immediately  rnU>r  the 
coIniDD  marching  parallel  to  the  fint  divinion;  itiK'bief 
will  allow  ft  tij  fila  patt  bini,  and  when  the  last  tile  is 
aUreaat  of  bim,  will  command:  1.  fifvond  (innioTifby  the 
U/l  flank— 'SI  ABC  ft.  2.  (Vt/We /c/l,  and  plaro  liimsclf  in  front 
uf  the  centre  ol  hia  division. 

166.  At  the  command  marr'i,  tko  division  \«'ill  faca  to 
the  left;  ftt  the  second  command,  the  left  i^nide  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  lofc  guide  of  the  flrst  divi*ion; 
the  men  will  take  the  touch  cf  elbows  to  the  loft.  When 
the  second  division  has  cluse<l  to  its  proper  diHlanre,  its 
chief  will  command  ;  (^nkk  fi'irt/-— Makou.  This  division 
will  then  change  its  utep  tu  quick  time. 

ISG.  The  chii'fs  of  the  third  and  fonrth  divi^iions  will 
execute  their  movementB  accordiaf;  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, taking  rare  to  gain  as  much  ground  as  p:B8iblo  to- 
wards the  head  of  the  colnmn. 

107.  If  tlis  battalion  bad  been  previously  marching  in 
line  at  doulile  quick  time,  when  the  fourth  division  shall 
have  gained  its  distance,  the  colonel  will  oommand : 
Double  guicJt— Sl&Bro. 

15S.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  give  lilm  a 
point  of  direction,  and  then  lollow  the  movements  of  the 
first  division.  Tbu  major  will  follow  the  movement 
abreast  with  tlio  left  of  th;i  feurtji  divlhion. 

Bemarki  on  ploying  Ihe  hattaUon   into  column. 

169.  The  battalion  may  be  played  info  column  at  full, 
or  half  distance,  on  the  same  principles,  aud  by  the  wwne 
commands,  substituting  for  the  first  command  :  Column 
allfuIl'AoT  halj)  distance  by  division. 

160.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  column,  when 
Ihe  subdivisions  execute  the  movements  successively, 
■uch  as- to  take  or  close  distances  ;  to  cli'tugo  direction 
by  the  flank  of  subdivisions,  each  chief  of  subdivision 
win  cause  his  men  t  >  support  arms  after  having  aligned 
it  and  comiaanded  Fbont. 

PART  TQIBD. 

Article  Fibst. 

To  nmrc\  in  column  al  full  distance. 

llil.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  culiimn  in 
niHrch,  he  will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide  two  distinct 
objects  in  front,  on  the  line  wliicli  the  guide  ought  to  fol- 
low. This  guide  will  immediately  put  his  bhoulders  in 
a  square  with  that  line,  take  the  more  dintunt  object  as 
the  point  of  direction,  aud  the  nearer  one  as  thj  interme- 
diate point. 

162.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present  itself  in 
the  directiou  the  guide  has  to  follow,  he  uill  face  to  it  as 
before,  and  iuunediately  endeavor  to  catch  ou  the  ground 
some  intermtdiuto  point,  by  which  to  give  steadiness  to 
his  march  on  the  point  of  directiou. 

163.  There  being  no  piominent  object  to  serve  as  the 
p  dnt  of  direction,  the  cnluuel  will  dispatch  the  lieutenant 
colonel  or  adjutant  to  jjlaco  himself  forty  puces  in  advance, 
facing  the  column,  and  by  ii  nign  of  the  swoid  establish 
him  on  the  direction  ho  niiiy  wish  tu  give  to  the  leading' 
4;uido  :  that  oflicer  being  tliiiH  ]>lH('eil,  this  guide  will  titke 

him  ai  the  point  of  directiou,  conforming  himself  to  what 
is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  Ilia  company  No.  87. 

Ib4.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Column  forward.    2.  (iulde  Irfl    (or  ri'jhl.)    a.  MAneii 
(or  double  quick — Mabcii.) 

ir5.  Al  the'  command  march,  briMkly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  Bubdiviuiun,  tlie  column  will  place  itself  in 
march,  cuciforming  to  what  is  prescribeU  in  the  tchaol  of 
the  company  No.  200  and  following. 

IGC.  The  leading  guide  miiy  always  maintain  himself 
correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping  stoidily  in  view  the 
two  po.uts  indicated  to  him,  or  chosen  by  himself;  if 
these  points  have  a  certain  elevation,  ho  may  bo  csuured 
be  is  on  the  true  direction,  when  the  nearer  niaaks  the 
more  distant  point. 


107.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  ezaclneta 
both  step  and  distance;  each  will  inarch  tu  the  trace  of 
the  guide  who  immediataly  precedes  him,  without  iKCU- 
pying  himself  with  th<'  geutral  direction. 

168.  The  IjouU'uant  cUmnl  will  hold  hlniiioir,  habitu- 
ally, abre.'ist  with  the  leading  guide,  to  Bee  that  he  dous 
not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and  will  observe,  also, 
that  the  next  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace  of  Iha 
first. 

ICU.  The  mi^or  will  generally  be  aVrc-ast  with  the  laat 
Kiibdivi!<iun  ;  he  will  »eo  tliat  c«ch  guide  marches  exactly 
iu  the  trace  of  the  one  immedialelT  precniliug;  if  either 
deviate  from  the  directioD,  the  luaior  will  promptly  recti- 
fy the  error,  and  provcut  its  beiuK  pr<>pagat(.d ;  but  he 
need  not  interfere,  iu  tbit  way,  unless  the  deviation  haa 
become  sensible,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  iu  inarch,  the  colonel  will  fre- 
quently cause  the  uhnui  to  be  executed  while  marching  ; 
to  this  eire:t,  he  will  command: 

1.   j:.iHali,,ii.ri.ilit  about.     'J.   MaKCII. 

171.  At  the  second  command,  the  compaiiieswill  face  to 
the  right  about,  and  the  co  iimn  will  then  march  forward 
In  an  opposite  direction;  the  cliiefn  of  snlHlivlslon  will 
remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  tile  closers  in  front  of 
the  rear  rank,  aud  the  jrnidea  will  place  thenDilves  In 
the  same  rank.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  remain 
abreast  of  the  llrst  division,  now  in  rear;  the  major  will 
give  a  point  ot  directioa  to  the  leading  guide,  and  march 
abreast  of  hiui. 

172.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually  on  the 
diiecting  flank  ;  ho  will  look  to  the  stop  and  to  the  dis- 
tances, aud  see  that  all  the  princij  les  prescribed  for  the 
march  in  column,  school  of  the  company,  are  observed. 

173.  These  means,  which  the  practice  iu  that  school 
ought  to  have  rendered  familiar,  will  give  sufliLient  ex- 
actness to  the  direction  of  the  column,  aud  also  enable  it 
to  form  ybnrurtj  or/.iO(<i  /Ac  rear,  <in  tin  rijlit,  or  oii  the  left, 
into  line  ot  battle,  and  iu  close  in  vuisx, 

174.  liut  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear 
of  the  line  of  battle,  or,  rather,  on  one  of  the  extremities  of 
that  line,  has  to  proloug  itself  ou  it,  in  order  to  form  to 
the  lift  or  to  the  riyhl  into  line  of  battle,  then,  as  it  is  es- 
sential to  prcvcut  the  column  from  cutting  the  line,  or 
sensib.y  deviating  from  it,  other  means,  as  fellows,  will 
be  employed. 

2"/ic  column  urririnij  iu  front  of  the  Hue  of  Imllh;  to  prolong 
it  OH  this  line. 

175.  If  the  ciluiun  right  in  front  arrive  in  front  of  the 
line  of  battle,  as  it  should  cross  It  and  find  itself  four  paces 
beyond  it  after  having  changea  direction,  the  colenel  will 
cause  to  be  placid,  iu  advsnce,  a  marker  on  the  Hue  to 
indicate  the  point  at  which  the  column  ought  to  cross  ii, 
and  another  marker  to  indicate  the  point  where  the  lira, 
subdivision  should  conimenco  to  whei  I ;  he  will  be  so 
placed  that  when  the  wheel  is  exeoutod,  the  left  guide 
will  lind  himself  four  paces  within  the  line  of  battle. 
Tho  chief  ot  llib  leading  subdivision,  when  the  head  of  the 
column  shall  have  arrived  neiir  the  line,  will  take  tho 
fiuide  to  the  rij^ht,  aud  this  guide  will  Iniuietlialely  direct 
himself  on  the  .second  marker.  On  arriviug  alirenst  of 
him,  this  subdivision  will  be  wheeled  to  the  left,  and 
when  the  wheel  is  completed,  tho  guide  will  be  chaugod 
again  to  the  left;  tliis  guide  will  th' n  march  parallel  to 
the  lino  of  battle  by  the  ii  cans  t»  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

170.  The  iustaut  the  fist  subdivision  wheels,  the  right 
general  guide,  who,  by  a  caution  from  the  lieutenant  col- 
onel, will  before  have  placed  himself  ou  the  lino  of  battle 
at  tho  point  where  the  column  crosnes  it,  aud  who  will 
have  fared  to  the  two  points  of  din  ction  in  his  front,  in- 
dicated by  the  colonel,  will  march  forward  correctly  on  the 
prolongation  of  those  points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like  manner 
on  the  lino  of  battle  ;  and,  at  the  Instant  tho  color  subdi- 
vision  wheels,  ho  will  proloug  his  march  on  that  line, 
abreast  with  this  subdivision,  taking  care  to  cairy  the 
color-lauco  before  tho  center  of  his  person,  and  to  maintHin 
himself  exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  general  guide  who 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION—PART  III. 


49 


precedes  him,  and  the  point  of  direction  in  front  which 
will  have  been  int^'cated  to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  in 
the  same  manner  oa  the  line  of  battle  ;  and,  at  the  instant 
the  last  subdivision  of  (he  battalion  wheels,  ho  will  march 
correitly  in  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer,  and  tbeother 
general  guide. 

179.  The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march 
steadily  abreast  with  the  right  general  guide,  and  about 
four  paces  to  his  right ;  eacli  of  the  guides  of  the  following 
subdivisions  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  im- 
mediately precedes  him,  as  prescribed.  No.  1G7. 

.  180.  The  colonel,  placed  outside  of  the  general  giiidos, 
will  see  that  the  column  m.-.rches  nearly  parallel  to,  and 
about  four  paces  within  these  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  look  to  the 
direction  of  the  general  guides,  and  to  this  end,  place 
themselves  stmelimes  in  rear  of  the  color-boaror,  or  the 
left  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  bo  composed  of  several  battalions,  the 
general  guides  of  each  will  successively  place  themselves 
on  the  line  of  battle  to  prolong  their  march  on  this  lino, 
as  the  leading  subdivision,  that  of  tho  color,  and  the  one 
in  the  rear  of  their  battalion,  shall  wheel  into  the  new 
direction;  these  guides  will  conform  themselves  respect- 
ively, as  will  also  the  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and 
major,  to  what  is  pri  3cribed  above  for  those  of  the  load- 
ing battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  battalions,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  each  will  maintain  steadily  tho  guide  of  his 
leading;  subdivision  about  four  paces  within  the  lino  of 
general  guides,  even  should  the  last  subdivisions  of  the 
battalion  immediately  preceding  deviate  from  tho  parallel- 
ism, in  order  that  the  false  direction  of  one  battalion  may 
not  influence  that  of  the  battalions  which  follow. 


The  column  arriving  behind  the  Uric  of  battle,  to  prolong  it 
on  this  line. 

184.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  behind  the 
line  of  battle,  as  it  ought  to  find  itself  four  paces  within 
this  line,  after  having  changed  direction,  the  colonel  will 
cause  a  marker  to  beplaced'atthe  point  where,  according 
to  that  condition,  thefirstsubdivision  ought  to  commence 
wheeling.  Another  marker  will  be  established  on  the 
line  of  battle,  to  indicate  the  point  at  which  the  general 
guides  ought,  in  succession,  to  begin  to  prolong  themselves 
on  that  line;  ha  will  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision, 
having  finished  its  wheel,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  line 
with  this  marker. 

185.  At  the  instant  tho  first  subdivision,  after  having 
wheeled  to  tho  right,  begins  to  prolong  itself,  parallelly  to 
the  line  of  battle,  the  leading  general  guids,  placed  in 
advanceon  that  line,  will  direct  himself  on  the  two  points 
taken  in  his  front ;  the  color-bearer  and  the  other  gene- 
ral guide  will  successively  place  themselves  on  the  same 
line  the  instant  that  their  respective  subdivisions  shall 
htve  finished  their  wheel. 

186.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions, 
the  general  guides  of  the  following  battalions  will  succes- 
sively execute  wh.it  has  been  just  prestiibed  for  those  of 
the  leading  battalion,  and  tho  whole  will  conform  them- 
lelves,  as  well  ps  the  guides  of  subdivisions,  and  the 
field  officers  of  the  several  battalions,  to  what  is  indica- 
ted, above,  for  a  column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of 
battle. 

187.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  in  front,  or  in 
rear  of  the  lineof  battle,  these  movements  will  be  executed 
on  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

The  column  arriving  on  tho  right  or  the  Irfl  of  the  line  of 
battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line. 

188.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front  or  in 
rear  of  the  lino  of  battle,  arrive  on  its  right  or  left,  and  if 
it  have  to  prolong  itself  on  that  lino,  in  order  aftirwards 
to  form  to  tho  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  bring  the  color  and  general  guides  on  tho  flank  of  the 
column  by  the  command  color  and  general  guidex  on  tho 


line:  and  these  guides  will  prolong  themselvfs   on   the 
line  of  battle,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

Manner  of  proloHging  a  line  of  battle  by  mitrJcers. 

189.  When  a  column  prolougsitself  on  tho  line  ofhattle, 
it  being  all-important  that  the  general  guides  march 
correctly  ob  that  line,  it  btrcomes  nccrssary  that  colonels, 
lieutenant  colonels,  and  ninjors,  whose  duty  it  is  to  main- 
tain the  true  direction,  should  be  able  to  see,  as  f;ir  as 
practicable,  the  two  objects,  on  which  the  march  of  the 
general  guides  ought  to  be  directed  ;  cunsequently,  when 
no  prominent  objects  present  themselves  iu  the  desired 
directif  i,the  chief  of  the  column  will  supply  the  wuntof 
them  in  advance  by  aids-d'  camp,  or  other  mounted  offi- 
cers, and  in  such  number  as  may  be  necessary. 

100.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far  as 
may  be  desired  in  tho  following  manner  :  they  will  place 
themselves  in  advance  on  the  lino  of  battle,  the  first  at  the 
point  where  the  head  of  the  column  ought  to  enter;  the 
second,  three  or  four  hundred  paces  behind  the  first,  and 
the  third,  a  like  distance  behind  the  second.  The  first  of 
these  officers  will  reme'n  in  position  till  the  leading 
general  guide  shall  have  entered  on  tho  line  of  battle,  and 
then,  at  a  gallop,  place  himself  at  a  convenient  distance 
l)ehind  the,  third.  Tho  second  will  do  the  like  in  respect 
to  the  first,  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  near 
him,  and  so  on  in  continuation.  These  oflicers,  without 
dismounting,  will  face  to  the  column,  and  cover  each 
other  accurately  iu  file.  It  will  be  on  them  that  the 
general  guides  will  steadily  direct  their  march,  and  it 
will  be  so  much  the  more  easy  for  the  latter  to  n.aiutain 
themselves  on  the  direction,  as  they  will  always  be  able  to 
see  the  mounted  officers  over  the  heads  of  tlie  preceding 
guides ;  thus  the  deviation  from  the  direcuon,  by  one  or 
more  general  guides,    need  not  mislead  tliaso  who  follow. 

191.  A  single  mounted  officer  may  suffice  to  assuro  the 
direction  of  a  column,  when  the  point  of  direction  towards 
which  it  marches  is  very  distinct.  In  this  case,  that 
officer  will  place  hims?lf  on  the  line  of  battle  within  that 
point,  and  beyond  the  ono  at  which  the  head  of  th« 
column  will  halt,  and  remain  in  position  till  the  column 
halts  ;  serving  thus  as  the  intermediate  point  for  g.ving 
steadiness  to  the  march  of  the  general  guides. 

192.  For  a  column  of  one.or  two  battalions,  markers  on 
foot  will  suffice  to  indicate  the  line  to  bo  followed  by  tho 
general  guides. 

licmarks  on  tho  march  in  colnmu. 

193.  Althouch  the  uncadeBced  step  be  that  of  columns 
in  route  marches,  and  also  that  which  ought  to  be 
habitually  employed  in  the  F.volutiimn  of  the  Line,  because 
it  leaves  the  men  more  at  ease,  and,  consequently ,  is  better 
adapted  to  movements  on  a  large  Ecale  and  to  dilficult 
grounds,  nevertheless,  as  it  is  of  paramount  importance 
to  confirm  soldiers  in  the  measure  and  the  movement  of 
the  cadenced  pace,  the  route  step  will  be  but  little  prac- 
tised in  the  exercises  by  battalion,  except  in  going  to,  and 
returning  from,  the  ground  of  instruction,  and  for  teach- 
ing the  mechanism  and  movements  of  columns  in  route. 

104.  It  is  highly  essential  to  the  regularity  of  the  march 
in  column  that  each  guide  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding,  without  occupying  his 
attention  with  tbe  general  direction  of  the  guides.  If 
this  principle  be  steadily  observed,  the  guides  will  find 
themselves  aligned,  provided  that  the  loading  one  march 
exactly  in  the  directioa  indicated  to  him;  and  even 
should  obstacles  in  his  way  force  him  into  a  momentary 
deviation,  the  direction  of  the  column  would  not  nece*- 
sarily  bo  changed ;  whereas,  if  the  following  guidjs  en- 
deavor to  conform  themselves  at  once  to  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  leading  ono,  in  order  to  cover  him  in  file, 
such  endeavors  would  necessarily  cause  corresponding 
fluctuations  in  the  column,  from  right  to  left,  and  from 
left  to  right,  and  render  the  preservation  of  distances  ex- 
tremely difficult. 

195.  As  a  consequence  of  the  principle,  that  each  guide 
thall  exactly  fdllow  in  thr.  trace  of  the  ov  who  immediately 
precedes,  if  pending  the  march  of  the  column,  the  colonel 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- -I'ART  III. 


50 

Khali  givfi  a  new  point  of  diractir.n,  too  nrftr  to  Uie  flrfst 
t'l  n-qnlro  a  formitl  chance  of  diroction,  llie  loading 
KiiiiJs,  a4lvanciuc  tlie  oii"  or  the  otlior  hli<Mil(l(>r,  will  iiii- 
tMediatfly  diiTot  hiiineir  on  tlii«  pfint  ;  t)i  ■  otlirr  i.iii'lc  » 
will  only  conform  lli<>lii«flvf«  to  ihis   ii.r.vriii' iit  nn   <■  i-h 


■  l!r»t  liad  i-x.cnto'i  it. 

If  to  the  in.iTpnmonf  of 

•honinnor   ghortcniiig  | 

-iii^  (throwing  bnck)  the- 

lint    willioat    loxttig   the 


nrrivoi   at  tli<«   jMjint  - 

Kiich  milrliTisJon  wil' 

its  guide,  tlio  men  i  ; 

iUp  "fpp,  and  advanriM    ...  , 

ulinnlJcr   oppojitB    thn    i;lilil 

tinrli  of  the  cllwiw  fow.'iriig  his  Hiil< 

19C.  The  colnnui,  hy  rnnipnny,  bi'inij  In  riarrli,  tlip 
i-olonol  will •  CJHHf  it  to  diniinisli  front  V.y  pliitonn.  Iro.n 
front  to  rear,  at  unce,  and  to  incrf^^oo  froni  hj  iiliiUxm  in 
like  manner,  which  niovcmontH  will  be  coniniamlod  and 
I'Xecutisl  as  prpKcribed  In  tin-  Bchool  of  the  compasy,  Noh. 
■_'S2  and  273  and  foll^winir,  chnnj,'ing  tlio  romnmud  /'■■■m- 
rnmpany  to  /wrni  rnmpanifii.  So  may  ho  incrpiiso  and  di- 
niinish.'or  diminiHli  and  incrpasp  front,  iipiordint:  to  the 
name  principlea  and  at  one.  l>y  coniimny,  changing  Clip 
command /orm  comprmirt  to/orm  th'ri.ii'nns,  and  tlip  com- 
mand break  into  j^Momir,  io  break  into  enuipnnics.  In 
this  case,  the  companies  and  divisionR  will  oxponte  what 
is  prp'crihed  for  plat-nns  and  companips  re«peclivply. 

I'tT.  Thp  colnmn  lipinR  at  a  halt,  il  tho  colonel  shonid 
wish  to  mnrrh  it  to  the  Tour.  r»nd  tho  disl^nci"  to  l>i'  ij:n)li>'d 
he  so  Inconsiderable  ns  to  rend'Tii  count' rmari  h  a  dls,- 
proportionate  loss  of  lime,  he  will  rati""  Iho  column -tb 
f;ico  about,  .Tnd  then  pot  it  in  march  by  the  oonimanda 
proscribed  No.  liil  ;  the  chii-l'f  of  the  snbdlTlsions  will 
remain  bihind  the  front  rank,  the  flle  elopers  before  tho 
rear  ranV,  and  the  puides  will  stop  into  thi-  roarrdrk, ' 
now  in  front.  Tn  a  colnmn,  bv  division,  the  junior  0!i;>- 
liins.  in  tliP  intervals  between  companies,  will  i-eplacip 
tlioir  coverins  eert^oants  In  tho  rpnr  r.inlr.  and  those  eer- 
fi-ants  will  stoji  into  the  lino  Of  the  ti'  ■  »  '  •■<-'  •:  front 
of  their  intervals. 

Aeticle  Second. 
Column  i»  route. 

lOS.  A  column  in  routo,  like  a  colnmij  in.  raijpoiuvre, 
oll^bt  uevpr  to  have  a  dopth  greater  tl^an  about  fUefroiit 
it  had  occupied  in  tho  Hue  of  battio,  loss  tho  froui  al'  b 
Hubdivislon. 

1!)0.  Tho  observanc"  of  this  princiiilo  requires  no  pnr- 
tic-ulnr  rule  for  a  column  in  manouvre  ;  but,  as  a  col- 
umn in  rrmlp  miiy  have  hourly  to  pass  narrow  ways, 
bridxes,  or  other  defiles,  rendering  it  uece.ssary  to  d.lnin- 
i',!!  the  front  of  Bubdivinions.  it  bocoraes  importout  'o 
Itive  rules  siud  means  by  which  tho  colunin  u.ay,  lor  iiuy 
leneth  of  march,  preserve  tho  case  of  tho  roUt«}.  bteji 
without  elouRtttion  from  front  to  rear.  '    ,  : 

200.  A  column  in  route  will  be  habitually  foriixojl'iliy- 
conipanv. 

201.  When  a  column  in  route  sliall  arrive  at  a  pass  too 
n:irron  to  receive  tlie  front  of  a  company,  tho  c  luinn 
will  diminiHli  front  hy  platoon  before  entering.  Thin, 
movement  will  be  executed  succouBivcl),  or  hy  all  tlio 
cuuipanles  at  once. 

202.  If.  however,  tho  dcfilo  be  very  short,  mid  it  mny 
l>o  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  few  files,  it  will  he 
preferable  to  break  to  tho  rear  tlio  limited  nunibur  of 
tiles. 

ZtC  Tho  colnmn  boinR  by  platoon,  and  the  want  of 
space  renderiuK  a  further  diuiiuiition  of  front  Jipieseary,  it 
will  be  diniinislied  by  section,  if  the  platouusbe  of  t\yolTa 
or  more  (ilos. 

20t.  Th«  column  being  by  section,  ^YiU 'puiilinpo  to 
march  V>y  that  front  as  long  as  the  defllo  may  piirmit. 

2(i5.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twilvo  files,  one  or 
two  files  will  be  hrukeu  to  tho  rear,  ntcurdlun  to  the  nar- 
rowing; of  the  dtliie.  and  tho  route  sttp  cuiit,iuiied  as  lou;^ 
as  six  tiles  can  march  abicast. 

200.  Wlial  has  just  been  explained  fvir  hrenlduj^Jilic  \n 
the  rear  in  u  column  by  platoon,  ii  ui^uully  apjilicahli'  ii< 
a  column  by  section.  ,        •,  I  , 

207.  ir  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  admit  hix  men  to 
march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  bo  marched  surces- 


•  1  wh.it  i'<pre*ctilied  Nos. 

•i.y. 

1  V    ih-    (lull:,    v.-ill    bo 

mpa- 

'  :  tho 

:     •Will 

>  wiuiu.iiitlB  of  too  <.aptaiuK^«a  their 
vcly  clear    the  rteSle,  ohtbhrili);   iho 
1   -        .^,  ;-      .  '  •'     ' 

2t)H.  ^a  Boon  as  tho  way  Is  snlficlontly  broad  to  contain 
six  nicn  nbreist,  the  cAptain  will  roniniaiid : 

1 .  7*y  section  (or  ly  pJaloon)  (tUo  linr.  .  2.  KaSCV. 

210.  At  tlr-   ■    •:-■  —  -'  r"Trc7i,  tho  |tnb'  =  --    ' '■■ '" ■  1 

will  form  th'  ■  line:  tho  111 

boon  able  tv  Mow  (Iiv  th" 

fili-s  of  their  f ..    1  1  .-I'M  '  '  ■  •'   '    ■ 

211.  Tho  tuiumu  marii 
reur  win  in-  run-od  to 
bread!'-     '■  "      ■    ;   -1.  ill. 

212  u;:  ly  srf.lioti  or  hj*  x\^'^'"'> 
jdatii  v.i!l  |.('  r..mud  as  soOti  as  the 
Iiroa'':  ■• 

2i:;.  :!io  winding's 

of  th  MS  *»ill  not 

occuj  ;  >  111    i  !.•■  .,  '     ■■' 

gion.  rare  of  tho  : 

theni  ;  Till  mi-n   \ 

bad  I'ui.- .  1  11.  •  >•  i.y,  but  pass,  iw  1  r.is;..  :, 

in  the  diroctiim  of  his  file. 

214    Ch;ni;;es  of  direct!  .n  will  nlw  yslo  r 
command;  if  tin  clmnjre  be  fip:i  -•■••.  ■ 
fri  m  theri'..<5ppctivo  chitfs  to  tie  ■ 
ar  '  tliP  rear  riink,  as  well  n«  il 

will  execute  SUCCesiivoly  the   UlL)    I  111  -in     ^^lule    iiir    m     ; 

rank  had  exocuti'd  it.  .  ,, 

210.  Th"  colonel  will  hold  hipiself  at  the  head  of  (he 
bfiftnlion  ;  he  will  re.'rtiinto  the  step  of  the  le.idinR  sub- 
divi«ion,  and  indicato  to  its  cliii^f  the  .iost^pt  for  oxe- 
cutin*;  tho  various  muremcnta  which  the  imtiirs  bf  th'> 
route  may  roudor  uccoasAfy.  i 

216.  If  the  column   be  c»ilil«8ed  of  severjil  hntluli.). 
ench  will  coufuim   itij'>lf  in   its  turn,   to  w^t  eb>iji  b^ 
been  couimnnded  for  t.v  luadiug  battalion.  obsorviiiK  " 
uxocnto  each  movcmout  at  tlio  samo  pliip<>,  aud  iu  tlj'' 
«amo  ui^uutr.  <      .  - 

217.  Finally,  to  ruuuor  11m>  m«qbaiu«i't  of  nU  tliosp 
movements  f.uiiiliar  to  the  troaig,aud  to  babituute  tluin 
to  march  in  tli"  routi'  kIpp  without  aloiipatiiig  tho  col- 
UlUD,  comiii.aidevs  will  guniiully  cause  their  biittulions 
to  march  in  this  stop,  going  to,  aud  retuiiiiug  from, 
llelds  of  oxerciKe.  £acli  will  ocpiksionally  civuduct  dii-* 
battalion  tbrou^U  narrow  passos,  in  order  to  make  it  per- 
!coiro  tho  utility  of  the  piincijiles  pretcribed  above;  ami 
1)0  will  sfveral  tiunis,  iu  oviry  course  of  iustructiun, 
lit.nruh  in  the  route  stop,  aud  caut>e  to  be  exucu'od,  su^eo- 
tinii  B  at  once,  and  somi'tiiuos  giiccessivcly,  tlio  divers 
iuovemeuts  which  have  just  been  iuJicatid. 

denirnl  vmarls  on  thr  column  in  rnvtr. 

218.  Tho  IcSRon  relative  totho  culumnin  route  is,  by  its 
frei|UOUt  application,  one  of  the  iinist  important  that 
can  be  givoa  to  troops.  If  it  bo  not  well  taught. and  ef^- 
lablisbed  on  rinht  principles,  it  »rill  Impiien  that  the  rear 
ot  tho  column  in  KUito  will  be  eblire'l  lo  run,  to  ingniii 
distSLDces,  or  that  the  fnwit  will  be  forced  to  halt  till  the 
rear  shall  have  nciwrnplished  that  object ;  thug  rendering 
the  march  groiitly  slower,  or  greatly  more  fatiguing, 
('ouorally  both,  than  if  it  wtro  executed  accord. ng  to 
rule. 

21!).  Tho  onlinary  progrcsii  of  a  column  in  routo  ought 
to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds,  at  the  rate  of  one 
hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a  minute.  Tliia  rato  may  be 
easily  niaintained  by  colon  ns  of  almost  any  depth;  but 
over  bad  roads,  ploogbeJ  fields,  loose  sands,  or  mouutain- 
ou.f  districts,  the  progro«:K  cannot  be  bo  groat,  and  munt 
.lliorefore  bo  regiilaU-d  ucrording  to  circumstances. 

220.  Tho  iiioxi  certain  menne  of  marchina  well  in  route, 
is  to  preserve  ahvays  a  regular  and  equal  movement,  and. 


SCHOOL  OIT  THE  BATTALION -PA  IIT  lii. 


if  oUstiiclGS  oblige  ouo  or  more  subdivisions  to  Bkickon  or 
to  shorten  tho  step,  to  cause  the  primitive  rateuf  march 
to  bo  resiimoil  tho  moment  the  difiiculties  are  p.i?-od. 

221.  A  siibdiTision  ought  never  to  take  »(.»■<•  than  the 
pri-scribed  distance  from  tho  sobdivision  imrnidiately 
preceding;  bnt  it  is  sometimes  neqess-ary  to  Icsfen  ihut 
iliataucc. 

222.  Thus  :  tlie  head  of  the  eohimu  CDcountei^  an  ob- 
Bt;icle  whicli  ol)bf^«3  it  to  relax  its  wircb  ;  all  tl^'  follow- 
ing subdivisioDB  will  preserve  tho  habitual  step,  and 
ilose  up  in  mass,  if  necessary,  on  tho  subdivisiou  neirest 
to  the  obataelo.  Distances  will  afterwards  naturally  be 
ivciivered  an  each  subdivision  sliall  sucoossively  have 
passed  tho  obstacle.  Neverlheloss,  if  the  difflonliy  bo  too 
t;re<t  to  be  overcome  by  one  subdiviiitu,  whilst  the  next 
i.^  closing  up,  so  that  distances  cannot  afterwards  be  rc- 
.(ivcnMl  witiiout  running;,  tho  chief  of  the  column  will 
Imlttlie  loadine  subdivision  beyond  tho  obstacle,  at  a 
distftnce  sufficient  to  contain  thu  wlidfc  column  in  mass. 
Ho  will  then  put  the  ccUimn  ia  march,  the  subdivisions 
litkin^  dintfinc  3  by  tlie  hciid,  ohperviii '  to  commonco  the 
liiovemrnt  in  time,  so  that  the  last  subdivision  may  not 
I'e  oblifpnl  lo  halt,  attor  having  cleacd  tho  ob:taolo. 

223.  When  tho  chief  of  a  column  shall  wiph  to  chau(;e 
the  rate  of  nvirch.  he  will  cause  tlm  leading  battalion  to 
•  piirken  or  relax  tho  step  insensibly,  autl  send  ordere  to 
ihn  other  battsliona  each  to  regulate  itself  by  that  which 
precedes  it. 

22i.  The  column  being  composed  of  several  battaliotls, 
tlio'  j:cnf>rnl-in-chicf  will  always  leave  an  aid-de-camp 
with  its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  information  if  it  find  a 
difficulty  in  folowing. 

225.  Subdivisions  ought  always  to  step  .out  well  in 
obhqninir,  both  in  broaking  and  forming  (kimpanics  or 
platoons.  When  either  is  done  in  succession,  it  is  highly 
iinportatit  that  no  subdivision  slacken  or  shorten  the 
step  whilst  tliat  which  precedes  it  is  engaged  iu  tlie 
movenioiit.  The  observance  of  this  principle  can  aloue 
prevent  au  elongation  of  the  column. 

220.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  Hank,  encounter  a 
pass  80  narrow  as  to  oblige  it  to  defile  with  a  f.  out  of 
rwo  men,  the  colonel  will  ordT  support  arms,  take  the 
c;idonced  step,  and  undouble  the  files,  which  will  be  exo- 
o\ited  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  tho  company,  No. 
;!2() ;  tho  tiles  will  double  again  aa  soon' as  the  breadth  of 
the  way  will  permit. 

227.  If  the  d.filc  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a  front  of 
one  man.  tho  colonel  will  cause  the  ni^n  to  pass  one  at  a 
fimn.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should  follow  each  other 
in  their  order  as  closely  as  possiLlo,  and  without  loss  of 
finio.  Aa  sood  as  tha  defile  permits  a  trout  of  two  or 
four  men,  th^  battalion  will  be  re-formed  into  two  or  four 
rnnks,  and  v.-ill  march  in  this  order  until  there  bo  spaco 
l<3  form  platoons  or  sections,  as  indicated  Ko.  200. 

2-"^.  In  both  cas<>g,  just  supposed,  tho  head  of  tlio  bat- 
tnliou,  after  having  passed  the  defile,  will  march  till 
■  •'Hcient  spaco  be  left  to  contain  tho  wholo  of  the  snb- 
!■  visions  in  niass  ;  afterwards  it  will  bo  put  in  march  by 
ilia  means  indicated  No.  222. 

229.  When  a  command  haa  to  move  rapidly  over  a 
given  distance,  the  movements  prefcribcd  In  this  article 
will  bo  executed  iu  double  quick  time;  if  the  dintanco 
be  b)iig,tlio  chief  of  tlie  column  will  not  allow  themal-ch 
at  this  gait  to  be  continued  for  more  than  fifteen  mtnntpn; 
at  tho  end  of  this  time,  ho  will  order  the  ordinary  rotit* 
■stop  to  bo  marched  for  five  minutes,  and  then  araia 
resume  tho  double  (juick.  If  the  ground  be  nn*Vi.-n, 
linviilg  considerable  ascents  and  descents,  ho  will  reserve 
I  bo  double  quick  for  those  p.irts  of  the  ground  most  favor- 
able to  this  march. 

230.  A  column  marcUing  alteru»tely'  iu  ao;(iblo'ii'nick 
;.  aiul  the  ordinary  routo  step,  iu  tup  mub'uer  slalej, 
ca:i  easily  accomplish  yaiy  long  distances  in  a  very  stkort 
Npnco  of  time;  but  when  the  distance. to  bu  jjassel  over 
]<»  not  piealer  than  two  miles,  it  ought  to  bu  accomplish- 
oi),  when  tho  ^rouud  is  favorable,  without  chapgiug  the 
rate  of  march. 


Article  Xuiuit. 
2'y  chamje  dircclion  in  column  at/nil  iiisUiW'\ 

231.  The  colTunn  boing  in  march  in  the  cadenced  step, 
when  the  colonel  glial!  wish  to  cause  it  to  cliauge  dine- 
tion,  he  ■will  go  to  rbe  point  at  which  the  change  ought  to 
be  commenced,  and  establish  a  marker  there,  presenting 
the  breast  to  the  Hank  of  the  column  ;  this  marker,  no 
matter  to  which  side  the  change  of  direction  istoi^e 
n^ade,  will  Ije  posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  re- 
main in  that  position  till  the  list  subdivision  of  the  b<tt«- 
lifiii  shall  have  pskssei.  The  leading  subdivision  being 
within  a  few  paces  of  the  marker,  tlio  colonel  will  com- 
niaiut  : 

ITl'iA  iifr.olitinn  to  the  Iffl  (or  right). 

2i_;.  At  lliis.  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
imuiediafely  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite  the 
c.ban<;i)  of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  Th  s  guide 
will  direct  himself  so  aa  to  graze  the  breast  of  the  ninrk- 
or;  an  i  ved  at  ihis  peint,  the  chief  will  cause  h's  suiidivision 
to  cl)an;;e  direction  by  the  commands  and  according  tu 
tho  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 
Vt'heu  the  wheel  ia  completed,  the  chief  of  this  subdivi- 
t-ion  will  retake  the  guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the 
primitive  tiirectioH. 

233  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as  wtll  as 
the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  explained 
for  the  loading  subdivision. 

2.'j4.  The  colonel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide  of  each 
subdivision,  in  wheelin:^;,  does  not  throw  himself  without 
or  within,  but  passes  over  all  the  points  of  the  arc  of  the 
circle,  which  he  ought  to  describe. 

235.  As  often  aa  no  distinct  object  presents  itsolf  in  the 
new  diiectioo,  tho  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
upon  it  iu  advance,  at  tho  (iistance  of  thirty  or  forty  pao^s 
from  tho  marker,  and  bo  assured  in  this  direction  by  the 
colonel;  the  leading  guide  will  take,  the  moment  ho  shall 
have  changed  direction,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
stra'ght  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  be- 
tween the  heels  of  the  lieutenant  colonel,  taking,  afb-r- 
wards,  new  points  as  he  advances. 

236.  The  major  will  sec  that  the  guides  direct  them- 
selves on  the  ma'kcr  posted  at  the  point  of  change,  so  as 
to  graze  his  breast. 

2.37.  If  tho  column  bo  composed  of  several  battalions, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  will  cause  the  marker 
of  the  first  battalion  to  ba  repl.iced  as  soon  as  the  last 
subdivision  of  this  battalion  shall  have  passed ;  this  dis- 
position will  bo  observed  by  baitalion  after  batta'ion,  to 
the  rear  of  the  column. 

EeiiiarJ^s. 

2-lS.  It  has  been  demonstrated,  school  of  the  company, 
how  important  it  i!',.;ir.'i<,  that  each  subdiviiion  execute 
its  change  of  direction  precisely  at  the  point  where  tho 
leading  one  had  changed,  and  that  it  arrive  in  a  square 
with  the  direction  ;  aecond,  that  the  wheeling  point  ought, 
always,  to  ba  cleared  in  time,  in  ordir  that  the  subdivis- 
ion engaged  in  tho  wheel  may  not  arrest  the  movement 
of  tho  following  one.  The  deeper  the  column,  the  more 
rigorously  ought  these  principles  t  •>  bo  obEcrved  ;  be- 
cause, a  fault  that  would  be  but  sliglit  iu  a  column  of  a 
single  battalion,  would  cause  uiuchembarrassmeBt  in  one 
of  great  depth. 

Article  I'oubtu. 

To  Iialt  the  ciiUonn. 

2.3,1,  The  column  being  iu  march,  when  the  colonel 
sli.iU  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 


1.  (Joluinn. 


Halt. 


21'i.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by  tho 
rnptains,  tho  column  will  halt ;  no  gniilo  will  stir,  though 
ho  may  liavo  I  at  his  distance,  or  bo  out  of  the  direction 
of  tho  preceding  guides. 

211.  Thccoliiuiii  being  in  march,  iu  double  quick  time, 
will  be  halted  by  the  same  command.      At  the  command 


52 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION— PART  III. 


/ii//,  Ibv  iiK'u  will  hull  in  tboir  placM,  bdiI  will  them- 
nclvt'H  rtKiiify  their  (HjaitiuDS  in  the  ranliB. 

'H'l.  Tb"  ci  lumn  lH>ing  baited,  when  fbe  colonel  Hball 
with  to  form  it  into  line  <f  battle,  be  will  move  >  little 
ill  front  of  the  Iratling  ((■>>('''•  'od  fncn  to  him  ;  tli'B  iniide 
Kud  the  l.illowinK  one  will  llx  their  ey'  h  on  the  colonel,  in 
order  promptly  to  conform  themsflvt'H  to  bin  dircctioua. 

'IVi.  If  th«i  colonel  jud(;e  it  not  n«-ocmiHry  to  (rive  a  gen- 
'■ra'  dirpi-tion  to  the  ^iiidec,  be  will  limit  himittif  t<^  recti- 
lyigK  th<-  poHitiiin  of  giich  as  iim.v  l>e  without,  or  within 
thx  direction,  by  the  c'>mnianil  piii'i^c  o/ (lucli)  compauii. 
or  jinV/.i  o/"(»nch)  r..nt/xii»'«x-/.>  Ih'.  ri'jiit  (or /o  th'  left ;) 
Ht  this  •-ommnnd,  the  guidea  deaiKuat^xl  will  plicc  them- 
neU'OH  on  the  direction  ;  the  others  will  Mtand  fniit. 

244.  If.  on  the  cutritry,  the  colonel  judge  it  neci-soary 
to  ^ive  H  K^niTil  direction  to  the  itiiides  of  the  column, 
he  will  p'aoH  the  tlrst  two  on  the  direction  he  sliiill  have 
cboaeBi  and  command : 

/      ,  (Viu'ito,    cover. 

2t.'>.  At  thi".  the  following  );ui<biH  will  promptly  |>lac« 
themselvea  on  the  direction  covering  the  first  two  m  file, 
I'Dd  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his 
company,  from  the  niiido  immediHtely  preceding;  the 
lientu' ant  lolonel  will  assure  llieiii  in  the  direction,  and 
thy  coloMi-l  willcommaiid  : 

Left  (or  rt-y/i/)— I)BE8K. 

240.  At  this  command,  each  coiiii>any  will  incline  to  the 
right  or  loft,  iiud  dress  forward  or  backward,  bo  us  to 
bring;  the  du8i^'nated  flank  to  rest  on  its  guide  ;  each  cap- 
tain will  place  biniMclf  two  paces  eutside  of  his  guide, 
promptly  align  bis  comp.any  purallelly  with  that  which 
precedes,  then  command  Fkunt,  and  return  to  his  place 
in  column. 

247.  Finally,  if  the  general  guides  march  on  th't  Hank 
of  the  coluiiii,  the  colonel,  having  balled  it.  will  p'ace 
liiniself  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  to  ascertain  whether 
the  leading  general  guide  and  the  co'or-bcarer  he  exactly 
on  the  direction  of  tho  two  points  in  advanco,  and 
t'stalilish  them  ou  that  direction  if  they  be  not  already  on 
it;  the  m»JL)r  will  do  the  like,  iu  respect  to  the  general 
guide  in  ibu  rear  ;  which  being  execute<l,  the  coloiiel  will 
ommand  : 

1.  O'lii.fe  — O.N  THE  Line. 

248.  At  thin  command,  th«  guide  of  each  cc^mpany  of 
the  directing  flank  will  step  promptly  into  the  direction 
of  the  general  guides,  and  face  to  the  front.  The  lieuten- 
ant colonel,  iilaced  in  front  of,  and  facing  to,  tho  leading 
general  guide,  and  the  iniijor,  placed  in  rear  of  the  rear- 
most one,  will  promptly  align  the  company  guides. 

249.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  of  tho 
guides,  will  command  : 

Left  (or  »■/<////)— DitE.s3. 

2.">).  This  will  li«  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  24i;. 


Iti.iiiurla. 

251.  The  means  indicated,  No.  244,  and  following,  for 
civin^  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  a  column,  at 
lull  distance,  will  apply  only  to  a  column  composed  of 
two,  or,  at  most,  three  battalioiiH.  If  the  number  be  more 
uumfrouH,  its  chief  will  caune  the  colors  and  general 
guides  of  all  the  battalions  to  stop  out  and  place  them- 
selves on  tho  direction  which  be  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
col'.mn,  as  is  explained  in  the  evolutions  of  the  line. 


AiiTiCLE   Fifth. 

Til  close  tlie  column  to  hulf  (UntaiKii,  or  in  wnsn, 

2  2.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance  right 
in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  alose  to  half  distance,  on  the  leading  company, 
he  will  command : 


1.    To  half  Hiflnnrc,  clone  eoliimti.        2.    M&BCii  (or  .Miiilr 
•/Hicil— Mabcb). 

2-Vt.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  l«ading 
company  will  cnulion  it  to  Ntand  fact. 

2.'>4.  At  the  command  nian/i,  which  will  be  repeated  by 
all  the  captiiin*,  except  the  captain  ol  the  lead' ng  company, 
tliia  company  will  stand  fast,  and  its  chief  will  align  it  by 
the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  rlofe  one  pace  uptin  the  rear 
rank. 

2V'i.  All  tho  other  companies  will  coutlnno  to  march, 
and  as  ea<li  in  snccession  arrives  at  platoon  distance 
from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will  halt  it. 

'IRC.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halta,  its  gnide 
will  jdace  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides  who 
precede,  and  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  tho 
left ;  the  file  cloaers  will  close  ono  pace  upon  the  rear 
rank. 

2.'>7.  No  partif  ular  attention  need  l>o  given  to  the  gen- 
eral direction  r.f  the  guides  l«forethoy  respectively  halt ; 
it  will  Hufllce  if  each  follow  iu  the  trace  of  the  one  who 
precedes  him.  , 

258.  The  c  'lonel,  on  the  side  of  tho  guides,  will  super- 
intend the  execution  of  the  mevenient,  observing  that  the 
captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at  platoon  distance 
the  one  from  the  other. 

2J0.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  a  IVw  paces  in  front,  will 
fac«  to  the  leading  guide  and  assure  tlie  positions  of  tbo 
followimr  guides  as  they  successively  place  themselves  ou 
the  direction. 

200.  The  mnjor  will  lollow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  last  guide. 

2til.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  cause 
it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

2i:2.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  (|uick  time, 
at  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  theleadiag  company 
will  command  quirl:  lime  ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  com- 
panies will  caution  them  to  continue  their  march. 

203.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will 
march  in  quick,  and  the  other  companies  in  double  quick 
time;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  tho 
preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick 
time. 

2('>4.  When  tho  rearmost  company  shall  havo  gained  its 
distance,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Double  quick— tilhRCU. 

2li5.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  the  column 
and  to  cause  it  to  cbHO  to  half  distance  at  the  same  time, 
he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  ol  his 
intention,  who  at  tho  command  march  will  halt  bis  com- 
pany and  align  it  by  the  loft. 

2fi<>.  If  the  column  bo  marching  in  quick  time,  and  tbo 
colonel  should  not  give  the  commanil  doulde  quick,  the 
captain  of  tho  leading  company  will  halt  his  company  at 
tbo  command  marcit,  and  align  It  by  the  left.  In  the  case, 
where  the  colonel  adds  the  command  double  qui<k,  the 
captains  of  the  companies  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  2(12,  and  tho  movement  will  be  executed  as 
indicated  No.  2G3. 

J'o  close  the  column  oil  tlie  eighth,  or  renriitoU  comjiaiij/. 

207.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  causing 
it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  tho  first  company,  tho 
colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  on  the  eighth,  ho 
will  command  : 

1.  On  the  ciijhlh  rompany,  to  half  (li/l<iucc  cinso  cnlumn. 
2.  JIaUalioii  abmU—VAc*.  .!.  Column  forward.  4. 
6'i<i'/«  riijhl.    5.  Maqcii.  (or  douhlc  quick— UkRcn.) 

208.  At  tho  second  command,  all  the  companies,  ex- 
cept the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and  their  guides  will  re- 
main in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

209.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  jiaces  outside  of  their  companies  on  the 
directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  cemmand  mnrc/i,  the  eighth  company  wid 
stand  fa^t,  and  its   captain   will  align  it  by  the   left,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAKT  III. 


53 


Dther  companie?  will  pnt  thomselvesin  march,  and.  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  oiio  established 
before  it,  its  captain  will  bait  it  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
At  the  moment  that  each  company  halts,  the  left  guide, 
remaining  faced  to  the  ronr,  will  place  hinipplt'  promptly 
on  the  direction  of  the  Ruides  already  estab  ished.  Im- 
mediately after,  the  captain  will  align  his  company  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the 
rear  rank.  If  this  movement  boexecuted  in  double  quick 
tinia,  each  captnin,  in  tMrn,  will  bait,  and  command  : 
Hiick  company,  ri'jhl  a?)f)i(f— H alt.  At  this  command,  the 
company  designated  will  face  to  (he  right  about  and  halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to  f;4ce 
about. 

272.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  behind  the 
rearmost  guides,  will  assure  successively  the  positions 
of  the  other  guides,  as  prescribed  No.  259  ;  the  major 
will  remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost  company. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  c'.oae  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  Jialf  dislancc,  close  rolumn.  2. 
Bal(aUon  right  about.  15.  Makch  (or  douhle  qnicJc  — 
Mabch.)    4.  Guide  ri/jht. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captnin  of  the  eighth 
oompany  will  caution  his  company  that  it  will  remain 
faced  to  the  front;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  cantion  their  companies  that  they  will  have  to  face 
about, 

27o.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  will  halt  hia  company,  and  alien  it  by  the  lift; 
the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

27fi.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the  same 
command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of  the  col- 
umn ;  the  BulidiviHions  will  face  about,  and  ase-ich  arrives 
at  platoon  distance  from  the  company  immediately  pre- 
ceding it,  its  chief  will  face  to  the  front  and  halt  it  as 
prescribed  No.  270.  The  instant  each  company  halts,  the 
gnide  on  the  direcMn^  Hauk,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear, 
vnW  quickly  place  himself  on  the  directioa  of  the  guides 
already  established.  After  which,  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close 
one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  movement 
abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  major  will  place  him- 
self a  few  paces  in  the  roar  of  the  guide  of  the  eighth 
company,  and  will  assure  successively  the  position  of  the 
other  guides. 

Hemarls. 

278.  A  column  by  division  at  full!  distance  will  close 
to  half  distance  by  the  same  means  and  the  same  com- 
mands. 

270.  A  column,  by  company,  or  by  division,  beng  ntfiill 
or  half  distance,  the  colonel  will  canse  it  toclose  in  mass  by 
the  same  means  and  commands,  substituting  the  indira- 
tion,  colinnti,  close  in  mass,  for  that  of  /n  hulf  ilistancc,  clime 
colmnii.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  conform  himself 
to  all  that  has  just  lieen  prescribed,  except  that  he  will 
not  bait  his  subdivision  till  its  guide  hhall  be  at  a  dis- 
tance of  six  paces  from  the  guide  of  the  subdivision  next 
preceding. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  vari: us  movements 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

Ar.TicLE  Sixth. 

To  march  in  column  al  half  dislancc,  or  closed  in  mass. 

2S1.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  at  a 
halt,  the  colonel  will  put  it  in  ma'ch  by  the  commands 
proscribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

282.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  bo  the  same  for  a 
column'at  half  distance  ar  in  mass,  as  for  a  column  at 
full  distance,  except  that  the  genera!  guides  will  not  step 
out. 

283.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  bait  it,  ho  will 


give  the  commands  prescribed  for  hailing  a  column  at 
full  distance,  and  if,  afterwards,  he  judge  it  necessary  to 
give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he 
will  employ,  to  thi«  end,  the  commands  and  means  indi- 
cated, No.  244  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass, 
chiefs  of  division  will  repeat  the  cominanda  march  and 
hall,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 

285.  Thn  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to  the 
rear,  by  the  means  and  the  commands  prescribed  Nos.  170 
and  171. 

27*).  A  column  by  division  or  eompany,  whether  at  fnll 
or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mans,  at  a  halt  or  marching, 
can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  marclnd  off  in  the 
new  direction. 

Article  Sevkntu. 

To  change  tUrectlon  in  column  al  ludf  disUmcc. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and  according  to 
the  s.ime  principles  as  a  column  at  full  di.stance  ;  bnt  as 
the  distance  between  the  subdivisions  is  less,  the  pivot 
man  in  each  subdivision  will  takesteps  of  fourteen  inches 
instead  of  nine,  and  of  seventeen  inches  instead  of  eleven, 
according  to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheel- 
ing point,  and  the  marching  flank  will  describe  tte  arc  of 
a  larger  circle,  the  better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 


Article  Eiqhtu. 

To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  viass. 

let.  To  cTiange  direction  in  marching. 

258.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being  in 
march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  subdi- 
visions. 

259.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse,  or  to 
the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on  the  princi- 
ple of  wheeling  in  marching;  te  this  end,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  guide  en  the  flank 
opposite  the  intended  change  of  dirtciion,  if  it  be  not 
already  on  tl>at flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the  colonel, 
after  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point 
where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion,  right  ivheel.    2.  March. 

291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division 
will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to 
its  movement ;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of  each,  advanc- 
ing slightly  the  left  shoulder,  and  lengthening  a  littlo  the 
step,  will  incliue  to  the  left,  and  will  observe,  at  the  same 
time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that  there  may 
constantly  be  an  interval  of  four  paces  between  his  divis- 
ion and  that  which  precedes  it  ;  and  as  soon  as  he  shall 
cover  the  preceding  guide,  ho  will  cease  to  incline  and  then 
march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

203.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  movement 
of  its  guide ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
him  and  advance  a  little  the  lefc  shoulder  the  instant  the 
movement  ccnimences  ;  each  file,  in  inclining,  will  gain 
so  much  the  less  ground  to  the  front,  as  the  file  shall  be 
nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will  gain  only  so 
much  as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  between  his  own 
and  the  preceding  division  the  same  distance  which  sepa- 
rates their  marching  flanks. 

294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will  regulate 
its  niiirch,  and  see  that  it  remains  con-itantly  included 
between  its  guides,  that  its  alignment  continues  nearly 
parallel  to  that  of  the  preceding  divieion,  and  that  tha 
center  bonds  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 

205.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement,  and 
cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  lengthen  or  to 
shorten  the  step,  conforming  to  th«  principle  established, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAKT  111. 


(^c^ool  ufllif  company,  No.  2-7— if  t-itlicr  Lc  necussary  U« 
liu'ilitato  tho  uiorcmept  xftlio  citlicr  divisioDii. 

'J96.  Ibf*  lieutenant  coU'DpI,  placpJ  noar  tlif  left  giiitle 
of  the  leiding  dirisioD,  will  rcculHtd  his  march,  and  take* 
(  HFP,  uboTB  all,  that  ho  docs  not  tbruw  hinutvir  toi7/tiii  the 
arc:  be  onsht  to  dMcrilx). 

;i'J7.  1  hn  mnjor,  plawd  in  the  n  ar  of  thi- s'liU^.  «  ill 
K>'<'  that  the  I  IS t  three  conform  t hems-  1-.'  -.  <:i.  li  l.y  «li^:lii 
dittrees,  t.  the  movement  o(  the  «"''''■  iniiin  liiiili  Iv  iri'- 
cedinjc,  an<l  that  neither  inclines  t(x>  nnicli  iu  the  emli t- 
Tor  l'>  c  iver  too  iimniptlv  the  gui'le  iu  his  front  :  lip  will 
rertil'yany  HvriouH  fault  tliit  may  bo  committed  in  either 
of  thoHP  particulars. 

298.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  whcol  nearly  ecdc-d,  will 
command : 

I.  /'•.rirnn/.     2.  JlABClI. 

290.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  Ixs  cir^n  at  the 
inotant  the  lea'ling  division  complotes  its  wheel,  it  will 
resume  the  direct  march;  the  other  <liviiiions  will  con- 
r  /rm  the'iiBelves  to  this  movement ;  and  if  any  (pilde  find 
himself  not  covering  his  immediate  leader,  he  will,  by 
slifht  dei;ree8.  briuK  himself  on  the  trace  of  that  guide, 
by  «dvancin:<  the  rifiht  shoulder. 

^00.  If  the  column.  rij.'ht  in  front,  has  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  left,  the  colonel  will  flr^t  cause  it  to  take  the 
guide  to  tli*  right,  and  then  comnmiid  : 

1.  JinWiUon,  lejiwheil.      2.  M Alien. 

;!iJl.  At  the  command  winrc/i,  the  battalion  will  chanpo 
direction  to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles  just  pre- 
gcri(>ed.  And  by  inverse  means. 

302.  When  the  battalion  shall  have  resnmed  the  direct 
march,  the  colonel  will  change  the  guide  to  the  left,  on 
weing  the  last  throe  guides  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the 
(•no  in  front. 

:'.ii:i.  The  foregoing  chiingos  ol  direction  will  lieoxfotited 
Ill-cording  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column,  left  in  front. 

Mi.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass.  %TiII  chanire 
ilirection  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and  mear.s  in- 
dicated for  a  column  by  division. 

^)5.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  part'cnlnr  wheel, 
ought  to  maintain  hImBelf  at  hi*  usual  distance  of  six 
)i*c*8from  the  guide  who  precf'de<  him;  if  this  distance 
l)e  Hot  exactly  preoerved,  the  divisions  would  peoessarlly 
become  confounded,  which  must  bo  carefnlly  avoided. 

2J.   To  cliawje  (lirccHdiifiom  a  hall, 

.'WC.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  cluHod  in 
mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give 
il  a  new  direction,  and  iu  which  it  is  to  remain,  ho  will 
crtuse  it  to  execute  this  movement  by  the  flanks  of  sub- 
divisions, in  the  following  manner : 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  by  Iho 
ri^'ht  flank,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenuit  colonel  the 
point  of  direction  ti  the  right  ;  this  officer  will  imnie- 
illately  ostablish,  on  the  new  direction,  two  markern,  dis- 
t.'intfrom  each  other  a  little  less  than  the  front  of  the  (irst 
subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  front  of  tho  riglit  fll«  of 
this  subdivision  ;  which  being  extcutot',  he  will  com-, 
mand : 

1.  Cliange  direction  by  the  right  flanl;.    2.  BaUalion,  right — 
Face.     3.  JiABcuXor  ci«((6/c  fyia'cA— Mahcu.) 

308.  At  the  second  command,  the  colnmn  will  fiico  to 
tlio  riglit,  and  each  chief  of  subdivi.sion  will  placo  himsblf 
by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

".09.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions  will 
step  off  together :  tlio  right  guide  of  tlii  lending  one  will 
direct  himself  to  the  flrst  step,  parallelly  t"  tlie  markers 
)daced  In  advance  on  the  now  direction  ;  the  chief  of  tho 
Bubdirisiou  will  not  follow  tho  movement,  but  sue  it  flio 
giast,  and  as  soon  as  tho  left  guide  shall  bnvo  passed,  he 
will  command : 


1.  First  coiti^auij  {or  first  (Uiision.)    2.  Halt. 
4.  1^— Darss. 


ri:o.M. 


oil).  At  th«  fourth  coiiiinand,  the  aiibdivitiuu  will  pla<e 
itself  aga'nat  the  two  markers,  and  bo  promptly  aligned 
by  its  chief. 

.''.II.  The  r'    ■  f  eiich  of  tho  following  suhdivi. 

sioua  will  <  f  to  the  diroclion  of  the  ri;.;lit 

guide  of  111  ■  -  I  ppT'-ding  his  own  in  the  coluniii, 

so  UK  to  enter  (11  III,.  ii,'w  direction  ]>aridlelly  to  that  sub- 
ilivis  on,  and  at  the  distance  of  four  (iices  from  Us  reiii' 

latlk. 

^.1-.  Each  chief (^ftub'liviiii'.n  wi'l  hall  iu  his  own  per- 
son, on  urrivicg  opposite-  to  tho  lell  tuides  already  placed 
on  the  new  direction,  roe  his  subdivision  lilu  past,  and 
confirm  bimfcif,  in  baiting  and  aligning  it,  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  '.Ui'J. 

313.  If  the  clianL,'.'  of  direcfion  U-  h*<'i"  hfl  flank,  the 
colonel  will  cniise  markers  to  bo  estamiBhod  as  before,  the 
first  in  front  of  the  l>tt  lllo  of  tho  lcadiiii;HubdiviHii'n,aud 
tlieugivc  the  same  C(.>iiiiiiaudB,substiuitingthe  iudicutiuu 
Ic/l  for  rl^iht. 

314.  AiiheB(:cond  comnmnd,  all  the  subdivisions  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will  place  biiusulf  by  tho 
side  of  his  lolt  guide. 

315.  At  thn  command  i/Kir'/i,  h'I  the  suhdiviaionR  will 
step  ofl  together,  each  conducted  by  its  chief. 

3IU.  The  guide  of  the  leading  siibdivisiou  will  direct 
himself,  from  the  first  step,  parallelly  to  tho  markers; 
the  subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  its  chief;  and  as  soon 
as  its  lott  guide  shall  have  pa-wed  the  second  marker,  it 
will  be  halted  and  aligned  as  prescribed  above  ;  end  bo  of 
each  of  the  lollowinc;  subdivision*. 

317.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  designated 
flank,  to  ceo  that  each  new  subdiviijion  outers  the  new  di- 
rection parallelly  to  tho  lending  one,  and  at  the  prescribed 
distance  from  that  which  jlreoedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himseU  in  front 
of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision, 
and  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  following  guides,  as 
tliev  successively  arrive  on  the  new  direction. 

319.  Tho  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  last  cubdiviiioii. 

320.  In  order  that  lliis  luovemfnt  may  beexectited  with 
facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary  that  the  leading 
subdivision  sliould  entirely  unmask  tlio  column  :  for  ex- 
ample, tho  movement  boiiia:  made  by  the  right  flank,  it  is 
necessary,  before  haltiiic  tho  leading  suhdivls'on.  that  its 
left  guide  Khali,  at  least  have  arrived  at  tho  place  previ- 
ously occupied  by  its  riglit  guide,  in  order  that  each  fel- 
lowing  subdivision  which  has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least 
C(|ual  to  its  front  to  putitKoKin  the  new  direction,  and 
whose  left  ought  to  pass  tho  point  at  which  the  riaht  had 
rested,  may,  at  the  command  h>ill.  lind  itself,  in  its  whole 
front,  parallel  to  the  leading  Hubdivi'-ion. 

3'_'1.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  uniy  not 
bo  given  to  a  column  in  masn. 

AUTK  LU  Xl.M'U. 

Bcinrj  in  colfonu  al  hilf  (Unlnnca,  or  closed  iit^tnasti  to 
lake  tli.-Jancrs. 

322.  A  column  at  half  distaixo  will  take  fHll  diatHiices  ,, 
hi/  tho  head  of  tho  column  whoa  it  has  to  prolong  itself  j 
on  the  line  of  battle.  If,  on  thi>  contrary,  it  has  to  form  , 
itself  into  lino  of  batlle  on  the  ground  it  occupies,  i(  wil^,, 
tfiko  diBtancos  on  tho  leading  or  oi»  thu  rearmost  subdi-  • 
vision  according  as  the  one  or  other  may  find  itself  at  the 
point  where  the  ri-ht  or  left  of  tho  ballalion  i>n;:ht  (o 
rest  iii  lino  of  battle. 

l$t.  To  lake  ditianccs  hij  the  licad  oj  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  diatanco 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
t.ike  lull  distances  by  tho  head,  he  will  command  : 

}lil  llie  Jiead  of  voUtmii,  lukc  wheeling  duiUiuc. 

3-1.  At  this  command,  tho  captain  of  tho  loading  loin- 
pauy  will  put  it  in  murcb ;  to  thiu  ond|  be  will  cuni- 

muud:  ,  i       . 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III. 


1.  First  company,  forward.    2.  Guide  left.    3.  Mabch  (or  ] 
dmthle  gm'cfe— Maucu.) 

;;25.  When  tlio  second  eliiU  have  nearly  its  wheeling  | 
distaoce,  its  cuptaia  will  commaud:  i 

1.  S'poii'l  compntiti,  foniHxrd.    2.    Gnida   I'fi.    3.    Mabcb.  1 
(or  douhh  giii'ct— March).'  ! 

32(i.  At  tlio  rominand  march,  which  will  l)e  proHonnced 
at  the  iuatuut  that  thia  company  shall  have  iis  wheelint; 
distan(^p,  it  will  stnp  olV  smartly,  tiikinc  the  step  from 
Iho  precediug  company.  Knch  of  tlio  other  compinu'S 
will  succoseively  oxocuto  what  has  just  been  proscribed 
for  the  Bf'cond. 

027.  The  colonol  will  SCO  that  each  company  puts  itself 
in  march  at  tho  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

o2S.  Tho  lioutouaiit-colonid  <kiU  hold  hirasolf  at  the 
lieaU  of  tho  coliimU)  and  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  tho 
rearmost  guide. 

SuO.  If  the  column,  instead  of  beinp;  at  a  halt,  he  in 
marcli,  tho  colonel  will  give  the  samo  commands,  and 
add  : 

M  AKO(i  {\>r  doiihlc  giiic/;— March). 

:!31.  If  the  column  bj  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the 
notnmand  morch:  the  captain  of  tho  leai^ng  company  will 
cause  doiihli-  quick  tii,ic  to  be  taken  ;  which  will  also  be 
done  by  tho  othor  ca])taina  as  the  companies  successively 
attain  their  proper  wheuling  distance. 

!il^'2.  If  the  column  bo  marching  in  donhJe  quich  timo,  the 
loadinj;  company  will  continue  to  m'trch  at  tiie  samo  gnit. 
Tho  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  cause  quick  time 
to  bo  taken,  and  as  each  company  gains  its  proper  dis- 
tance, its  captain  will  cause  it  to  retake  the  douhle  quick 

2fJ.  To  fake  distancci!  on  the  roir  of  the  cnhniDi. 

S.13.  If  tho  colonel  wish  to  take  distanoes  on  the  rear" 
most  com)  any,  he  will  ostabli-h  two  markers  on  the  di' 
rection  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  flrs' 
opposite  to  thB  rearmoHt  com;  any,  tho  second  marker  to" 
wards  the  head  of  tho  colnmn,  at  company  distance  from 
the  first,  aii<I  b^th  facing  to  tho  rear  ;  at  the  same  time, 
the  right  g.moral  guile,  on  an  intimation  from  tho  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a  little  beyond  the  point 
to  which  tho  heal  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place 
himself  correctly  on  th"  prolongation  of  tho  two  mark  rs. 
These  distances  being  made,  the  colonel  will  commatid  : 

1.  On  the  eighth  rnmjtnnii,  take  vhccling  distance.  2  Column 
ftirwanl.  3.  Guide  left,  i,  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

334.  At  tho  third  command,  tlie  cai.talus  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank  ;  the 
cnptaln  of  tho  eighth  company  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast. 

S.'io.  At  the  command  mirch,  repeated  bysU  th:«  cap- 
tains, except  th)  captaitf  of  tho  e'ghth  compary,  this  com- 
pany  will  st'tnd  fast;  its  chief  will  align  it  by  (ho  left  on 
the  first  mariior,  who  is  opposite  to  this  company,  and 
place  himself  before  its  centre,  after  commandin!;,  Fuo.vt. 
At  this  coaimaiul,  tho  marker  will  retire,  and  tho  loft 
j;nide  will  take  his  place. 

:s3r).  A4I  the  other  companies  will  put  thems»lvcs  in 
ma'cli,  the  gnide  of  tho  leading  onn  diiecting  himpolf  a 
Utile  within  the  right  general  guide  ;  when  the  seventh 
c'lmpany  has  arrived  oppusito  tho  second  marker,  its  ca> 
taia  will  holt,  and  align  it  on  this  marker,  in  tho  manner 
prescribed  lor  tho  eighth  company. 

337,  When  th  i  captain  of  tho  sixth  oimpnny  shall  see 
that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  (ho  seventh,  the 
necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line,  he  will  halt  his 
company;  the  guile  facing  to  the  rear  will  place  himself 
promptly  on  the  direction,  and  tho  moment  he  shall  be 
assured  in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align  the  com- 
pany by  the  left,  and  then  place  himself  two  paces  before 


its  centre.;  tho  othor  companies  will  successively  conform 
tbemselvo  to  what  has  jiist  been  proscribed  for  the  sixth 
company. 

838.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  and  see  that 
each  company  halts  at  tho  pre-cribed  distance  ;  he  will 
promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may  be  committed,  and, 
us  sci  >u  as  all  the  companies  shall  be  aligned,  ho  will 
cause  tho  guides,  who  aro  faced  to  the  rear,  to  fai'o 
about. 

3.39.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  successively  assure  the 
left  guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself  in  their  roar, 
as  they  arrive. 

340."The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  ami  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

3(/.  To  take  distances  at  the  head  qf  the  colnmn. 

341.  Tho  colc'el,  wishing  to  take  distances  on  the  lead- 
ing company,  will  establish  two  markers  in  the  manner 
just  proBcribed,  one  abreast  with  this  company,  and  the 
other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of  the  tir.st,  but  both 
facing  to  the  front :  the  left  general  guide,  on  an  intima- 
tion from  tho  lieutenant  colouol,  will  moTO  rapidly  to  the 
rear  and  place  himself  correctly  on  tho  prolongation  of 
the  two  markers,  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  tho 
rear  of  the  column  will  extend:  these  dispositions  being 
made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first  company,  take  wheeling  disianca.  2.  liatlnl- 
ion.  about— Yace.-  3.  Colnmn,  forward.  4.  Guide  right. 
5,  March  (  r  double  quick — March). 

342.  At  the  second  cohimand,  all  tho  companies,  except 
the  one  designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides  remaining 
in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  tho  captains  will  place 
themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  designated 
company, will  align  it,  as  prescribed,  No.  335,  on  the  mar- 
ker placed  by  its  side. 

34.5.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  the'guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct  himself 
a  little  within  the  left  general  guide  ;  when  the  second 
company  ehall  have  arrived  opposite  the  second  marker, 
its  captain  will  face  it  about,  conforming  to  what  is  pro- 
scribed. No.  270,  and  align  it,  as  has  just  been  prescribe<l 
for  the  first  company. 

;!4t).  The  instant  that  tho  third  coninany  shall  have  its 
wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it  facing  it  about, 
as  prescribed,  No.  270,  and  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  cap- 
tains of  the  remaining  companies  will  each,  in  succession, 
conform  himself  to  what  has  just  been  prescribtd  for  tho 
captain  of  the  third. 

347.  Tho  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  indicated 
No.  33S  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  proscribed,  Nos.  339  and  340. 

348.  These  various  movements  will  bo  executed  accor- 
ding to  tho  samo  principles  in  a  column  with  the  left  in 
front. 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a  column 
closed  in  mass  ;  but,  if  it  he  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to 
open  out  the  column  to  half,  instead  of  full  distance,  ho 
will  substitute,  in  the  commands,  the  indicatioii  half  for 
that  of  ivhceliiiij  distance. 

350.  In  a  column,  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken 
according  to  the  same  principles. 


AmiCLK  Tenth. 
Connlennarch  of  n  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 

351.  In  a  colnmn  at  full  or  half  distance,  tin  conuter- 
niarch  will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated,  school  (  1' 
the  company  ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Jhillalion  right  (or  kfl)—TArF..  3. 
Bi/  file  left  (or  right).  4.  Mabck  (or  double  quick — 
Miiicn), 


5G 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III. 


To  ccninUrmardi  a  cotumm  ctoted  ut  mat*. 


V.'jI.  irtlip  colamn  b(>c1oiu«din  mBSX,  ttiP  ronntermarrh 
will  be  exocaie<l  by  Ibo  commaDds  aud   tiK^n"  inbjoiocd. 

363.  Tli«  rolumn  bctiiK  miiipoiiod  ftirnjfd  by  divUiuD, 
right  in  tront,  lb*  colouul  will  comniand  : 

1.  Cotinltrmarch.     2.  BaUali'm,  right   and  ItJl—VxCK.    a 
J}g  file   left  and  right.     4.  M.ah<  a    (or   dtullc  quick— 

?m'>1.  At  tbo  first  coniiuinil,  tlir-  cliicrd  (if  tbe  odd  niiiii- 
bered  divisiuoB  will  camion  tliein  to  face  to  tlio  ricbt, 
aod  lliu  eveu  to  llii>  lift ;  the  ri|{ht  and  left  guides  of  all 
tbe  diviBlouH  will  f.ice  about  ;  thecliiefH  of  the  odd  divi- 
HioDB  will  Imsteii  to  the  right  and  ciiuoe  two  fi|i'9  to  brciik 
to  tbe  rear,  and  each  chiof  place  himgelf  on  tbe  lelt  of  iho 
leading  front  rank  man  of  jiis  divinion  ;  the  chiefn  of  even 
dtrinions  will  hasten  to  their  left,  and  cnuHe  two  filcH  to 
break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  uu  tbo 
right  of  his  leading  front  rank  man. 

35C.  At  the  command  manh,  all  the  diriiiionf*,  each 
conduct!  d  by  it<  chief,  will  Htep  olT  smartly,  the  guides 
standing  fast;  each  odd  dirisioH  will  wheel  by  file  to  tbo 
lifft  around  its  right  guide;  each  e%-on  diviHiou  will  wheel 
ty  file  to  the  right  urouu  1  its  left  guide,  each  division  so 
directing  its  march  as  to  arrive  behind  itn  opposite  guide, 
and  when  its  bead  Fliall  bo  up  with  this  guide,  the  chief 
shall  halt  the  division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  f-iciug  to  the  front,  will  bo 
aligned  by  it.'^  chief  by  the  right ;  to  this  end,  tbe  chiefs 
of  the  even  diviKions  will  move  rapidly  to  tbe  right  of 
tl  eir  resp.'Ctive  divisions. 

u6S.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will  com- 
mand, Fbont  ;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to  their  proper 
flanks. 

35'J.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
utoanH  ;  but  all  the  divisions  will  be  aligned  bv  the  left: 
to  thii  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to 
the  left  of  their  rsspectivo  divisions  us  soon  us  the  latter 
thall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

3U'J-  Tlie  colonel,  placed  ou  the  directing  flank,  will 
superintend  the  general  movement. 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  tbo  lientonant 
colonel  will  always  phice  hiinselfubreast  with  the  loading, 
and  the  major  ubrea.st  with  the  rturmost  division. 

3'"i2.  In  a  column  by  company,  clwed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  bo  executed  by  the  name  means  and 
commands,  applying  to  companies  what  is  prcscrit)ed  for 
divi^ous. 

3G3.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place  from  a 
halt,  whether  the  column  bo  cioHitd  in  maHj,  or  at  full,  or 
half  dist»uc4^^. 


AaTICLE    Eletimu. 

T!eiii(i  ill  column  hy  company,  closed  in  man/i,  to  foi-m 
iliviuions, 

'Mil.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divi- 
sions, ho  will  command : 

1.  Form  divinioiu.    2.  LrflcompaiueM,Un—¥Avr..    .">.  MAKCa 
(or  double  giucA— Maucu). 

3G5.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  llie  left  com- 
panies will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

3t;C.  At  the  second  comnmnd,  tho  left  companiei  will 
face  to  tho  left,  and  their  captains  will  jilace  themselves 
ly  the  side  of  their  respective  left  guidm. 

;;(i7.  The  ri^lit  companies,  and  tbelrcaptuins.  will  stand 
fast;  but  the  right  and  left  guides  of  eiicn  of  these  com- 
panies, will  place  themwelvea  resixsctively  before  tbe  right 
and  left  tiles  of  the  company,  both  guides  facing  to  tbe 
right,  and  each  resting  his  right  arm  gently  nguinst  the 
breast  of  the  Irotlt  rank  man  of  tlio  file,  in  order  to  mark 
tlio  direction. 


3('>S.  At  tbo  command  tibirr/t,  tho  loft  companies  only 
will  put  thrmwlves  in  march,  their  raptains  ptauding 
fast:  as  each  shall  see  that  his  company,  filing  past,  ban 
nearly  cleared  tbo  rulamn,  he  will  command  : 


1.  Nmc/i  fowixiiiy. 


Halt.    3.  Kbont. 


300.  The  first  command  will  l>e  given  when  the  company 
shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march  ;  the  sicond  at  the 
instant  it  shall  have  cleared  Its  right  company;  aud  tbe 
third  immediately  uftiT  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  fared  to  th  >  front,  the  files, 
if  there  bo  intervuls  between  them,  will  promptly  incline 
to  the  right ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  on  tho  left  of 
tho  right  company  of  the  division,  and  align  himself  cor- 
rectly on  tlio  front  tank  of  that  company. 

.'171.  Tho  Icf.  guide 'will  place  bimnelf  at  tho  same 
time  before  one  of  the  tliree  lift  flies  of  his  company, 
face  to  the  right,  and  cover  correctly  tbe  ;:uides  of  the 
right  company;  the  moment  the  captain  sees  him  estab- 
lished ou  the  direction,  he  will  command  : 

lii'jhl—'DB.T.SS. 

372.  At  ibis,  the  left  company  will  dress  forwanl  on 
tho  alignmvnt  of  the  right  cumpany  ;  tbo  front  rank 
man,  who  may  flnil  himaelf  opposite  to  the  left  guide, 
will,  without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly  his  breast 
against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide  ;  the  captain  of  tbe 
left  company  will  direct  its  alignment  on  thin  man,  and 
tbe  alignment  being  assured,  he  will  command,  Kbont  ; 
but  not  quit  his  position. 

373.  Tho  C'lonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will  com- 
mand : 

(Tuidcs— Posts. 

874.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the  fronts  of 
divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in  columnu,the  left 
guide  of  each  right  company  pai-slng  thruiiKh'tnft  inter- 
val in  tbe  centre  of  the  division,  and  the  captains  will 
plHCo  themselves  as  pros  ribed  No.  1'k 

375.  The  colonel  from  tbe  directing  flank  of  tho  col- 
umn, will  superintend  ti.e  general  execution  of  the 
movement. 

370.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt, 
when  tho  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will 
commaTid : 

1.  Form  duisioiis.    2.  Lffl  companies,  b;/  the  left  flank.    3. 
Maucii  (or  double  i^uict— MAttCH). 

377.  At  fhn  first  command,  tho  captains  of  the  right 
companies  will  commaud,  JUurl:  time,  tho  captains  of  the 
left  companies  will  caution  their  companies  to /me  by  Iht 
Up.  flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  Ibo  right  corapsnios  will 
mark  time,  the  h'fl  companies  will  face  to  the  left;  tho 
captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each  see  his  company 
file  pist  him,  aud  wliou  it  has  cleared  tho  column,  will 
command : 

^ii<7(  coiiipanii  by  the  rejW  yJajii— Mahch. 

As  soon  08  tho  divisions  arc  formed,  the  colonel  will 
c  iiimarid  : 

4.  Fortcatd.    5.  March. 

379.  At  tho  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resnrao  the 
gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the  commence- 
ment of  the  movement.  The  guides  of  each  division  will 
remain  ou  tlio  right  and  left  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies; tho  lelt  guide  of  the  right  company  will  pass  into 
the  line  of  file  closers,  before  the  two  companies  are 
united ,  tho  right  guide  of  tbo  left  company  will  step  Into 
tho  rear  rank.  The  captains  will  place  themselves  as 
prescribed  No.  To. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAKT  IV. 


51 


330..  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and  closed  in  mass,  in- 
stead of  at  fuller  half  distance,  divisions  will  be  formed  in 
the  same  manner  ;  but  the  captains  of  the  left  companies, 
it  the  movement  be  made  in  quick  time,  after  command- 
ing Front,  will  each  place  himself  before  Ihe  centre  of 
his  company,  and  command,  1.  Hitch  compau;/,  forward. 
2.  Guide  riijht.  3.  Maech.  If  the  movement  be  made  In 
double  quick  time,  each  will  command  as  soon  as  his 
compauy  has  cleared  the  column : 

1.  Such  companij  hi/ the  right  flank.    2,  Mabcii. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so  direct 
his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  mnn  on  the  left 
of  the  right  company.  The  left  company  being  nearly  up 
with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  company,  its  captain  will 
halt  it.  and  the  movement  will  be  finished  us  prescribed 
No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  inverse  means  :  the  right  companies  will  conform 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for  the  left  compa- 
nies ;  and  the  t>vo  guides,  placed  respectively,  before  the 
right  and  left  files  ot  each  left  company,  will  face  to  the 
left.  At  the  command,  Oi/u/*-*  poj/.«,  given  by  the  colo- 
nel, the  guides  who  have  marked  the  front  of  divisions, 
and  the  captains,  will  quickly  retake  their  places  in  the 
column. 

383.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance,  the 
divisions  will  be  formed  as  prescribed  No.  190.  If  it  be 
marching'  at  half  distance,  the  formation  will  take  place 
by  the  comiiuinds  and  according  to  the  principles  indica- 
I'd  No.  37<i;  if  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  companies  which  should  mark  time  will  march 
in  quick  time  by  the  command  of  their  captains. 

HemarJcs  on  the  formation  of  divisions  from  a  halt. 

384.  As  this  movement  may  Jbe  considered  as  the  ele- 
ment of  deployments,  it  ought  to  be  executed  with  the 
utmost  accuracy. 

385.  If  companies  marching  by  the  flank  do  not  pre- 
serve exactly  their  distances,  there  will  be  openings 
between  the  flies  at  the  instant  of  facing  to  the  fi  ont. 

.■^G.  If  captains  halt  their  companies  too  early,  they 
will  want  space,  and  the  files  which  have  not  cleared  the 
flanks  of  the  standing  companies  will  not  bo  able  to  dross 
into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks  latterly. 

GST.  If  on  the  contrary  the  companies  be  halted  too  late, 
it  will  be  neci^ssary  for  thom  to  incline  to  the  right  or 
left  in  dressing  ;  and  in  deployments,  either  of  these 
faults  would  lead  to  error  in  tiie  following  companies. 

3S8.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to  place 
himself  before  his  subdivision  in  order  to  mark  the  direc- 
tion, he  will  be  particular^'  careful  to  place  himself  so  as 
to  bo  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  outer  files  of  the  subdi- 
vision when  they  shall  bo  aligned  :  if  ho  take  too  much 
distance,  and  neither  of  those  files  finds  itself  against  him, 
the  chiffs  of  the  subdivision  will  have  no  assured  point  on 
which  to  direct  the  alignment. 


PART  FOURTH. 

Different  modes  ofpassinyfrom  the  order  in  column  to  the  order 
ill  baUte, 

Article  Fibst. 

Md.nner'jof  dclcrminitui  the  line  of  battle. 

389.  The  line  of  battle  may  bo  marked  or  determined 
in  three  different  manners  :  Ist,  by  placing  two  markers 
eighty  or  a  hundred  paces  apart,  on  the  direction  it  is 
wished  to  give  the  line;  2d,  by  placing  a  marVcr  at  the 
point  at  which  it  may  be  intnnded  tu  rest  a  flank,  and 
then  choosing  a  Kecond  point  towards,  or  beyond  tho 
opposite  fl*nk,  aud  thora  posting  aseond  marker  distant 
from  each  other  a  little  less  ijian  the  leading  subdivi- 
sion ;  3d.  by  choosing  at  the  first  the  points  of  direction 
tor  the  flanks,  and  then  determining,  by  iutermediato 

8 


points,  the  straight   line  between    those  selected  points, 
both  of  which  may  sometimes  be  beyond  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  full  distance  into 
line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)"! 

2.  T<*  the  right  (or  left)  !.„»„,.        ,  ,    .., 

3.  Forward;  ^  }■  into  hno  of  battle. 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,       J 

lat.  Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left,  into  line 
ofbaUle. 

390.  A  column,  r'ght  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when 
tho  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into  line,  ho 
will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the  means  pre- 
viously ind. Gated,  an  '  then  command  : 

1.    Left  into  line,  whal.       2.    Marck   (or   double  quick — 
Mabcu). 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  lead" 
ing  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the  direction 
of  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them,  and  place 
himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  ri^ht 
files  of  his  compauy,  whoa  they  shall  bo  in  line :  he  will 
be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  tho  left  front  rank  man  of  each  cr,nipany  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the 
right  arm  of  his  guide;  the  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  the  jiriuciple  of  wheeling  from  a  halt,  conforming 
themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school  of  the  company. 
No.  239:  eaoh  captain,  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  ob- 
serve the  execution  of  the  movement,  and,  when  the 
right  of  the  company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Snch  ccTiipaiiy.    2.  IIalt. 

393.  The  company  being  halted,  the  captain  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front  rank  mau 
of  the  company  next  on  tho  right,  align  himself  correctly 
and  command  : 

3.  fi/y/i^— Dbesp. 

394.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up  be- 
tween the  captain  and  tho  front  rank  man  on  its  left,  the 
captain  directing  the  alignment  on  that  man  ;  the  front 
rank  man  on  the  right  ol  the  right  company,  who  finds 
himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will  lightly  rest  bis 
breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

305.  Kach  captai^  having  aligned  hia  company,  will 
command.  Front,  and  the  colonel  will  add  : 

<7(n'<?es— Posts. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to  their 
places  iu  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through  the  nearest 
captain's  interval ;  to  permit  him  to  jiass,  tho  captain  will 
momentarily  step  before  the  first  file  of  his  company,  and 
the  covering  sergeant  behind  the  same  file.  This  rule  is 
general  for  all  the  funnations  into  line  of  bailie. 

397.  When  companies  form  lioo  of  battle,  file  closers 
will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank,  which  will  sufficiently  assure  their  alignment. 

398.  Tho  battalion  beibg  correctly  aligned,  the  colonel, 
lieut-cnant  colonel,  and  major,  as  well  as  the  adjutant  and 
sergeant  major,  will  return  to  their  respective  places  in 
lino  of  battle.  2Viis  rule  is  general  for  all  the  formations 
into  line  of  battle;  nevertheless,  the  battalion  being  in  tho 
school  of  elementary  instruction,  the  colonel  will  go  to 
any  point  he  may  deem  necessary. 

399.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  itself 
to  the  riglU  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples ;  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  himsel  f, 
at  the  first  command,  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides, 
in  a  manner  corresponding  to  what  is  prescribed.  No. 
391,  for  tho  right  guide  of  the  right  company. 


SCHOOL  OP  TUE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 


58 

400.  At  Ifcp  rommanil  <7»iW''«  pnsit,  th"  cnplaiti'j  will 
tdke  theJr  places  in  lino  of  buttle  *«  well  bi  llio  cniilfP. 
'J'hit  rule  it  ijcm-ntl  fnr  all  firtiintinnr  xnt'  li>-'.  i/l'tllU  in 
ichi'-h  the  compani,'  are  ali^jwd  hy  Iho  Wfl. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itgolf  into  lino  sf 
battle  by  tho  B»me  commitnda,  and  minuR,  but  obgerrinp 
wliit  follows:  if  tho  richt  b<<  in  front,  .it  the  conimnml 
Antt,  (fiven  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  lli  •  lift  uuide  of  ench 
right  company  will  place  himself  on  the  nliKtimont  opjx)- 
iiit«  to  on>  of  the  tliroo;  fiU«  on  the  loft  of  lila  compa- 
ny ;  the  left  piiide  of  the  firnt  company  will  hfs  a88tir<-d  on 
the  direction  by  tho  lletitenant  colonel ;  tdo  !■  ft  puideB  of 
the  other  right  companies  will  alifn  theinwlveH  correctly 
on  the  division  Kuides  ;  to  this  oiid,  tho  division  gnldes 
(on  the  alignment)  will  invert,  and  hold  thiir  pieces  ni« 
p«rpeodicularly  before  tho  centre  of  their  bodiwH,  at  tho 
command  /.  ft  into  line.  uhol.  If  tho  colnmn  by  dirtpi.ni 
be  with  tho'left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of  left  compnnins 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  juat  bnen  prMcril)->d 
fwr  the  I'/ft  guides  of  right  companies,  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  line  opposite  to  one  of  the  tliryo  right  Hies 
of  their  rispt'ctive  companies. 

402.  A  csluinn  in  march  will  be  formed  info  llne,witli- 
<iut  liulting,  by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At  tho 
command  vuirdi.  the  guides  will  halt  in  their  places,  and 
tlio  lieutenant  cdonel  will  proui|>tly  rectify theirpositioiis. 

4'j;i.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  tbo  colom! 
should  wish  to  move  forward,  without  lialting,  ho  will 
command  : 

1.  li]/  companies,  IJl  wheeJ.^  2.  Mabcii  (or  douUe  quick— 

MA.BC1I).  , 

404.  At  the  command  iinrc/i.  bristly  repeated  by  fhn 
captains,  each  cfimi>Hny  will  whifl  to  th"  left  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  as  prescribed  iu  the  srhofil  of  the  company  Ko. 
2f;l ;  the  left  guides  will  stop  back  into  tlio  r;tnk  of  lilo 
closers  before  tho  wheel  is  complotcd,  and  when  tho  right 
of  the  a.mpaniea  shall  arri\o  near  tho  line,  iho  colonel 
will  command  : 

3.  Furtcard.     4.  Uaucii.     0.  GiMc  centre. 

4(]0.  At  tho  fourth  r.omninnd,  given  at  thu  instant  tho 
wheel  is  couipl  tttil,  tho  ci  nipauies  will  march  dir-ctly  to 
tho  front.  At  the  liUh  eoniuiHnd,  the  cidor  and  tho  i;on- 
eral  guides  will  move  rapiilly  six  paces  to  tho  front.  Tho 
colonel  will  asHure  the  direction  of  the  color  ;  the  cap- 
tains of  companies  and  tho  moii  will,  at  once,  oonform 
themselves  to  tho  pn'ociides  of  tho  march  in  line  of 
»)af  Ir,  to  l>e  hereinafter  indicated,  No.  687  aii'l  th  )  lollow- 
Ing. 

40f,.  Tr.e  same  principles  aro  appVicablo  to  a  column 
loft  in  front  '■  .     ' 

By  inversion  lo  tint  rigU  {or  U^  iido  line  o/  halllc.    , 

407.  When  a  roluiiin,  right  in  front,  shall  be  under  th* 
iietesHity  of  forming  iisolf  into  lino  faced  to  tho  reverse 
llauk,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  oxecut«i  'his  fora;a- 
tion  by  the  shortest  movcmout,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  lij    iavtrsion,   riylU   into  line,   ivJicd,      I.TldtlnIln 
f/ui'k  riijIU.  ,,  I 

408  At  the  first  command,  tho  llouteiiailt  colonH  wii^ 
placrt'liinK-olf  in  front,  and  facing  to  the  rlgtlt  piilde  of 
the  leading  su'id  vihlon  ;  at  tho  nncond  cornmrtntf,  ho'will 
r-ctify,  as  promptly  a4  possil  le,  llio  din^ctSon  of  tho  right 
guides  of  the  column  ;  th"  captain  fif  tho  old  ciinipany, 
if  there  bu  one,  and  t'p  coltiiuu  be  by  division,  will 
promptly  bring  tho  rlglit  of  his  company  ou'the  direo- 
tiou,  and  at  company  distance  from  I  lie  division  next  in 
front:  the  left  guide  of  the  leadinj:  H^l.-iivi.^ioti  will  place 
himself  ou  the  direction  of  tho  right  ;;nidfs,  and  will  I* 
assured  in  his  position  by  tho  licul.  imut,  .1  ,  ,!  t  v.Mrl. 
being  executed,  tho  coleael  will  comman  ' 

3.  JI\RCH  (or  double  quid— 'hi A i.  ■■). 

409.  At  this,  the  front  rank  man  of  each  anbdiviJioi:  will 
face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  tho  left 


1"  •          n  will  form  itself  to  tho 

I  I.:  to  tho  principles  prr. 

»■  _                -^1   tho    colonel    will    coin- 
niuud : 

(7iiWc«— PcFTS. 

410.  Tf  tho  column  Ih>  with  the  loft  iu  front,  it  will  form 
Itself,  by  Inversion,  to  the  lett  into  line,  according  to  the 
sanio  principleg. 

411.  Ifthecolond  shouUl  wiiih  file  battalion,  when 
formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  bo  moved  forward,  tho  move- 
ment will  be  execute<I  by  tho  rommands,  and  according 
to  tho  principles  indicated  in  No.  403  ;  alwa.vs  preceding 
tho  couunand.  hy  eomjpatiica  n'y/U  (or  hjl)  iihetl,  by  the 
comiuauil,  hy  inicreiuii. 

.•^re.-c*t!ee  Fortnatimu. 

412.  L'ndor  the  denomination  of  successive  formatiorfl 
are  included  all  thos>' formations  where  the  several  sub- 
divisions of  a  column  arrive  one  after  another  on  tho  line 
of  battle  ;  such  aro  formations  on  tlio  right,  or  loft,  for- 
ward and  ficed  to  the  rear  into  line  of  biitt'o,  as  well  as 
deployments  of  ccdnmns  in  mass. 

413.  The  successive  f.jrmatiou8  which  may  bo  ordered  « 
when  the  column  is  marching,  and  is  to  continue  march- 
ing,   will  he  executed  by  a  coinbinrit!"ii  <f  the   two  gaits, 
qnick  and  tlvublt  quiok  lime. 

2(1.    Column  at  full  dialiwce,  on  the  riijld  (or  on  Ote  7<^),  t«/o 
li»K!  o/baltte. 

414.  A  column  hy  company,  at  full  disfa'^ce  and  right  in 
front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into  lino  of  battle, 
tho  colonel  will  indicate  to  tin  lieutenant  colonel  n  littlo 
in  advance,  the  point  of  <';);>ti/,  or  reat.  f«r  the  right,  ns 
will  as  the  point  of  direction  to  tho  left;  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  hastou  with  two  markers,  and  extalilish  them 
in  the  following  manner  on  tho  direction  indicated. 

415.  The  lirst  marker  will  be  phiced  at  tho  point  of 
n))jmi  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  hndingconnpany ; 
tho  second  will  indicate  tho  point  where  one  of  tho  three 
left  files  of  the  Bane'  C(,nipaiiy  will  rest  when  inline  ;  they 
will  bo  placed  so  us  to  proseut  the  right  shouldsr  to  the 
battalion  when  formed. 

•lie.  Thcso  dispositions  being  umde,  the  coloiu-1  will 
cuiuniaud  : 

1.  On  the  ri'jUl,  iiUv  line.     2.  Hatltiliou,  gtiUlt  ridld. 

417.  At  tho  second  couimainl,  the  right  will  Vecomc  the 
directing  flank,  and  the  touoli  of  tlio  elbow  will  be  to  that 
side;  the  right  guide  of  the  leai'jng  company  will  march 
straight  forward  until  up  with  the  turning  point,  and  each 
following  guide  will  ;aurch  In  tho  trace  of  tho  one  im- 
mediately pieceilii;g. 

418.  Tho  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with  tho  first 
marker,  its  capUiin  will  ;<  uiniiiain!  :  1.  Iliijhl  turn,  and 
when  tho  company  is  pncisoly  up  with  this  markur,  he 
will  add  :   2.  J^Uncii. 

410  At  the  command  ntarc7(,  tho  company  will  turn  to 
the  rif;ht  ;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to 
brine  the  man  n"xt  to  him  opposite  to  the  right  marker, 
and  when  at  throe  puces  from  him,  tho  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  First  company;   2.  Halt. 

42 >.  At  the  second  command,  tho  comiiany  will  halt; 
the  file",  not  yet  inline,  will  form  promptly  ;  t'>e  left 
guide  wi  1  retire  as  a  fileclosar  ;  and  tho  captain  will  then 
command : 

3.  Jfi(/7(1— DBP.3F. 

421.  At  this  command,  tho  company  will  align  itself; 
ill  J  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to  Iho  twomar- 
1-.  rs,  willesoh  lightly  rest  his  breast  iigainst  the  right 
:irni  of  his  in«rker;  tho  captaia,  passing  to  tho  right  of 
tho  front  rank,  will  dkeot  the  nligninent  of  thcfe  two 
men.  These  ruUt  are  gcnvral  for  all  succcmive  forma- 
tions. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 


59 


422.  The  socond  company  will  contiune  to  mnrch  i 
HtraigUt  forward  :  when  arriyed  opposite  to  tlip  left  flank  i 
of  tho  procciliug  company,  it  will  turn  to  the  riitht,  and 
1*0  formed  on  the  line  of  buttle,  as  has  j':Bt  l>c-fn  pro-  j 
scribed;  the  right  guide  will  direct  liiniseli  bo  hs  to  come  i 
upon  that  line  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  1.  fc  of  the  I 
liret  compiny.  | 

423.  At  tlio  distance  of  thrpo  pacos  from  the  line  of  , 
battle,  the  company  will  be  halted   by  its  captain,  who 
will  place  himself  briskly  by  (lie  side  of  the  nitn  on   the  | 
l"ft  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  himself  correctly 
on  its  front  rank.  | 

424.  The  left  guide  will,  at  tbo  snrac  time,  place  himself 
before  one  of  the  three  left  filo<  oi  his  companjrv  and, 
facing  to  the  right,  ho  will  p'aco  himself  accurately  on  the 
direction  of  the  two  markers  of  tlio  procoding  company. 

125.  Tlio  captain  will  tli'jn  comwond  : 

night— Danaa. 

4..'G.  At  thiscommand,  the  second  company  will  dress 
forward  on  th-*  line ;  the  c.iptain  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  the  front  rank  iiian  who  his  rested  his  breast  ag  iin.st 
the  lott  ;ruide  of  the  company. 

427.  Tlio  following  companies  will  th'js  come  successive- 
iy  t"  fiiriii  lliomselves  on  thu  line  of  battle,  each  confjrni- 
iii;:  il.selt  10  what  has  just  been  prescribed  fortlieono  next 
to  the  right;  and  when  they  sljall  all  bo  catablistaed,  the 
colonel  will  command: 

GuiJta— Posts, 

428.  At  this  comtnand,  the  guides  will  take  their  places 
in  the  lino  of  battl"!,  and  the  marhcrs  placed  before  the 
right  company  will  retire. 

429.  If  tile  c  dumn  be  marching  in  inick  tinic,  and  the 
rolouol  should  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  bo  executed 
in  dnuMe  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  command:  Dmibh 
tjiiich—J^AHni.  At  the  command  marcli.  all  tho-  co'iipa- 
nie«  will  take  (ho  double  quick  step,  and  tho  movemont 
will  boexocut'  d  as  prescribed,  No.  417,  and  following. 

4oO.  Tho  culoatl  will  follow  up  the  formatioi!,  pi^s- 
%iiig  along  tho  front,  and  fcoing  alwajs  oppo.-iite  to  tho 
lompany  about  to  turn:  it  is  thus  that  ho  will  bo  tho 
bettor  able  to  see  and  to  correct  tho  error  that  would  re- 
sult from  a  command  given  too  so?n  or  too  late  to  the 
precodine  company. 

iZ\.  The  li'iufonant  colonel  will,  with  fho  greatest 
care,  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides  ;  to  this  end,  the 
instant  that  tho  markers  are  established  for  fho  leading 
company,  ho  will  move  a  little  beyond  the  point  at 
which  tho  left  of  tho  next  company  will  rest,  establish 
himself  correctly  on  t"o  prolongation  of  the  two  markers, 
and  assure  tho  guide  of  tho  second  company  on  this  di- 
rection; this  guide,  bein?  ansnred,  tho  liontenaut  colonel 
will  placo  himself  farther  to  tho  rear,  in  order  to  assure, 
in  like  manner,  the  guide  of  the  third  company,  and  so 
on,  successivelj'.  to  the  left  of  the  battalion.  In  assuring 
iho  gin'des  in  their  positions  on  the  line  of  battle,  he 
will  tako  care  to  let  them  first  pii«co  themselves,  and 
confine  himself  to  rectify  their  positions  if  they  do  not 
cover  accurately,  and  at  the  proper  distance,  the  prece- 
ding (fnides  or  markers.  This  rule  is  general,  for  all  sue- 
ccuive  fonnalinns. 

4.'}2.  A  column,  left  In  front,  will  form  itself  en  the 
left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles; 
the  captains  will  go  to  the  loft  of  their  n'spcctive  com- 
p  mio*  to  align  tliom,  and  shift  afterwards  to  thoir  proper 
flanks,  as  prescribed  No.  400. 

Jkmarkt  on  tlie  fonnation  on  the  right,  or  I. ft,  into  lint  o/ 
UMc. 

4'33.  In  order  that  thi?  movement  may  bo  executed 
with  regularity.  It  is  nccresary  t<>  establish  the  line  of 
battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after  turning, 
may  have  at  least  ten  steps  to  take,  in  order  to  come 
upnn  that  lino. 

4'').  In  tho  first  exorcises,  (ho  lino  of  batlV'  w  ill  bo 
es'ablit^hod  on  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the  column  ; 
but,  when  tho  captains  and  guides  shall  comprehend  tho 
mechanism  of  tho  movsmcnt,  tho  colonel  will  .generally 


choose  oblique  directions,  in  order  to  habilnate  the  bat- 
taliou  to  form  itself  in  any  direction. 

4'!,").  When  thedirtction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms  a 
sensible  angle  with  tliat  of  the  march  of  the  coluuin.  tho 
colonel,  before  beginning  tho  movement,  will  give  the 
head  of  tlie.column  a  new  direction  pirallol  to  (hat  line; 
to  this  end,  be  will  indicate  to  the  guide  of  the  bading 
company  a  po'nt  in  advance,  on  which  tfus  guide  will  ini- 
i:iediately  direct  himself,  and  the  company  will  conform 
itself  to  tho  direction  of  its  guide,  at  the  command,  or  un 
a  mero  caution,  of  the  captain,  according  as  the  change  of 
direction  may  require  ;  each  following  company  will  make 
tho  same  movement,  on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  suc- 
cessively arriva.  ]!y  thi»  means  the  guides  of  all  the 
ci'mpanies  iu  the  column  will  have,  after  turning,  n(arly 
the  same  nnmboi  of  paces  to  tako  in  order  to  come  upon 
the  lino  of  battle. 

4"i;.  Every  captain  will  alwa^  s  observe,  in  placing  him- 
self on  that  line,  not  to  give  the  command  dress,  until  af- 
tr  the  guide  of  his  company  shall  have  been  assured  ou 
the  diroetion  by  tho  lieutenant  colonel.  Tltii  rule  it  gene- 
ral fur  all  successive  formation-t. 

4:-7.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  eompary  to  tupport 
aruis,  t'le  iastaut  that  the  captain,  who  follows  him.  sha'l 
have  commanded //on<.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  sue- 
cestlve  formations. 

iS>i.  AVh>n,  iu  tho  esortition  of  this  movemotit,  tho 
colonel  shall  wish  to  commence  firing,  he  will  give  the 
'  rder  tc  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  company  is  tho 
first  in  line  of  battle;  this  captain  will  immediately  placo 
himself  behind  the  centre  of  bis  company,  and  as  soon  as 
thajiext  company  shall  have  commanded /)oh<,  ho  wi'l 
comm  nee  tho  fire  by  filo,  by  the  commnnds  prescribed, 
fthoo!  cf  the,  conipaiiv.  At  the  roram:ind  Jire  hit  file,  the 
marker  at  tho  outer  filo  of  this  first  company  will  retire, 
.Tud  tho  other  will  place  hiroaclf  against  the  nearest  man 
of  the  next  company.  The  captain  of  the  latter  will  com- 
mence firing  as  soon  as  the  capt;iin  of  the  third  company, 
in  line  shall  have  commtcded  front ;  llie  marker  befi>re 
tho  nearest  filo  of  tho  sicoud  company,  in  line,  will  now 
retire,  and  the  guide  before  tho  ot>posite  flank  will  placo 
himself  before  tho  nearest  file  of  tho  third  company  iu 
lino,  atid  so  on,  iu  eoutiatititiou,  to  (he  last  company  on 
the  left  or  right  of  the  battalion,  according  as  the  forma- 
tion may  have  commenc«d  with  tho  r'ght  or  left  in  front. 

439.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same  princi- 
ples will  be  observed  for  the  execution  of  the  fire  by  file. 
This  fire  will  always  bo  executed  by  thocommand  of  each 
captain  of  company. 

3d,,  Colmnu  at  full  (listaHce,foric<ird  into  line  of  battle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  ftill  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  fjrm  it  forward  into  line,  ho  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  411  and  41.j,  and  then  command  : 

• 
1.  Foricnrd  info  line.    2.  Li/  company,   left  half  wlieel.    3. 
ilAJBCn  (or  douWo  igiiicA-— Mahch.) 

441.  At  tho  first  command,  the  captain  of  tho  leading 
company  will  add — f/»iVe  riglU,  put  (he  company  in  march, 
halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  -and  align  it  against 
tho  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  weirrh,  all  tho  other  companies 
will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivtts  ;  and,  at  the  instant 
the  colf.riel  shall  judge,  according  to  the  line  of  battle, 
that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will 
command : 

4.  Foricard.    5.  Mabcii.    C.  Guide  right. 

443.  At  tho  fifth  comn;and,  tho  companies,  ceasing  to 
wheel,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  and  at  tho  sixth, 
tho  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right.  The  right 
guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is  nearest  to  the  line 
of  battle,  will  march  straight  forward;  each  succeeding 
right  guide  will  follow  tho  filo  immediately  before  him  at 
the  cessation  of  the  wheel. 

444.  The  secimd  company  having  arrived  opposite  to 
the  left  filo  of  (lie  first,  its  captains  will  cause  it  to  turn 

o  tho  rightj  in  order  to  approach  the  lino  of  battle;  and 


60 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 


wboo  iU  riicht  cuiilo   Rliall  \>c  nt  tlir(>o  \iaco%   from  that 
liue,  tke  captain  Mill  rommaud  : 

1.  .<<-fo»</  conijiany.    2.  Halt. 

44'>.  At  Iho  8Ccond  coinmaDil,  tlip  company  will  halt; 
the  fiU-  not  ypt  in  Hha  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it 
promptly,  llm  l<-ft  piido  will  placo  himself  fn  the  lino  of 
(•attio,  »•>  an  to  Ik'  oppoaite  to  one  nf  the  tlirrK)  files  ou  the 
left  of  the  r  iinpaiiy  ;  and,  as  eoon  aa  he  in  aHNurod  on  the 
direction  by  the  lieutenant  cj^donel,  the  rni^tain,  havinx 
placed  liliDdeU  accnrately  on  the  line  of  liattle,  will  com- 
niand : 

Jiight—1>RK9B. 

HC.  At  thn  InNlnnt  that  the  unido  of  Hm  fecund  com- 
pany bepins  t.i  turn  to  Ihe  riicht,  the  piiide  of  the  third, 
ceaslDR  to  follow  the  file  immedintidy  before  him,  will 
march  Htraight  forward  ;  and,  when  he  shall  arrive  oppo- 
Bite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  hiH  cuptaiu  will  ciiuqe  the 
company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the 
line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  and 
n'ign  it  by  the  right,  aa  proscrib  d  for  the  second  com- 
pany. 

447.  Kach  fidlowing  company  will  execute  what  has 
just  been  prepcribed  for  the  third,  as  the  preceding  com- 
pany nhall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  ni)proach  the 
linn  of  battle. 

H'.  The  formation  ond^'i,  tbo colonel  will  command  : 

Cuulcx—VosTS 

440  The  colonel  and  lientenant-colonel  will  observe  in 
this  formation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them  on  the  right 
into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  forward 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inver"e  meant. 

461.  When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance,  right 
in  front,  and  in  march,  fhall  arrive  behin<l  the  right  of 
the  line  ou  which  it  is  to  form  into  battle,  t)io  colonel  and 
lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  thimselTus  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

4o2.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  com- 
pany distnnc  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.    t'ortrard  into   line.     2.    Ity  cnmpany,    left  half  tcJiccl. 
a.  Marcu  (or  iloubtg  quick — March). 

463.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  fitet  com- 
pany will  command,  Cnidr  right,  and  caution  it  to  march  di- 
rectly to  the  front,  the  captains  of  the  othor  compauioa 
will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  left. 

4.14.  At  the  command  viarrh,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
captains,  the  first  company  will  coiitlniic  to  march  to  the 
front,  taking  the  toucli  of  elbows  to  the  right.  Its  chief 
will  lislt  at  three  paces  Irom  the  marker.^,  and  al"n  it  by 
the  right.  The  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  lift  on 
fixed  pivots,  and  at  tlio  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge 
that  they  have  wheeled  sufiiciently,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Fonrard.     6.  March.     C.   CuiderijhI. 

456.  At  the  fifth  command,  thfi  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  mov6  forward.  At  the  sixth,  they  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  Tlie  movement  will  bo 
executed  as  previously  explained. 

45G.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column  for- 
ward into  line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this  order, 
he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  eHtablishod;  the  uiove- 
nient  will  be  oxecutod  in  dould'- i]ui'-k  time,  by  the  same 
commands  and  means,  but  with  the  lullowiug  modifica- 
tions. 

457.  At  the  firht  commnnd,  the  captain  of  the  first  com- 
pany will  add  ijnicli  limn  after  the  command  guide  right. 
At  the  second  command,  tho  first  company  will  continue 
to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take  the  toucli  of  elbows 
to  the  ri<ht  ;  its  chief  will  immediately  place  himself  on 
its  rij;ht,  and  to  assure  the  march,  will  take  points  of  di- 
rection to  tlie  front.    Tho  captain  of  the  second  company 


will  c.inso  hii  company  to  take  the  came  gait  m  toon  as  it 
shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  alio  move  to 
the  right  of  Ills  company  ;  the  captains  of  Ihe  third  and 
fourth  companies  will  execute  8ucce»sively  what  has  juft 
I'Cen  prescribe<l  for  tho  ."econd.  The  coiupani<-s  will  pre- 
serve the  touch  of  elbows  to  Ihoright,  until  tla«camm:kud, 

tjuidf  Cfutre. 

458.  When  the  color  company  shall  have  entered  the 
line,  tho  colonel  will  command,  guide  ctnlrc.  At  this 
command,  tho  rolor-l>earer  and  tho  right  general  gHidc 
will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  lino.  The 
colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the  rolor-bearer.  Tho 
lieutenant  colonel  and  the  right  companies  will  imme- 
diatoly  conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of  Ihe  march 
in  line  of  battle.  The  left  coinpaniea  and  the  left  general 
guide,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the 
same  principles.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double 
iiuick  time,  when  the  last  rnnipany  shall  have  arriveil  on 
the  line,  tho  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to  be 
resumed. 

459.  It  Is  not  necessary  that  tho  movement  be  entirely 
completed,  before  halting  the  battalion.  As  soon  as  tho 
part  of  the  battalion  already  formed  shall  have  arrived  on 
the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battaliou  ;  the 
companies  not  in  line  will  each  complete  the  movement 


Ii<nnarht  on  thr  fornuUion  foricard,  into  line  n/ balUe. 

400.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on  tho  di- 
rection the  conipanies  have  at  tlie  moment  the  colonel 
commands,  J'^inmrd — March.  Tho  ctdonel  will  judge 
nicely  the  point  of  time  for  giving  this  command,  observ- 
ing that,  if  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  form  with 
that  of  the  eolumu  a  right,  or  nearly  a  right  angle,  the 
companies  ouglit  to  wheel  about  the  eiehth  of  the  circle, 
and  tliat  the  more  acuto  auglo  formed  by  the  two  direc- 
tions, so  much  the  more  the  companies  ought  to  wheel  be- 
fore marching  straight  forward. 

4CI.  It  is  important  that  each  company  in  marching 
towards  the  lino  of  battle  slioiild|turn  exactly  opposite  the 
point  where  its  captJiiu  ought  to  place  himeelf  ou  that 
lino;  if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it  will  tiiid  itaelf  masked, 
in  part,  by  that  which  preceded  it  on  the  lino  of  battle, 
and  be  obliged  to  unmask  itself  by  tho  oblique  stop  ;  if  it 
turn  too  late,  it  will  leave  an  interval  between  itself  and 
the  preceding  company  to  l>e  regained  in  like  manner. 
In  eithor  caco,  tho  next  company  will  bo  led  into  error, 
and  the  fault  propagated  to  tho  opposite  flunk  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

4f>2.  Tho  guide  of  each  company  ought  so  to  regulate 
hiiiuelf  in  turnieg,  as  to  bring  his  company  to  the  halt- 
ing point  parallolly  with  the  lino  of  battlo.i( 

•103.  If  the  niiglo  formed  by  tho  lino  of  battle  and  tho 
primitive  dirocti<m  of  the  column  be  so  acute,  that  tho 
cimipanics,  on  arriving  opposite  to  their  respective  places 
ou  the  line  of  battle,  find  ibemsclves  nearly  parallel  to  it, 
tho  captains  will  not  givo  tho  command,  right  (or  left) 
turn,  but  ouch  lialt  his  company,  plico  Uimaulf  ou  tho 
line,  and  command  : 

night  (or  ?</0— Dress. 

404.  If,  on  the  contrary,  tho  angle  formed  by  tho  lino 
of  battle  and  tho  i)riraitivo  direction  of  tho  column  bo 
mnch  greater  than  a  right  angle,  the  f  irmation  should 
ho  executed,  not  by  tho  movement  forward  into  line  of 
battle,  but  by  that  cf  on  the  right  (or  irfl)  into  line  of  battle, 
and  according  to  tho  principles  prescribed  for  this  for- 
mation. 

405.  If  a  company  encounter  an  obstacle  gnfficient  to 
prevent  it  from  marching  by  tho  front,  it  will  right  (or 
l(7'i!)/acc  in  marching,  by  tho  commands  and  means  indi- 
cated in  tho  school  of  tho  company,  Nos.  314  aud  315. 
The  guide  will  coiitiiiuo  to  follow  tho  same  file  bohind 
which  ho  was  marching,  and  will  maintain  exactly  tho 
same  distance  from  tho  company  Immediately  preceding 
his  own.  Tho  obstacle  being  passed,  the  company  will 
bo  formed  Into  lino  by  tho  command  of  its  captain. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAET  IV. 


Ilk.  Column  (U  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  1 
hattle. 

406.  A  column  being  by  oompany,  nt  full  tlistanco,  i 
ripht  in  front,  and  at  a  Iialt,  wlieu  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  form  it  into  lino  fucod  to  the  roar,  ho  and  the  lieu- 
tenant coloBcl  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No3.  414  and  415,  and  the  colonel  will  then  com- 
mand : 

1.    Into  tine,  fnccd  to  the  rem:     2.  Ballntion  ri'jM—fACF.. 
is.  March  (or  double  i/hicA-— March). 

407.  At  tlio  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  pit  it  in 
march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  lelt,  and  direct 
its  march  towards  the  line  of  battle  which  it  will  pass 
in  rear  of  the  left  marker  ;  the  first  file  having  passea 
three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  company  will  wheel  again 
by  file  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  itself  in  rear  of  the 
two  markers  ;  being  in  this  position,  its  captain  will  hilt 
it,  face  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  tUo 
markers. 

408.  At  the  second  command,  all  tUo  other  companies 
will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  placing  himself  by  the 
fiileof  his  right  guide. 

4h9.  At  the  command  march,  the  ponipaniea  will  put 
themselves  in  movement ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second, 
who  is  nearest  to  the  lino  of  battle,  will  hasten  iu 
advance  to  maik  that  line;  ho  will  place  hiuuolf  on  it  as 
prescribed  above  for  successive  formation?,  and  thus  in- 
dicate to  hii  captain  the  poiut  at  which  ho  ought  to  pass 
the  line  of  battle,  by  three  psccf,  in  otder  to  wheel  by  filo 
to  the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his  company  paralloUy  to 
that  line. 

470.  As  sson  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall  have 
arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one  already  on 
the  line  of  tattle,  i'  8  captain  will  command  : 

1.    Second   comjmwj.    2.    Halt.      3.    Tront.    4.    Eljht  - 
Dress. 

171.  The  first  comman<l  will  be  given  when  the  company 
shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach  the  halting 
point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  fnco  ti  the  front, 
and  if  thi^re  be  openings  between  the  liU-s,  the  lattfr  will 
promptly  close  to  the  right;  the  captain  will  immediately 
jdace  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  kfc  of  the 
preceding  comp  iny,  and  align  himself  on   its  front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  boexecutod  us  prescribed. 
No.  4-20. 

475.  The  felloAing  ccmpaBies  will  bo  conducted  and 
established  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for  the 
second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one  that  precedes  it ; 
the  left  guides  will  detach  theniflelves  iu  time  to  precede 
their  respective  companies  on  the  lino  by  twelve  or  fifteen 
paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  when  iu  lino.  If  tlio 
movement  I'O  executed  in  double  quick  time,  the  moment 
it  is  commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves 
at  the  came  time  from  the  column,  and  will  move  nt  a  run, 
to  establish  themselves  on  a  lino  of  battle. 

470.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command ; 

Guides — Posts. 

477.  The  colonel  and  litutenant  co'onel,  in  this  forma- 
tion, will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for  him  in  that 
of  on  the  riyhl,  into  line  of  \>atXla. 

47S.  A  column,  left  iu  trout,  will  form  itself  faced  to 
the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  princi- 
pl-s  and  by  inverse  means. 

479.  If  the  oolnnin  be  in  march,  and  should  arrive  iu 
fron'  of  the  right  of  the  lino  on  which  it  is  lo  form  inio 
battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant  colouul  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed,  Kos.  414  an^l  415. 

480.  Wlieu  the  head  of  the  column  shall  bo  nearly  at 
company  distance  from  the  two  maricrd  establibhod  on 
the  Hue,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


61 

1.  Into  Vine,  faced  to  the  rear.      2.  Battalion,  bi/  the  rigJiC"] 
flanJc.    3.  Mabch  (ordow&fe  giact— MABcn).        ' 

4S1.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  Qlink. 

482.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  tho 
captains  of  c<;mranios,  all  tho  companies  will  face  lo  the 
right  ;  the  first  company  will  then  wbcel  by  file  to  the 
left,  and  bo  directed  by  its  captain.'a  little  to  tho  rear  of  the 
Uft  marker  ;  then  pass  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  and 
wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left  ;  having  arrived  on  tho 
line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it  by 
the  right.  The  remaining  part  of  tho  movement  will  1  e 
exi  eutod  as  hrretoforo  explained. 

483.  Tho  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a  col- 
umn, left  in  front. 

484.  As  the  companies  approach  tho  lino  of  battle,  it  is 
necessary  that  their  captains  should  so  direct  the  march 
as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  iu  roar  of  their  respective 
guides,  who  are   faced   to   tho   basis  of  tho   formation  ; 

•hence  each  guide  ought  to  detaoh  himself  in  time  to  find 
himself  correctly  estiblished  on  tho  direction  before  Lis 
company  shall  come  up  with  him. 

ABTiciE  Third. 
I'or motion  in  lino  of  battle  by  two  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  anfl  at  a 
halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  tho  lino  of  battle,  and  the 
colonel  should  think  proper  to  form  line  of  battle  before 
all  tho  companies  enter  the  now  direction,  the  formaticn 
will  be  executed  in  tho  following  manner  : 

480.  It  will  bo  supposed  timt  the  column  has  arrived 
behind  tiro  line  of  battle,  and  that  fl\o  companiea  have 
entered  the  now  direction.  Tho  colonel  having  assured 
the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies  on  the  direction, 
will  command : 

I,  Left  into  line,  wheel.    2.  Three  rear  conqiaaics,  forward 
into  line. 

4S7.  At  the  second  command,  tho  chief  of  each  of  the 
rear  companies  will  command  :  By  company,  left  half 
wheel;  and  tho  colonel  will  add  : 

,         3.  March  (or  double  quick— 1S.K9.qv.). 

488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  live 
companies  will  form  themselves  to  the.  left,  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, and  the  thren  last,  forward,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the 
means  prescribed  for  these  respective  formations  ;  each 
captain  of  the  three  roar  companies  will,  when  his  com-' 
pauy  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  command  : 

1.  Forward.    2.  Marcii.    3.  Guide  ri'jhl. 

489.  If  the  column  bo  iu  march,  llje  colonel  will  can. 
mand : 

1.  To  the  left,  and  formird  inlo  line.      '2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those  com- 
panies which  have  not  entered  on  tho  new  direction,  will 
command:  Ihj  company, Ufl  half  irh'jil.  At  the  commaud 
march,  briskly  rcpeateil,  the  fiist  five  c:)mpanies  will  form 
left  into  line,  and  tho  last  three  forward  into  line,  as  pre- 
siiribfd  for  these  respective  formations.  Those  captains 
who  fjrm  their  companies  forward  into  line  will  conform 
to  what  is  proscribed,  No.  4SS. 

491.  If  tho  colonel  should  wi.sh,  in  forming  the  battalion 
into  lite,  to  march  ii;  immediately  forward,  hs  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  By  company  lo  the  hfl,  and  forward  inlo  line.    2.  Maucu 

492.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  whose  com- 
pany is  not  jet  in  the  new  direction,  will  command:  1. 
Jly  company,  Irft  half  wheel.  2.  Pwble  quick.  At  the 
(.'oinnibud  march,  briskly  repeated  by  tho  captains,  tho 
companies  not  iu  the  new  direction  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed  above  for  forming   forward    into    line   while 


SCHOOL  (J)F  TUB  BATTALION— PART  IV. 


mHrthinp;  pach  or  the  otiior  compaaicfi  will  whcvl  to  the 
loft  on  a  fnfd  piTot,  and  »hon  the  ri(;bt  of  tlifpo  compa- 
nies Hball  arrive  ou  tbo  lino,  tho  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.    4.  Mabch.    6.     GnicU  centre.     ^ 

493.  Tho  fifth  command  will  l.o  pivcn  wlion  tho  color- 
bearer  arrives  on  the  lino,  if  not  alreHdv  there. 

494.  If  tho  hattalion  be  marching  in  di)iiblo  quick  time, 
theculnnel  will  cause  quiclc  time  to  bo  talieu  b^foro  com- 
mencinc  the  moTement. 

495.  If.  instead  of  arriviuK  behind,  tho  column  shoald 
arrive  bef  ire  tho  lino  of  bittle,  tlio  colouol  w  ill  command  : 

1.  Le/l  into  line,  irhctl.     2.  Three  rMr  companies  into  line, 
faced  to  Uu  rear. 

496.  At  the  second  commanr^,  the  captain  of  each  of  tho 
Oiree  rear  cnmpaniea  will  command  :  1.  Such  (yimpaiiy  ; 
li.  /fiy*/— Face.    Tho  colonel  will  then  add  : 

3.  MABcn  (or  double  7i/ict— Mabcb). 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  tho  first  five 
companies  will  form  themiselveB  l'>  the  left,  into  line  of 
battle,  and  the  three  last/act  J  to  Vtc  rear,  into  li/ieo/lnilttc, 
by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  rospoctivo  formations. 

498.  If  the  column  bo  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    To  tlic  left,    nnil  into  /i'm-'   facal  to    the  rear.     S.MAItfc'I! 
(or  double  <juick — Mabch). 

499.  The  movement  will  bo  czecatcd  as  proscribod  Nos. 
391,  480,  and  followiuK. 

5<Xt.  These  several  movem''nt8  in  a  colinnn,  left  in  front, 
will  be  executed  according  to  tbo  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

Abticle  Fovrth. 

Different  mode*  of  jxusing  from  column  at  half  distance, 
into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  tho  left  (or  light)  ) 

2.  On  the  right  (or  lefi) 
;j.  Forward,  by  deployment, 
4.  Faced  to  tho  rear, 

^sl.  Ck)lumn  at  half  disttnce,  to  the  left  (or  rirjht)  into  line 
of  halllri 

TiOI.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  itself  to 
llin  left  (or  ri^ht)  into  lino  of  battle,  tho  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the  mewiin  prescribed, 
.\rticle  IX.,  Part  Third,  of  this  school ;  which  Iieinj;  exe- 
cuted, he  will  form  the  column  into  line  of  buttle,  m  bus 
been  indicated,  No.  '/'M),  and  followin;;. 

602.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be  in 
march,  audit  is  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  Une  of 
battle,  the  colonul  will  command  :  ' 

1.  liy  the  rear  of  colnmn  left  (or  right)    into  line,  whee\ 
'1.  Mabch  (or  doMe  quick — Mabch). 

r03.  At  the  first  command,  the  ri^'it  ffenernl  guide  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  front,  and  jiliiru  himself  a  litilo  be- 
yond the  point  whore  the  bend  of  the  cohimn  will  rest, 
and  on  tho  prolont;iition  of  tic  Kuhles.  Tho  captain  of 
the  eighth  comjiany  will  comniaud  :  Left  info  lire,  whal; 
the  other  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  con- 
tinue to  march  to  the  front. 

504.  At  tho  command  march,  briskly  rej)Oiitod  by  tho 
captain  of  tho  eighth  company,  tho  guide  of  this  com- 
pany will  halt  (short,  and  the  company  will  wheel  to  tho 
left,  couforminn  to  tlie  principles  proscribud  lor  wheeling 
from  a  halt;  when  its  ri^^ht  shall  arrive  near  (ho  line, 
the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align  it,  by  the 
left.  The  other  captains  wiil  place  theniselTes  brinkly  on 
tho  flank  of  the  column;  when  thocaptain  of  the  seventh 
gees  there  is  snlliuientilistaQCo  between  his  company  and 
the  eighth  to  form  the  latter  into  line,  he  willconiiimiid  : 
Left  into  line,  jo/iccJ— MABCH ;    the   left  guidu   will    hull 


)■  'nto  lino  of  battle. 
] 


►  liort,  and  facing  to  tho  raar,  will  jdac*  bims'lf  on  tho 
lino;  the  company  will  wIkn?!  to  the  left,  tho  man  on  tho 
lea  of  the  front  rank  will  faco  to  the  left,  and  jilace  bin 
breast  against  the  b-lt  arm  of  the  guide ;  tho  captain  wiil 
halt  the  company  when  its  right  Khali  arrive  near  the 
lino,  a:;d  will  ftli^ru  ft  by  tho  If  ft.  Tho  other  conipitDlei 
■will  conform  snccosiivaly  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scrilH-d  for  tho  acvenlh. 

Mv').  Kich  captau  will  direct  tho  alignment  of  hia 
company  on  tlie  Uft  arm  in  thu  (rontrankof  thoconipauy 
next  on  bis  right. 

60r,.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  bo  watchful  that  the 
leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the  pr"longation  of 
the  lino  of  battle,  !\nd  directs  himself  on  the  right  goui>ral 
guide.  Tho  major,  placed  in  rear  of  the  left  guide  of  the 
eighth  company,  will,  as  soon  a^  tho  guide  of  tho  seTwiilh 
company  is  eslnblished  on  the  direction,  hasten  in  roar  of 
tho  guides  of  the  other  companies,  so  as  to  aseiire  each  of 
them  in  succcs-sion  on  tho  line. 

2(/.  Column  nt  half  di-slanre,  nii  the  ri<jht  (or   left)  into  lino 
of  Inittle. 

TiOT.  A  colnmn  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on  tho 
right  (or  left)  Into  Hue  of  battle,  as  i>rc'.scribed  for  a  col- 
umn at  full  (listaiicc. 

3(f.  Column  at  half  distance,  forward,  into  line  of  battle. 

508.  If  it  ho  wished  to  form  a  rnlTimn  at  lialfdistance, 
forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonol  will  first  cause  It  to 
close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on  tho  leading  c  iiipany. 

Alh.  Cohimn   nt  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rcnr,  into  line  of 
battle. 

r>09.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  bo  formed  Into  lino 
of  battle,  faced  to  tho  rear,  ns  prcpcribcd  (or  a  column  at 
full  distance. 


A  uTicLK  Fifth. 

Deployment  of  columns  elated  in  mass. 

510.  A  column  in  nuifs  may  be  farmed  into  Ifne  of 
battle  : 

1.  Faced  to  tho  front,  by   the  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to  the   tear,   by   the  countermarch    and   tho 

deployment. 
.0.  Faced   to   tlu'  right   and    faced  to    tho  loft,  by  a 
change    of  direction    by   the    think,    and    tho 
doploymeut. 

CIl.  When  n  column  in  ninsi,  by  division,  arrives  be- 
liind  tho  line  on  which  It  is  inionded  to  deploy  it,  tho 
colonel  will  indicate,  in  advance,  to  tho  lieutenant  col  . 
onel,  the  direction  of  the  Hue  of  battle,  as  well  us  tho 
jioint  on  which  ho  may  wish  to  direct  tlie  column.  Tho 
lieutenant  colonel  will  iiniucdiately  detntch  bimselfwitli 
two  markers,  and  esfabliih  them  on  that  line,  the  first 
at  the  point  indicated,  tlm  focoud  a  littlo  less  than  tho 
Iront  of  tt  divifcion  fioin  the  liist. 

.')I2.  Deployments  will  always  bo  giado  upon  lines  par- 
allel, and  linos  |)erpcndicular  to  tho  line  of  battle  ;  conse- 
quently, if  the  lieiid  of  tho  cjlumu  bo  near  the  line  of 
battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establishing  tho 
direct! m  of  tlio  column  perpendicularly  to  that  line,  if  it 
be  not  already  so,  by  one  ol  tho  jmans  indicited.  No.  211 
and  following,  or  No.  307  and  following-.  If  tho  column 
bo  in  march,  ho  will  80  direct  it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly 
behind  the  markers,  perpendicularly  to  tlio  lino  of  battle, 
and  halt  it  at  throe  paces  from  lliat  line. 

CA'A.  The  column,  right  iu  front,  being  halted,  it  is  sup- 
posed that  the  colonol  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  di- 
vision ;  ho  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to  go  to  n 
print  on  tho  line  of  battle  a  little  beyiuid  that  at  which 
the  left  of  tho  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed,  and 
place  himself  correctly  on  tho  prolongatiOH  of  tfio  mark- 
ors  cBtablished  bofuro  tho  first  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— rAET  IV. 


63 


614.  Theee  dispositions  beiDg  made,  the  colonel  \rill 
command  : 

1.  On  the  firsl  dU-Uion,   deploy  column.    2.  UaUalion,  left 
—Face. 

515.  At  tho  first  command,  Ihecliiefef  tlip first  division 
will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  tho  chiefs  of  tlio  three  other 
diTinioDS  will  remind  thorn  that  they  will  hare  to  face  to 
tho  left. 

510.  At  the  second  command,  the  tlireo  lapt  divisions 
will  face  to  tho  left ;  tho  chief  of  each  division  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  its  left  gaid",  and  the  junior  cap- 
tain by  the  side  of  tho  covi-rinj;  ierceant  of  the  left  com- 
pany, who  will  have  stepped  into  the  front  rank. 

517.  At  tho  same  commaml,  the  lientcniint  colonel  will 
place  a  third  marker  on  tho  alignment  of  the  two  first, 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  (f  tho  right  compa- 
ny, first  division,  and  then  place  hiniscvf  on  ilio  line  of 
battle  a  few  pnees  beyond  the  point  at  which  tho  left  of 
the  second  division  will  rest. 

618.  The  colonel  will  than  command  : 

3.  March  (or  donlU  jiiicJ.— Mabch.) 

519.  At  this  commond,  the  chief  of  tho  first  division 
will  go  to  its  right,  and  command  : 

/ifjW— Dkess. 

520.  At  this,  the  division  will  dross  np  Bgninst  the 
markers  ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  captain, 
will  each  al-gn  the  company  on  his  left,  and  then  com- 
mand : 

Fkont. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  pnt  them- 
selves in,  march  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  secopd  will  direct 
himself  parallelly  to  tho  line  of  battle  :  the  left  gnides  of 
the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  march  abreast  with 
the  guide  of  the  si  cond ;  the  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth 
each  preserving  the  prescribed  distance  between  himself 
and  the  guide  of  tho  division  which  preceded  his  own  in 
the  column. 

622.  The  chief  of  tho  second  division  will  not  follow  its 
niovomont;  he  will  see  it  file  bv  him,  and  wlieu  its  right 
shall  be  abreast  with  him,  ho  willcominand  : 

1.  Second  Division.    1   Halt.    'i.  Frost. 

523.  The  first  command  will  bo  given  when  tho  divi- 
eiou  shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to  march  ;  the 
.■second,  when  tho  right  guide  shall  bo  abieast  with  the 
chief  of  tho  division,  and  the  third  immediately  after  tho 
sernnd. 

524.  At  tho  second  command,  tho  division  will  halt;  at 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  bo  open- 
ings bo"  ween  tho  files,  the  chief  of  the  division  will  cause 
tham  to  be  pioinptly  cloBtd  to  tho  right;  the  left  guides 
of  both  companies  will  step  upon  the  line  of  baitlo,  face 
to  tho  right,  ncd  place  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the 
markers  establiBhed  before  the  first  division,  each  guide 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  compaiiy. 

&25.  Th-^  division  having  faced  to  tho  f'ont,  its  chief 
will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  lino  of  battle,  on  the 
left  of  the  first  ilivisioti;  and  when  ho  shall  see  the 
guides  assured  on  tho  direction,  he  will  command,  liiylit 
— Drrss.  At  this,  tho  divfbiou  will  be  aligned  by  the 
right.  In  the  manner  indicated  for  the  first. 

5211.  Tho  third  and  lonrth  divisions  will  continue  to 
march:  at  the  command  halt,  ^\\n  to  the  second,  the 
chief  of  tho  third  will  Imlt  in  his  own  person,  place  hira- 
solf  exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  tho  second,  after 
this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front  and  closed  its 
filed ;  he  will  uco  his  division  flio  past,  and  when  his  right 
guide  shall  be  abreast  with  hiui,  ho  will  commond : 

1.   Third  diviticn.     2.  H^LT.     3.   KnoMT. 

.'"■27.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its  chief 
will  pliice  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre,  and  com- 
mand : 


1.  Third  division  forward.    2.  Guide  right.    3.  MABCn. 

528.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  march  to- 
wards tho  lino  of  battle  ;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct 
himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of 
the  second  division,  and  when  the  division  is  at  three 
paces  from  tho  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will  halt  it  and 
al  gn  it  by  tho  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  tho  fourth  division  will  conform  him- 
self (and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth)  to  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

530.  The  deployment  ended,  the  eolonol  will  command: 

Guides— Posts. 

531.  At  this  command,  tho  guides  will  resume  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

502.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  tho  colonel  shall 
wirh  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without  halting 
tho  column,  ho  will  make  the  dispositions  indicated  Nos. 
512  and  513,  and  when  the  first  division  shall  have  ar- 
rived at  three  paces  from  the  line,  he  will  command  : 

( 
1.  O"  the  firsl  division,  deploy  column.    2.  TicUtalion  by  th» 
Itj't  Jlauk.    3.  Mabch  (or  double  quick— Mxuca.) 

533.  At  tho  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  cantion  it  to  halt,  and  will  command.  First 
division  ;  tho  other  chiefs  will  caution  their  divisions  to 
face  by  the  left  flank. 

534.  At  tho  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  tho 
chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  commfiiid,  Halt,  and  will  align  his  division  by  tho 
right  against  the  markers  ;  the  other  divisions  will  face 
to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to  the  left  of  their 
divisions.  The  second  division  will  conform  its  movo- 
B'.ents  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  522  and  following. 
The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  execute  what  is  pre- 
scribed No  .')20  and  following;  but  the  chief  of  each 
division  will  halt  in  his  own  person  at  the  command 
march  given  by  the  chief  of  the  division  which  precedes 
him,  and  when  the  right  of  his  division  arrives  abreast 
of  him,  he  will  command  : 

Such  division,  hy  the  ri'jJU  JlnnJ: — March. 

535.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  tho  position  of 
the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  431. 
The  major  will  follow  thq  movement  abreast  with  the 
fourth  division. 

5oG.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  dejdoy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the  mark- 
ers will  not  bo  posted  ;  tho  movement  will  be  executed 
by  tho  samo  commands  and  the  same  means  as  the  fore- 
going, but  v.ith  the  following  modifications  : 

537.  At  tho  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  command.  1  Guide  rif/IU.  2.  Quicklime.  At 
tho  command,  Double  quick — MAUciir  given  by  the  colonel, 
the  first  division  will  march  in  quick  time  and  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  tho  right ;  tho  captains  will  place 
themsalves  on  tho  right  of  their  respective  companies  ; 
tho  captain  on  tho  riglit  of  the  battalion  will  take  points 
on  the  groiffid  to  assure  the  direction  of  the  march.  The 
chief  of  the  socend  division  will  allow  his  division  to  filo 
past  him,  and  when  he  sees  it  right  abreast  of  liim,  he 
will  command.  1.  Second  diiisiun  by  the  right  jlank.  2. 
March.  3.  C'it</c  riV7/i{,.and  when  this  'division  shall  ar- 
rive on  the  alignment  of  the  lirst,  he  will  cause  it  to 
march  in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  deploy  according  to  the  «.ime  principles  as  tho  second. 

53S.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and  color- 
bearer  will  confirm  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 

•lis. 

i.. 539.  The  colonel  will  see,  pending  the  movement,  that 
the  principles  just  prescribed  are  duly  observed,  and  par- 
ticularly that  the  divisions,  in  deploying,  be  not  halted 
too  soon  ncr  toa  late.  He  will  correct  promptly  and 
quickly  the  faults  tlixt  may  be  committed,  and  prevent 
their  propagation.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  deployments, 
bio.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  deploy- 
ing it  on  the  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on 
the  rearmost  division,  ho  will  cause  tho  dispositions  to 


C4 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  IV. 


be  inilicaU'd  No.  611  adJ  fullowiug;  but  it  will  to  tbc  riglit 
(fcneral  pnido  wlKim  lie  will  ceiKl  to  place  liiiiirelf  Ix^yond 
Cbepoiot  Ml    which  (ho    H^'lit  ut  the  battaliiiu   vill  nitt 
whea  daployofl. 
iAl.  Theculoucl  will  then  cotomand  : 

1.  On  Oie  fuitrth   (or  tnoh)  divution.iUpIoi/ colli iiiH.     2.   Vat- 
tnlion,  rijiil — Face. 

642.  At  the  fifiit  commnnil,  the  cbiof  of  tin  finrth  divi- 
sion will  cmition  it  to  rtind  fast;  tho  chicfH  of  tho  other 
cliriaious  will  caution  them  thnt  they  will  Imvo  to  tiuM  to 
the  riglit. 

843.  At  the  Rocohd  cumtnand,  tho  first  Ihroo  diviHlon* 
will  fHce  to  iho  riKht;  and  the  chk-f  of  each  will  i.hico 
liiliiHelf  by  tho  Hide  of  il8  ri|2lit  piide. 

644.  At  the  name  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
place  a  third  iiiariier  between  the  first  two,  no  thnt  thin 
markt-rinay  bo  o['p'>Hrto  to  one  of  thf  three  ri(;hf  files  of 
tho  left  company  ol  the  division  ;  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  then  place  himself  nn  the  line  of  battle  a  few  pacoa 
l>eyoad  tho  point  at  which  tho  right  of  the  third  division 
will  refit  whi-n  deployed. 

616.  The  coio&el  will  then  command  : 

3.  Mabcu  (or  tloulk'  quick— 'MxncB.) 

64C.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will 
put  themselves  iu  march,  tli.'  guide  of  the  lir^t  so  direct- 
ing himseiras  to  pass  three  piicts  within  th'f  line  marked 
by  the  ritht  jrenenil  guide.  The  chiet  of  tiie  third  divi- 
hion  will  not  follow  i(H  movement ;  he  will  see  it  tile  past, 
halt  it  when  its  loft  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  and 
causf;  it  to  face  to  the  fr^nt ;  nnd,  if  there  be  oi>euings  be- 
tween the  files,  ha  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  clos<'d 
to  the  lelt. 

647.  Tho  chief  r,r  the  fourth  divinion,  when  ho  sees  it 
nearly  uuniasked  by  the  three  others,  will  command : 

1.  TuiiiUnlaUnm,  furteaid.     2.  Citiile  left.     3.  MA.BC1I. 

543.  At  the  command  »iiarc/i,  which  will  bo  given  the 
instant  the  fourth  is  unmaskod,  this  division  will  ap- 
proach the  line  of  battle,  and  when  nt  three  paces  from 
the  markerrt  ou  that  line,  its  chiols  will  halt  it,  and  com- 
mand : 

Left— D&ZS3. 

619.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dross  iorvrard 
BRaiust  the  markers;  the  chiefof  the  divislAU  and  the 
junior  cuptiiu  will  each  align  tho  company  ou  lis  right, 
and  then  command : 

Frost. 

660.  Tho  instant  that  the  thiul  division  isunmiBked, 
its  chief  will  c.aase  it  to  approach  the  line  of  buttle,  and 
halt  it  in  tho  nninner  jnst  prcRcrihed  for  tho  fourth. 

651.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  iU  right  guide 
and  the  covering  -aergeant  of  its  lelt' company  will  step 
on  the  line  of  battle,  placing  theniselvcs  on  tbu  proIong%- 
tioii  of  the  markcrd  tst.iklished  In  iroiit  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision ;  us  HI -on  as  they  shall  be  assured  in  their  positlenx, 
the  division  will  be  aligned  as  has  just  been  prcscrlbid 
for  the  fourth. 

6.12.  The  second  and  first  divinii.ns  whir  h  will  have  con- 
tinued to  march,  will,  in  suircHMiou,  be  lialttd  and  aligned 
by  the  left,  In  tho  same  mauinr  as  th  i  third  ;  the  chiefs  of 
these  divisions  will  conlorm  tlieniselvos  to  what  is  pro- 
Bcriliod,  No.  5iJi;.  Tho  second  being  near  tho  liuo  ol  battlo, 
the  command  will  not  be  given  for  it  to  move  ou  this  lino, 
but  It  will  Ix!  dressed  up  to  it. 

65.'J.  The  deployment  ended,  tUo  colonel  will  comidan  I : 

(7iu'(/cs— Posts. 

664.  At  this  command,  tho  chiefs  of  division  and  tho 
guides  will  [OHu.ne  tli<.-ir  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
markers  will  retire. 

655.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  tho  positions  of 
the  guides  bv  the  means  inuioated.  No.  -Illl,  ana  the  major 
will  follow  tho  movement  alireaxt  with  the  loiirtli  division. 

560.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  tho  coloiu-I  shall 
wish  to  deploy  it  ou  tho  Iburth  division,  hu  will  muku  the 


divisions  indicated  No.  611  and  following;;  And  when  the 
head  of  tho  column  blinll  arrive  within  three  paces  of  the 
line,  ho  will  comman<l  : 

1.     0«  the  fourth  rffrin'on,  drplmi  column.    2.  llallalion,  ly 
Oir  riijht  flank.     ."..  N  MiCH  (or  tlouhle  quick — MaRCII). 

667.  At  the  first  o  >mniKnd,  tho  chief  of  the  fonrth  di- 
vision will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  wi  1  command,  tXiurUi 
(iirmon  ,- the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution 
thoir  divi>i<iU8  to  fare  to  the  rii;ht. 

^6S.  At  the  command  march,  brjtkly  repented  ^y  tho 
chiefs  of  the  first  three  divisions,  the  chiif  of  the  fonrth 
will  command  :  Halt.  Tho  lir-t  three  diviiinns  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  be  ditoclcd  purallcUy  to  ;ho  lineof  battle. 
The  chief  of  each  of  these  divisiors  will  pUce  himself  by 
the  side  of  its  right  guid^  The  chief  of  the  third  division 
will  see  his  division  file  past  htm,  and  when  bis  bft  guide 
is  abreast  of  him,  he  will  hall  it,  and  face  it  to  tho  (rout. 
'1  he  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  ghnll  see  it 
nearly  unmasked,  will  command:  1.  Fourth  division, 
forward;  2.  (J uide  left ;  3.  SIarcu  (or  double  quich — 
Mabcu).  This  division  will  move  towards  tho  line  of 
battle,  and'wlipn  at  three  paces  frtm  this  liuo,  it  will  be 
halted  by  its  chief,  and  aligned  by  tho  left. 

66'J.  The  chiefof  the  thir>l  ilivision  will  move  his  divi- 
sion forward,  conforming  to  what  has  just  boon  prescribed 
for  the  fourth. 

AGO.  The  clii^f-i  of  the  second  and  first  divisions,  after 
haltiuE  their  divisions,  will  eonforu.  to  what  is  jircbctibed. 
No.  562. 

6GI.  If  the  colonel  should  vtIeIi  to  deploy  on  the  fourth 
division  without  halting  the  column,  and  to  continue  to 
march  forward,  he  will  not  have  markers  posted,  and  the 
movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
the  same  means,  i^ith  the  following  iiiodiUcatioos  :  tho 
fourth  division,  when  uumisked,  will  be  moved  forward 
in  quick  time,  and  will  continue  to  march,  instead  of 
being  halted,  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 
The  third  division,  on  b.iiiig  ucmabked,  will  be  moved  to 
the  front  in  ilouble  <iuick  time,  but  wlieii  it  arrives  Jon 
the  alignment  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the  quick  step, 
and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command  Guide  crnlre,  is 
given  by  the  coloufl.  The  chieftt  of  the  sicond  and  flast 
divisicns  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  tho 
third.  When  the  first  division  sliall  arrive  on  the  line, 
the  colonel  may  cause  tho  battilion  to  take  the  double 
quick  Step. 

6()i.  Tho  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  468  and  45ii. 

5(J3.  To  deploy  a  column  on  an  interior  division,  tho 
colonel  will  caii^o  the  line  traced  by  the  means  above 
indicated,  and  the  general  guides  will  move  briskly  on 
the  line,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  613  nnd  610.  This  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  unch  dirisioti,  d'-ploij  column.     1.  lialtalion  oiitirards 
— Face.    3.    MAUcii"(or   double  quick — Mabcu). 

CG4.  Whether  the  columu  bo  with  the  right  or  left  in 
front,  tho  divisions  which,  iu  the  order  in  battle,  belong 
to  the  riglit  of  the  directing  one,  will  face  to  the  right  ; 
the  others,  except  tho  directing  division,  will  f  ice  to  the 
left ;  the  divisions  iu  front  of  the  latter  will  deploy  by  iho 
means  indicated.  No.  642,  and  follouing  ;  those  iu  its  rear 
will  deploy  as  is  prescriS-ed,  No.  613,  and  tli>'  following 

&G6.  The  directiug  division,  the  insbint  it  finds  itself 
nnnmsked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle,  taking  the 
guide  left  or  right,  according  as  tho  right  or  left  of  the 
coluinn  may  be  in  front.  Tho  chief  of  this  division  will 
align  it  by  the  directing  fiauk,  and  then  step  back  into 
the  rear,  in  order  uiomentarily  to  give  place  to  thj  chief 
of  tho  next  for  aligning  the  ne.xt  division. 

£00.  Tho  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of 
the  guides  of  divisions,  which  In  the  lino  of  battle,  tnko 
the  right  of  the  directing  division,  and  the  uiBJor  will 
assure  tho  posili  .ns  of  tho  other  guides. 

607.  If  tho  columu  bo  in  inarch,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 
1.  On  such  dirlsion,  dcploii  column.    2.  Battilion,  hij  the 

right   and    left  Jiankt.    3.  MabciI    (or    double  quick  — 

INUbch). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX—PART  V. 


65 


5C8.  The  divislans  which  are  in  front  of  the  directing 
one  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated,  Noa.  657,  and 
following ;  those  in  rear,  as  prescribed,  N*.  633  and 
followiug. 

559.  The  directing  division,  whsn  unmasked,  will  con- 
form to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  divieioa,  No. 
558. 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  ninjor  will 
cenform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.   158  and  450. 

571.  Iq  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  thesam^  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

Hemarkt  on  the  (Xefloymcnt  of  columns,  dosed  in  mas'. 

572.  All  the  divisions  ought^  to  deploy  rectangularly, 
to  march  cff  abreast,  and  to  preserve  llieir  distances  to- 
wards the  line  of  battle. 

57.3.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmasked, 
ought  to  be  marched  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  to  be 
aligned  upon  it  by  the  flank  next  to  the  directing  division; 
the  latter,  whether  the  right  or  left  bo  in  trout,  will  al- 
ways b?  aligned  by  the  flank  next  to  the  point  of  ojm«j, 
when  the  deployment  is  made  on  the  first  or  last  divi- 
8  on;  but  if  the  column  be  deployed  on  an  interior  divi 
sion,  thin  divisioawill  be  aligned  by  the  flank  which  teas 
that  of  direction. 

571.  The  chiefs  ot  division  will  see  that,  in  deploying, 
the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  by  the  flank  are 
well  {fbserved,  and  if  the  openings  between  the  files  occur, 
which  ought  not  to  happen  except  on  broken  or  difficult 
grounds,  the  openings  ought  to  be  promptly  closed  to 
war.^B  the  directing  flank  as  soon  as  the  civisions  face  to 
the  front. 

675.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  command  halt,  or  the 
soraraand,  by  the  right  rrr  left  flank,  too  soon  or  too  late, 
his  division  will  bo  obliged  to  obliq"o  to  the  right  or  lett 
in  approaching  the  line  of  bittle,  and  his  fault  may  lead 
the  following  eubdisisi  in  into  error. 

57G.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left  fliink,  it 
is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company  who  ought  to 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  mark  the  direction  ; 
In  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  right 
guide. 

577.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may  be 
formed  to  the  lett  or  to  the  right  into  lin?,  in  the  same 
manner  as  a  column  at  half  distance,  and  by  the  means 
Icd'cated,  No.  602,  and  following. 

578  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may  be 
formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  as  a 
column  at  halt  distance;  l.ut  in  order  to  execute  this 
movement,  without  arresting  the  march  of  the  column,  it 
ia  necessary  that  the  guides  «void,  with  the  greatest  care, 
shortening  the  step  in  turning,  and  that  the  men  near 
them,  respectively,  conform  themselves  rapidly  to  the 
movements  of  their  guides. 

Bemarlcs  on  invcrsioju. 

579.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of  forming 
line  of  battle, in  the  promptest  manner,  are  of  graatutility 
iu  the  movements  ot  an  army. 

680.  The  application  that  may  be  made  of  inversions 
in  tbn  formatiocs  to  the  right  and  to  lett  in  lino  of  battle, 
has  been  indicated.  No.  407,  and  following.  They  may 
also  be  advantageously  employed  in  the  successive  f  ^rma- 
tions,  except  in  that  of  faad  t«  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

581.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  bo  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  as  formations  in  the  direct 
order;  but  the  colonel's  first  command  will  always  be- 
gin hy  inverninn. 

682.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish,  by  forminc  it  into  column, 
to  bring  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he  will  cause  it  either 
to  break  or  to  pU»i  by  c.impauy,  or  by  division,  accord- 
ingly as  the  column  may  have  been  bv  company  or  by 
divition  before  it  had  been  formed  into  line  of  battle  by 
inversion. 

58;}.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by 
inversion,  has  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  aa  if 

9 


the  line  were    in  a    direct  order,    but  observing  what 
follows. 

5S4.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  by  di- 
vision, with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  company,  with  the 
first  company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce  in  the 
second  command — Ir/t  in  front,  because  the  bat'alioB 
being  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion,  that  subdivision  is  on 
the  left. 

585.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position  in  the 
column  in  front  of  the  directing  one,  will  direct  hij  sub- 
division till  it  halts;  and  each  chief  whose  eubdiviriou 
takes  position  in  rear  of  the  directicg  one,  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  when  xiy>  with  the  preceding  ligbt  guide,  and 
see  his  subdivision  file  past ;  aud  each  chief  will  align  his 
subdivision  by  the  right.  TVhen  the  column  is  to  be  put 
in  march,  the  second  command  will  be — guide  left,  bocause 
the  proper  right  is  in  front. 

586.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that  the  laet 
subdivision  shsll  be  in  front,  right  in  front,  will  be  an- 
nounced in  the  second  command  ;  the  subdivisions  will  be 
aligned  by  the  left,  and  to  put  the  inarch,  the  second 
command' will  be,  giiiile  right,  because  the  proper  left  U  In 
front. 

PABT    FITFH. 

AhTICLE    FiEST. 
To  adcance  in  line  of  hallle. 

5S7.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  sup- 
posed to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  march  iu  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the  lieutenant  col- 
onel an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place  h  mself  about 
forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-file,  and  face  to  the  front. 

588.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  alike 
distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the  colo- 
nel, who  will  establish  him  as  ccrrectly  as  possible,  by 
signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle 
opposite  the  color-bearer.  The  colonel  will  next,  above 
the  heads  of  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  color- bearer,  take 
a  point  of  direction  in  the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one 
piesent  itself,  exactly  in  the  proloogatiou  of  those  two 
points. 

569.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  farther  to 
the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  straight  line  passing  through  the  color- bearer  and 
the  lieutenant  colonel ;  these  murkers  will  face  to  the 
rear,  the  first  placed  about  twenty  five  paces  behind  the 
rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and  the  second  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  first. 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take  the 
moment  the  lieutenant  colonel  shall  be  established  on 
the  perpendicular,  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  be- 
tween the  heels  of  that  officer ;  the  first  of  these  points 
will  be  taken  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the  color- 
bearer. 

691.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Battalion,  forward. 

592.  At  this,  Ihe  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  will 
advance  six  paces  to  the  front;  the  corporals  in  the  rear 
rank  will  place  themselves  iu  the  front  rank,  and  these 
will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of  ihe  file  closers; 
at  the  same  time  the  two  genera'  guides  will  move  in 
advance,  abreast  with  the  color-bearer,  the  one  on  the 
right,  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  right  company,  the 
other  opposite  to  the  sergeant  who  closes  the  left  of  the 
battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  passing 
before  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies :  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  battalion  will  step  back 
into  the  rear  rank.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  com- 
pany next  on  the  left  of  the  color-company,  will  step  into 
the  front  rank. 

594.  The  lieutenant-colonel  having  assured  the  color- 
bearer  on  the  line  between  himself  and  the  corporal  of 
the  color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank,  will  go  to  the  posi- 
tion which  will  be  hereinafter  indicated,  Mo.  602. 


SCHOOL  OF  TUE  BATTALION— PAKT  V. 


CG 

(>'>:>.  Tk«  major  will  p1ac«  IiimicU  liz  or  elsht  pacM  on 
clilirr  flrwik  of  tbr  calor-r»ak. 

r<9<S.  The  colonel  will  then  cornnutod  : 

?    M4M''>f  '->r 'f  >«'■'«  "Mt'-t- — M*iictt>, 


t:  11    of    lljo    I«u 

|.  :t  Ukiup  ollwrn 

II,  .  .  ,  thp  RcUool  of  th« 

c<'iup<uj>  ,  lh«  i.'-ijx^i*<  uu  Ills  ri,{lit.  iiiid   the  oae  un  liis 
lot),  vill  march  lu  ibc  umi'  pirp.  Ukiiie  rjir«  not  to  turn 


llfH  1 


ir'y 


'.11'  r»,   lb«  cylor-boariT  Mipporling  the 

■  hi,.. 

■  rs\  cniiloa  will   marcb  in  tbn  same 
:   rnuk,    cacb     maintainlnfc    kimv^lf 

I,  with  that  rank,  and  mithcroociipy- 
iuft  iiiinti*!!  with  tlit-  muvi-mrnt  of  the  other. 

.V.'a.  The  tlirie  rorpomlB  of  the  colnr-KUanl,  new  In  tho 
from  rank  of  tho  battalion,  frill  tntrcji  woll  nliirnod,  ol- 
l>o>r  to  elbc'W,  beada  direct  to  the  front,  nnJ  without  ilr- 
mnging  the  line  of  tboir  shouldera  ;  thi- coiitro  onnwill 
follow  exactly  in  the  truce  of  the  rolor-bcarfr,  and  main- 
tain the  Hame  utrp,  without  lon;;thenin(C  or  hhnrleninK  it, 
except  on  an  intiination  troin  the  colonel  or  lieutenant- 
colonel,  altlion^h  he  Hhould  find  himself  more  ur  1  sn 
than  six  paces  from  the  olor-r.ink: 

CiOO.  The  covering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  between 
tbp  color-company  and  the  next  on  tho  left,  will  march 
*lbow  to  elbow,  and  on  tho  Hnine  line,  with  the  three  cor- 
Porali  in  the  centre,  bin  hctad  well  to  the  front. 

601.  Th«  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the  com- 
pany next  to  Ilia  left,  will  conslitut^,  with  tli"  thn^e  cor- 
puriiU  in  the  centre  of  tho  front  rank,  the  banii  of  ali;:u- 
ment  for  both  winiiv  ef  the  battalion  ;  Ihey  will  march 
in  the  fame  Bt«]i  with  tlie  color-boarer,  and  exert  (hera- 
iMtlveii  to  maititHin  their  BhonlderH  exactly  in  the  square 
with  tlifl  dlrtclion.  To  this  end,  they  will  keepibeir 
lioadi  direct  to  the  front,  only  occasionally  casting  an 
eye  on  tho  three  c<>ntral  corporals,  with  the  sliglltfct 
pu*«il>le  turn  of  the  neck,  and  if  they  perceive  themselves 
in  ad*auc«,  or  in  the  lear  of  these  corporals,  the  cap- 
tjiin.  or  two  captains,  will  almost  insensib'y  shorten  or 
lin.tben  IIk*  stei  ,  so  as,  at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to 
re);nln  tlio  true  alignment,  without  giving  sudden  checks 
or  Impulsions  to  Ibo  wings  beyord  them  respectively. 

<<ui.  The  lieuteniiDt  colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fifteen 
pac'  »  on  the  right  of  the  captiiin  of  tho  color-company, 
will  in«intnin  this  captain  and  the  next  one  beyond, 
abrriaat  Willi  the  threo  centre  corporals;  to  this  end,  he 
will  caution  either  to  IcAugthen  or  to  chorten  tho  s'ep  as 
iiiay  b«  n<'C««sary,  which  the  captain,  or  two  ciipfains, 
will  execiit<>  aa  baa  just  been  explained. 

(i'l::.  All  tbn  othiir  captains  will  maintain  thomselvcs 
CD  the  ulongations  of  this  basis  ;  and,  to  this  end,  they 
will  c«*t  tboir  eyes  towards  llie  centre,  taking  rare  to 
lorn  Uio  nec»  but  slightly,  and  not  to  dernngu  tho  direc- 
tion of  their  shoulders. 

fiOl.  The  cjiptAins  will  obferve  tho  march  of  their  com- 
panies, and  prevent  tho  iiH'ii  from  getting  in  advance  of 
the  line  of  captains  ;  they  will  not  lengthen  cr  shorten 
Hep  except  when  evi'leiitly  necessary;  because,  to  cor- 
rect, with  too  srrnpulons  atlentlpn,  small  faults,  la  ant  to 
oituse  the  production  of  greafor— loss  of  calmness,  silenco 
and  equality  of  step,  each  of  which  It  is  so  important  to 
maintain. 

tMXS.  The  men  will  cooslantly  ko'p  thoir  heads  toll 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  tlio  ribow  towards  the 
(ontre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  (Unk,  give  tho 
greatest  attention  to  the  squari-ness  of  shoulders,  and 
b'>ld  tbeniholves  always  very  slightly  l.ebiud  tho  line  of 
the  captains,  In  order  never  to  slint  out  troni  the  view  of 
the  latter  the  basis  of  alignment ;  they  will  from  time  to 
t  me,  r-nt  an  eye  on  the  color-rank,  or  on  the  g'-neral 
guide  of  the  wing,  in  order  to  march  c  mstantly  In  tho 
same  step  wiih  those  advanced  persons. 

I'lOU.  Tending  tho  mirili,  tho  lino  dcterniinod  by  the 
two  markers  (A  and  </)  will  bo  prolonged  by  placing,  in 
proportion  as  the  battalion   atlrancee,  a  third  marker  (I'j 


in  the  rear  of  the  flrnt  (h),  thon  Uic  maiker  (J) 
will  qnit  bis  t  Uce,  and  go  *  like  distance  in  roar 
<~r     "    "  h)  will,  in  his  turn,  do  tho  liRe  in 

I  on,  in  saccossion.os  long  aa  the  bnt- 

udvance;  each   marker,   ou  ahifiiii:: 
;  .  i.u.ii..:  ( .lie  to  face  to  the  rear,  and  »o  i^ver  nr- 
y    Ibo    two   irarkcrs    nlready   ostabiishcd  ou   tlu' 
.   n.     A  stntl  cfllcer,  <  r  the  quartermaster  sort- in  lit, 
'.1  Binuatiil  for   the  purjioso,   and  who  will  bold  hiniuM 
constantly  llrtcon  or  twenty  paces  facing  the  marker  far- 
thest from  tho  battalion,  will  caution  each  marker  wh  n 
to  shift  place,  and  oaauro  him  on  the  direction  behind  the 
other  two. 

r,07.  The  colonel  will  babitnally  hold  himself  about 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  tho  centre  ofbis  battalion,  t'\kinc 
care  not  to  put  himself  en  the  lino  cf  markers;  if,  for 
example,  by  the  slanting  of  the  battitlkm,  or  tho  iudi<  a- 
cAtions  which  will  be  given,  Nob.  U17  and  following,  he 
find  that  the  march  if  the  color-bearer  la  not  rerp<>ii- 
dicular,  he  will  promptly  command  : 

I\)int  of  direction  to  the  right  (or  Uft). 

(AS.  At  this  command,  the  major  will  hasten  thirty  or 
fori)  pacf  s  in  advanca  ot  the  color-rank,  halt,  face  to  th. 
col(mel,aodplai'p  himtelfon  the  ilireclim  which  the  latter 
will  indicate  by  signal  of  the  sword  :  tho  corporal  in  the 
centre  of  the  battalion  will  then  direct  hini>elf  upon  the 
miijor,  ou  a  cautiou  Ircni  the  colone',  advancing,  to  tl,at 
end,  the  oppouiie  nhculdor ;  the  corporals  on  tiia  right 
and  left  will  conform  thomselvcs  to  his  direction. 

t>()9.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon  Ibo 
mnj'jr,  advancing  tho  opposite  rhoulder,  the  TDsjor  causing 
liiui,  at  tho  same  tiflTe,  to  incline  to  the  right  orlefc, until 
ho  sIihII  exactly  cover  the  corporal  of  his  file  ;  the  color 
bearer  will  tliou  lake  poiiits  un  tho  ground  in  this  new 
direction. 

r,li).  Tho  two  genoral  guidus  will  conform  themeclves 
to  the  new  direction  »f  ihe  color-rank. 

(111.  The  olliccr charged  with  observing  tho  successive 
replacing  of  tb^  iii%rkers  in  the  rear  of  the  centre,  will 
establish  them  promptly  on  tho  new  direction,  taking  for 
basis  the  color-bearer  and  the  oiporal  of  bis  file  in  the 
Centre  (if  tho  battHliou  ;  the  colonel  will  verily  the  ncAv 
direction  of  tho  mutkeis. 

C12.  The  lieutenant  rolouel,  fiom  the  ptsition  given, 
No.  002,  will  SCO  that  Ihe  two  ceulru  companies,  and  suc- 
cessively all  the  olbers,  conform  tbemseives  to  the  new 
dircctiun  of  thu  ccnlie,  but  without  precipitancy  or  dis- 
order ;  ho  will  then  endeavor  to  maintain  that  basis  of 
.-iligninent  for  Ihe  battalion,  perpendicularly  toth)  direc- 
tion pursued  by  the  color-bearer. 

(il3.  Ho  will  often  observe  Ihe  niurcU  of  the  tw»  wings  ; 
and,  if  he  discover  that  the  cnptains  neglect  to  oouforni 
lliemsolves  to  tho  basis  of  alignment,  he  will  recall  their 
attention  by  the  comuiaud — oi;)<<iiii  o/(such)  coiiijxir/;^,  or 
f((ji.'<ii)is  o/(6Uch)  cfiiijHiiiifx.  on  llie  liitc — without,  however, 
eudeavoring  too  nerupuUm^ly  to  correct  small  fiults. 

<<I4.  The  m»j'jr  ou  the  tUuk  of  the  colur-rauk  will,  du- 
ring the  nidrcli,  place  bim^tclf,  from  time  to  lime,  tnenty 
paces  in  front  ol  that  rank,  Oice  to  the  n-ar,  and  place 
llimielf  correctly  on  tho  prolongition  of  tho  niarkois 
establinlieil  behind  th"  centre,  in  order  to  verify  the  exact 
inurcb  of  the  color-bearer  on  that  line;  be  will  rectify,  ;f 
necessary,  thu  direction  of  tlje  color  IwMirer,  who  will  im- 
mediately tako  two  new  iioiut*  on  tho  ;;round  botwcen 
himself  iind  the  mi'jor. 

015.  All  the  principles  applicnble  I"  the  advance  in 
line  are  tho  same  for  a  suborditiale  as  for  the  direditig  bat- 
talion ;  btit  when  the  battalion  under  instruction  is  sup- 
posed to  bo  inmliordiitale,  no  markvrs  will  le  placed  be- 
liind  the  centre. 

•^  BcmaiKs  on  the  adeaitce   in  line  of  battle. 

Tlio.  If  in  tho  exorcises  of  detail,  or  courses  of  elemen- 
tary instruction,  tho  officers,  serge  ints,  corpo-als,  an, I 
men,  have  not  tieen  well  confirmed  in  the  principles  of  the 
position  under  arms,  as  woll  an  in  tho  length  and  cadencu 
of  the  step,  the  march  of  the  battalion  in  line  will  be 
lluatiug,  unsteady, and  disunited. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION— PAKT  V. 


6T 


617.  If  tbe  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching  perpen- 
dlcularly  forward,  pursue  an  oblique  direction,  the  bat- 
talion will  slant  ;  crowdings  in  one  winpr.  and  openngs 
In  the  other,  will  follow,  and  these  defects  in  tbe  march, 
becoming  mure  and  more  embarrasnlng  ia  proportion  to 
t'  e  deviation  from  the  porpendicular,  will  commence 
ne«T  th«>  c  mtre. 

618.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  iinporta'co  that  the 
color  bearer  should  direct  himself  porncndiculnrly  for- 
ward, and  tliat  the  basis  of  alienment  should  always  be 
perpendicular  to  the  line  purau'  d  by  him. 

619.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  filei  crowd  eac'i 
other,  if,  in  short,  disorder  ensne  the  remedy  ought  to 
be  applied  as  promptly  as  possible,  but  calmly,  with  few 
words,  and  as  litt'e  noise  as  practicable. 

020.  The  object  of  the  ceneral  eu'des.  in  the  march  in 
line  of  battle  Is,  to  indicate  to  the  companies  near  the 
flanks  tbo  stop  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and  to 
afford  more  facility  in  establishing  the  wings  on  tbo 
direction  of  the  centre  if  they  should  be  too  much  in  the 
rear  ;  hence  the  necessity  that  these  guides  should  main- 
tain the  same  step,  and  march  abreast,  or  very  nearly  eo, 
with  the  color-rank,  which  it  will  bo  oaay  for  them  to 
do  by  casting  from  time  to  time  an  eye  on  that  rank. 

i;2i.  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step,  the  colo- 
nel will  recall  its  attention  t'y  the  command,  to  /7i(?— Step; 
cai  t  lius  an{l»th«ir  companies  will  immediately  cast  an  eye 
on  the  color-rank,  or  on**  of  tlia  general  guides,  and 
jiroraptly  conform  themselves  to  the  step. 

022  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the 
attainment  of  regularity  in  the  mircli  in  line  cf  battle, 
to  Inbituato  the  battalion  toexecute  with  as  much  order 
;is  promptness  the  movements  prescribed  No.  607  and  fol- 
lowing, for  rcctifyina:  tbe  direction  ;  it  is  not  less  essential 
that  commanders  of  battalions  should  exorciso^themselves, 
with  tlie  greatest  care,  in  forming  their  own  coiip  iVcril, 
in  order  to  be  able  to  judge  with  precision  the  direction 
to  be  given  to  theii  battalions. 

Article  Second. 

Oblique  march  in  liiie  of  battle. 

023.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  cf  battle,  vhen  tlio 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblijue,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  liight  (or  Ufl)  ohliqiiK.  2.  MaeCII  (or  donlle  quick— 
HARCn). 

C24.  At  the  first  command,  the  major  will  place  himsplf 
in  front  of.  and  faced  to  the  color- Ijearer. 

02.">.  At  the  command  march,  the  whole  battalion  will 
take  the  oblique  step.  The  ccinpanies  and  captains  will 
strictly  observe  the  principles  established  in  the  school  of 
the  company. 

020.  The  major  in  front  of  tho  color  bearer  ought  to 
maintain  tho  latter  in  a  lino  with  tho  centre  corporal,  so 
that  the  color-bearer  may  oblique  neither  more  nor  less 
than  that  corporal.  Ho  will  carcfnlly  observe,  also,  that 
they  follow  parallel  directions  and  preserve  the  same 
length  offltep. 

027.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  take  care  that  the  cap- 
tains and'the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  keep  exactly 
on  a  line  and  follow  para'Iel  directions. 

628.  Th«  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  preserves  its 
parallelism;  he  will  exert  himself  to  prevent  the  files 
from  opening  or  crowding.  If  ho  perceive  tbo  latter 
fault,  ho  will  cause  tho  files  on  the  ilank,  to  which  tho 
battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 

629.  The  colonel,  wishing  tho  direct  mircli  to  be  re- 
sumed, will  command : 

1.  Forward,    ?.  Mabih. 

030.  At  the  command  march,  tlio  battalion  will  resume 
the  direct  march.  The  major  will  place  hinigelf  thirty 
paces  in  front  of  tbe  color  bearer,  ami  face  to  tho  colonel, 
who  will  establish  him,  by  a  signal  o(  the  sword,  on  the 
direction  which  tho  color-bearer  ought  to  pursue.  The 
latter  will  immeliatoly  take  two  points  on  tho  ground  be- 
tween himself  and  the  major. 


631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be  taken 
that  tho  men  d'>  not  close  the  intervals  vhich  may  exi-t 
between  the  files  at  once  ;  it  should  be  done  almost  in- 
sensibly. 

liciiiark/i  on  the  cbliqiie  vwrrh. 

6.32.  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain  Kr«iinil 
to  the  right  fr  left,  preserving  al  the  while  tbe  primi  ive 
direction  of  the  line  of  batth  ;  as  thus,  fnr  examp'e:  t*n 
battalion,  departing  from  the  line  (.<«),  arrives  (.n  the  line 
(r  .t1  parallel  to  (ss) 

033.  It  is  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  tbe  centre 
of  tie  battalion,  and  tie  captains  of  companies  should 
f)llow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain  thunselves  at  the 
same  height;  without  which  they  will  give  a  false  direc- 
tion  to  the  battalion. 

0.34.  The  colonel  and  lieu'cnant  colonel  will  exert 
themselves  to  prevent  the  files  from  crowding  ;  for,  with- 
out such  precaution,  the  oblique  inarch  cannot  be  exe- 
cuted with  facility. 

Article  Thikd. 

To   hah   the  hattalion,    marching  in  Hue  of  hiittie,   omt  to 
align  it. 

035.  The  battalion,  marching  in  tho  lino  of  batf'o,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  ho  will  command  : 


1.  Unttalhn. 


IIait. 


030.  At  the  second  rommand,  the  battalion  will  halt ; 
the  color-rank  and  tlio  general  guides  will  remain  in 
front ;  but  if  the  colonol  should  not  wi^h  imm  diataly  to 
resume  tho  advance  in  line,  nor  to  give  a  general  align- 
ment, he  will  cciiunand  : 

Color  iiiui  geiicYvl  f/iiith'!)  —Posts. 

t;:i7.  At  this  command,  the  color  rank  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the  cap- 
tains in  tbe  left  wing  will  shift  to  flie  right  of  the  com- 
panies. 

038.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary  to 
rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  Cfnimand  : 

Captains,  rectify  thtaligmwnt. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye  towards 
the  centre,  align  thomeWes  accurately,  on  the  basis  of  the 
alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  see  well 
directed,  and  then  promptly  dress  their  respective  com- 
panies. The  lieutenant  colonel  will  admonish  such  cap- 
tains as  may  not  be  accurnttdy  on  tho  alignment  by  the 
command  :  Captain  o/(such)  rominnnj,  or  laptains  o/(8Uch) 
companifs.  moce  up  or  fall  baric. 

640.  But  when  tho  colonel  Bhall  wish  to  give  the  bat- 
talion a  g'  neral  alignment,  either  parallel  or  oblique,  in- 
stead ot  ri  ctifying  it  as  above,  in  will  move  some  pa;ia 
o^^t^id  ■  of  oio  (f  the  general  guides  (tho  right  wi'l  hero 
be  supposed)  and  cantion  tbe  right  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  to  f;ice  him.  and  tlien  efltatilish  them  by 
signal  of  the  swerd,  on  tho  direction  which  he  may  with 
to  L' ive  to  the  battalion.  As  soon  as  tliey  shall  be  cor- 
rectly established,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  him- 
self on  their  direction,  acd' be  .assured  in  bis  position  by 
the  major.  The  color-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance 
perpendicularly  between  his  ejTS,  and  the  two  corpora's 
of  his  rank  will  return  to  their  places  in  tho  front  rank 
the  moment  ho  shall  face  tho  colonel. 

041.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Guides— 0^  the  Line. 

642.  At  this  command,  tho  right  guide  ot  each  ccm- 
pany  in  theright  wing,  and  tho  loft  guide  of  each  company 
in  the  left,  will  each  place  bimaelf  on  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer  and  the  two  gouoral  guides,  face  to  tlie  color- 
boaror,  place  himself  in  rear  of  tlae  guide  who  is  next  be- 
fore him  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  compnny, 
and  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  the  general  ^ 
guide  beyond. 


68 


SCUOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


r,\?,.  The  c«|)t  liut  in  the  ri^ht  wiop  will  iliin  to  tlie  I 
l»rt  of  Urlr  coinpaniof,  except  the  r«pUiD  cf  the  color-  1 
company,  who  will  rpmiiJn  on  !»•  right,  but  lUp  Into  tlie  1 
TMT  nink  ;  the  cepUinn  In  tin-  l<  ft  wing  w:ll  ehift  to  the  i 
ileht  of  their  renipaui'-^. 

lAl.  The  lifulenunt  colonel  will  prorap  ly  rectify,  if 
neoeaMry,  the  poeltlom  of  the  (niidf"  of  th'>  riRht  win^, 
nnd  th»>  mnjor  thnee  of  t)ie  other;  which  l-olng  execnted, 
the  MJonel  will  command:  I 

I 
2,  On  th*  c«i(rf— D«KBS. 

r.l6.  At  lliU  command,  the  comptnles  will  moTo  «p  in 
quirk   time  a{;alntt  tb»  cuidna.   where.  harioK   arrlred,  i 
each  capUin   will   ft'icn    his  c<jrapany   according  to   pr«- 
t  ril>»d  priaclplvf,  (he   licutanant  oolom-1  aliKnifg   the  , 
color-company 

r>t6.  If  the  aliicnmeat  be  oMiine,  the  captain*  will 
take  care  to  conform  their  compaoiea  to  it  in  coDductlni; 
them  toward*  the  line.  i 

fv47.  Tne  baitalion  being  al'gned,  the  colonel  will  com-  \ 
mand: 

3.  Color  euid  CMMiM— Posts. 

f*S.  At  thi*  command,   the  color-b^nr'-r,  the  general  , 
and  coRipnny  fcnideii,  nnd  the  captains  lo  the  rifsht  v  inR,  ' 
will  tako  their  plar<'«  in  the  lino  cf  batt'e.  and  the  color-  j 
hoarer  will  replac«  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  ogainat  the 
ri(fht  hit'. 

649.  If  th«  now  direction  of  the  Hue   of  battle  l>e  such 
lli\t  one  or  more  companie*  find   tbrmsAlvos   in  advance 
of  that  line,  the  colond,  before   establiHhini;  the  f^eueral 
KUldM  on  the  line,  will  cause  ancb  cnnipaniea  to  be  moved  | 
to  the  rear,  either   bv    the  back    utop,  or   by  first   facing  1 
about,  according  as  there  may  be  less  or  more   ground  to 
be  repassod  to  bring  the  (■■)mi«ttDies  in   roar   of  the  new  ' 
d'recti'n. 

660.  When  the  colonel  fliall  wi  )i  to  giTc  a  give  gen- 
eral alignment,  and  tbe  color  and  gen'Tal  guides  are  not 
on  the  line,  be  will  caus«  them  to  more  »ut  by  the  com- 
mand : 

1.  Color  and  general  guidet—Oa  the  Line. 

Ml.  At  this  co-nmand,  the  color-bearer  and  tin  gene- 
ral guides  will  plnce  themselTos  oa  the  line,  conforming 
to  what  la  prescribed  No.  CIO. 

Abticle  FoCBTn. 

Chnngt  of  dirtction  lit  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

U2.  Tlie  battalion  marching  In  lino  of  battle,  when 
tlie  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right, 
he  will  command  : 

1 .  Chanija  dirtction  to  'M  riyfU.  2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

i'/>3.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  com- 
mence; the  color-rank  will  shortan  the  step  to  fourteen 
or  serenteen  inch' s,  and  direct  itself  circularly  to  the 
right,  taking  care  tn  advance  the  left  shoulder,  but  only 
insenalb  y ;  the  mnjor  will  place  himself  before  the  color- 
bearer,  facing  him,  and  so  direct  his  iiiarrli  that  ho  may 
describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  neither  too  large  nor  too  small  ; 
he  will  also  K'o  that  the  coior-bearer  takes  steps  of  four- 
teen or  seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait, 

054.  The  right  general  gnidu  will  wh«-6l  on  the  right 
captain  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot:  the  left  general  guide 
will  circularly  march  In  the  step  of  twenty -elgtrt  Inches 
or  thirtv-three  inches,  kccotiling  to  the  gait,  and  will 
align  blm'tclf  on  the  color-lKjarcr  imd  the  right  general 
guide. 

Cbb.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion, 
will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  will 
wheel  to  the  ri^ht  by  advancing  Insensibly  the  left  shoul- 
der; the  battalion  will  conform  Itself  to  the  movement 
of  the  centre;  to  this  end,  the  captain  of  the  color-rom- 
panv,  and  the  ciptain  of  the  next  to  the  K-lt,  will  atten- 
tively regulate  their  march,  as  well  as  the  direction  of 
their  shoulder,  on  the  three  centre  corporals.  All  the 
other  captains  will  regulate  the  direction  of  their  shonl- 
ders  and  the  length  of  their  stop  on  this  basis. 


C.'>6.  The  men  will  redouble  their  aiteDlion  in  order  uoi 
to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

G67.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  bo  lengthened  in 
proportion  as  the  &!<•  is  distant  from  the  contra  ;  the  c«p- 
f  liin  <if  the  eighth  company  irho  r lo«on  the  left  Hank  of  the 
battalion  will  take  rtops  of  twenty-eight  or  tblrty-thrro 
inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

068.  In  the  right  wing  the  |iace  will  lie  ahort<>ncd  in 
proportion  as  tlie  file  la  di^tantfrolll  the  centre  ;  the  ctp- 
tain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will  only  slowly  turn  in 
his  person,  oljsorving  to  ylol  J  ground  n  litt  le  if  pushed. 

rAO.  The  cclonel  will  tike  groat  care  to  prevent  the 
centre  of  the  battalion  from  describing  an  arc  of  a  circle, 
either  too  great  or  too  aniall,  in  orJer  that  the  winga 
may  conform  themselves  to  it«  movement.  He  will  see 
also  that  the  captains  keep  their  companies  constantly 
aligned  upon  the  centre,  ao  that  there  may  be  no  opening 
and  no  crowdlbg  of  files.  He  w  11  endeavor  to  prevent 
faults,  and,  should  they  o:cur.  correct  'hem  without  nolae. 

Ot'iO.  7  he  lieutenant  ci  lonil,  placed  before  the  balt%lion, 
will  give  hia  attontion  to  the  aanie  objects. 

•KJl.  When  the  colonel  ahall  wish  the  direct  march  lo 
be  returned,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Foncard.    2.  MARCn. 

CC'.!.  At  the  command  marc'i,  the  color  rnnlc,  the  gen« 
eral  guides,  and  the  battalion  will  resume  the  direct 
march  ;  the  mnj  ir  will  intmcdiately  place  himself  thirty 
or  f 'rty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  colonel,  placed  in  rear 
of  the  centre,  who  will  establish  him  by  signal  cf  the 
sword  on  the  perpendicnlar  direction  which  tli"  corporal 
in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  ought  to  pursue  ;  the  m»J'  r 
will  immediately  cause  the  color-bearer,  if  necessary,  to 
incline  to  the  right  or  left,  so  as  to  be  oxr.ctly  opposite  to 
hia  file;  the  color-bearer  will  then  tike  two  point )  on  the 
ground  between  himself  and  the  msjor. 

CC3.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  end-avor  to  give  to  the 
color-company  and  the  nrxt  on  the  left  a  direction  per- 
pendicular to  that  pmsurd  bv  the  centre  corporal ;  ana  all 
the  other  companies,  withont  precipitancy,  will  conform 
them. elves  to  that  bafi.". 

AllTlCLE    FiriH. 

To  hiiirrh  I'll  nlreat,  in  line  cf  battle. 

GC4.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  bo  the  wish  of 
the  colonel  to  causo  it  to  uiurch  in  retra  -t,  ho  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fare  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion,  about  —Tace. 

CC.'i.  At  the  second  command,  the  battolion  will  face 
about;  the  color-rank,  and  the  general  guides,  if  in  ad- 
vance, will  take  their  places  iu  lino;  the  color-boarar 
will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading  ;  the  corporal 
of  his  lUe  will  stop  boliiud  the  corporal  next  on  his  own 
right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then  step  into  the 
front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re  form  the  color-flle  ;  the  colo- 
nel will  plaoo  himself  b<diind  the  front  rank,  become  the 
rear;  the  lientouiint-colonol  and  msjor  will  place  them 
sclvoH  before  the  rear  rank,  now  loading. 

CGO.  The  colonel  will  take  jiost  forty  pacos  behind  the 
color-file.  In  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  the 
perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a  like  distance 
iu  front,  HB  preccribed  lor  the  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

007.  If  the  battalion  b"  the  one  charged  with  the  direc- 
tion, the  colonel  will  establish  markers  iu  the  manner  in- 
dicated. No.  6J>'.i,  except  that  they  will  face  to  the  battal- 
ion, and  that  the  first  will  bo  placed  twenty-paces  from 
the  lieutenant-colonel.  If  the  markers  bo  already  estab- 
lished, the  oflicer  charged  with  reiijaciiig  them  in  succos- 
aiou  will  cau3e,to  face  about,  the  moment  that  the  battal- 
ion executes  this  movement,  and  then  the  marker  near- 
est to  the  battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two 
others. 

008.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

3.  liattalion,  foncard. 

009.  At  thhi  command,  the  color-bearer  will  advance 
six  iMices  beyond  tlm  rank  of  the  file  closers,  accompanied 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


60 


by  tli6  two  corporals  of  Ills  guard  of  that  rank,  the  cen- 
tre corporal  stepping  back  to  lot  the  color-bearer  pass; 
the  two  file  closers  noarest  this  centre  corporal  will  unite 
on  him  behind  the  color-guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of 
Hligument  for  the  line  of  the  file  closers ;  the  two  general 
guides  will  placo  themselves  abreast  with  the  color  rank, 
the  covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  in  the  line 
of  file  closers,  and  the  captalus  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
leading;  the  captains  in  the  left  wipg,  now  right,  will,  if 
not  already  there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  companies, 
now  become  the  right. 

G70.  The  colonel  will  j,hen  command  : 

4.  March  (or  double  (jtmiV/j— March). 

071.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the  same 
priBCiples  which  govern  the  advance  in  line  :  the  centre 
corporal  behind  the  color- bearer  will  mirch  exactly  in 
his  trace. 

i'u'i.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color-bearer 
will  direct  himself  on  the  markers,  who  will,  of  their  own 
accord,  each  place  himself  iu  succession  behind  the  marker 
UKist  distant,  on  being  approached  by  the  battalion:  the 
clhcer  charged  with  the  superintendence  of  Ihe  markers, 
will  carefully  assure  them  on  the  direction. 

07:i.  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  maintain  himself  on  the  perpendicular  by 
means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground. 

(i74.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major  will  each 
discharge  the  same  functions  as  in  the  advance  of  line 

67'5.  'iho  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  on  the  outside  of 
the  file  closers  of  the  color-company,  will  also  maintain  the 
three  fils  closers  of  the  basis  of  alignment  in  a  square  with 
the  line  of  dirtction  :  the  other  file  clostrs  will  keep  them- 
selves aligned  on  this  basis. 

Article  Sixth. 

To  UiU  tha  haltalion  marcliing  i«   retreat,   and  to  face  it 
to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  havinj;  halted  the  battalion,  and  wibh- 
ing  to  face  to  the  front,  will  command  : 

1.  Ftxce  to  the  front.    2.  Eallaltoii,  aloiit — Face. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  general 
guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all  re-take 
their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer 
will  repass  into  the  iront  rank. 

678.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by  the 
front  tank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  re- 
treat, he  will  comman  I  : 

1.  Batlalion,  right  ahunt.      2.  March. 

G79.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  faco  to 
the  re- V  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  tho  rear  rank. 
The  principles  prescribed  Nos.  GC9  and  following  will  be 
carefully  oberved. 

680.  if  the  colonel  should  wish  ihe  battelion  to  march 
again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  name  commands. 


Article  SEV£STir. 

CJtange  of  direction,  in  marching  in  retreat. 

68t.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direction 
by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  No.  652  and  fol- 
lowing; the  three  file  closers,  united  behind  the  color- 
rank,  will  cenform  th?meelve8  to  the  movement  of  this 
rank,  and  wheel  like  it ;  the  centre  file  oloser  of  the  three 
will  take  steps  of  fourteen  (>r  seventeen  inches,  according 
to  the  gait,  and  keep  himself  steadily  at  the  same  dis- 
tance from  tho  c  lor-bearer  ;  the  line  of  file  closers  will 
conform  themselves  to  the  movement  of  its  centre,  and 
the  lieutenant  colouel  will  maintain  it  on  that  basis. 

Article  EianiH 

Passage  of  olstacles,  advancing  aiul  retreating. 

682.  Tho  battalion  advancing  into  line  will  be  supposed 
toencount<?r  an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or  more  compa- 


nies ;  the  colonpl  will  cause  them  to  ploy  into  column  at 
full  distance,  in  rear  of  tho  next  company  towards  tho 
color,  which  will  bo  executed  in  the  foUowiuK  manner. 
It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  only  covers  tho  third 
company,  th  ;  colonel  will  command  : 

Third  comptn'j,  ohstacle. 

683.  At  this  command  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
will  place  himself^in  its  front,  turn  to  it,   and  command, 

1.  Third  compamj.  by  the  left  flank,  to  the  rear  into  column. 

2.  Double  quid-.  3.  March.  He  will  then  hasten  to  the 
loft  of  his  company. 

684.  At  the  command  march,  tho  company  will  fiice  to 
tlie  loft  in  marching  ;  tho  two  left  files  will  promptly 
disengage  to  Iho  rear  in  double  quick  time ;  the  left 
guide, placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  flank,  will 
conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  company,  directing  himself 
parallelly  with  this  company;  Ihe  captain  of  tie  third  will 
himself  halt  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see 
his  company  file  past;  when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly 
up  with  him,  he  will  command,  1.  Third  companj/.  2. 
By  the  right  fiank.  3.  March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  placo 
himself  before  tho  centre  of  his  company. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  moment  it 
shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quid:  time.    1.  March. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that 
behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance,  its 
right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  captain 
of  that  company. 

6S7.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced  to 
the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  maintain 
between  himself  and  the  right  of  the  fourth  the  space 
necessary   lor  the  return  into  line  of  the  third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Third  company,  forward,  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  hia  com- 
pany, will  add  : 

1.  By  company,  right  half  wheel,  d.  Double  (pticli.  3.  March. 

690.  A'  the  command  march,  tho  company  will  take  tho 
double  quick  step,  and  ex"cuto  a  half  wheel;  its  captain 
will  then  command,  1.  Ihrirard.  2.  March.  3.  Guide 
left.  The  second  command  will  be  given  when  the  com- 
pany shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled. 

(191.  At  the  command  iimrrh,  the  company  will  direct 
itself  straight  forward  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  re- 
take its  position  in  it  According  to  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  formation  forward  into  lino  ol  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers  several 
contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies  on  the  right 
for  example.)  tho  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  TJiree  right  companies,  obatacle.    2.  By  tho  left  flanic,  to 
the  rear,  into  column.    3.  Double  quid: — March. 

693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  designat- 
ed companies  will  each  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the  movement  atout  to 
be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  companies 
will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  immediately  take 
the  double  quick  step  ;  each  captain  will  cause  the  head 
of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  to  the  rear,  and  th»} 
left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank, 
the  captain  of  the  third  company  will  conform  himself  to 
what  is  prescribed.  No.  684  and  following  ;  the  captains  of 
the  other  companies  will  conduct  them  by  tho  flank  in 
rear  of  the  third,  inclining  toward  the  head  of  the  column; 
and,  as  the  head  of  ouch  company  arrives  to  the  right  of 
the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain  will  himself 
halt,  see  his  company  file  past,  and  conform  himself  for 
facing  it  to  the  front,  in  marching,  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  684  and  following. 


70 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION— FART  V. 


COS.  Wbeo  ib«  ImI  compaoy  in  co'umn  tliall  bare  i<as- 
M>d  the  obatacle,  tbe  coIodoI  will  command: 

1.  Tlurte  right  ccmpaniet,  f'jrteard,   iiito  hn». 

GOG.  At  tbii  command,  tbe  captain  of  each  of  tbM* 
three  companies  will  comman4,  by  company,  ri'jht  half 
tvhctl.  The  colonel  well  then  add  : 

1.  V^-nlk  quick .    2.  Marcu. 

COT.  At  thli,  briskly  rtpeated  \>y  the  captiunii  of  tbe 
three  compani'-"  <-iifl"  r.n.iHi  v  will  conform  ittclf  to 
whaliiprc?  •  •   1  lowing. 

COS.  It  it  '  .-•  'Injt  cxaropici,  that  tbe 

companiea  U  ^  -„ -  .-I't  wing;   If  thoy   make 

I>art  of  the  otlittr,  tliey  will  ext-catc  the  passage  of  an  ol>- 
Rtarle  arcording  to  the  same  prlnciplei  and  by  inverse 
mi-«n«. 

I  '•'•  Wh«n  flank  compsnics  are  broken  olT  to  p»  s  an 
<.l".tnr1<>,  ilio  K^ncral  guide  on  that  flank  will  iJare  him- 
Belf  eix  pares  in  front  of  the  outer  file  of  the  uoarost  com- 
l>iinv  to  bim  remainlDgin  line. 

TiH).  Tn  tbe  pr^ri-dlnp  movements  it  has  been  supposed 
that  the  lialtalinn  was  marching  in  quick  limo,  but  if  it 
Ih<  marching  in  double  ijnick  time,  and  the  colonel  chall 
wish  to  cause  sereral  contiguous  companies  to  break  to 
the  rear,  he  will  first  order  the  battalion  to  march  in 
<iuick  time;  tbe  companios  will  break  as  indicated  No. 
C02. 

7nl.  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colonel  will 
order  tli''  double  quick  step  to  bo  resuuiwl.  Iln  will  also 
cause  t)io  battalion  to  march  in  quick  time,  when  hp  shall 
widh  to  bring  into  line  the  several  companies  which  are 
to  be  rear  in  column  ;  (lie  movement  will  be  executed  at 
previously  indicated  ;  ami  wlian  the  last  company  gball 
have  nearly  coyipleted  its  niovemcDt,  the  colonel  will 
canse  the  double  quick  step  to  hi  resumed. 

702  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or  of  seve- 
rsl  companies  not  conticnous  to  each  other,  the  battalion 
will  continue  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  but  in  these 
ca«e»  tbe  companies  which  are  t3  ploy  into  column,  or  re- 
enter f'e  line,  will  increase  the  gait. 

70:!.  In  the  march  in  n  treat,  thcsn  several  movements 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  prinolplos  as  if  the  battalion 
marched  bj  tbe  front  rank. 

7C>4.  When  a  battalion,  advancinc  in  lino  of  battle," 
shall  be  ol<liged  to  execute  tbe  right  about  in  order  to 
ri  treat,  if  there  be  companies  in  column,  likhiBd  the  rear 
rank,  those  c<^irapanic8  will  al"o  execute  the  riglit  about, 
put  themselves  in  march,  at  tlie  same  time  with  the  bat- 
liilion,  and  will  tliu<  precede  it  in  the  retreat ;  they  will 
afterwards  succeHslvely  put  themselves  into  lino  by  the 
oblique  step,  as  the  ground  may  permit. 

705.  If  the  battalinn  bo  marching  iu  retreat  in  doiihlo 
f|uick  time,  and  many  contl;:u  jud  companies  be  marching 
iK'fore  the  rear  rank  nf  tli«  battalion,  the  colonel  will  not 
change  tbe  gait  of  the  batliiliou  in  causing  them  to  re- 
enter into  line. 

70<5.  When  the  color-compnny  Bhall  bo  obliged  to  exe- 
iiito  the  movement  of  passing  un  obst>kclu,  the  culor-rank 
will  return  into  lino  at  tbe  mi  luent  the  com])auy  shall 
face  to  the  left  or  rUbt ;  the  m  -Jor  will  jilaco  himself  six 
paces  before  the  extremity  of  the  company  behind  which 
tlie  color-company  marches  in  column,  in  order  to  give 
tlie  step  and  the  direction  ;  he,  himself,  firxt  taking  tbe 
step  from  the  batlBlion. 

707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  returned 
into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-;;iiard  will  again 
move  out  six  paces  In  iront  of  the  ball  ilion,  and  talto 
the  step  from  tbe  major  ;  the  latter  will  immeiliiitely  place 
h'.mself  twenty  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer, 
and  face  to  the  colonel  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the 
battalion,  who  will  cBtabllHh  bim  on  tbe  perpendicular ; 
and,  as  soon  ail  ho  shall  be  assured  on  it,  the  color-boarer 
will  instantly  take  two  points  on  (he  ground  between 
him  self  and  the  maj  jr. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rulo,  that  the  com- 
panies of  the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  tbe  movement 
of  passing  obstacles  by  the  left  flank,  and  the  reverse  for 
the  comptmies  of  the  other  wing  ;  but  if  th"}  obstacle  cover 


at  onre  i<evoral  companies  of  (ho  cant  re,  each  will  file 
into  Column  behind  that,  still  in  line,  and  of  (he  *am* 
wing,  which  may  be  the  nrarent  to  It. 

Articli  Nl.NTH. 
To  jxu*  a  defiU,  in  rrlrtat,  htj    the  right   or  U/l  flank. 

7C0.  When  a  battalion,  retlrins  in  line,  shall  encoun- 
ter a  defile  whjrh  it  must  piut«,  tbe  caloucl  will  halt  the 
battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  frout. 

71U.  It  will  be  Hupposed  that  the  defile  Is  in  roar  of  the 
left  flank,  and  that  its  width  is  suflicienl  to  give  passage 
to  a  column  by  platoon;  the  colonel  wilt  place  a  marker 
fifteen  or  twenty  paces  In  rear  of  the  flle  closers  at  the 
point  around  which  the  subdlTisions  will  have  to  change 
direction  iu  order  to  eu.er  the  d.flle;  lie  will  then  com- 
mand : 

To  the  rear,  by  Ut»  riijhl  flank,  pau  Iht  deftle. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  flrdl  iximpany  will  immediately 
command  : 

1.  t'irtl    conijMHy,    riy'it— Fack.      2.  Mabcii    {or  doubU 
quick — MaBCH. 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will 
commence  the  movement  ;  the  flr^(  flle  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall  have  passed  four 
paces  beyond  the  flle  closers,  when  It  will  wheel  again  to 
the  right,  and  then  direct  itself  straight  lorwtird  towardx 
the  left  flunk.  All  the  other  flies  of  this  company  will 
come  to  wheel  in  succession  at  the  same  place  where  the 
first  had  wheeled. 

7K!.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  time,  the 
eame  movement,  by  the  commands  uf  its  captain,  who 
will  give  the  command  Mabci],  bo  that  the  first  flle  of  his 
company  may  immediately  follow  the  last  of  the  first, 
without  constraint,  however,  at  to  taking  the  step  of  the 
first;  the  first  file  of  the  second  company  will  wlie«^  t<i 
the  right,  on  its  ground  ;  all  tbe  other  tiles  of  this  com- 
pany will  come  in  sncces^son  to  wheel  at  the  Bnme  i  lace. 
Tbe  f'liowing  companies  will  execute,  each  in  its  tnru, 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall  be 
on  the  same  direction  with  thu  first,  lh(T  ciiptalo  of  the 
first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  )>liitoon,  into  line,  and  the 
moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guide  of  the  first  pla- 
toon will  direct  himself  on  tbe  marker  around  whom  be 
has  to  cl.ange  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  dellle. 

"l*!.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  by 
the  Hank,  directing  itself  pariillelly  with  the  lice  of  bat- 
tle ;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  I  y  platoon  int  <  line, 
when  the  third  company  sbull  be  who  ly  un  the  tame 
direction  with  itself. 

710.  The  following  companies  will  suocetsively  execute 
what  has  ju't  l)0"n  prescrl'"  d  for  tlie  second,  and  each 
will  form  by  platoon!  ■  .no,  when  the  next  company 
shall  be  on  the  sitmu  dii>..  to'ii  with  itself. 

717.  The  Hret  pl'itoou  of  ih,'  leading  company  having 
arrived  opposito  to  the  nmrluT  placed  at  the  entrance  of 
the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  mid  the  follow  ing  platoons 
will  all  execute  this  movoinent  at  the  same  P'  int.  As 
the  hist  companios  will  not  bo  able  to  form  platoons  be- 
fore reaching  the  dellle,  they  will  so  direct  themselves  in 
ontoring  It,  as  to  leave  room  to  the  left  of  Ihii  in  ivemunt. 

718.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  di-file  by  platoon; 
and,  aB  the  two  platoons  of  each  comjiany  sliui'  -'ear  it, 
CO  >  panics  will  be  successfully  formed  by  the  meiiiif.  ,udi- 
cated,  school  of  tbe  compiny,  No.  'J!73,  and  following. 

719.  The  head  of  the  column  liavlng  ilearod  the  defile, 
and  bai'lug  reached  the  distance  at  wliich  the  colonel 
wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defile,  ho  may  cause 
the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left,  to  nrolong  tbe 
column  In  that  direction,  ond  then  form  it  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle;  cr  he  may  halt  the  column,  and  form  it 
into  lino  of  battle  faced  to  the  rear. 

720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank,  it 
will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  movement  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  ard  by  inverse  moans. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


71 


721.  If  the  defilo  be  too  narrow  (o  receive  the  front  of 
a  platoon,  it  wiil  be  passed  by  the  flank.  Captaine  and 
file  cloflers  will  be  watchful  that  tbo  files  do  not  lose 
their  distances  in  marching.  Companies  or  platoons  will 
be  formed  into  line  as  the  width  of  the  defile  may  permit, 
or  as  the  compaui     shall  irely  clear  it. 

Article  Tenth. 

o  manh  hj  the  /Ion  . 

723.  The  colonel,  wislung  the  ba'talion  to  march  by  the 
flank,  ho  will  command  : 

1.  BaUalion.    2.  night  (or   Ip/c)—!? &cr..    3.  ForioanL    4. 
Mabch  (or  doiMe    m)c7;— March). 

72."?.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and  coverine 
sergeants  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed,  Nos.  loG 
and  141,  school  of  th«  company. 

721.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  place 
himself  t^he  left  and  by  the  side  of  the  last  file  of  hia 
company,Toveringth6  cuptains  in  file. 

725.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  Ic't  flank,  the 
captains,  at  the  second  command,  will  shift  rapidly  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  and  each  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  covering  .sergeant  of  the  company  preceding 
his  own,  except  the  captain  of  the  left  company,  who  wilt 
place  himselt  b.r  the  side  ef  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  battalion.  The  covering  sergeant  of  i  he  right  com- 
pany will  place  himself  by  the  right  .side  of  the  front 
rank  man  of  the  rearmost  file  of  his  company,  covering 
the  captains  In  file. 

720.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  <fill  stop  off 
with  litV  ;  the  sergeant  placed  before  tho  leading  file 
(right  or  loft  in  front),  will  be  careful  to  preserve  exactly 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  direct  himself 
straight  forward  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  take  points  on  the 
gronnd. 

727.  Whether  tho  baUalion  march  by  the  right  rr  loft 
tlank,  tho  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  abreast 
with  the  loading  file,  and  the  major  abreast  with  the 
color- file,  both  on  the  side  of  tho  front  rank,  and  about 
six  paces  from  it. 

728.  The  .idjutant,  placed  belw"  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel and  the  front  rank,  will  marolj  iu  the  same  step  with 
tho  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  sergeant  major,  ))Iaced 
between  the  major  ard  tho  color-bearer,  will  march  in 
the  same  step  with  tbo  adjutant. 

720.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully  see  that 
the  files  neither  open  ont,  uor  close  too  much,  and  that 
thev  regain  insensibly  their  distances,  if  lost. 

730.  Tho  colonel  wishing  the  batt*liou  to  wheel  by  fi!o 
will  command : 

1.  Bi/  file  ri.jhi  (or  Icjl )    2.  Mahcii 

731.  Tho  files  will  wheel  iu  snctession,  and  all  at  the 
place  wlitre  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conlbrming  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  tho  flank,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will  command  : 


1.  BiilUiUoii.    2.  Halt. 


Front. 


733.  Those  commands  will  be  executed  as  prfcscribod  iu 
the  school  of  the  company,  No.  116. 

734.  If  the  battalion  bo  marching  by  the  flack  and  tho 
colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line,  either  to 
the  front  or  to  tin  rear,  the  movements  will  be  executed 
bv  the  commands  and  moans  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  compiiiy  . 

Article  Eleventh. 

Tn  form  the  Inttation  an  lie  right  or  Ufl,  by  file,  into  line  of 
haUle. 

735.  The  battalion  mirching  by  the  rijjht  fl.ank,  when 
tho  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by  file,  he 
will  detarmiuo  the  lino  of  battle,  ond  the  lieutenant  colo- 


uf  I  will  place  two  markers  on  that  line,   in  conformity 
with  what  is  proscribed.  No.  415. 

736.  Tho  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with  the 
first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  right,  h;/  file  into   lin^.     2.  Mabch   (or  tlonhle 
quick — March.) 

737.  At  the  command  7«mc/j,  the  leading  company  will 
form  itself  on  tho  right,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle,  as  indi- 
cated in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  119  ;  tho  front 
rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest  his  breast  lightly 
againtit  the  ri^ht  arm  of  the  first  marker ;  the  other  com- 
panies wiil  fjUow  the  movement  of  the  leading  company; 
each  cap'oin  will  placo  himself  on  the  line  at  tho  same 
time  with  the  front  rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on  tho 
right  ot  this  man. 

738.  Tho  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  tho 
loading  one,  will  placo  himself  on  th»  direction  of  tho 
markers,  and  opposite  to  ihe  left  file  of  his  company,  at 
the  instant  that  the  front  laukmauof  this  file  arrives  on 
the  line.  ,       ,      .„ 

IVJ.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides— FosTa. 

740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  fuccessive  ferma- 
tion  of  tho  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of  the  line  of 
battle. 

741.  Tho  lieutenant  colonel  will,  in  succession,  assnre 
the  iiirection  of  the  guides,  and  see  that  thu  men  of  tho 
front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  line,  do  not 
pass  it.  ,„,.., 

742.  If  the  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Twelfth. 

CJianges  of  front. 

Change  of  front  j)«rpcndicula7-hj  foricird, 

713.  Tho  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  supposed 
to  bo  the  wish  of  tho  colonel  to  cause  a  change  of  front 
farward  on  tlie  right  cempanj ,  and  that  the  angle  formed 
by  the  old  and  now  positions  be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few 
degrees  more  or  less  than  one  ;  ho  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  on  tbe  new  direction,  before  the  position  to 
be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  order  its  captain  to 
establish  it  against  the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  immediately 
direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  w-heel  to  the  right  on  tho 
Qxed  pivot ;  and  afar  h  iving  halted  it,  he  will  align  it  by 
tho  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made  tho  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Change  front  fonuard  onflrsl  company.    2.  By  company, 
right  haij  wheel.    3.  Makch  (or  rfoiidkijNic/;— March). 

74  J.  At  tho  second  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  tho  centre  of  his  coii.pany. 

717.  At  tho  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guide,  of  each  will  place 
himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass  ;  and 
when  the  colonel  shall  jmlgo  that  the  companies  havo 
sufficiently  whtclod,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Toru-fud.     5.  MARCH,     (i.  Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  tho  companies  ceasing  lo 
wheel  will  march  straight  forward  ;  at  the  sixth,  tho 
men  will  touch  elbowj  towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will  march 
straightforward  until  this  compai  y  Bh»ll  arrive  at  the 
point  where  it  should  lurn  to  the  right  ;  each  sncceediuK 
right  guide  will  follow  the  file  immediately  before  him  at 
the  cessation  of  ths  wheel,  and  will  march  In  the  trace  cf 
this  file  until  this  company  shall  turn  to  the  right  to 
move  upon  the  line  ;  this  guide  will  then  march  straight 
forward. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- -PART  V. 


760.  Th«  Moond  company  hariiiR  arrircd  oppo«lt«  to  tlie 
loft  iili  of  tbi>  fu'-t.  it-  ciiDtniii  uill  rsiiM.  It  to  tarn  to  tho 
ri;:   '      •    -  ■        ■  f  so  •■  to  RrriTO  I 

f'j'  <  II  ho  hliall  be  at 

tl:!       .  .  ■  !  riiiiHii:i:i<l  : 

1.  Soeond  eompamj.    2.  Ukit  | 

751.  At  tho  h.         ■  '.any  will  hiilt  ;  j 

tbR  film  Dol  yc  1 1   com'A  iutu  it  , 

(ironiptly,    till-  I  IfoD  th(t  lino  of 

liattia,  and  a«  mou  no  ii.  i»  a--..'ii-.i  n.  tiw  direction  bytho  ] 
liout«D«iit  colunel,  tlie  c«plaiD  will  align  the  company  by  , 
th^  rlpbt. 

7''          •   -  ••  iny  will  conform  to  what  has  i 

Ji;  ■  'foncl.                                            I 


1  lie  colonel  will  comtnand  : 


6'uiJtJi— Posts, 


761.  If  the  bnttalion  be  in  march,  nnd  tho  colonel  shall  I 
wiih  to  chaDRc  front  forward  on  the  first   company,    and 
thHt  the  angle  f 'rtiK-d  by  the  old  and  now  petitions  be  a^ 
right  ang'e,  lie  will  caime  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the 
new  direction,  before  the  ponitioD  to  be  occupied  by  tbat 
company,  and  will  commat^d  : 

1.  Chanife  frotit  fonrnr<l  on  JirH  cowpoini.     2.  Ihj  comjwny, 
rig)U  h<! If  wheel,    a.  tiAUCJ  (OT  double  quick— ajLacu).** 

"iXt.  At  the  first  command,  tho  captainn  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respective  companies; 
the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  cnnimand  :  1.  I}{<jht 
turn;  2.  Qi/iVl  <iinc  ;  the  captains  of  tho  other  companies 
will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  riRht. 

756.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  company  will  turn 
to  the  right  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  tliu 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402  ;  its  captain  will  halt  it  at 
three  paces  from  the  markers,  ami  the  lllos  in  rear  will 
promptly  come  intj  lino.  The  ciptain  will  align  thecom- 
jany  by  the  right.  _ 

767.  Kach  of  tho  other  compan'ea  will  wheel  to  the  right 
on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guides  will  place  ihemaelvcs  on 
the  left  ot  their  respective  companies,  and  when  the 
colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled  Buflioi'ntly,  he  will 
command : 

4.  I'uncard.     5.  MabcII.     (i.   (luide  rijIU. 

768.  The«e  commands  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No. 
lift  and  following. 

7.'''9.  Tho  ci  lunt  1  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front 
forward  on  the  eighth  company  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Clianyc  of  front  perpendiailarly  to  llif  rear. 

700.  Tho  cilonfl,  wishing  d)  change  front  to  tin  roar 
on  tho  right  cumpany,  will  impart  his  purpose  to  the  cap- 
tain of  this  company.  The  latter  will  imniodiatoly  face 
his  company  about,  wheel  it  t<j  the  left  on  tho  fixed  pivot, 
and  ha  t  it  when  it  shall  Im-  in  the  <lirection  indicated  to 
him  by  the  colonel  ;  the  captiiin  will  then  face  his  com- 
pany to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  riitht  atrainst  the 
two  markers,  whom  the  colonel  will  cause  to  bo  ohtib- 
lished  before  the  right  and  left  files. 

7C1.  Those  dispositions  b'^iog  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  r»nr,  on  ftr^t  compn n>i .  2.  JiaUaUon, 
about — Face.  'i.  J3iicompany,lrflhalf  whrel.  4,  MAItou 
(or  double  fyiiict— Makcu). 

702.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except 
the  right,  will  face  about. 

70S.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whoso  componies  have 
ficed  about,  will  each  i>Iace  himself  behind  the  centre  of 
his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front  rank,  now  tho 
roar. 

704.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  tho  rear  r.auk  ;  the  left  guide 


of  each  will.MRoen  aihe  ii  able  to  pMs,  pUco  bimself  on 
the  left  of  the  rear  rank  d  his  company,  now  becom*  Uie 
right:  and  when  the  colonel  shall  Judge  tbat  tbo  compa- 
nies have  KuQlciently  wheeled,  he  will  command  : 

5.  Fortran!.     0.  M.lEcn.     7.  Guide  lefl. 

7G5.  At  the  sixth  command,  tho  companies  w'll  cease  to 
wheel,  march  straight  firward  t  >wards  the  new  line  of 
batilu.  and,  at  the  sevcuth,  tuko  the  touch  cf  tho  elbow 
towirds  tho  Uft. 

700.  Tho  guide  of  each  company  on  iti  right  flank, 
become  left,  will  coafunn  bimsiclf  to  tbo  principles  pre- 
scribed, ^o.  748. 

707.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having  ar- 
rived oppo8it<>  to  the  lolt  of  the  first,  will  turn  to  the  left  : 
tie  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive  parallelly 
with  t::eline  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and  when  the 
front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  Im  thr^e  paces  beyond 
it,  tho  captain  will  cnimand:  1.  t^cund  cuiiipaiitj ;  2. 
Halt. 

7(9.  At  (he  second  command,  the  company  will  halt; 
the  files  which  may  not  yet  be  In  lino  with  tke  guide,  will 
prcilijtly  comn  into  it ;  tho  captaiu  will  ctuso  the  com- 
pany to  facs  about,  and  then  ali/n  it  by  tho  light. 

70'.).  All  the  other  <•  iiipanies.will  t.vecuti-  what  ba^  Just 
bei'u  prescribed  for  too  Hocond,  each  as  it  suooossively 
arrives  opposite  to  the  loft  of  tho  company  that  precedes 
it  on  the  new  lin»  of  battle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  tho  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

(.'l(l(f0S— roSTB. 

771.  Tbocoloufl  will  cause  o  change  of  front  on  the 
left  company  of  the  battalion  to  tho  rear,  according  to  the 
sanio  principles  and  by  inverse  moans. 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  tho  colonel  will  give  a  gene- 
ral fuporintoiidonce  to  the  movement. 

77.1.  Tho  liintciiunt  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of 
the  guides  as  they  succosHivoly  move  out  on  the  line  of 
battle,  conforniiQK  hiuMolf  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
In  tbo  Bucccsiive  formations. 

remarks  on  chan/jes  of  front. 

774.  Wheu  tho  new  direction  IsperpendicuUr,  or  nearly 
so,  to  that  of  the  hatulion,  the  companies  ouiiht  to  maku 
about  a  hilf  wheel  (tho  eighth  of  tho  circle)  hef.ire  march- 
ing straight  forward;  but  when  those  two  lines  are 
oblique  to  each  oth.T.  tho  Kinnllor  the  angle  which  they 
firm,  the  less  ought  tho  conipiinies  to  wheel.  It  is  fir  the 
colonel  to  judge,  Hccording  ti>  tli  i  iiu«le,  tho  tirecise  time 
when  ho  ought  to  give  tho  command  viarcli,  after  tho 
caution  forward,  if  he  cannot  catch  the  oxact  moment, 
tho  word  of  execution  blioiiM  rather  bo  given  a  littlo  too 
soon,  than  an  instant  too  bile. 

775.  \Vbcn  the  old  and  the  new  lines  form  an  angle  of 
forty-flvo  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel  Will  Iin<1  it  neces- 
sary to  arrest  lli  >  whoel  of  the  companies  wli  'n  thf> 
marching  flanks  shall  have  taken  but  n  IVw  poci  h.  er,  it 
may  bo,  have  but  disonciigod,  respectively,  from  the  fixed 
pivots  of  tho  next  companies ;  a'.d  in  all  such  coiies.  tho 
companies  will  arrive  so  nearly  pamllel  to  tho  new  line, 
as  to  be  able  to  align  llu>mi<elveH  upon  It  without  th" 
intermediate  turn  to  the  right  or  left;  to  exocnto  the 
movement  under  lither  circumstance  supp.isod,  tho  colo- 
nel will  commaud  : 

Obliqne  change  of  front,  fun'card  (or  to  (he  rear)  on  {such 
company). 


Abticlb   TuIBTE£N'TII. 

To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the  centre. 

770.  This  movomnut  consists  in  ployicg  tho  correspond- 
ing companies  of  tho  right  and  left  wings  into  column  at 
company  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  in  rear  of  the  two 
centre  companies,  eccordlug  to  the  principles  profcribed, 
Arliclo  Third,  Part  Second,  of  this  .School. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


73 


777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double  column  i 
at  company  distance,  (the  battalion  being  in  line  of  bat-  ] 
tie,)  will  command  :  ] 

1.  Double  cohimn.al  haJf  distanci.    2.  Bailal ion  inwards— 
Facb.    3.  Mabcu  (or  double  quick — Mai*:h). 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  in  front  (  f  their  renpective  compa- 
nies ;  the  captains  of  the  two  centre  com  Dailies  will  cau- 
tion them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  captains  will  can- 
tion  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and  right,  respec- 
tively. Ihe  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  front 
rank. 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  Btatid  fast  ;  the  othors  of  the  right  wing  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left  wing  will  fuce 

^  to  the  right ;  eaoh  ciiptaiu  whose  company  hag  faced,  will 
hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  files  at  the  head  «f  his 
company  ;  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company,  and  the 
right  guide  of  lach  loft  company,  will  each  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  its  front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side 
Of  his  guide. 

780.  At  the  command'marc7i,  the  foHrth  and  fifth  com- 
panies, which  are  to  form  the  fifth  division,  will  stand 
fast ;  the  senior  captain  of  the  two  will  place  himself  be- 
fore the  centre  of  the  division,  and  command  :  Ouide 
right ;  iho  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  inter- 
val between  the  two  companies,  and  the  left  guide  of  the 
left  company  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank  on  the 
left  of  the  division,  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their  cap- 
tains, will  step  eff  with  life  to  arrange  themselves  in 
column  at  company  distance,  esch  company  behind  the 
preceding  one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so  that, 
in  the  right  wing,  the  third  may  be  next  behind  the 
fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to  the  right 
company  ;  and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth  may  be  next 
behind  the  fifth,  ths  seventh  next  to  the  sixth,  and  so  on 
to  the  left  company  of  the  battalioir* 

7S2.  Tho  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings 
will  unite  into  divisions  in  arranging  themselves  In 
colamn  ;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  tho  centre  of  the 
column,  tho  loft  guides  of  right  companies  will  pass  into 
the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain  will  command  : 
1.  Such  company  ;  2.  IlaU ;  3.  Front. 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt ;  at  the  third 
it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  captain  in  each  divi- 
sion will  place  himself  on  his  right,  and  command,  Right 
— DftESB,  and  the  junior  captain  will  place  hionsolf  in  the 
interval  between  the  two  companies.  Tho  division  being 
aligned,  its  chief  will  command  Front,  and  take  his  posi- 
tion twoL^iftces  before  Its  centre. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions  will 
take  tho  respective  denominations  of  fint,  secoitd,  third, 
Ac,  according  to  position  In  the  column,  beginning  at 
the  front. 

785.  The  lienfenant  colonel,  who,  at  the  second  com- 
mand given  by  the  colonel,  will  have  placed  himself  at  a 
little  more  than  company  distance  in  roar  of  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  right  gnides  on 
tli»  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  by  idacing  him- 
self in  their  rear. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the  double 
column  at  company  distance  without  hailing  the  bat- 
talion, tho  company  will  command  : 

1.  Doitble  rnlumn  at  half  di<,l/t»ct.    2.  BaUalion  by  the  right 
and  left  flanks.    3.  March  (or  douhU  (jtucit— Mabch  ) 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  c  mpany  ;  the  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their  companies  to 
move  straight  forward  ;  the  other  captains  will  caution 
the'r  companies  to  f^co  to  tho  right  and  left. 

789.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  ;  the 
senior  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centra  of  his 
illvhloii  and  command,  Chtvt(  right ;    the  Junior  cftptalu 

10 


will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  com- 
panies. The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company  will  place 
himself  on  the  lett  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division.  The 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  Thecolor 
and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places.  The  three 
right  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left 
companies  will  face  t*  the  righf.  Each  captain  will  break 
to  the  rear  two  files  at  the  head  of  his  Bompany;  the  left 
gnides  of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the 
leftconipanios,  will  encli  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank  of  his  cumpauy,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of 
his  guide. 

700.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
column  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first  divi- 
sion. Each  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like  manner, 
place  itself  behind  the  company  of  tho  wing  to  which  It 
belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as  much  ground  at 
possible  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

791.  Tho  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing  will 
unite  into  divisioBs  on  taking  their  positions  in  column, 
and  each  captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his  company  ar- 
rives at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will  command,  1.  Stich 
company  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.  2.  March.  The  eonior 
captain  of  the  two  compaoiws  will  place  himself  in  front  of 
the  centre  ef  his  division,  and  command.  Guide  right ;  the 
junior  captain  will  plf.ce  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies.  The  two  companies  thus  formed  into 
a  division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  tho  right,  and 
when  each  division  has  gained  its  proper  distance,  its 
chipf  will  cause  it  to  march  in  (juick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  odd  number  of 
companies,  the  formation  will  be  made  in  like  manner, 
and  the  compony  on  either  llnnk  which  shall  find  itself 
without  a  corresponding  one,  will  place  itse  f  at  company 
distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it  belonp;<. 

79J.  Tho  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be  formed 
according  to  the  same  princiiles  and  by  /he  same  com- 
mands, substituting  the  Indication,  closed  in  mass,  for  that 
of  cU  half  distance. 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when  two 
or  more  battalions  are  to  be  In  one  general  column,  it  will 
babitnally  take  the  guideto  tbe  right,  sometimes  to  the 
left,  or  in  the  centre  of  the  column  ;  in  the  last  case,  the 
command  will  be,  y»!'rfe  criiir?.  The  column  will  march 
and  change  direction  according  to  tha  principles  pre- 
scribed for  a  simple  column  by  division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  will  be 
closed  in  mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take  half  distance,  by 
tho  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a  simple  colnniii 
by  division. 

Deployment  of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front. 

.  796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double  cnlnmn, 
will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the  light  and 
left  files  of  thfl  first  division,  and  a  third  before  the  left 
file  of  the  right  company,  same  division;  which  being 
done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general  guides  to  spring 
out  on  the  alignment  of  tho  markers  a  little  beyond  the 
points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  tho  battalion 
ought  to  rest;    ho  will  then  command: 

1.    Deploy  column.     2.    Battalion  outwards— T A  ce. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

797.  Tho  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  coni- 
panies  at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  the  deployment  of  culurans  in  mass.  The  captains 
of  these  compani>>s  will  each,  at  the  command  march, 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  bis  company,  and  align  it 
by  the  right  ;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  will  them  place 
himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  in 
the  rank  of  file  closers,  at  the  moment  the  captain  of 
third  shall  come  to  its  left  to  align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

799.  If  it  be  Ihe  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the  tiie 
to  commence  pending  the  deployment,  he  -will  give  to 
order  tj  that  effect  tu  thu  captains  of  the  fonrth  and  fiftii 


74 


SCHOOL  or  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


roTipnTiloi,  a-»i1  th?  flr'  «lll  bi  czeoit:d  acv>.dIog  to  the 
pii  ci|l  <  vrO'cr.b  d  K  '.  4:i6 

8><>.  TUi  to<t-l>>u  bri  K  <n  4onble  orlomn  ard  in 
ini!ca,  •{  tU<-r.],a  1  tb  11  «'>«li  t>d  pi'7  H  witDuut 
bill'i'K  t' •  ■  ril  im  1.  ho  wU  cnuta  tlifee  njirkT*  lo  t^e 
posted  nn  thp  li<.e  ul  h<tC  l-i  Hud  wlien  the  Ix-od  '  f  ibti  col- 
UoiD  tU'll  urnr*  luar  tli«  mirkur*,  hn  Mill  ommtod  : 

I.  J)tphfo1'm»      2    C  (n'mn   by  (h«rtyVafid /^</IaltJl«. 

A.    J1*IUI    {OT  lieublt  Iju^k  -  Jl  A  II' Ik). 

fOl  Tho  c  1 1  uD  w  II  leiliyon  ibs  two  leading  com- 
pil>.U<.  hcc>'a<iiii  to  li»  (jnir  i|l--  f.r.  «cr"i-il  I  r  ilie 
o«il  •>mi.i  f  «  0  "  ec  1  iiu  ■.  N  •  531  »•  <!  f  11  .wmg;  at 
tb«  0"Ui'ii«ud  march  tiie  ciii  f  wf  I «<  Grit  d  viiiuu  »i  i 
b>l  1%  H'l  ih<-  c>i-'al<"< '  f 'l>e  lOi.lb  Hiiu  fliili  cumjia- 
nis-  W.  I  •  1  i;ii  Ibeir  c  wpantes  b .  <  be  r  glit. 

8  2.  riiiu  <c<luin  <  bit  III  u-r.h,  und  ii  l«  ih*  vltb  <  f 
tlix  I'l  Ii' I  lA  ne|.l>y  ttif  ool  nil  Kn)  to  coi  t  nue  to 
liiarcii  III  liiC  uid-r  ot  •>  III  ■.  I>(i  »il'  li<  t  CuUie  tn  i  t'l-r* 
t'>  la  I'S'iil'lirhttl  Ht  tue  h  al  •Till  c  lumn.  I'l,»  moVr- 
in-ii(  Mill  be  t-xecnu-d  l>>  t  o  loi.  m •bill  ubd  lurHiiS  io- 
diCileJ  «u.  &UU  ob-eiviiff  uimt  f  .1  i«ra.  At  tl.o  fliSt 
C'>'ii  liii 'f1,  tbe  c'liel  til;  flrnt  ■ii\lM.iD  will  c'>uit>  ami, 
Q»ide  Hint  At  ih^  c>iiiiiiiafi<l  tnircA  the  tl  Bt  dinaii  u 
viii  .<iii  iiiiin  >o  iiitrch  III  «{<i'ck  lima;  ilit^  n  1  l- 1  xfii 
c  mm  id  Gil  d*  c  nirt.  ibu  <  xpuius  uf  ibe  lumlh  m  d 
Sr  tl  c  m^i'iu  B  ,  itiu  t'  1  >r.  Hid  itis  ui-n.  lit  imiii<di- 
n  ly  •uui-irm  to  tli>-  pr  iiiKili'*  oi  ibo  ma'cb  lu  Mae  if 
bi'in.  Ibo  to  '  p  ii'leo  w  1.  t  ke  t) «  q  ick  auip  by  thu 
Ci/iam  lid  of  ILer  cnptil  n-,  ««  ticy  iUtCJ»»lv  y  HrriVe  li> 
)>ii-.  X'lv  iii{ivi  mi-iii  c  mpittfil.  ilie  .  uiuiiul  may  cause 
b&ilaliuD  to  tuarch  lu  duut^io  qii;ck  limo. 

To  form  On  doubU  column  itlo  lint  qf  biUU,  /aetd  to  lh» 
rijjkt  or  ItjX. 

t03.  Tbe  d?<ilila  C'>lim'),  being  nt  company  diitaiiM 
Atiil  <kt  H  ht't  m ly  Id  I-iiuad  i  lu  lliiu  of  bt< t  a  facoi  to 
tUu  ruin  '  r  iri>  ;  wU  n  tiiu  >'0'i)n<!l  iibiil  wlib  to  tjim  it 
t..cuJ  lo  lUx  ricbi,  hi  wiU  >.ommitud  : 

1.  T.itihl  inln  line  toAee'.  U/l  companiei  on  the  right  into 
lii».  2  Ux  Ulijn,  guidi  riylU  3.  Makch  (or  doubl* 
^ick  —  'il.i.tiCu). 

8H.  At  the  drat  commaDd,  encb  onptaln  will  place 
bt  i.Kcif  b<  f  <re  ibe  centre  of  bid  csuipiny;  the  right 
om^aoles  will  b:  cautloued  thtt  they  ulil  bave  to  wheel 
t-i.lie  rk'ht  iiitaliue,  tLelat  coup^Uiua  tbat  tboy  will 
have  t  '  uiiich  biralght  turwar  I. 

8  3  At  >Iju  Hiciiid  comtiiaiid,  tbe  left  gnldo  of  the 
fourth  rnmpary  will  place  himxelf  brUkly  oa  (be  direc- 
tion cf  thu  riglit  ^iiiJi/R  nf  Ml'  coiuiiiii,  lucu  to  iIkiu,  an  I 
oppoaite  to  t>.,a  ot  the  three  laat  fili-a  uf  bia  c  iiiimDy 
wben  in  line  or  buttle;  the  lieuteuant-colonel  will  atauru 
b.m  la  that  posiiloi:. 

bOO  Allliec  mmaiid  marcA,  briakly  repented  l>y  bII  tbe 
captaioa,  the  ri^lit  C'lnipinica  will  form  to  t  o  right  into 
line  of  I  Attle,  thu  left  c^'ini'aaiea  wlil  put  themwiTea  lu 
niiirob  Id  order  to  form  on  tb«  iiKlit  into  lino  of  battle; 
tbui«  orniait'iuH  will  becxiiriited  by  themciiuii  indicated 
Ho.  391  and  lolloping.  No.  'lIC  und  lollowliu  ;  ibo  lioutoii- 
HDt-coloual  will  HHBuro  tbe  ku'<1>'k  of  the  lo't  ving  oD  tbe 
Udr  of  iHtile  aa  they  aiiciieaiitvoly  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  tbe  columu  be  lo  march,  the  colouel  will  com- 
maud : 

1.  B'glit  xnto  Unt  icheel.  1.  Jjtt  oompinxti,  on  tht  right 
into  line.  3.  Unit  lim,  guiit  rijht.  4.  Ma.uch  (or 
doMt  quick  -JIakch). 

803  At  t  ■«  fl-«t  commnn',  eich  oaptnln  will  place 
hiiiigelf  promptly  b  fire  the  cuiitre  of  bin  c  mpany  ;  tbe 
T  Kht  compaiila-i  wM  be  cautioned  that  tb  •}•  will  have  to 
wU  el  to  th'i  inht  and  the  1' ft  lompuiic*  thit  they 
■will  hive  to  f.im  OD  ilierl/ht  ntoline.  i  hef"  form  alonu 
"(111    \t'i   exiculej   uj  prescillHd    ti«»  iOZ.iM,  and    lol- 

°8lo.  If  the  colotel  should  wish  to  move  the  b.ittallon 


forvrnri}.  at  the  momi-'iit  ih*  r'fcht  compaAUa  hara  com- 
pleted tba  whtfel,  b«  wi  I  C'.mio«nd  : 

6.  .fbrvard.    6    MiiBcn  (or  do*Ale  ^icir— Mibcb). 

811.  At  the  ccmmnnd  fono  rd,  tVie  rupiaioa  of  <b« 
rlf^ht  comt>anl'M  will  c<i  m«<id.  Qui-klmt  At  t  a 
c  >  mHtid  march  ih  right  c  mpaoie <  »l'i  cI-h«i»  to  wheal 
and  maicb  mralg.'it  l>ir«raid.  'Iba  clonal  will  tbaa 
add: 

7.  GiUdtc«nti: 

812.  "h**  m"Tem'nt  of  the  loft  cnmpanici  will  b'<ezec«- 
trd  ID  doi.b'e  qii  ck  time  rk  prvcilbed  hbo*r,  ai  d  a«  'hey 
ai  r  re  on  th>-  line  p.-.cb  capt  in  will  cnaie  bla  compatiy  to 
uiaic'i  in  qui)  k  t  rao. 

8i3  Th-3  cii'uran  may  be  f  ritifd  faced  t<  the  lifi  int« 
line  I  f  bit  le  nciordinir  to  the  >ame  princlplei. 

£14  If  the  colum  i  be  cln-iol  in  mils')  I '  Rie<«d  '  fat  com- 
pnny  dia  ance,  t..fs'  m'jvcnie.  la  «lll  be  <"Tern»fd  ac- 
(orilttjg  to  tD'3  prJD^ipKa  iruscr.bod  No«.  417,  603,  aod 
6l0. 

Jiemark  on  tht  dtp^oymenl  of  tht  douliU  column, 

81&.  Thedrpthof  ilm  d'^uble  c  lumn,  at  compary  dla- 
tniicp,  I  I'll  K  InMiimlileriibli'.  c] '»iUK 't  in  mnaa,  ii  at  a 
b  It,  in  uriii-r  t.>  d"i'l'<>  li.  ma}  bi>  Irpensed  w  ib  ;  bjt  If 
It  be  lu  tuarcli,  it  will  L>«  i TolcrubU  t  cauit:  ilao  to  cloae, 
lu  halting,  l>clore  drploi  i"g. 

8 I'l.  The  duub  e  c  iluruu  ulU  h«  d«>plo^ed  habiti  ally  oo 
the  K-ntre  coiii|miiii-a.  but  ttic  colvijt-l  ninv  aumrilmta  dr- 
pi  \  It  uu  any  iai.iior  tuiii^any,  or  on  lb*  brat  or  eikhlb 
cjiiipauy. 

AETICLS    FOCRriEWTH. 

D'lpositioni  againit    dvalry. 

617.  A  ha'tall  n  being  In  crlum-  by  e<  mpaoy,  at  fbU 
dlat^uce  right  in  troDt,  a'd  nt  nhsl',  wlou  b<!  Colunal 
KbHll  wish  t>  f  rni  It  Into  sqnaie,  be  will  fir  t  CoHM 
di  l>ioa3  to  te  foruitd  ;  wbicb  bcii.g  doLe,  he  will  cum- 
laaud: 

1.  To  form  tqnart.     2.  To  half  distanet,  clou  column,     t. 
XtiAHCB  (or  double  quick — Uahcu). 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  cirae  to 
company  diatai  ce,  the  aicouu  .  Ivi»iun  taklQjj  ita  dlataoca 
,rom  tbe  re^r  nink  o'  thn  limt  diviaioii. 

819.  At  tb  m  ni>'iit  of  halting  ih»  fourth  divlalOD,  the 
fill  clotera  ol  euch  con  puny  ui  which  it  la  compuaad, 
pana  vii  l>y  the  ouiur  fltiik  "I  tholr  cumpaniea  will  piac« 
.heinse'Tea  two  pHces  bL-li  re  the  fr.  nt  rank  oppos  le  to 
t>  cir  respvclive  ilacis  lu  liue  of  battle,  aud  face  towarda 
ibi'  hta  t  of  (ha  coliiuin  , 

S20.  At  the  coiumonccment  of  tbe  raoTement,  the  m«J"r 
will  place  himvoif  oD  the  riKbt  of  the  column  abreaat  wilb 
Ibo  fli'Nt  divmlon  ;  the  biiKli-ra  tornifd  luio  I  wo  ranka  will 
placH  thi'iuM'hca  at  p!aI<on  ilia. ance,  behiud  tbe  inner 
I  latooUB  of  the  -ecoid  alvi»lon. 

821.  Iheaa  diapoaitiou-  bi  log  made,  tbe  colonel  may, 
ac<xjrdlng  to  cir.  uui'st:iiicoa,  put  the  culuuin  to  nmrcb,  or 
ciiuBu  it  tu  foira  »  aquiue  ;  If  be  wiab  to  do  the  latter,  ha 
willcommaad  : 

1.  Form  Sqitart.    2,  Bight  andjifl  into  lint,  whti. 

822.  At  the  flrat  conimind,  the  llo'it«'nant  colonel,  fac- 
ing to  the  loft  Kii  de'i,  and  the  major,  fnc  ng  to  thoea  of 
tb<<  riiiht.  will  align  the<a  th-m.  imm  ibe  iront,  on  the 
respecivH  y^a\  ca  .  f  tin- lou'th  «'iv|  iou.  who  will  atand 
fa-t  holding  lip  their  piece,  Inveried,  pHrpenrilculaily  ; 
tbo  right  K  ddo".  In  plKclnn  thfrn^elves  on  tbe  direction, 
will  I  ke  their  exact  tlii.tance'i. 

82:1.  At  the  ai'iond  commanl,  the  chief  of  the  first 
'livitiou  will  caution  If  t)  Htand  fmt ;  all  the  captalna  of 
ihu  lecond  anil  third  d.vliioiiB  will  place  themselTes  be- 
fore the  ■  entres  of  lh«  r  ri'BpectIV'' lonipaulea.  and  oau- 
tioQ  them  that  they  will  hivb  to  wlieol.  the  right  com:i»- 
ulea  to  the  rli^bt,  and  the  lufc  companies  to  tbe  left  Into 
lluo  of  battle. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOIST— PART  V. 


T5 


S24.  The  color  bearer -will  stot>  bark  Into  the  line  of 
fl'e  closers  opposite  to  liU  plare  In  line  of  liait  e,  Bnrl 
will  be  replace'!  by  'he  oorpoial  of  his  fi'o,  who  Is  in  the 
rear  rank  ;  ihe  corpriral  of  ttie  mm-^  file  who  is  in  the 
rank  of  tile  elisors  will  stpp  into  ther^ar  rank. 

825  The  chief  of  the  furth  division  will  couimand  : 
1.  Iburlh  divUion  forward.  2  Guide  left,  and  |..laCB  birn 
self  at  the  8>iint)  lime  two  paces   outride  of  ihe  left  fljok. 

826.  These  dl8po3ltioDd  ended,  ihe  colonel  nill  com- 
mind: 

March  (or  douhU  jutcfe— Maech.) 

827.  At  this  command,  briskly  rt  rented,  the  first  dl^l- 
Bion  will  stand  fait;  but  Its  right  fll»  will  f  c«  to  the 
right,  And  I  s  left  file  to  the  left 

828.  The  oompatiiea  of  the  ^ei'ond  and  lhlr<1  dlTlsions 
will  wheel  to  the  right  nnd  left  into  line,  and  the  buglers 
will  advance  a  s  ace  equal  to  th»  froi.t  of  a  c(>mp>iuy. 

820.  ThH  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
Bqnare.  and  when  it  ^ball  ha\o  closed,  the  chief  will  hul  t 
it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  1  y  the  riar  rank  upon  the 
Ruides  of  the  division,  who  will,  f>r  this  purpose,  ifaiiiin 
fecfd  to  Ihe  f  ont.  The  junior  laptain  will  p:is8  into  the 
re.ir  rank,  now  becoi  e  tbe  trout,  anl  t  e  covrlng  sor- 
reant  of  the  left  corapiny  will  place  himseif  buhl;  d  lilm, 
in  the  front  tank,  bee  me  rear.  Tlie  tile  ci  i.-ers  will,  at 
the  same  tlm  ,  close  n  '  a  puce  on  the  front  rank,  and  the 
oater  flie  on  each  fl.ink  of  the  divisi  n  wiil  ftio  >  outward-. 

890.  The  square  beli^g  formed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Gui'rfes— Posts. 

831.  At  this  crmra'ind,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
fourth  divisions, as  w  II  as  th>)  guides,  will  enter  the 
squ'ire. 

632  The  captains  whose  cnrapanies  have  formed  to  the 
right  into  line,  wiil  remnin  on  the  kft  of  their  compa- 
nies: the  left  guide  of  •  ach  of  (hose  companies  will,  in 
the  rear  rank,  covj'r  his  captalu,  and  the  covering  ser- 
fteant  of  each  will  place  himselt  as  a  file  closer  behind 
the  riiht  file  of  his  compHny. 

8,S3,  The  field  and  stalT  will  enter  the  square,  tl  e  lieu- 
tenant colonel  placinir  himself  behind  the  left,  and  the 
mf  jor  behind  the  right  of  the  first  division. 

814  If  the  battalion  presenf  ten,  Instf'ad  rf  eight 
eompanie'.  th«  fnurti  (<ivision  will  make  the  sumo  move 
ments  prescribed  above  fir  the  se  oi.d  and  third  liivl^ons, 
and  the  fifth,  the  movements  prescribe!  for  the  fourth 
division 

hy>.  A  batta'ion  ought  cever  to  presen*',  near  fio 
enemy's  cava  ry,  an  odd  lo  pany.  Tbe  odd  company, 
under  that  oircumstacoe,  ought,  whei  the  battalion  is 
under  arm",  to  be  consolidated,  f^r  the  time,  with  the 
other  companies. 

836  1  he  fronts  rf  'he  Fq'iare  will  be  de">  gnnfed  bs  fnl- 
lows:  the  flrpt  divisi 'n  nil  nlways  bi  the  first  front  ■ 
the  lH*t  division,  iliH^/bttrCi  front  ;  the-  right  Ci'nipnuies  "f 
the  other  dvp|^n<  will  f  iMi  ihf  fee  ndfr  n<;  nnj  iho  left 
oompanies  of  ih'?  S!»m>  d*vi  ions  iha  third  front. 

i-tl.  A  biit'ali  on  h>  Ing  In  column  hy  cinpatpy,  at  full 
distance,  rig'it  in  front,  and  In  miroh.  wh'n  il  e  cJonel 
■hall  wish  t.>  f  rm  s  owre.  he  will  c-in-e  this  movemi  .t 
to  bA  <xtrcuted  by  thucimoiands  and  means  ind.ca  e  . 
No.  817. 

f88  At  the  cimmind  mirch.  theolnmnvl'l  rlote  to 
enropanv  dlsttnre  hs  H  prisi^rii-ed.  No.  v7.^  Wh-a  tho 
el'lef  of  the  f  U' tb  dlvi-ioti  shall  command  Quick  m  rch. 
the  file  closers  o  this  divUioa  wiU  pliico  ihemaclvod  betore 
the  front  rank. 

839  The  mijor  and  the  bugles  will  conform    to  what  Is 

preFcrlO'd,  Nu     820. 

840  irihecolunel  ehill  wish  to  form  square,  be  will 
•omiuabd  : 

1.  Farm,  tquare.    2.  Itight   avd  left   into  line,    whetl.    3. 
Mau.  h. 

811.  A*  th  •  first  co-i  min  ',  the  c'iff  of  th^  first  divis 
Kin  wil  cintion  It  to  t.alt  ;  all  the  captans  i  f  the  sect  ni 
•ndihir.idivulonswlll  rapidly  pUce  th(m3elve5  bettro 
tb«  ceLtr©«  of   their  tesptciive   companies,  and  cauiion 


thrra  that  tVey  will  hsre  to  whe'l.  the  right  cim- 
panics 'o  tie  rig'it  and  tie  rft  cmpinies  to  tho  left  Into 
lino.  Tho  chiet  of  tie  fiunh  (llvisi.u  will  ca-tjon  It  to 
continue  lis  inarch,  and  wi  I  hasten  to  i's  left  fl  ink.  At 
the  third  commurd,  hil-kly  repeated,  the  chief  of  the 
first  divlbion  wil  halt  Ills  divipl  m  and  aMgu  It  to  tho 
loft,  the  (>uter  files  will  f.co  to  the  righr  and  efr,  the  rtst 
of  the  moviment  win  be  executed  as  .  rescribtd  ^o.  B.:8 
and  following 

612  The  I'eu'erant  colonel  snd  tho  mpjir.  at  tho 
command  march,  will  ooBf  im  to  whit  Is  p  escribed,  No. 
822. 

t43.  If  Ihe  haftnllon,  before  the  sqtiare  la  forn'sd,  beln 
double  CO  nmn,  the  t*")  leading  comi  auiea  w  li  f  irn  tho 
first  'rout,  Ihe  wo  rear  companies  thetonrili  ;  iheoih  r 
companies  1 1  the  right  t  elf  baiia'i  n  will  f'rni  the  fee  tij, 
anl   th  i-e  of  the  !■  (t  ha  f  Dittaiion  the  tlur  1  tiout. 

f44.  The  fir.tt  and  fourth  fronts  will  bo  commau(?e1  by 
the  chiefs  ot  tho  fist  aid  f  >  rth  divisions;  e.ch  uf  the 
other  t«o  by  its  81  nior  cnpialn. 

845.  The  commmder  of  each  front  will  place  himself 
four  paces  be  iud  its  pre'^eit  renr  rnnk,  <nfi  wil  be  ro- 
plxced  m  imen'arily  in  the  commaud  f  bis  cmipuny  by 
the  ne.vt  in  rank  therein. 

846.  If  the  column  bi  at  full  d  sla^ce.  Instead  of  at  com- 
pauy  dIstHuce,  as  has  been  supposed,    the  fq  nrowlH  be 
lornied  in  the  manner  presciibed.  No.  8.7or848  and  fot 
lowing  ;  and  the  difpos' tioin  indic«fed,  Nos.  810  and  t20, 
will  be  executed  at  the  command  form  square. 

847.  If  the  column  bydivisioft,  whether  double  or  sim- 
ple, be  in  ma>s,  and  the  colonel  shall  with  to  f  im  it  into 
square,  he  will  first  caitse  it  to  take  Cumpany  distance  ; 
to  this  eO'tct  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  squire.    2.  By  the  head  of  lolumn,  take  ftj// 
distance. 

F48.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the  mrnns 
indicated.  No.  S24.  and  following.  What  is  prescribed. 
No.  820,  will  bB  executed  as  the  first  and  tecoud  divisions 
are  put  In  motion. 

840.  The  colon  1  will  halt  the  column  the  moment  Ihe 
third  divi^ion  shall  have  it  distance.  As  soon  ai  the 
column  is  halted,  the  disipositions  li  dicated.  No  810  will 
be  executed,  and  when  these  are  completed,  tho  colonel 
may  proceed  to  forns  square. 

860.  If  tbe  column  be  in  march,  he  '^\d^  also,  in  tb9 
fi'Bt  piece,  cause  coinpanv  liistance  to  be  rak«Li,  and,  for 
this  purpose,  will  oommaml  : 

1.  To  form  tquare.    2.  By  the  head  of  column,  tfihe  half  dlt- 
tance.    8.  M.^&ca  yOf  double  ijuick-'M.^KCii.) 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  aspre'cribrd  I^o- 
33J,  and  lollowing.  What  is  pn  sorioed.  No.  (j2 '.  will  b« 
eYucTited  as  the  first  aid  second  ulvhl  ns  aie  put  lu  mo- 
tion. 

i5i.  Tbe  cf  lonel  will  proceoil  to  form  tqn«re  tho  me- 
m>M.t  tbe  ilrr.i  divlnl  n  shall  have  it^mlMan  «;  Ht  iho 
c  mniaii  I  form  square  th-i  'il<p  si'l  ns  insicitid.  No. 
fli)  will  b- exiciiert  If  It  le  iiiiended  merely  to  d«fi04« 
the  column  for  square,  tho  Colonel  win  net  hall  tlie  u^iuuia 
ut  to  lU    Ina    iiivrMH  u  hn-  lis  (Imiiii  CO 

!-53.  lu  a  f'impio  (U  mnR,  I.  tc  in  front  fhe.ie  feveral 
movemetilti  wlii  h  txfC  itod  Hccmriing  '»  the  Mii«  )  r  ncU 
p  ei  ai  d  l'\  imerse  Uiians  ;  hnl;  Ihe  fr  nta  <  I  iLeK,t)iio 
will  '  ave  the  ranie  design,  t  ■ti'*  hm  If  ihn  I'g'i'  ol  the 
clnmn  -ere  in  front,  ih  i,  is,  the  first  diviri.n  will  con. 
Mltme  the  firwt  Iron     and  th  w  ..I  tne  other  8ubdivi,|i,i  g. 

8^4.  Ihe  ha'tHllon  being  f.rined  into^qutre.  wh^u  the 
coj.  uel  shall  wish  to  c•llI^e  i'  to  advauo-  a  djsiuuo.  lets 
than  thirty  pace  ,  he  will  c>  mm.iud: 

1.  Bn  (^x\ch)fiontfo  U)ird      2.  MAKCn. 
6£5.  If  it  ho  snt'posed  fh  it  the  advnnn    h<  mi  'e  by  (b» 
flrot  fr jnt,  iheih  ef  of  Ihia  front  will  c  m  i  ai.d  : 

1.  First  divisian,  forwar^.    2    Guide  centra. 
856.  The  chief  rf  the  seconl  front  will  (acr  Irs  frnnf  to 
the  lefo.    Th   captnihs  ot  iho  c  TOpiniits  loinp' si   jc  ilils 
».rcnt  will  place  ihem-Clves  outade,  uLd  wu  ihail^Ltof 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— rAKT  T. 


76 

thkir  left  foidoi,  who  will  tbm  r»pUc«  »liem  In  the 
froni  rank  ;  Ibf  rhlef  of  ihe  Ih  rd  front  will  fiic«  Lis 
frrnt  I"  Ihe  rlKht.  »ud  the  captain*  inthl«frout  will  place 
ih*mwlTBt  oultidf,  and  on  the  left  of  their  covering  ler- 
reaott ;  the  ctilef  of  the  fourth  ftont  will  fcc*  KIs  front 
•  rout,  and  command:  1.  Fourth  liitUxon,  forxeard.  2. 
^imi«  e*»lrt.  The  captain  who  in  In  the  centre  of  the 
flnl  front,  will  l>e  charpwl  with  the  dinrtion  of  the 
march,  and  will  rrf;ul»te  hlmoclf  hy  the  means  lnJicat4>d 
in  tbeichjol  of  the  company.  No  HW. 

•37.  At  the  Command  m«rcH.  the  pqaare  will  pnt  Itself 
rn  motion  :  the  companies  raarchinic  hy  iho  flank  will  Vw 
careful  not  U>  loM  thoir  distances.  The  chief  of  the 
fnorth  division  will  cauac  his  division  to»  keep  constantly 
rlcawi  on  the  flanks  of  the  second  and  third  front?. 

M«.  Ttoia  moTfraent  will  only    be   exccmod  in   quick 

S58.  The  llcutenant-rolonel  will  place  himself  in  rear 
«  f  the  flU  of  direct  Ion  In  order  to  regulate  his  march. 

MO.  If  Ihe  colonel  should  wl»h  to  li»U  the  square,  he 
will  ci'iiinand : 

I.  Oattaliun.      2.  Halt. 

)!>ei.  At  tli«  second  command,  the  square  will  linlt ;  the 
fnnrtb  front  will  face  about  immediately,  nnd  without 
fnrther  command  ;  the  second  and  third  fronts  will  f»re 
ontwards;  the  captains  of  companies  will  resume  their 
plae4Ht  ti-i  in  square. 

862.  In  moviiiB  Ihe  square  li>rwar.l  by  the  second,  tliir  J, 
•r  fiurth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be  observed. 

8M.  Tha  t'attalien  beinp;  formed  into  square,  when  the 
•olonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater  dis- 
tance than  thirty  pacos,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Ibrm  column. 
Kt.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command  : 
1.  nrti  diritu>n  forward.    2.  Guide  Ufl. 

Vt,.  The  rommandor  of  the  fonrth  front  will  caution  it 
t>  stand  fast:  the  f.mmandcr  of  the  Sfcond  front  will 
f  aiiM  it  to  far«  to  the  left,  and  then  command,  Ihj  com- 
pany, hy  flu  U/t.  The  commander  sf  tlio  third  iVont 
will  causa  It  tofaca  to  the  right,  (lud  then  command,  Jly 
mmpany,  fcy  fiU  right.  At  the  raonient  tl.o  second  and 
ihlrii  fronta  facn  to  the  left  and  righ',  each  captain  will 
paaM  to  vBbk  to  the  raar  the  two  leading  files  of  bis 
pompanr. 

888.  These  dispositions  being  ma'^e,  the  colonel  will 
•ommaDil  : 

:i.  Mabcb  (or  doiilU  71110^— Mabcii.) 

M7.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march  for- 
ward ;  Its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  adiancod 
a  s|>a<^e  equal  to  half  \U  front,  and  aliffn  it  by  the  U-ft. 

868.  The  correBponding  companies  <  f  the  second  and 
third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  th'»  left  and  right,  and 
march  to  meet  each  ether  behind  the  centre  of  the  first 
division,  and  tb«  moment  they  uuito,  the  captain  of  each 
oompauy  will  halt  his  company  and  face  it  to  the  front. 
The  division  being  re-formed,  its  chief  will  aJign  it  by 
IheUft. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  w'U  cause  it 
to  face  about:  its  tile  closers  will  remain  before  the  front 
raak. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel  may 
p  it  It  in  march  by  the  commands  and  moans  prescribed, 
Ko.  164,  and  fullowlng;  the  right  Ruides  will  preBcrve 
company  distance  exactly  as  the  directing  guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re  form  square, 
he  will  give  the  commands  indicated,  No.  840. 

872.  To  canto  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a  dis- 
tance ><reater  than  tliirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  first 
(ansa  c/ilumn  to  bo  formed  as  indicated  No.  8C3;  and 
when  formed,  ho  will  cause  it  to  face  by  the  rear  rank  ; 
to  this  end,  he  will  command  ; 

1.  To  march  in  rHrtal.    2.  Face  bvOit  rear  rank.    3.  n^U- 
talien  alui't—TACU. 


&T.1.  At  the  sM-ond  command,  lh«  file  cloiers  of  Ih* 
Interior  divisions  will  place  thcmsilviM,  passing  by  tli« 
outer  flanks  of  ihclr  ritpective  coiapanlea,  behind  th» 
front  rank  oppositv  to  their  places  in  the  Hue  of  batllu  ; 
the  file  closers  <'f  the  oth'-r  divislnns  will  stand  ftst. 

874.  At  the  third  ccinmand,  the  battalion  will  f*ro 
about;  each  cliief  of  division  will  place  himself  before  li« 
rear  rank,  become  front.  pAwUng  through  the  interval 
bctwet'n  its  two  companies  ;  the  giiidis  w  ill  step  into  ths 
rear  rank,  now  front. 

876.  The  c  lumn  l«inR  thus  disposed,  the  colonel  may 
pnt  it  In  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  squa'e  as  if  it  were 
fACed  by  the  front  rank.  The  rqiiare  l>eing  formed,  Ita 
fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations  they  bad  when 
face«i  to  Ihe  front. 

676.  The  battalion  being  in  squa'o  by  Ihe  rear  rank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  or  In 
advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty  jraces,  he  will  con- 
form to  what  iff  proscrl'icd  No.  8.'i4  and  following;  other- 
wise, 1)0  will  re-form  the  co'umo  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples jirescribed  No.  SOO  by  marching  forward  the  fotirtli 
front. 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  s  dis- 
tinct greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  face 
the  column  by  the  front  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   To  >iiarch  in  a'lranrr.    2.   Fjcf  b-j  llie  front  rank. 
3.  Battaliotl  about— V.^CB. 

67S.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  873  and 
following. 

879.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  nnd  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  ho  w  111  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.    2.  Battalion  right  about.    3.  MiRon 
(or  double  quick— yiKV.CH). 

880.  At  the  second  commiiiid,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  rapidly 
Itefore  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  divisions.  At  Iho 
command  march,  the  column  will  face  abont  and  move  olt 
to  the  rear  ;  the  chiefs  of  divisions  and  the  guides  will 
conform  to  what  is  jirescribed  No.  87-1. 

£81.  If  the  column  be  inarching  in  retreat,  and  tlin 
colonel  8hall  wish  to  march  it  in  advauc  >,  ho  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Tbmarch  in  adcance.  2.  IlnUalion  right  about.  Z.  Mabch 
{or  dovhU  juicilt— Mabcii). 

862.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  (if  Ih* 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  before 
the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divi8lc:is  ;  At  the  third, 
the  column  will  face  br  the  Iront  rank. 

To  reduci  lite  square. 

6S.^.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will 
command : 

1.  Reduce  iquare.      2.  Mabcii   (or  doulU  ^iiicA— March.) 

884.  This  movement  will  be  exocnted  in  the  manner  in- 

dicat<'d,  No.  8<'iH  and  fjllowing  ;  but  the  file  closers  of  the 
fourth  front  will  place  themselves  hohind  the  rear  rank 
the  moment  It  faces  about ;  Ihe  field  and  staff,  the  color- 
benrer  and  buglers,  will,  at  the  same  time,  return  to  their 
places  in  column. 

To  form  $qiiarefrom  line  of  ballh-. 

885.  A  battalion  deployed,  moy  be  formed  into  sqiiaro 
in  a  direction  either  parallel  or  perpendicular  to  the  Una 
of  battle. 

kSC).  In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion 
to  break  by  division  to  the  roar,  by  the  right  or  left,  and 
then  close  the  column  to  half  distanco,  as  iudicat«d,  No. 
817  and  lollowing. 

887.  In  the  second  case,  be  will  ploy  the  battalion  Into 
simple  column  by  division  at  half  distance  In  rear  of  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— P^RT  V. 


(igbf.  fir  Icfi  divieiui],    ur    iuto    roluino    doubleJ    uu    (liu 
ceutre. 

888.  To  ploy  the  ba^'alloa  lufo  column  iipuu  oue  of  tbe 
flank  dlvIsioQS,  tbo  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Tofonnt([ii<ire.       2.  Column  alluiJj  distance  hy  division. 

3.  On  thejirsl  (or  fourth)  divhii  n.     i.  DaUnlion  ritjht  (or 
''»A)— Facb.    6.»Marcii  (or  double  2"icJ— March). 

SH9.  This  movement  will  be  executed  aceording  to  the 
jirinclples  prescribed  No.  119  ami  lollowliif. 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  Hue  of  battle,  and 
tbe  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  a  direction  per- 
pendicular to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  snuare.  1.  On  the  first  {qt  fotn-iV)  tlirision 
form  column.      ;t.  hattalion  hi}  the  right  (or  kft)  flank. 

4.  MabcII    (or  donhU  ryiiic^,— MaRCB.) 

S91.  Tliis  movement  will  l)o  fxecuted  according  to  tbe 
luincipieu  prescribed  for  ploying  a  column  by  division  at 
lialf  distance,  No.  150.  The  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  halt  his  divisional  the  command  march. 

892.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  coluoin.  the  colo- 
nel will  command  : 

1.  7b  form  square.  2.  Donhle  column  at  ludf  dis'aiice. 
3.  JiaUalion  inwards— Fi.CE..  4.  March  (or  doiille 
(jHicA-— March). 

893.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No* 
778  and  followinjar. 

804.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  dou- 
ble column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  lb  form  nquaro.  2.  Form''donlle  column.  3.  Battnlion 
or  the  right  attd  left  flunks.  4.  Marcu  ( ir  double 
quid- — March). 

865.  This  movement  will  be  executed  ns  proscribed  No. 
788;  the  chief  of  til's  leading  division  will  halt  his  divi- 
aiou  at  tbe  coiAm<ind  mirch. 


Obttrvatiom  rclulive  to  tlm  formation   of  squa  es    in    two 
ranks. 

gOfi.  When  the  colonel  shall  judge  it  proper  to  have  a 
reserve,  this  reserve,  in  a  columa  of  three  divisions,  will 
be  formed  of  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 
The  second  divialon  will,  in  this  case,  close  to  platoon  dis- 
tance on  the  first  division.  Wh^n  the  square  is  formed, 
the  reserve  plstoons  will  move  forward  a  distance  nearly 
equal  to  a  platocn  front.  , 

897.  In  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will  move 
forward  platoon,  instead  of  company  distance. 

898.  If  (he  column  be  formed  of  fcur  divisicns,  the  in- 
ner {ilatoons  of  tlie  third  division  will  compose  the  re- 
serve; then,  in  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will 
conform  to  the  general  rule,  and  the  chief  of  the  third,  as 
soon  as  bis  division  is  formed,  will  close  it  to  plat^ion  dis- 
tance on  the  second  division.  The  colonel  miy,  if  neces- 
sary, form  the  reserve  of  the  entire  third  division.  In 
this  case,  the  movemoat  will  be  executed  in  the  following 
manner. 

iiy9.  If  th»  column  bo  hI  full  distance,  when  it  shall 
dose,  at  the  commanl  to  form  ."quare,  to  half  distance  the 
ihief  of  the  third  division  will  (ause  four  files  to  break 
to  the  rear  from  the  right  and  left  of  his  division  ;  the 
guides  will  c'ose  upon  the  outer  files  reniaicing  in  line, 
and  the  left  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
file  immediately  in  front  of  him.  This  division  will  then 
wlose  In  mass  on  tbe  fecond  division  ;^  and  the  chief 
of  the  fourth  divUion  will  close  to  half  distance  on  the 
same  division. 

900.  At  tbe  command  form  squire,  the  chief  cf  the  ro- 
Rorve  division  will  command,  1.  Third  difision  forward. 
2.  Guide  centre;  at  this  command,  the  guides  on  the 
flanks  will  fall  into  the  line  of  file  closers.  At  the  com- 
mand wuirrh,  the  reserve  will  move  forward  the  distance 
of  a  compony  front.  When  halted,  its  chief  will  cause 
tho  platoons  to  be  doubled,  and  for  this  purpose  will 
command  : 


1.  On  Ih'-  centre  doubtt  ^latuo,ii>.    2.  Maecw. 

iiOl.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  respect- 
ive platoons  ;  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon  will  face  bis 
platoon  towordrt  the  centre,  and  cause  to  break  to  the 
rear  two  files  from  the  left  or  right.  At  the  ccmmaud 
march,  the  outer  platoons  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to 
double  on  the  centre  platoon  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  ;  their  chiefs  will  alien  these  outer  platoons  oif  the 
centre,  and  tho  files  previously  broken  to  the  rear  will 
come  into  line. 

902.  If  the  column  be  at  half,  instead  of  full  distance, 
tho  colonel  before  forming  sijuare  will  order  the  chiefs  of 
the  third  and  fourth  divisi^i  a  to  move  for,vard  their  di- 
visions as  prescribed  No  899. 

903.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  at  J,ho  commaml 
to  form  square,  the  chief  of  the  third  divi'^ioc  will  break 
four  files  to  the  roar  from  each  of  the  flanks  as  pre- 
scribed No.  800. 

904.  Tho  colonel  will  hjilt  the  column  ns  soon  as  the 
second  division  shall  have  gained  its  distance. 

905.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  contiuno 
marching,  at  the  command,  tlie  hyhend  of  the  column  tahu 
half  distance,  the  cliief  of  the  reseive  division  will  give 
his  cautionary  commands  in  snfiicient  time  to  place  hisf 
division  in  motion  bimultaueously  with  the  one  which 
precedes  it.  Tho  chief  of  the  tliird  division  will  give 
the  command  viarch  at  the  instant  there  is  company  dis- 
tance between  his  divisitm  and  the  second. 

90G.  Whan  tho  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  the  column, 
at  the  command  f^rm  eohimn,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  di- 
vision will  command  I'orm  division ;  at  this  command, 
the  chiefs  of  the  outer  platoons  which  liave  doubled  in 
rear  of  tbe  centre  platoons,  will  give  tho  commands  and 
make  the  preparatory  movements  for  deploying  on  the 
centre  platoons,  which  will  be  t-xecutcd  at  the  command 
march  given  by  the  colonel  and  briskly  repeated  by  tho 
chief  of  this  division.  The  division  being  re-formed,  tbe 
chiefs  of  the  outer  p'atooirs  will  retake  their  places  in 
column,  and  tho  chief  of  this  division  will  ngain  cause 
four  files  from  each  of  its  flanks  to  break  to  the  rear. 

907.  If  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the  column 
had  been  left  in  front,  it  would  be  formed  by  the  saiuo 
commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles.  Iho 
second  division,  in  this  case,  would  form  the  reserve. 

908.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel  ciboiild 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  he  will  face  it  by  the  rear 
rank.  The  flies  of  the  third  divi  ion  broken  ofl'  to  tha 
rear,  will  face  about  with  the  battaliun,  and  wlu>n  the 
column  is  put  in  motion  will  march  in  front  of  the  rear 
rank.  But  should  the  colonel  wish  tore-torm  tho  square, 
he  will  cause  the  battalion  to  face  by  the  front  rank. 

909.  If  the  battalion  be  inline,  insteai  of  in  column, 
the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  bring  it  iuto  column 
in  such  manner  that  there  may  bo  a  distance  of  only 
four  paces  between  this  division  and  tho  one  which  is  to 
be  immediat«ly  in  front  of  it ;  and  when  this  division  is 
halted  and  aligned,  its  chief  will  canse  the  usual  number 
of  files  to  be  br.ken  to  tho  rear.  The  chief  of  the  divis- 
ion which  should  occupy  in  column  a  position  immediate- 
ly in  rear  ot  the  reserve  division  will,  on  entering  tho 
column,  take  a  distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and 
the  division  established  immediately  in  front  of  tho  reserve 
division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  fquares  formed  in  two  ranks,  according  to 
the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  deemed  sufficiently 
strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  square  to  be  formed  in 
tour  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at  lull 
distaqce,  tight  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colout-l 
shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  rank^,  he|will  first  cau.so 
divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being  executed,  ho  will 
command : 

1.  To  form  equnrc  in  four  ranks.    2.  To  halj^  distance,  do  a 
column.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divis- 
ion will  caution  the  right  company  to  face  to  the  left,  and 


IB 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PAKT  V. 


the  Itft  compkoy  to  (ao«  to  tb*  riKbt.  The  cblrfs^of  tb« 
otb'^r  (JiTitiuas  will  cAutiuD  ibuir  diTlsiout  to  muTe  fur- 
ward. 

013.  At  tbe  cnmmiDd  march,  the  riebt  c>  mpany  of 
thi-  flr«t  di'Ufoa  will  form  iuu>  font  raolts  on  il8  left  file, 
aod  ihe  left  compaDj  into  fuur  r  'nko  im  its  rif;ht  flle.  The 
fttrma  l<D  ended,  the  cbief  of  this  diri^iou  will  align  !■ 
bv  the  !•  n.  I 

9)4.  The  othiT  diTlsioDfi  will  mora  Uirward  and  double  1 
tn-'lr  files  m»rchitig  ;  t- c  ricbt  coiopmiy  ot  •(ich  livisiou  ; 
will  (loiiblw  nn  Its  I  ft  ftto,  aii.l  lh<  left  cmiptny  on  its  | 
riKbl  flltr.  The  forma  ion  ri>iii|il<'Ud,  *ftch  chlpf  (if  diTis-  I 
inn  will  command.  Guilt  UJt.  E  >rh  chief  will  halt  his  i 
<1ivi,il  D  whe'  it  ^ball  b«v<-  the  di-tanco  of  a  company 
front  in  four  rank"  from  the  precoiinj;  on<>.  counting  from  i 
its  -fiir  THTik,  and  will  alig"  bis  divi-.ion  liy  lhi>  left.  At  | 
the  instnu*  thn  fo'-r  h  dirigioii  is  halted,  tUo  tile  closers  i 
will  mr  T«  tapidlj  before  its  front  rauk.  I 

9'6.  The  c  loiK'l    will    fo'm    bqnare.   rx-form    column,  i 
and  red  ice  f-qnare  in  fourra-ik-,   Ijy  th«   sime  c  imniauris 
and  m-Hn"  (i»  preBcribed  'or  a  haitalioi;  i'l  two  lank^.  I 

016.  II  ih<'  s<|n  re  firmed  In  f  ur  lanks  hi-  rtdnctd  and  I 
at  a  halt,  and  the  colon)  I  sli.ill  wish  to  foinithe  bntlaliun  ' 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  conimaDd  : 

1.   In  Itro  rank*  unrlou'tU'    filet.     2.    B'ltlnUon   oulwartli — 
Face.    3    March. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  ciptains  will  step  be- 
fore the  centres  of  thfir  resiiectlTe  romiianioB,  and  th  ifo 
or,  the  right  will  GHUtion  them  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
th  >ee  on  the  left  to  f  ice  to  the  left. 

918.  At  thu  second  comiaand,  the  batta'iun  will  faot.-  to 
the  right  and  It  ft. 

919  At  the  Command  march,  each  company  will  un- 
douhle  its  flies  and  re-form  into  two  rank-  hi  in'Hcated  in 
the  s  liool  of  the  conipany  No.  370  and  followlTiif.  Knob 
cuptaiu  will  halt  hin  company  and  ftce  it  to  th-  front. 
Thn  format  on  vnipleted,  each  chief  of  division  will  align 
biK  division  by  tiie  'oft. 

020.  If  ih"  c  flumu  b<< 'n  Tarch.  with  division*  formed 
in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  xliall  wish  to  re-fjrm  them 
into  two  ratiks,  be  will  command  : 

1.  6ui<U  centre.     2.  Inlwo  ritnkf,  undoMe  filet.  3.  MARCH. 

9U1.  The  cpt«in.  nlaced  in  the  centre  of  each  division, 
will  con'iuiie  to  march  ptrai^ibl  to  ilie  front,  as  will  aUo 
Ihe  l<  ft  fi  e  of  the  right  compai  y,  and  tlie  right  til<i  of  Ihe 
lelt  ci't'ipai  V.  Each  compauy  will  then  here  formed  into 
two  ranks  us  prescribed  in  ibe  sthool  of  the  company. 

S22.  Tlio  bittaliou  be  >'g  torcnel  into  two  ruuks,  the 
colon  1  will  command,  fiuidf  let  (or  ru/ltl). 

0^3.  To  form  rquare  in  f  mi  ranks  ou  one  of  the  Hank  di- 
vision-, the  culouui  will  cooimnud  : 

1.  Toform  Siftfre.  in /our  ranks.  2.  Vrdnmn  ut  hulf  dit- 
t  nee  hj/ dicUirm  3  Onlli^Jlrtt  (or  fourth)  division.  4. 
Bitlalion  rij/ltl  (or  le/l) — Fahe.  5.  Mabcu  (or  doubU: 
r/uick-'MAB.CU). 

024.  At  the  pooond  command,  each  chief  of  division  will 
plHO-  himself  befo  e  the  centre  of  bisdiNision,  and  caution 
it  'o  fare  t  •  ih»  right. 

02''.  At  the  fourth  commai't,  the  rig  tgu'deofthe first 
diviilon  "III  renain  fi,ced  tj  th.-  front,  thj  bittulion  will 
(sof  10  tlie  rijibt. 

026  At  Ihe  nouiin  ind  marcA.  the  Arst  flle  of  four  men  of 
the  flrsi  divii-i  m  wii|  tac*'  to  the  front  romiiiuiD!;  doubled. 
All  iho  oilier  iihs  of  four  men  will  step  off  lo^'eilier,  and 
each  i  i  i-nc^  anion  ••ill  clobe  up  to  iis  proper  dista  ce  on 
the  fllo  prec-ding  it,  and  fMco  to  th^  front,  rem-ining 
donlded.  W  en  tbo  lust  flle  >-hall  liavu  c  osed,  ^be  chief 
of  d'vsion  willc  mmand,  Left— I)ur.f.n. 

027.  I  he  o  her  tJl  iaioos  Will  pli,y  into  column  in  the 
same  mmner  as  with  a  I  attalinn  in  Iw.,  runks.  obiervln,^ 
what  'ollowb  :  lliec  1  fs  r-f  .Jivisi  >n,  iiintea<l  of  allouiig 
their  dlvli-i  11  H  to  flle  past  th- m  on  en'erlnt;  th»  column, 
will  c  minne  to  lea  '  them,  and  as  e.ich  diviKlon  „hall  ar 
rive  on  a  I'ne  -1th  the  richt  gjlte  (f  llie  first  ilivi-loD,  its 
chief  will  ualt  the  ri^ht  gnide,  who  will  immediately  fa:e 


to  the  fhint ;  th*  flrs>  file  of  four  man  will  aho  halt  at 
tbe  fame  lime  and  tars  to  the  froiit,  remaining  doui  led. 
The  second  file  will  ch-^e  on  the  f^«t,  and  wbvn  cloaed, 
hikit,  end  face  to  the  front,  remaining  donblad.  All  th* 
other  flios  will  <xecnto  nnccestirely  what  baa  just  been 
prescribed  f>r  the  s>^oud.  When  the  last  file  RbHll  hive 
cloK-d,  the  cbi<  f  uf  diviki  in  will  command,  X^f—Daasa. 
9'2'^.  If  the  hAttalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  oom- 
maud  : 

1.  To  form  tquare,  in  four  rank:  2.  On  Ike  firtt  diwieion, 
form  colli  mu.  Z.  Battalion,  by  lite  right  flank.  4.  MaaCB 
(or  double  quick — HAkcu.) 

929.  At  the  second  commtnd.  each  chief  of  dMainn  will 
rt  p  in  tr<jnt  of  the  centre  <  f  bis  divis'on  and  cantion  It  to 
fare  by  the  right  flank.  The  chief  ■  f  the  flrkt  division 
will  caution  bis  covering  ser^eaut  to  bait,  and  remain 
fac,  d  to  the  front. 

"S'l  At  the  command  marcfc,  the  bittalion  will  fM«  to 
the  right ;  th"  coverlig  sergeant  of  the  first  division  will 
halt  imd  remain  f.iced  to  the  front,  the  flrst  division  will 
then  form  into  four  rantts  ax  heretofore  preccribed.  The 
other  divisions  will  ploy  Into  c  'lumn  in  the  same  manner 
as    f  the  movement  hud  takeu  p  nee  from  a  halt. 

931.  If  the  celonel  should  wish  to  form  a  perpendicular 
square  in  four  raukd,  by  double  coluiun,  be  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  sipiarc,  in  four  rankn.  2.  Double  column,  at  ho{f 
difiaiux  3.  Ualtalion  intoarde — Face.  4.  Mahcb  (or 
fiouble  gutdic— Maucu  ) 

'.•.'{2.  At  the  second  command,  the  captnioe  of  compa- 

I  Dies  will  place  themselves  before  the  CfUtres  of  their  res- 

I  pective  conipan  es,  and  caution  those  on  the  right  to  f  >oe 
t  I  tlie  lelt,  and  those  on  Ihe  left  to  face  to  the  right.     The 

:  captain  of  the  fifth   company  will   caution    his  Odveriug 

I  8erK>-ant  to  stand  fiet. 

933.  At  the  third  rommaud,  the  battalion  will  face  to 
the  left  and  right  ;  at  the  ciin  naud  march,  the  le''t  file  of 
the  fourth,  and  the  right  tile  of  the  flub  company  will 
then  face  to  the  front,  reniair.ing  doubled.  The  lonrth 
conipany  will  rio-e  snccefsively  by  flle  of  fours  ou  the  left 
fl'e,  and  the  fifth  conipiiTiy,  in  like  manner,  ou  the  right 
filH  ;  the  files  will  f.ice  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled. 
The  formation  conipleieil.  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
manii,  /i'  ght  drem  'I'lie  junior  captain  will  pl.ice  himsilf 
in  Ihe  Interval  between  the  two  compauiex. 

WH.  Trie  other  conipaiii"H  will  close  as  prescrib'd  for 
the  iio^.l..  column  in  two  rank*,  observii  g  what  fellows  : 
euch  c-iptsin  will  hall  th»  leading  guide  of  bis  company 
the  moment  the  h  ad  of  h's  company  arrives  o  .  a  line 
with  ibe  centre  of  ibn  r  dumn.  In  the  right  oompanlen, 
the  left  eu  des  will  step  into  the  line  of  til"  cloters,  and 
Ihe  left  tile  of  four  men  will  fu-e  immediately  to  the  front, 
r-niaiutng  doubled,  and  by  the  side  (f  Ihe  rlKht  guide  of 
tho  left  c  mp'<ny.  The  c 'mpinioi  wi'l  each  furm  into 
l<iur  ranks,  as  i  resciib*d  No.  92G,  the  right  ronipanies  on 

I  the   left   fl'e,   and    ilie   I' ft   coiiip tii|.  s  tn  the    right  fl  e. 

;  The  formation   c>  mpleted,   the  junior  lapialn  will  pl-ioe 
liimself  letw  en  >h«  two  oompauies,  Hnd  the  senior  Will 

]  comma'id,  RiylU  drees. 

036.  If  the  batlAlioo  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To/orm  square,  in  fimr  ranks  2.  Fnrm  donbU  oolumn. 
3  BuUali'n  bij  the  n.jlit  and  l^ft  fianke,  4.  AlAbCU  (or 
dUuhle  quick — Mabcu  ) 

036.  At  the  second  command,  Ihe  captains  will  plana 
thi-m'-eliei  leorc  tlie  lenlren  i-f  their  ivfp.icthe  com- 
XianiuH,  and  ibone  nn  the  right  w  II  cant  Ion  ihem  to  fnoe 
liv  the  U  fi  fltuk.and  thohe  ou  Ibe  left  to  face  by  the 
rivhtflink;  tH  capluin  of  the  fiiih  company  will  caution 
his  c  iveriug  sergeant   to   halt,  and  remain   facjd  roth* 

front. 

837.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
rnuies  will  halt,  'ibe  baiiu.ion  w'ii  f  I  re  to  I  lin  left  and 
rtgi  t;  the  covering  Fergeant  of  the  flub  company  will 
halt  and  remain  fared  to  the  front,  tbe  movement  will 
then  ha  executed  aa  If  the  battalion  was  at  a  bait. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 


T9 


Oblique  Squaret. 

938.  The  battalion  beins;  In  IIcp  of  batMe,  when  the 
colonel  BhsU  uish  to  fjrm  the  oblique  square,  he  will 
oommand  : 

I.    To  form  oblique  square     2.  On  the  first  dhision  form 
column 

930.  At  thn  second  oorom.iod,  the  Hentennnt  (lolonel 
vrlll  trace  the  alignment  of  ttie  flrf^t  division  In  th-'  f<)l- 
lowing  manner  :  he  will  place  liini'telf  before  and  near 
the  right  file  of  'Ms  divisiin,  fic>  to  th(»  eft.  march 
twelve  paces  alone  the  front  rat  k,  hilt,  face  to  the  right, 
march  twelve  laces  perpendimla  ly  to  thp  front,  halt 
again,  fa  e  to  the  right,  and  imiriediatoly  place  a  marker 
«t  this  point.  The  coverina;  *?rg  ant  of  ihe  right 'Om 
p  ny  will  B'pp,  at  the  same  liiiie.  beVr»  ita  richt  file, 
face  to  the  lefr,  and  CO  I  form  the  line  f  f  his  shoiiHerB  to 
thntoftho  .'hi  uWerR  of  tlie  mark  r  ostablfshe'l  by  the 
llen'enant  colo  el  Those  two  markers  being  established, 
the  Ueii'enint  coloml  wi'l  placp  a  iliir.l  roark-r  on  the 
•nme  alignment,  at  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  di- 
vlelon  will  halt 

840  The  chiefs  of  division  will  ploce  themselves  in 
f^ont  of  the  centres  nf  ilieir  divisions;  the  chief  of  the 
flr.Ht  division  will  Immed'ately  establish  It  by  a  wheel  to 
th«  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  against  the  mtrkers.  at  d  align 
It  bv  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the  i.ther  divisions  will 
canffnn  them  to  face  to  the  right,  The  culosel  will  then 
•ommand : 

S.  Battalion    nyW— Facb.    4.   March    (or  double  quick— 
March.) 

041.  Tho  three  re<r  divisions  wfll  direct  the'r  march  so 
»s  to  plice  themselV' s  at  half  dlitance  from  each  olher, 
»nd  in  rear  of  the  first  division, as  previously  indicated, 
observing  what  follows  : 

9W.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead  of  breaking 
the  headmost  files  to  the  r^nr,  will  break  them  to  tlia 
front,  and  at  the  command  march,  will  condnrt  bis  di- 
vision towards  the  point  of  eitr^nre  into  thecolurau.  Ar- 
rive! at  this  point,  he  will  halt  in  his  own  p  rson.  oanso 
bis  divlsi'n  to  wheal  by  the  file  to  the  rkht,  instructing 
the  right  guide  to  direct  hinitelf  parallelly  to  (he  first  di 
vision;  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file  has  parsed,  Its  chief 
win  halt  the  division,  an  1  align  it  by  tba  left.  The  other 
divisions  will  break  to  the  rear,  lint  <>Ifghtly:  each  will 
enter  the  column  as  prescribed  for  tlie  second,  and  tho 
moment  the  battalion  Ir  ployed  into  column,  the  colouel 
will  canse  It  to  form  square. 

943.  The  formation  of  a  batta'-'on  into  oblinwe  square 
on  the  left  division,  will  be  p«cuted  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  bv  inverse  means. 

944.  ShouM  the  battalion  ie  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  it  to  ha't. 

946.  In  the  preceding  eismple,  the  battalion  was  sup- 
posed to  be  deployed  ;  bat  If  it  be  alrrady  formed  in  c  1- 
umn,  the  desired  oblijniiy  will  bo  established  by  causing 
it  to  change  direction  by  the  flank;  to  this  end,  the 
colond  will  command  : 

I.  To  form    oblique  sqxuire.      2.  Change    di-ection   by    the 
rigkl  (or  left)   flank. 

940.  At  the  secfl  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  trace  the  ne*  direction  in  tho  following  manner  :  he 
will  place  be*'"e  the  right  and  the  left  fll.-s  of  the 
headmost  di'l'ion,  two  markers.  an,l  a  third  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  first  two  on  the  fide  of  the  change  of 
directloFi  and  at  twehe  paces  from  tho  flan  ;  of  the  col- 
umn. He  will  then  place  himse  f  before  the  third 
marl'er,  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front, 
balA  and  finish  tracing  tho  now  direction  in  tie  man- 
ittT  Indicated,  No.  S39. 

947.  The  colonel  will  then   oommnnd : 

S.  BaUalion,  right  (or  Ufl)—'E'ACS.    4.  Mahou  {or  double 
juicfc— Mahch). 

948.  Tbe'change  of  direction  having  been  'executed, 
th«  colonel  will  otuaa  the  square  to  be  formed. 


049.  Should  the  cMnmn  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
firs    ca  Fe  it  to   hHlt. 

9"0.  Oblique  squares  in  four  racks,  will  be  executed 
by  ih'  sime  m?»ri8.  au'l  accordirg  to  the  principles  iiro- 
tcribod  lor  the  fo  maiion  of  iqmres  In  four  rarks. 

v5'.  •»  hcthT  tho  latfalinn  he  pl.y.d  int  >  simo  e  ot 
double  colUMin,  the  particnlir  dis' o^iti  Ds  for  the  fotma- 
tion  of  the  jqiaro  wi  1  be  executed  "B  piescr  bed  No. 
819  and  fnll.)wlti2.  Th  d.vi-ion  whi  h  is  !■.  f>rm  tb» 
leir  rf  Ihe  column,  will  he  closed  iu  m  ts«  and  as  soon  a* 
it  U  aligued,  the  m-^J  'r  will  rictiiy  the  j^osjrinn  of  ihs 
I  uide<  on  the  gi''e  of  the  colu'en  opposite  to  the  direction. 

9  2.  If  it  bo  the  wish  of  thn  co  onel  mertly  to  pre- 
pare fjr  tquare.  he  will  in  all  formations  with  that 
vie  >•  substitute  the  command  prepare  for  squar$,  in  plao» 
of  to  form  square,  and  In  that  c-is--,  lh»  laai  diviiioK  will 
enter  the  culuma  at  company  distance. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  tquare*. 

953.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column  bv  company, 
which  is  to  be  formed  into  tquare,  will  first  form  divis- 
lous,  and  close  to  bdlf  distance.  Never tlieiesa.  if  It  fitd 
itrelf^uddeniy  throatenwd  bv  cavalry  without  suffl  itent 
time  to  form  divisions,  the  colonel  will  oau«e  'h-i  colu nn 
to  close  to  platoon  distance  and  ihcn  form  square  by 
the  commands  and  m>'a  is  which  have  been  indicated  ;  the 
leading  and  rearmost cimpauiea  will  conforu  lhem^e'ves 
towhathas  been  prefOiititd  f'r  divisions  In  tho»e  posi- 
tions. The  olh»r  companies  will  form  by  plato  n  to  the 
ri^ht  and  lefi  in  o  line  of  bitte,  and  eacb  cbhf  (f  t)la- 
toi  n,  after  having  halted  it,  •»  ill  place  biiriself  on  the  line, 
as  if  the  p'aioon  were  a  company,  and  he  will  be  covered 
by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 

054.  A  iiattaMon  in  columu  at  fnll  rlistance,  having  to 
forni.-qutre  will  always  close  on  the  leading  s'.bJiilalon  ; 
und  a  culumn  dosed  iu  mass,  will  olways,  for  ihe  same 
purpose,  take  rtistances  by  tbe  head.  In  <  ither  case,  the 
second  subdivision  thonld  be  careful,  iu  taking  its  dis- 
tance, to  reckon  from  the  rear  rank  of  tbe  subdivision  in 
front  of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required  to 
f  rm  square  in  fnir  ranks,  the  diublipg  of  nks  will 
tthvayj  take  place  on  the  file  next  the  guide. 

'.56.  When  a  column,  di.'-DOseil  to  form  square,  shall  be 
in  march,  it  will  ch  lUge  direction  as  a  column  at  half 
distance  ;  thus,  having  to  execute  tl.ls  movement,  the 
column  will  tak^  the  gnide  on  tlie  side  opposite  to  that 
to  which  the  change  nt  direction  is  to  be  made,  if  that 
be  not  already  the  side  of  the  guide. 

9j7.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  company  dls. 
tance  or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formej*  into  square 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  baitaliou  is  plojed,  with  a  view  to  the 
square,  it  will  always  be  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  divis- 
ion, in  order  that  it  m  ly  he  able  to  commence  flrine.  pend- 
ing th^  e.xi'cution  of  the  m  rvenient.  The  double  column, 
also,  alTords  this  advantage,  and  being  more  promptly 
formed  than  any  other, it  will  habitually  be  emtiloyed,  un- 
less particular  circumstances  cause  a  different  lormatlou 
to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  nse  any  other 
th"iu  the  fire  by  file  and  by  rank  ;  the  color  being  in  tho 
line  of  file  clo-ers,  itsguard  will  not  fall  back  as  presor  - 
bod  No.  41-,  it  will  fire  like  tho  men  of  the  company  of 
which  it  forms  a  part. 

9fiO  If  the  equare  be  formed  in  fur  ranks,  the  first  t  wu 
ranks  will  alone  execute  the  tiring^  pre-cribed  above:  the 
other  two  ranks  will  remain  either  at  thoulder  or  support 
arms.' 

961.  The  formation  of  Ihe  square  being  often  neceptary 
in  war,  and  beini;  the  most  complicated  of  the  manoeuvres, 
it  will  be  as  frequently  repeated  as  the  supposed  necessity 
may  require,  in  order  to  render  its  mechanism  f-imiliar  to 
both  oihcers  and  men. 

0C2.  In  the  execution  of  this   minceuvre,  the  colonel 
will  carefully  observe  that  theriivere  movements  which  It 
involves  succeed  each  other  without  loss  of  time,  but  nlto  ' 
without  confusion  ;  for,  if  the  rapidity  of  cavalry    move- 
ments requires  the  greatest  promptitude  in  the  formatloa 


80 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  B ATT A.LION— PART  V 


of  sijuarca,  bo,  on  Ihp  <'tber  li»nd,  precipiUnry  always 
reialts  in  disorder,  and  in  no  circamstauce  ii  JisordiT 
more  to  be  Bvoldc-d. 

903.  When  tbo  colonel  ihall  wish  to  c.ivor  l>y  ■kiriii- 
iiilierii  the  mov.  ;::'nt»  of  a  colnmn  preparini!;  to  form 
■qnare,  he  will  dfi»ch  fur  this  purpose  one  or  two  i  >nor 
pUtiwnn  of  one  of  the  interior  diviglnni  of  the  colnmn. 
In  this  cfo,  the  oxtt-ri'ir  p'.ntoons  of  this  division  and 
the  followiDR  BubdIvisloiiH,  will,  according  to  circum- 
staocea,  close  on  the  prfc^dinit  subdiTitinn,  in  such  man- 
ucr,  that  thcr»  niFir  lie  between  them  only  tho  distance 
necessary  for  furmnj;  into  line. 

9C4.  When  the  colocl  Hhall  be  roady  to  form  squBrc, 
ho  will,  in  order  to  rec.'xll  tho  slcirmishcra.  cause  ^o  thr. 
color  to  be  sounded.  If  on  the  return  of  the  sklnnishers, 
there  be  not  room  for  them  to  form  into  line  of  battle, 
they  will  double  on  the  outer  platoons  of  tlioir  respective 
companies. 

ChUimn  ngaiiul  cavalry. 
9G5.  When  a  colunn  closed  in  mass  has  to  form  square, 
it  will  begin   by  t.iking  company  distance  ;  but  if  so  sud- 
denly  threatened  by  cavalry  an  not  to   allow  time  for  its 
dispo«ition,  it  will  bo  formed  in  tho  following  manner: 
iH>6.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Column  iiyaimt  eavalv'j.  2.  Mahcii. 
907.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  tho  leadinp;  di- 
visioD  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  and  p^its  behind  the 
rear  rank  ;  in  tho  interior  divisions  each  captain  will 
jiromptly  deninnatft  th"  number  of  filoi  necessary  to  close 
tho  interval  between  his  carapany  and  tins  one  in  front  of 
it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions  next  to  tho  one  in  rear, 
in  addition  to  closini;  the  interval  in  front,  will  also  close 
np  the  interval  which  separates  this  division  from  tho 
last  ;  tho  chief  of  tho  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to 
fice  about,  and  its  file  closers  will  pasi  kriukly  biforu  the 
fro  't  rank. 

'J>,8.  At  the  corammd  march,  Ihe  guides  of  each  division 
will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  tho  Una  of  file  closers. 
Tho  first  division  will  stand  fa-t,  the  f.)urth  will  fico 
Hbout,  the  ontor  file  of  eacli  of  these  divisions  will  then 
face  outwards;  in  the  other  divisions  the  files  desiftnated 
lor  closing  tho  intervals  will  form  to  the  right  and  left 
into  line,  but  in  the  division  next  to  tho  rearmost  one, 
the  first  files  that  come  into  lirje  will  closa  t"  the  right 
or  left  until  tliey  join  tho  rear  division.  Tho  files  ef  each 
company  which  remain  in  column  wlllclofe  on  their  outer 
files,  formed  into  line,  in  order  to  creuto  u  vacant  space 
in  the  middle  of  tho  column. 

91)9.  If  tho  column  bo  In  march,  tho  column  ogaxnst 
cavalry  will  be  formed  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 
At  the  command  t,iarch,  the  first  and  fouitli  divisions  will 
halt  and  the  latter  division  will  face  about;  tho  interior 
divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  above. 

970.  The  battalion  l>eing  no  longer  thrcattned  by  cav- 
alry, tli'3  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  MabCII. 

971.  At  the  coipmand  march,  tho  files  in  column  will 
close  to  th"  left  and  right  te  make  room  for  those  in  lino 
who  will  retake  their  places  in  column  by  stepping  back- 
wards, except  lli'iBo  closing  the  interval  between  the  two 
rear  divisions,  who  will  t'lke  their  places  in  column  by  a 
fiaiik  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face  about, 
tlin  guides  will  resnme  their  (dares. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  i>o  so  pressed  as  not  ti)  have 
time  to  order  bsjoucts  to  bj  ll.xoJ,  the  men  will  fix  them 
without  command  or  signal,  at  tho  cautionary  command, 
cdliimn  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  man<r.iivro  is  often  used  in  war,  and  with 
decided  advantage,  the  coioriel  will  frequently  cau*o  it  to 
be  executed  in  ordor  to  render  it  familiar. 

Article  Fiftef.ntii. 
The  Ktlly. 

974.  Tho  battalion  being  in  linn  of  battle,  the  colonel 
M  iU  aometlmvs  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,  at  which 
blfrnal  the  batialiou  will  bronk  and  disperse. 

976.  When  tbio  ooluu^l  shall  wish  to  rally  tLe  battalion. 


he  will  cause  lo  the  colar  to  l:>e  sounded,  and  at  the  stms 
time  place  two  markers  and  the  color  bearer  in  the  direc- 
tion he  may  wish  to  give  the  battalion. 

976.  Kach  captain  will  rally  his  company  about  sis  pa- 
ces in  rear  of  the  place  It  i<  to  occupy  In  litie  ofb«ttle. 

977.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  c*lor  company  to  be 
promptly  establinhed  agiiinst  the  markers,  and  each  cm- 
pany  by  tho  coaimand  of  its  ca|itiin  will  be  aligoed  on 
the  e>lor  company  according  to  tbe  priuciples  heretofore 
prescribed. 

978.  When  the  colonel  rhall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion 
in  column,  he  will  cause  /h'\  atscmilii  to  be  souiidsd,  and 
place  two  markers  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
tho  first  company  ;  tho  captain  of  this  company  will  rally 
bis  company  in  rear  of  the  two  markers,  and  each  of  tho 
other  captains  will  rally  his  company  at  platoon  distance 
behind  tho  one  which  should  precede  it  iu  tho  order  in 
cdlumn. 

ABTICI.E  SiXTEBilTll. 

Iiulcs/or  manccucring  by  (h«  rear  rani: 

979.  It  may  often  be  necessary  to  cause  a  battalion  to 
manicuvre  by  the  rear  rank  ;  when  the  case  presents  it- 
self, the  following  rules  will  be  observed  : 

9!^0.  The  battalion  being  by  the  f.-ont  rank,  when  tho 
colonel  shall  wish  to  mamuavre  by  the  rear  rank,  be  will 
command : 


1.  Face  l>/  Iht  rear  rrnlt.     3.  Battalion. 
Face. 


3.  About— 


981.  If  the  battalion  \»  deployed,  this  movement  will 
be  executed  as  baa  bci-n  indicatd  for  thu  fire  by  tho  rear 
rank. 

952.  Iftho  battalion  be  in  column  by  c.impsny,  or  by 
platoon,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  chiefs  of  subdivision, 
to  taVe  their  new  places  in  '^oiumu,  will  each  pass  by 
tho  left  flank  of  his  subdivision,  and  tlie  file  c.osers  by 
the  right  llank  :  the  guides  will  placa  themselves  in  the 
roar;  lank. 

953.  If  the  column  bo  formed  by  division,  the  chiefs 
of  'ivision  will  each  pass  by  the  interval  in  the  centre 
of  bis  divisiotk,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  outer  fianks 
of  tlioir  respec<ivo  companies;  the  junior  captain  iu 
each  division  wiR  steu  into  the  rear  rank,  and  bo  cov- 
ered in  the  front  r»ok  by  the  covcrinf(  sergeant  of  the 
left  company. 

984.  Tbe  lit  iitenant  Csjouel  will  place  himself  abreast 
with  the  leading  subdNision,  and  the  major  alisrast 
with  the  roarui'>Kt  one. 

9S5.  The  battalion  being  Vid  by  the  rear  rank, com- 
panie><,  divisions,  and  wiug*v  will  preserve  their  prior 
denominations  respectively. 

98(5.  The  manduvrcH  l.y  the  reai  rank  w  11  bo  exeout  d 
by  tho  same  commands  and  on  l>iy  mn-.e  principles  an 
if  the  battalion  faced  by  the  front  rank  ;  b-t  in  such 
manner  that  when  the  battalion  skall  be  broii(iht  to  its 
proiier  front,  all  tlin  subdivisions  may  fihU  thumtelvos  in 
their  regular  order  from  right  to  |,.ft 

9.S7.  According  to  this  principii',  when  a  column  fuced 
by  tho  roar  rank  is  deployed,  tho  hiibdivisiona  which,  in 
lino  of  battle  bv  the  front  rank,  ought  to  find  thomHoUe-i 
on  the  right  oi^lio  snbdivlsiou  on  wlihli  iI,b  deployment 
is  made,  will  fan«  to  th"  left;  and  those  ihich  ought  to 
bo  placed  on  its  left,  will  face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  in  lino  ol  battle,  l..^,,i  by  th  • 
rear  rank.  Is  to  be  ployed  in'o  column,  the  coimol  will 
announce,  iu  tho  comnmn<l8,  Lft  or  ri;;/it  in  front,  -fcoid  • 
ing  as  it  may  bo  intended  that  ihe  first  or  last  subdivision 
shall  be  at  the  head  of  the  cohimn,  because  the  first  s^,. 
division  is  on  the  left,  and  the  last  on  the  right  of  tho  bat. 
talion  faced  by  the  rear  rank.  Tho  colnmn  by  the  reai 
rank  will  take  the  guMo  to  tho  right,  if  the  first  subdivi- 
Bion  bo  in  front,  and  to  tho  Ictl  in  the  reverse  case. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  be  brought 
to  its  proper  front  by  the  meuua  heretofore  prescribea.  If 
the  column  bo  formed. by  company,  or  by  platoon,  ilio 
chiefs  of  subdivision,  in  order  to  take  their  now  places  In 
col^jmn,  will  pass  by  the  left  of  subdlrisiont.  now  rlibt, 
and  tliu  file  closers  by  Ihe  right,  now  loft. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


ARBANGED  INTO  LESSONS. 


LKS80N  FIKST. 


Article  /.—Open  rauks  (No.  23). 
Article  77 —    lofe  ihu    s  (No  29). 
Article  III  —tlAnuA^  of  arms  (No.  30). 

(No.  HI). 
Article  IF— Difrer»ni  flres  by  the  front  rank  (No. 39),  and 


Lradlng  at  will 


by  tiip  rear  rank  (No.  64). 


LKsSON  SECOND. 

Article  I — Hreiik  by    otnpxny  to  the  right  (No.  60.)  or  to 

th..  left  (No.  74). 
Article  II  — Mnrch  in  colnmn.  at  rhe  cadenceri  sl^p,  a  con- 

kiiterHblc  cistjiiice  (Nt'.  1C4|.     ChMiipc  of  ■  irection    (No. 

2  1).     Diuiinibh    ami   iucr-age    iront  in    raarruing  (No. 

196).     M.irch  in  retreat  iNo    '70). 
AHicie  Iir.—Ha.  i  tli-  cohiinn  (N  .  230).     F.rm  It  to  the 

l»f(  or  r  :;ht  into  line  of  ba'tie  (No.  390)      txi-cnte  tins 

fornnti  u,  the  ro  uniu  inarching  (No.  402). 
ilitic/e /r -i;x(cuie  ti.(."  comitttiinarcli,    and    repeat    the 

(ill  im  "•ov^ni'-ms  (No  3>1). 
Arlicle  V.—V  im  columu  into  lint;  of  battle,  to  he  right  or 

left,  liy  inversion  (No.  407). 


liESSON  THiaD. 

Artiele  I — Break  by  company  to  the  rear  hv  the  ri:ht  or 

left,  the  b.i  talion  beiLj,-  at  a  hali  (No.  87),  or  m<irchiDg 

(No.  94). 
Article  J/^— Vlarch  in  the  ro   te  step  (No.  19S).     Cause  to 

be  executei!.  at  this  giit  und  i-  dr  ulile  quick  time,    the 

divers  niijvements  iucident  to  the  column  in  route,    and 

cau-e  'he  .  adence  I  ntep  to  l>e  rexTimed. 
Article  III. —  Form  t'uecomiun  forwaid  inio  li.ie  of  battle 

(Ni  8   440,  45iJ,  t"«c  d  to  lh«  rear  into  line  of  battle  (    ni. 

466,  180).    the  bittali',:)  bei  g  at  a  halt,  .;r  maruliinL'. 

Form  111!  c<  li.niii  torwarri  into  li(.e,   and  continue  the 

m»rrh  ill  this  "rdi  r  (No  456). 
Article  IV— T  rm  the  column  on  tiie  rij;ht  (No.  416),    or 

the  left  (No.  4.3^).    mo  line  of  bittle 
Artidt  F.— March  hy  tto-  n  <iik  (No.  722),    and  form  com- 

pHnie!)  ii'to  Hue.  mucliii  g. 
Article  F/.-l  ho  column  eupposel   to  aTire  before  (No. 

175)  or  bi>hiud  the  line  of  bnttle  (So.  114),  to  prolong  it 

on  thai  line.  * 

Article  F/T—C 'anpe  front   forward  (No.  743).   or  io  rear 

(No.  76o),  .  n  the  right  or  !« ft  1  f  coiupanie-!,  indirections 

perp.  Mlicular  or  oblique. 
Article    F/77— Maich  t.v   the  right  fl  ink  (No  722)  orhy 

tli.-!efi  flnnk  (no.  725)'.     Chanfie   direction    hy  flU  (No. 

7.lOj.    Form  b:<ttulion  into  line  •  f  battle,  on  th"  right 

or  l.f",  by  file  (No.  73=>) 
ilr(<c/«JX— Tassth    d  file  in   retreat  bv    the  right  (No, 

T'l'M.    r  I  T  »h«  I.ft  fl«nk --Kn.  T»OV 

1) 


LESSON  FOURTH. 


Arlicle  I — Break  by  division  to  the  rear,   by  tlie  richt  or 

leff,  the  tat  talion  being  at  a  halt  or  marchini;  (  ^o.  102). 
Article  II  —  March  in  c  I    mn  by  division   (No.  161).     Di- 

miiis     and  increase  front  by  comptuy  (No.  196). 
Article  III — Close   th  ■  column   to  hnlf  uiatance  on  the 

h  ndHins'  or  tlio  r  aroiosc  divii  on   (No.  ^78). 
Article  IV — March  ia  column  at  half  distance  (No.  281), 

■ml  change  di.eclion  (N'o.  2^7) 
Article  F.— The  column    being  at  half  distance,    to  form 

-qu  -re  it  a  halt  (No.  817),  or  ui^rchini:  (No.  837). 
Artide  V[ — The  liitta  ion  tieiog  in   sqii:iie,   to  maich  to 

the  trout  (  \u.  '•Si).     Halt  the  squ-t.re   (No.  8G0)      Form 

I.'    i.m'i  1 1  mirch  to  the  front   (.No.  863)    or  ia  retreat 

(No.  }<72).  Re.f.  rm  the  square  (N.i.  ^7.i) 
y!r«c/e  VII  -Reduce  thesqiaie  (No.  881). 
Ar.icle  VIII — '^iose  the  0  lumniu  m^sa  .'n  the  headmost 

■  ■r  r.a'iiio^t  divigioL  (No.  279). 

Article  /X.— M.^ich  in  coiutnn  cl  sod  in  miss    a'  d  change 

■  li'i-cti   n  bv  the  front  ot  subdivi-i  on'^  (No   2S8) 
Article  X — Form  the  column  a.ainsr  cavalri  (>o.  P66  ) 
Articl'  Al  —  lake  d'8ta>  ces  by  the  heid    (Nos.  323  and 

330).  or  ou  retr  of  the  CO  umn  (No.  ;i33),  the  column 
beiog  at  a  halt  or  man-hin^. 

.drtic/e  X//— The  column  beine:  hy  compmy,  c-«nse  to  be 
executed  the  biove 'eiit^  indie  ited  in  Nos.  3  4.  6.  «.  7, 
8,  9,  10  a  d  11  of  ihis  lesson.  The  column  being  at  half 
ilistaice,  or  olo.^ei  iu  nnss.  to  form  to  the  left,  or  right, 
intn  line,  wheel,  on  th  •  rear  <  f  t   e  column  (No.  50') 

Article  Xni — The  culuiin  bein;  by  company,  form  divis- 
ions fr.m  a  halt  (    o.  361).  or  in  march    No.  ;<76). 

Article  XIV. —  1  h  coliiuin  bi  ing  by  division  tu  lorm  it 
to  the  left  or  righ :  into  line  of  battle  at  a  halt  (No.  401), 
or  :n  march  (No   402). 


LESSON    FIFTH. 

Article  1. — The  ba  talion  being  in  liue  of  battle,  and  at  a 
halt,  to  ploy  it  by  dlvinion  int  column  clor^ed  in  mass 
on  the  right  division  (No  U9)  or  on  the  1  ft  division 
(No.  141),  or  ouau  interior  division  (No.  143),  ihe  right 
or  left  lu  front.  Ploy  the  haltation  niarclrnk  iu  liue 
of  battle  on  the  right  or  left  division  f  No.  149). 

Article  IT. — Execute  the  couoterni'ucb  (No.  352). 

.<4  rtcfe //T— tJhinire  dire' tc' n  'o  ihri  ri.ht  (.No.  307.),  to 
the  left  (No.  al3)   b.  the  flank  .  f  the  column. 

Article  IV. — De-.iloy  the  c  ilumo  on  the  right  division  (No. 
514).  on  the  lefc  division  (541),  or  ,->n  any  interior  diTi- 
sion.  tht-  column  being  at  a  half,  or  marching  (.No.  503). 

Arlicle  V. —  Ph.y  the  luttilion  into  column  by  divisio^  at 
h   If  distance,  marching  (No.  656) 

.4r<ic  e  VI — Ploy  the  battalion  by  company,  closed  in 
mH.sn.  and  f  .rm  it  on  the  right  or  left  int .  line  of  bat 
ti-  (No  .■>77) 

Article  VII. — f  loy  the  batiali  n  into  doub'e  column,  at 
half  dibtincc  (No.  777),  or  closed  iu  mass  (No.  703).  the 
hnrtnlion  twfng  at  •  halt,  or  marrhing 


82 


TABLE  OF  COMTKHTS. 


ArticU  r727.— Murch  in  this  order,  ana   change  direction 

(Xo.7M). 

Article  /J.— Deploy  the  colamn  at  a  halt  (No.  796;,  or 
marcblDf;  (No.  SOU),  and  without  cuspendlui;  ti  e  omrch 
(No.  H(j2). 

ArtUie  X — Tlie  donblo  oolomn  being  at  half  diHlHOce, 
lorm  It  into  lino  of  battle  faced  to  the  riaht  or  left  (No. 
803),theto,umn  being  i  I  march  (No.  8(i7)  Kx-cu  o 
the  rame  movement  without  suBi>ending  tlio  ni:>rcli  (No. 
810). 

ArUdt  XI — PeriiendicnlB'  or  parallel  Hquarcit,  the  bat- 
talion being  deployti  ( .•  o».  88»,  898).  Ubliqiie  squarw, 
the  batuhou  being  in  Hue  of  battle  CSo.  938),  <>r  in 
rolumn  (No.  94S).     Sqnuree  in  four  rBnkB(No.  911). 

LESSON  SIXTH. 

AvtiOe  /.— Mnrch   in  line  of  l>attlo  (No.  fi87j.      Halt  the 

l.aitnlion  (N".  636),  and  iilign  it  (No.  640). 
Article  II. — C'hant:e  din-cliori  in  line  of  l>attl<».  advini-ing. 

(No.  r,52)   or  in  leir' at  (No.  681).      Kxeruie  jmBssge    of 

obstacles  (No   ^2). 
Article  ///.—Oblique march  in  line  of  battle  (No.  623  ) 
Article  IV — Disperae  and   rally    the   batl  lion   in    line  of 

bnttlo  (No  874).  and   rally  the  battalion  in  cdlamD  by 

company  (No.  978). 


REMABRS  OX  THE  SCHOOL  OK  THE  KATTAlilON. 

In  every  course  of  iiii<trction.  the  first  losHon  yn>\\  be 
ex'cuted  several  timcK  in  the  order  in  which  it  1*  nr- 
ranged  ;  nut  hh  cOon  :ik 'h»  nttalion  Rhiill  be  conilrnied 
In  the  principle"  t  the  esaou,  the  firm  will  be  pxerulud 
after  the  advance  in  line,  and  «fter  (heviiriouff  riha  ionn 
into  line  of  battle,  and  into  snuare.     P.irticular  atiQutiou 


will  be  given  to  the  flrr  by  (lie,  which  is  that  principally 
umd  in  war. 

Kvery  lesion  of  thin  uch  ol  vfill'be  executed  with  the 
utuiqa'  prerJHion  :  bnt  the  second,  which  comprehends 
the  marrh  in  column,  and  th  '  march  in  line  of  battle, 
being  of  th''  most  'mjxirtnnce,  will  W  the  ofteneKt  repeat- 
o   ,  especially  in  the  Ix-cinning. 

Gr>Mit  aticLiiuii  i.ngh  ,  also  to  be  given  to  the  fourth 
h-Jiiin,  which  coti  prebends  the  march  in  column  by  dlrl- 
Hio:i,  Mu\  the  dittpnsitions  againut  cavalry. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  he  ezecntod 
by  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  march  'n  eolumn,  the  mnrch  in 
line  of  battle,  and  the  miiirh  hy  the  flank,  will  be  execut- 
ed only  ir  quick  lime,  and  will  be  contlnu'nl  until  the 
battalion  sh.ill  have  beocm-  well  established  in  the  ca- 
dence of  tlii»«teii. 

The  non  cadenced  step  will  be  employed  1  i  this  school 
only  In  the  lepetition  ■  f  the  movements  inoideat  to  a 
column  In  route,  or  w'^en  great  cel-rity  may  be  required. 

Whin  It  m  ly  l>e  deitired  to  give  th-  men  relief,  arms 
mity  be  stipiiorted,  if  at  n  h  It,  or  marching  by  the 
flaul;. 

In  marching  by  the  front,  iirm*  may  be  shift-d  to  the 
right  shoulder;  Itut  not  in  the  march  in  line  of  battle 
until  the  biittnlirns  Hhall  be  well  mstrui-led. 

After  Hrm«  have  been  carried  for  some  time  on  the 
right  shoulni'' ,  they  may  bo  sliifi-td,  in  like  mnniier,  to 
the  left  bhnuldor. 

When  a  battalioi:  is  manoeuvring,  its  nr>vemenls  will 
be  covered  by  a  -irni'shers 

All  the  companies  will  be  exercisei!.  successively,  in 
this  service. 

Wh.  n  H  liattalion,  instructed  in  this  drill,  fhall  !«■  re- 
quired to  manoeuvre  in  the  evolutions  u'  the  li  e,  its 
UKivwnientB  will  \i<-  re»:ulated  by  the  iiistruc  ious  c«n 
tained  in  the  Tbiid  v  .liime  of  the  TacMcs  for  heavy  lu- 
funtry,  approved  by  the  War  Di-piirtnieut,  April  10th, 
1836. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


TTTLE  FIKST. 

ARTICLE  FIRST. 

P.VOE. 

Formation  of  a  reg't  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line 3 

Posts  of  f;oni|)iiny  officers,  hergcnuts  and  eorporals..  3 

Posts  of  ficl'i  offi'cerh  and  regimental  staff. 3 

Posts  of  fiehl  music  and  Vxind. 4 

Color-guard 4 

General  guides * 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

Instruction  of  the  liattalion 4 

Instruction  of  offlccre 4 

Instruction  of  hargeants ■* 

Instruction  of  corporals ,f^^.  -t 

Commands "■•  ^ 

TITLE  SECOND. 

SCHOOL  OF  TUE  SOLDIER. 

PART    FIRST. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier     5 

XesDon  /.—Position  of   the   soldier  (No.    78).    Eyes 

right,  left  and  front  (Kos.  80.83) 5 

iesion  //.—Facings  (Nob.  80,  91) 6 


Lesium  III. — Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common 
and  quick  time  (Nos.  9'1.  Iii2^ <> 

Lesson  IV. — i'riuciples  ol  the  ttouble  quick  stcD  (No. 
104) ". 7 

PART   8XCONl>. 

General  rules 7 

Lesson  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  anns 7 

Lesson  II. — Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No.  133i. 
Present  arms  (No.  143).  Order  arms  (No.  147). 
Position  of  onler  arms  (No.  119).  Load  in  nine  tiines 
(No.  160).  Kejidy  (No  171).  Aim  (No.  174)  Fire 
(No.  177j.  Fix  Imyonet  (No  188).  Charge  l»ayon- 
et  (No.  193)  .  Tii\if  uriiis  (No.  1!»7(.  Unflx  bayonet 
(Nti.  200).  Secure  urnis  (No.  •-;04).  Right  shoulder 
shift  arms  (No.  '.il(i).  Arms  iil  will  (No.  219^. 
(jround  arms  (No.  -Z-iZ).  Inspection  :irm8  (^Nc  1227). 
Remarks  on  the  nnintiiil  of  arms  (No.  ;^37).  .Mark 
time  (No.  241).  Cliange  step  (No.  245).  Murch 
backwards  (No.  247) 8 

Lesson  ///.-Load  in  four  tifties  (No.  250).  Loud  .tt 
will  (No.  267) 12 

Lesson  /K.— Firings.  Direct  lire  (No.  261).  Oblique 
firings  (No.  20(i).  Position  of  fhu  two  ranks  in  the 
oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  JtiT).  Position  of  tho 
two  ranks  in  the  oblique  Hiv  to  the  left  (No  270). 
Fire  by  file  (No.  275).     Fire  by  rank  (No  285) 13 

Lesson  T.— Fire  and  loud,  kneeling  (No.  292).  Fire 
and  load,  lying  (No.  3iio) 13 

La»mm  K/.— Bayonet  axercise H 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


83 


PART  THIRD. 

Leteon  I. — Alignments 14 

Lesson  /f.— March  by  the  front  (No.  325).    March  by 
front  ift  double  quick  time  (No.  334).    Face  about 
\    in  marching  (No.  343).  March  backwards  (No. 345).  15 
t««»oii  III— March  ty  the  fl.Tiik  (No,  351).     March  by 

^   the  flank  in  double   quic-k  time  (No.  Sf-.S)    16 

%e>ison  /r.— General  principles  of  wheelihg  (No.  370). 
.Wheeling   from    a    halt    (No.   383).      Wheeling  m 
'marchmg   (No.  393).    Turning  (No.  400).    Wheel- 
ing and  turning  in  double  quick  time  (No.  403) 17 

iff-^on  V. — Long  marehos  in  double  quick  time  and 

the  run  (No.  406).    i^tack  arm?   (No.  410).    Take 

'     arms  (No.  413) 18 

TITLE  THIRD. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rufes  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  com. 
i    pany ^ 19 

LESSON   FIRST. 

Artich  /.— To  open  rauk.s  (No.  8) 19 

Article  II — .Alignments  in  open  ranks  (No.  18) 19 

Article  //I.— Manual  of  .arms  (No.  20) 19 

Article  JV.—To  close  ranks  (No.  28) 20 

AriicU  V. — .Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed 
ranks  (No.  3U) 20 

LESSON  SECOND. 
Article  /.—To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will  (No.  44).  20 

Article  II.— To  fire  by  company  (No.  48) 20 

Article  /JZ.— To  fire  by  file  (No.  55) 20 

Article  jr.— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  68) 21 

ArtirU  ('.—To  fire  by  the  rear  rank 21 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Article  I- — T'>  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84) 21 

Article  II  —To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of 

J    battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99) 22 

XArticle  III. — Oblique  march    in    line  of  battle  (No. 

1    101) 22 

Uriirle  IT'.— To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick 

•ime,  and  the  hack  step  (No.  109) 22 

'■iicle  K— To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 23 

-  LESSON   FOURTH. 

IAriicle  I.— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  135) 23 
Article  //.—To  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142) 24 
Article  ///.—To  halt' the  company,  marching  by  the 

flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  145) .". 24 

;  Article  /K— The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form   it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 

/      line  of  battle  (No.  148) 24 

AArtfcfe  r.— The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to 
^  form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause 
>  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching  (No.  153).  24 

[  LESSON  FIFTH. 

Artick  I. — To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  cither 

(  at  a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  171) 26 

JHtde  tl. — To  march  in  column  (No.  195) 2C 

MMe  /I/.— To  change  direction  (No.  211) 27 

Y^le  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  ''31) „...  27 

kicle  r.— BeinK  in  column  by  i)latoon,  to  form  to  the 
fright 'or  left  into  liu'' of  battle,  either  at  a  halt,  or 
"  marching  (No.  23.0) 27 

"^^^  Ll-i^ON  SI.XTH. 

Article  I. — To  break  t^ie  company  into  jllatoons.  and 
to  re-i'orm  the  cori'pany  (No.  265) 29 

Article  II. — To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause 
them  to  re-ener  into  line   (No.  289.) 29 

Article  III. — To  manb  in  folurnn  in  route,  and  to  ex- 
ecute the  movpmf-.t'4  incident  thereto  (No.  306)...  80 


I  Article  /F.— Countermarch  (No.  334) 31 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  bv  platoon,  to  form  on 

I      the  right  or  U'ft  into  line  of  battle  (No.  343) 31 

I  Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 

rank,  and  reciprocally"  (No.  369) 32 

Formation  oT  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four, 
and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  marching  (No.  371).  32 

INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction 33 

Article  /.-Deployments  (No.  16).  Deplov  forward 
(No.  22).  Der'loy  by  the  flank  (No.  .37).  Extend 
intervals  (No.  51).  Close  iijttrvals  (No.  59).  Re- 
lieve skirmishers  (No.  66) 34 

Article  //.—March  to  the  front  (No.  71).  March  in  re- 
treat (Ncp.  79).  Change  direction  (No.  86).  March 
by  the  flank  (No.  96) 36 

Article  ///.—Firings  (No.  100).  Firing  at  a  halt  (No. 
107).  Fire  marching  (No.  111).  Observations  (No. 
120)..... 37 

Article  /F.- Rally  (No.  127).  Rally  by  sections(No.l32) 
Rally  by  pfatoons  (No.  137).  Rally  on  the  reserve 
(No.  1.39).  Form  column  (No.  14:3).  Rally  on  the 
battitlion  (No.  IGl).  Assemble  on  the  reserve  (No. 
(171)    Assemble  on  the  centre  (No.  174) 38 

Article  V. — Deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers  (No. 
178).    Observations  (No.  194).    Rally  (No.  137.).  ••  39 

Manual  of  the  sabre  for  officers 41 

Salute  of  the  color 41 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels 41 

Instruction  for  parade  rest 41 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  &c... 41 

Generalcalls 41 

Calls  for  skirmishers 42 


TITLE    FOUKTH. 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  battalion  (No.  1) 42 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color  escort  (No.  4)...  42 

Honors  pi^'fl  to  the  color   (No.  II) 42 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  battal- 
ion (No.  14)  42 

PART     FIRST. 

Article  I.— To  open  ;md  close  ranks  (No.  22) 43 

j4r((c/e  //.—Manual  of  arms  (No.  30) 43 

Article  ///.—Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings  (No.  31).  43 

PART     SECOND. 

Article  I. — To  break  by  company  (o  the  right  (No. 
G9).  Break  by  company  to  the  left  (No.  74).  Break 
by  division  (No.  75).  To  break  by  company, march- 
ing  (No.  «4) 44 

Article  //.-Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies  (No.  87).  Break  to  the  rear  l>y  the  right 
or  left  of  comp.anies,  marching  (No.  94)"  Advance 
or'retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies  (No.  105). 
Advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  compan- 
ies, marching  i  No.  llu).  Advancing  or  retiring,  by 
the  light  or  left  of  companies,  to  form  line  to  the 
front  (No.  11.3) 45 

Article  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  on 
the  first  division  (No.  119).  Floy  the  battalion  into 
close  column  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  141).  Ploy 
the  battalion  into  close  column  on  any  interior  di- 
vision (No.  143)  Battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy 
It  into  column  on  the  first  division  (No.  149) 46 

PART  THIRD. 

Artich  I. — March  in  column  at  full  distance  (No.  164). 
Column  being  march,  to  execute  the  about  (No. 
170).  Column  arrivinz  in  fr«nt  oi  the  line  of  bat'le, 
to  prolong  it  on  this  line  (No.  175).    CoUimn  arri- 


ft4 


lACi-t.  OK  tvUWTiJUa 


Tinj?  behind  the  line  o'  battle,  to  proloDg  it  od  iftie 
line  (No.  IM  .  Coliunu  arriviiiu  oniherghlor 
loft  of  ihe  line  of  liHtile.  i-  j>rolouj{  it  on  this  line 
(No.lKr).  JIanuer  of  |>roloniiiDK  ft  line  by  mark- 
ers (No.  M*) « 

Ariiclt  //.—Column  in  route  (No.  19") 80 

Article  III.— ChBnfCt  of  direction  in  column  at  full 
distance  (No.   2.11) Al 

ArticU  IK.— Unit  the  iOlumn  (No.  239) 51 

ArluU  V. — Close  the  column  f<i  half  distance,  or  in 
maflo  (No.  252>.  Clos*--  the  column  on  the  eighth 
company  (No.  2i".").  Execute  th  s  movement, 
roarchiog  (No.  n:\) 62 

AriicU  r/.— March  in  <*lumn  at  half  dbitance,  or 
alost-d  in  muss   (N-  281) 63 

ArticU  VU  -tJiangc  direction  m  column  at  half  dis- 
tan  e    N...  2>-7; M 

AriicU  VIII. — tTienge  dir«ction  of  a  column  closed  in 
mnHs,  man'hin);  (No.  2^»).  Ohanp*  dir  ciionof  a 
column,  r-lohed   in  ma-^x,  from  n  halt  (No.  ;j0tj)....     63 

Article  IX. — Take  distance.*  V>y  the  heHd  of  the  col- 
umn (No  32a>  Take  Idistai'cee  by  the  rear  of  the 
column  (No.  333).  Take  distance!*  on  the  head  of 
t  e  column  (Xo.  341) 64 

Article  X. — t'.Minterman.'h  of  a  column  at  full  or  half 
dihtince  (No  MX).  Cduiueriiinr  h  of  a  column 
closed  in  mass  (No.  352) 65 

Artic'e  XI. — Being  in  column  by  companj',  closed  in 
mft.«8.  to  form  division.s  (No.  361).  To  form  divi- 
sions, marching  (Nf.  37Gj 66 


PART     FOURTH. 


An  cU  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  lini' of  Ijattle 
(No.  380) 67 

Article  //.—To  form  a  column,  «t  full  dintaiice,  to  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  Ao.  39  ).  To  form  a  column 
to  the  richt  in'o  line  of  liatile  iNo.  S'.tu)  A  col- 
umn being  in  murch,  to  form  it  into  line  of  biiule 
(Xo.  402;  To  form  a  column  into  line  of  battle, 
and  to  iiiov-  it  forward  (No.  103).  Hy  uiver.sion  to 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  4(i7).  Col- 
umn at  full  distani-e,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left 
into  line  of  battle  ^No»  414'.  Coumuatfuli  dis- 
tance forward  into  'iii<'  of  battle  (No.  lid).  Forward 
into  lin-  of  battle,  marching  (No.  462).  Co'iimn  at 
fu  I  distance,  laeed  to  the  re.T  into  line  of  batr  o 
(No.  460  .     Execute  this  movement,  marching  (No. 


479). 


■»■■ 


57 


AriicU  ///.—Formation  in  line  of  batt'o  by  two  move- 
tnenUs  (.\o  4'5j 61 

ArtiiAe  /K.— Piflerent  modes  of  forming  co  umn  at 
ha'f  dibtance,  t<>  the  left  or  right,  into  ine  ofbhtt «; 
(No.  501).  By  the  rear  of  column,  leit  or  right, 
into  line,  wheel  (N  >.  5  i3).  Column  at  h  i  f  dis- 
tance, on  the  riuht  or  left,  into  ine  (No.  607). 
Column,  at  ha  f  distance,  forward  into  line  (.\o. 
6  8).  Co'umn,  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear 
int"  line  (No.  6(9) 62 

AriicU  r.— Dep'oyment  of  columns  c'osed  in  mass 
(No.  510).  Dep  oymeut  on  the  first  division  (No. 
514).  To  dcpoy,  whi  st  mnrchin'.',  on  the  lirst  di- 
vision (No.  6:12).  To  deploy  without  hating  the 
tip  umn,  and  to  continue  m'lwcbing  (No.  63G).  To 
Q0p  oy  on  the  fourth  di»ision  (No.  541).  To  de- 
pi-  y,  whilst  marching,  on  the  fourtli  divi.sion  (No. 
656).  To  dep  oy  on  an  interior  division  (No.  5«3). 
To  dep  oy,  whilst  marching,  on  au  interiordivifion 
(No.  667) 62 


PAKT  rrrra. 

ArHeU  /.— To  8QV:ui'  .    m  In.-  ..f  )..itt>  (No    ri-\....     'T 

Article  //.—Ob  ii  • 

Article  JII.-lo  ! 
of  batt  e,  r.  n.i 

Artirl    IV--'  a    .u  u.^.  :. 

~of  batt  e 

Article  v.-                             .    .ii  in  .ine  Of  ! 
664  _ „. 

ArticU  ri —To  hat  th'-  ''iltaion.   marching  in  re 
Uvat,  an'l  to  Cice  to  the  '■••m  (No.  ij7(.i 

Artcle  V//.— Change  ofdin^Uon,   in    iii 
retreat  (No.  GHl).  ...^ 

Artrclt    r///.— Passage   'f  olstacles,  ad\;. 
retreating   (^No.   iitfl.')---' i.> 

ArticU  7-1'.— To  i>a-«  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  r(ght 

or  left  flank  (No.  710) ^....  7u 

.4r<i>fc  A'.— To  march    '  No.  722) 70 

Article  A'/.— To  form  tl,  Mlir  right  or  left, 
by  file,  into  line  of  !■.  i ..f _..  71 

Artl-lf  XII.—'  hange   ^.1    li"   :   L'(  rpendic'i  :irly  for- 
wanl  (No    T43i.       hauge  front  fonvaid  .■n  the  first     / 
company,  mar-hing  (No.  7.>1).       hange  of  firont 

I  erpcnaicu  ar  v  to  the  rear  (.N".  7(".l;..... 71 

Article  .XIII.— Ti'>  ploy  the  ti..it:i  ion  into  column, 
doiib  cd  on  th<' centre  (No.  77'ii.  To  form  doubte  ( 
CO  umn,  marching  (No.  7-7).  Dep  nymeu'  of  th>  ' 
double  column,  need  to  th<"  fronf  (No.  7'.t6).  De- 
p  oymcnt  of  the  doub  e  co  umn,  marching  (No. 
80(1).  To  form  the  doubl'-  co  iimii  into  lae  of  bat- 
t'e,  fnced  to  the  rig  t  or  eft  (No.  8  3,.  To  form 
the  dpub  e  column  ihto  ine  of  bait  e,  Uu:e<l  to  the 

r'ghtor'eft,   mar-hing  (No.  8(i7) 7: 

Article  X/K— Dispositions  agiinst  cavalry  (No.  .S17). 
A  CO  umn  he  ng  in  march  at  fu"  distance  to  form 
square  (No.  '.37  .  If  the  column  be  c  osed  in  nins.i, 
to  make  ilispositions  to  f  im  square  (No.  847).  Thi- 
bit  ta  ion  being  in  square,  ko  move  it  in  dvMnci>  by 
one  of  its  froiifs  (No.  SMV  To  halt  the  siinare  (So. 
86<»).  The  batiA  ion  being  in  square,  to I'orni  column 
to  march  to  the  front,  a  dLsUirico  gr  ili  v  ih'i  thirty 
paces    No.  M.:iV    To  march  the  -i  ;■  it.i 

g.-eat  r  disiMiii  !•   than  thirt>  pa^  Tli.' 

battn  ion  beinji  in  square,  to  mai  \u  ■■   ir 

in  retreat,  a  distan  e  'ess  than  ilm  i.  1. 1  . ->  (No, 
8761.  The  CO  iimr.  inarching  to  the  fro'i:.  '■.  in«rrh 
it  in  rcireat  (No.  879).  The  column  mmc!  'iig  i:i 
retreat,  to  maieb  it  to  the  frunt  f  No.  "-SI),  'fo  r.> 
duco  the  sqiisre  1  No.  s83).  I'o  form  square  ii  ■  i 
line  of  batt  e  (No.  :-86).  Perponilicii  ar  s(|i:are  i  N 
8^8).  I'crpendicu'ar  sqnaac,  marching,  (No  v9o  . 
To  form  square  i  y  doub  e  co  umn  No.  '!•'■;.  To 
form  square  b\  doub  o  co  iiiuii.  niarchine  '  No.  Httli. 
Observations  re  ative  to  the  toriiintion  o'  -quares 
in  two  ranks  (No.  WW).  The  o  imiii  being  f  rmed 
of  four  divisions,  to  p  aee  the  inner  p  atoon«  of  th>' 
third  division  in  resi>rv.-  (No  S.i8).  .Stiimres  in  f'ur 
rinks(No.  910).  The  s.;i\aie  formeil  ;ii  !.)■  r  rank.'? 
being  redi.ced,  and  at  a  'lalt  to  form  the  i.atia  ioa 
into  two  ranks  (No.  01  (i  .  The  co  umn  being  In 
[,;,mnrch  with  division-  fi^rnied  in  four  ranks,, to  re- 
form ii  into  two  ranks  (No.  92ii).  To  form  sqiiatro 
in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions  (No.  •.•2.1). 

I  F'rm  sqimr.-'  in  four  ranks  on  the  first  division, 
marching  (No.  !)2H).  Form  perpendicular  8qt.'r»4p 

I      four   ranks,  by  doiib'e  column   (No.  931).     ForifT 

!      perpen<liciii«r  square  in  four  rai'ks,  by  double  CO-    ' 
lumn   marching   (N<>.  9.'<r._).    Oblique  >quare   (No. 

I      0'8).     Ob  ique -quale, 'bc'ing   in   co  nmn  i  .Vo  01'. 

I      Co  umn   against   cav.'tiry  (No. '.Hi')).    The  batt  i:     n 

I      being  no  onger  thnate^cd  by  cava'ry,  lo  form      >- 

!      lumn  .No.'.l7ii> .*• 

;  ArticU  AK.— The  ra   y  (No.  97'4iV    i  80 

I  i4rtici«  ACT/.— Rules  for  manaMivrmL'  by  the  rear  ;  n.c 

I  .  tNo.979)  '^'^ 


